Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D99-0421 - McLeod USA - Switch Centerd99-0421 3417 south 120th place McLeod USA Switch Center City of Tukwila t Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 Parcel No: 102304 -9069 Address: 3417 S 120 PL Suite No: Location: Category: AOFF Type: DEVPERM Zoning: MIC /L Const Type: V -N Gas /Elec.: Units: 001 Setbacks: North: Water: 125 Wetlands: Contractor License No: MAMORC*190N6 MCLEOD USA SWITCH CENTER 341 S 120 PL, TUKWILA WA 98188 THE BOEING COMPANY PO BOX 3707 M/S 1F -09, SEATTLE WA CHUCK RAUCH 280 N 8 ST SUITE 138, BOISE ID 83702 M A MORTENSON COMPANY PO BOX 710, MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55440 ih************** *•k-k ** * *** * * *** ** *-k * *•ktk•k* ** *•k *** kit * *•k -k•k*** *•kiY•k•k•k*** *• kilt* *** *•k•k*tQ•k-k*** ** Permit Description: BUILD OUT NEW TELEPHONE SWITCH CENTER ******• k********** * *•k * *•k * * * *•k * * * * * * * * * * * * * *•k* k******• k k** * * * * ** *•k * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * *•k* Construction Valuation: $ 2,000,000.00 PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS: *(Water Meter Permits Listed Separate) Eng. Appr: Curb Cut /Access /Sidewalk /CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: N No: Size(in): .00 Flood Control Zone: N Hauling: N Start Time: Land Altering: N Cut: Landscape Irrigation: N Moving Oversized Load: N Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: N No: Sewer Main Extension: N Private: N Public: N Storm Drainage: N Street Use: N Water Main Extension: N Private: N Public: N ********************• k• k******* k******************* k**** *k ** * * * * * * * * * * * * *** *** * * * * *** OCCUPANT ,OWNER CONTACT CONTRACTOR TOTAL DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FEES: $ 15,281.44 k* k•k k * * * ** * * * ** k * **** * * * ** k * * * * *•k * ** k * *•k * ** k k * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * ** k * * * * * * * *1 Permit Center Authorized Signature: cancel the provi or the perf deve1opme Signature: Print Name: DEVELOPMENT PERMIT WARNING: IF CONSTRUCTION BEGINS BEFORE APPEAL PERIOD EXPIRES, APPLICANT IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK. .0 South: Sewer: Slopes: Occupancy: UBC: 1997 Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS .0 East: .0 West: .0 VAL VUE Streams: ..;: (206) 431 -3670 Permit No: Status: Issued: Expires: Phone: D99 -0421 ISSUED 01/13/2000 07/11/2000 Phone: 208- 342 -6641 Phone: 425 - 895 -9000 End Time: Fi11: Date: \ I hereby certify that I have read and examined t s permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or of any other state or local laws regulating construction work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this Date: J— J3 —,2UOU This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. NaProject C n . `� ( 11E0D ` to V Existing use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant El Multi-family Warehouse ❑Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Vale onstr j ory ) Site Address: . 1/7 5, !Z&' PL, ,w . 98/ 38 City State/Zip: y p Tax Parce tu ber : /�z >✓ 7 %9 ,P� o �erty Owner: iNraprAt'r F —T L-4— d Building Square Feet: Its AO() existing Phone: a -2Bt -'7U Street Address: City State /Zip: ibi W t# vE, )i 3 sE& s k� 98114 -caw Fax #: ztO6 - 8Z — / Contractor: MDR i CreV Phone: b/z- szz -z /, t Street Address: City St to /Zi : 7GO1 It WAVE Ail MINNEAtPtxr5 55 VzZ Fax #: Architect: QQ������yyE�f GRo•� eatce4 /i �xt, Phone: /� 2- q /,�}� Q a -e/9 UY KJ Street Address: F2Zd7Iv LtosE LOA/EA/k -Kb 6(02! i i City State /Zip: Fax #: Engineer: ONAE As kf tliatr Phone: Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: Contact Person: R +1 Zoo- viz -(06yf Street Address: no N. &!1 sT. viT I% eoisE,ID. 83702 City State /Zip: Fax #: 708 ' z9 Description of work to be done: elit .0 bl11 NEW' j LGptbOE SW iltki or-W Existing use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant El Multi-family Warehouse ❑Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other __ __ _ _ Proposed use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse ❑ Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other S i3O1TGII^1 CEN < 1IA (jft. -Tie j(/" Will there be a change of use? 7gt yes ❑ no If yes, extent of change: (Attach additional sheet if necessary) r , :WARESibU TO 7 ioNE SW&1t$' MN/ER Will there be rack storage? El yes A no Existing fire protection features: PI sprinklers ❑ automatic fire alarm ❑ none ❑ other (specify) Building Square Feet: Its AO() existing Area of Construction: (sq. ft.) /53 y , Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material in the building? ❑ yes a no Attach list of materials and storage location on separate 8 1/2 X 11 paper indicating quantities & Material Safety Data Sheets CITY OF TUUNILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 FOR STAI USE. ONI Y Pro > Num • PermU Numbeir. � }J Commercial / Multi - Family Tenant Improvement / Alteration Permit Application Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or facsimile. APPLICANT REQUEST: FOR PUBLIC WORKS SITE/CIVIL PLAN REVIEW'OF THE•FOLLOWING: (Additional reviews may be determined by the Public Works Department) ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Land Altering 0 Cut cubic yds. 0 Fill cubic yds. ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer #: ❑ Sewer Main Extension ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension ❑ Water Meter /Exempt #: Size(s): 0 Deduct ❑ Water Meter /Permanent it Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est. quantity: gal ❑ Miscellaneous ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Hauling ❑ Landscape Irrigation O Private 0 Public O Private 0 Public 0 Water Only Schedule: Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. Thls figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. Date l application epted: CTPERM!T.DOC 1 /29/97 Date a�pj ' fires: 5 ca Applic n en by: (initials) PLEASE SIGN BACK OF APPLICATION FORM • BUILDI f�, Lza' R AUTH v RIZED AGENT: Signatur• r. ‘11111111P" _ _ Date: ff29 _19 Print name: RONi a Phone:// 6 _ Fax Ity/ 0 Address /A.17 A 4E, g7it/_ '_(.lEvUE Wit c'SCO7 City /State /Zip ALL COMMERCIAL/MULTI -FY TENANT IMPROVEMENT /ALTION PERMIT APPLICATIONS MU BE SUBMITTED WITH THE FOLL ING: "➢ *LL oPAWINGS TO STAMPED BY WASHINGTON STATE LICENSED ARCHITECT, °i • TRUCTURAL.ENGINEER OR CIVIL ENGINEER ➢ ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN ➢ BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED N/A SUBMITTED Cgt ❑ Complete Legal Description ❑ ❑ Metro: Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification if there is a change in the amount of plumbing fixtures (Form H -13). Business Declaration required (Form H -10). Four (4) sets of working drawings (five(5) sets for structural work), which include : M. ❑ Site Plan (including existing fire hydrant location(s) 1. North arrow and scale 2. Property lines, dimensions, setbacks, names of adjacent roads, any proposed or existing easements 3. Parking Analysis of existing and proposed capacity; proposed stalls with dimensions 4. Location of driveways, parking, loading & service areas 5. Recycle collection location and area calculations (change of use only) 6. Location and screening of outdoor storage (change of use only) 7. Limits of clearing /grading with existing and proposed topography at 2' intervals extending 5' beyond property's boundaries 8. Identify location of sensitive area slopes 20% or greater, wetlands, watercourses and their buffers (change of use only) 9. Identify location and size of existing trees that are located in sensitive areas and buffer (TMC 18.45.040), of those, identify by size and species which are to be removed and saved 10. Landscape plan with irrigation and existing trees to be saved by size and species (exterior changes or change of use only) 11. Location and gross floor area of existing structure with dimensions and setback 12. Lowest finished floor elevation (if in flood control zone) 13. See Public Works Checklist for detailed civil /site plan information required for Public Works Review (Form H- 9). ❑ gl Floor plan: show location of tenant space with proposed use of each room labeled ❑ El Overall building floor plan with adjacent tenant use; identify tenant space use and location of storage of any hazardous materials; dimensions of proposed tenant space. 71 AV Vicinity Map showing location of site ❑ Rack Storage: If adding new racks or altering existing rack storage, provide a floor plan identifying rack layout and all exit doors. Show dimensions of aisles, include dimensions of height, length, and width of rack. Structural calculations are required for rack storage eight feet and over. ❑ 7( Indicate proposed construction of tenant space or addition and walls being demolished ❑ 171 Construction details ❑ j' Sprinkler details - details of sprinkler hangers, specifically penetrations in structure, i.e., roof; size of water supply to sprinkler vault with documentation from contractor stating supply line will meet or exceed sprinkler system design criteria as identified by the Fire Department. ❑ Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Data shall be noted on the construction drawings. ❑ SEPA Checklist - if intensification of use (check with Planning Department for thresholds). ❑ Attach plans, reports or other documentation required to comply with Sensitive Area Ordinance or other land use or SEPA decisions. ❑ Food service establishments require two (2) sets of stamped approved plans by the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health prior to submitting for building permit application. The Department of Public Health is located at 201 Smith Tower, Seattle, WA or call (206) 296 -4787. (Form H -5) ❑ I Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If no contractor has been selected at time of application a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner /Authorized Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal ! HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PER.IGRY B1 11 LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 Dear Sir: City of Tukwila Fire Department Fire Department Review Control #D99 -0420 (512) Re: D.W. Close - 4304 South 131st Place December 1, 1999 Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. Portable fire extinguishers shall be securely installed on the hanger or in the bracket supplied, placed in cabinets or wall recesses. The hanger or bracket shall be securely and properly anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The extinguisher shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above the floor and the clearance between the bottom of the extinguisher and the floor shall not be less than 4 inches. Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher ", with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC Standard 10 -1) 2. Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. Exit doors shall not be locked, chained, bolted, barred, latched or otherwise rendered unusable. All locking devices shall be of an approved type. (UFC 1207.3) Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant John W. Rants, Mayor Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575 • Fax (206) 575-4439 1 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 2 space. (UFC 1207.3) Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the Uniform Fire Code. (UFC 1207 -1212) Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Combustible material shall not be stored in exits or exit enclosures. (UFC 1103.3.2.3) 3. Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition /relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding sprinkler heads. All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers, Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by The City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 4. All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of The National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 5. Required fire resistive construction, includin? occupancy separations, area separation walls, exterior walls due to location on property, fire resistive requirements based on type of construction, draft stop partitions and roof coverings shall be maintained as specified in the Building Code and Fire Code and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly John W. Rants, Mayor Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575.4404 • Fax (206) 57.5-4439 1908 cc: TFD file ncd The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau This review limited to speculative tenant space only special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Yours truly, City of ` Tukwila John W Rants, hfayor . Fire Department Thomas P. Keefe, Rre chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 37S-4439 REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS TCONST CONT GENERAL .. , , ,REG I ST . # EXP . ' DATE coi •: ;-, HOUSE**015LA 06/01/2000 TEPFECTIVE , DATE . 06/01/1999 HOUSEWRIGHT'S • ,I818 WESTLAKE A N : SEATTLE ..' 98 4 :0 7 , !•-... - s A..1.....:. ( • .4, •-.1' • . t .rt+ Ar0.2 .9.. A..J.P iNDiJSTRIb! . • • . . , ei 4 . 3417 S 120 PL Address: Suite: Tenant: Type: DEVPERM Parcel if: 102304 -9069 • CITY OF TUKWILA Permit No: D99 -0421 Status: ISSUED. Applied: 11/30/1999 Issued: 01/13/2000 k• k•k'k*•k•k•k•k* * * *•k *•k* kirk* k**• k* k*** k• k*• k*• k*• k• k k*• k• k• kk****• k * *•k *k *•k ' k ' k ** Permit Conditions 1,. ;COPIES OF ALL GEOTECH ENGINEERS REPORT MUST FORWARDED TO THE CITY OF TUI;WXLA FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FINAL BUILDING INSPECTION APPROVAL AND OCCUPANCY 2 . When special inspecti'on'is required either .the .owner, architect or engineer shall _ noti - F y - the TukWi ~ la:Buiiding Division of appointment of the inspection .agencies prior to the first building; inspection. Copies of all special inspection'. reports shall be submitted to the : B u i l d i n g . Division ,in a ti mely manner. Reports shall contain address, pro.ject,name permit number and type of inspection being performed. 3. The special inspector shall submiI. a final signed report . stating whether the wort; requiring special inspection was, to the hest . of the inspector's .knowledge, in conformance with approved plans and specifications and the a p p l i c a b l e workmanship' or.kr ansh i p' provisions of the UBC. 4. Any exposed insulttions backing material shall have a Flame - Sp'read Rating "of.'`5..or .less, and material shall bear identi- fication the fire performance rating thereof 5 . Structural observation shall . be provided for this project. Architect or :engineer responsible for the structural design shall submit :a written statement to the Building Official in accordance with UBC Sec. 307 G.. Plumbing : - permits shall be obtained through the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health. Plumbing will be inspected by that agency, including all gas piping (296= -4722) 7. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior•• to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 8. VENTILATION IS REQUIRED FOR ALL NEW ROOMS AND SPACES OF NEW OR EXISTING BUILDINGS IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AND THE WASHINGTON STATE VENTILATION. AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY CODE, CHAPTER 51 -13 WAC. 9. All structural masonry shall be special inspected per UBC Sec. 306(a) 7. 10. Electrical permits shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industr ies and all electrical work; will be inspected by that agency (248 - 6630). 11. All rack storage requires a separate permit through the City of Tukwila. Structural calculations stamped by a Washington State licensed Structural Engineer are required for rack storage over eight (8) feet in height 12. Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications, and computations shall not be con- - strued to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinance of the jur isdiction. No permit presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be v a l i d . 3 ..263.25.. 3 *A** 1' h * A :t 4 •k • 1r .% h 1 • •h 1 :t A t t t %I 1 * *'rVc:'r It l •4 .y 1 � k'1 k t i :t :1 1 i h :4 k. k . k :1 1 1 1—te :CITY Q.f 1 1I 1IZLA• 1t (.,r.ErtSNIl 4A �e,�r:lik ..A k.t AA4. 1: 4*: 1• A*: th*: tAtk ''e4:4kk4.:k:ih *of:4 *7t01 +* • F.R rM3 `11um.hQr R9800?19 .Ameitril 9263. x5 01. /1 3 Q 13:53', • Payment: llethedt .GHl:CI tdio MSI 1'E�4S1lN; 1:ousT ani;tr, 'CLtl Perwitvii; 1)9'3-•04'21 Type: I)Et UEVl_ .01'141 I0 • Ph.ndT • No: 102304:.90(.;.9 .: {:.rx'''Addreae ; t: 3417 S 120 l'L Total ; Fees~ 15.201.,.44 T�rtci l ' ALL 1'm „ 15,281.44 II al aine #.*ith *•A \*1 4A * *it it* **,. **•d * >t *•k *4,A4 t **•kkk*: * * *•A *A*. *' Acr~ctoyit 4rde •I)e ,cr.i pt i on 000/322 l;l.1rLDI.06 I�Ottt.CS 000/380.904 STATE: IL1):(i4G "511111 Hr•`, 01, Arnaun1 4.'10 *4, *dAA' *; *il **A;t*Alc•AS *d •k +S 4 *A:k* Alit• AA40A1* *><i44**4 *A i I rY 'DE CU{(1V . " tRANSldi 1 4 •k ' �: is ;> >S'.�•:tl '.•;i •k tS• ik!7t t4�r •�+• �t s�: tt'�L t �t •1� �t k A ik �'s1 .1; 9t •A !c °k.R .tt t'k tc_ti!' d h �+ :l v!• �• k: *�. V vSr �r �1 A �t �c; : :, tftAit;S14IT `Uum,h !t`)09,0.1,95:.(a,no411i;. x.`01 3 19 11 30/9 13:10. fit >vm Ysi,:.N tModa;`CHtCl< Nc t t icin MURTE10.1Cli<!;'Lp • i1; 7L. fl V4.1)PMENT . !'Lft�il:l • P L,. g .: "f p•t4.1 T e,es.:::. 1.5.:'.01..44 T14:1! i ('avm rii` G 3 3 • 9 Toted., AL L 1)fu is.. 0,.018 1.1 . • •. . • 11f.Fi 'Ancen - 9.262. 2 . *)t* *k•k*•k.•j.Ad *. .** *s1****• ik*- atit'* A•'***"** t4.* d .kko-4A, ***A *'.V'do#*•fiA ** *' * ti! * •k•A***t4 •facrou17i: ". CodE? 1), "GS cr. ipli- i6ir' Ea ina.tin t ' \16. 4 1.830 P.L:RN CHECK PRUrikEa Ci 01 U 1.9 : .. 4 . — . «. ,�.... .. ...� .. .. it:;zCP:is� Prolec . I , 1 , ,,,, ./., i Lo 06 1 Dri Dw tel(---CCI —Typ o ns,pec io . e : Address: 3L 1 (7 ) GO 4- Special instructions: Date wanted: . . Cn Requester: - DC71)(j . Phone: SO (0- Lo • r- / - INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. COMME J $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Re6ipt No: Date: Proj ct: 6 1C(,,, C..e(2I;" Type of Inspection: Address: 54/7 L 5 /20 Date called: Special instructions: Date w 7 4 m. Reque r: , , �� Potfuy Phone: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 . 4 pi 4 �rF.'_ a.." ar ::',: �Y^ �Gr✓.. r..' Si t..K z�: Y'F s'`. E',: Y 'v.���:S�S7':J"`J.....5..�_..� ......r...re_..._._....i 4:.,..� PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 El Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: /eke/4(14-6 F1 Amt. 4c r r es , ZrC7/7 7 . Ins or. Dat / Li $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspec ion, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS: ,(0 PePtotre7 C oAJC,2 E rr 3f A f OT Fog. -- / 05). cn D A r1....i S - - 0 0 • 3 7 , y73 Pah) i DE.. (?>t) t L WA-rC7 ;7 rnn r1~ ,u - & e,( (6. e— ,-c c 6 e t rc. 47 ID Co / e nos t4e- 04 r 1 g Fir /C(J, Ge e, SP c r4c.... A(SPC (fl9 -it( Requester: /Xf d Re. C15-,44-t,/c6 A &4 /e r -00 i � co-ZO 1 Pt.( -i 1 r A AA / r C6. A ric- 4,0(Tv; Pro • I vW -- WV Type of Inspection: /4e- ei*., . arc- . ♦itil' G y . :Ott.— 3 7 , y73 Date called: . Special instructions:/.1C.) pc_ ' . Date w t : a.n p.m. Requester: /Xf d Phone: INSPECTION NO. , ,, INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 D ate: i (206)431 -3670 ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspe $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRE. Prior to paid inspection, fee must be ❑ P P at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS:/ e ,, , , - e? , / Type of, Inspection:„ t■nci C-C—V—eX Addr ss: 31 S IW k 0 X(or 13 rj 'xiimS Special instructions: 1 : , ( ._ — Co Rei8ezte ntexvi Phone: 5 /tror -e?ffsye) .... ..." .0, A / 1 ,proJect: 1 Type of, Inspection:„ t■nci C-C—V—eX Addr ss: 31 S IW k 1>te called ' G-1 — c) Special instructions: 1 : , Dawarstgb — 6 ., ._ — Co Rei8ezte ntexvi Phone: 00 INSPECTION RECORD I Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Er Approved err applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. DatZ at) 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Prittt tiod uA. TyrA ct3Isecttei i' is . Date 11: 1 cp Special instructions: Date w6n ecl:., 19 /OD qv. Re ngic. fa ccova + Phw — h Q-Ob f ...1.46114MAITOTai 411010RIO. 110,1,144 • • • ; • MIA INSPER N NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWI).A BUILDING DIVISION 6300 S uthCentei' Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Approved per applicable codes. .14 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 11V1,-, • /240i0. Cr-1 P.-e:/el!e" r_s/944 (77 4 42,se caaze-e-,, a. rtrl-f r2L Cp M'4 e re f4e, El $47.00 REINSPECTION E REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: MILIMusznee...' COMMENTS: Type_qf Mspection: , t Le 1 1 j.<, ' 0 'O6 7b7 - F 71 . to Z..4774e- )134.4c e-A.)..42 c ,rt-e( 5s) 4 /6- C/Pe5w A) P S. Requ , P>rc \ yekc.e/#:!- , ) /e.)e2,4fr /Wirfiie 70 //t(.. J.(7 f i t-7( ree.-63V, S 7 0 ,€/. crre.:ai X/4 7?--1> Oz-4//7.---AvE9,-tts 0 (We/LA- -t.iei ://t7 ,-/r.ete- Xei.t. 4(2,iy.,,,E werAot.. --1 )1 fr xi or USc--b Wet Leczit t icsA Type_qf Mspection: , t Le 1 1 Address: , I2C) Pi Date called: ir- ig-r)o Special instructions: Date wznL: Requ , P>rc Ph n 2 eic32._ INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 •••••••••••••••••••.11100,00 • PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 0 Approved per applicable codes. C rrections required prior to approval. Inspector. $47.00 REINSPECTION EH REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: nIfi; &I:J.14 .1., .1 . •. Pidect: , DT..-LECd USP\ Type of Insenction: . cove.r Address 5 . aptif j Date f i a : 44 ..\co Spe !al instructions: „ '. Date wanted: a.m. ntsnnce:ffirdi • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. . CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 )e 0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: becrY-71-e PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQ IRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Piot Leo u Type rIggipt. , . . c ( ARC AteR s , rzoth?0(6 Date calIed . _ J Special instructions: Date wa ted: a.m. 'L H 16.1a). CP"' Requleib a a:1 vat Phou2 1.436 - Approved per applicable codes. • INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 tOlytt4NTS: ... ).., -e-le- 0744 .../ cecA;)-7-e ) 19 e Inspector: PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Corrections required prior to approval. 1,_, „AA. Ej $47.00 REINSPECTION F fREQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd,, Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Project rtecri USA- 3ype of Inspectio l v; /wail a m f LA AddresN 5. oom . Date calle6 , 30/00 Speci;Tinstructions: --- bla z Date IN gl3i 100 Requester: , / 50 _, 4h, Phone r _s„----,_.„---, INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. $47.00 REINSPECT1/ FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. COMMENTS: 64 / °1-c; r 9 g Ale Receipt No: Date: 7.. 5 : 111/4:12r14.1 4 : 4 710 Iate• .01 r - v COMMENTS: �^ / �,� ,� ‘14w/A- 6 C�/,:7U 7 Less Date called: 0-3/i 7/ O g Q 4 PA g U tS Date wanted: a.m. 0�/ p� / /Al 4A-rt.-lb tigrt TA-Or fir - Rs r 2 ViS( 41 ZA-` pkg,TrrWs u1 6 e (/(). (9U.t .DOG— S Tel 67 Proj c t: tic /...t- (,� }- -Type of Inspe `on: atio -1 h,�tt ,CC Ad s: 5 /cat P1. Date called: 0-3/i 7/ O Special instructions: Date wanted: a.m. 0�/ p� Requester r;._ % Phone r'5O / Rte/ [2] INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 El Approved per applicable codes. Correction re uir for to approval. D Ei $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior toinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS: Type n� arspectioc nD S� cU 5E� /t(o 7 7— 00,44 4 T r (Date calle6 / i 4/ 6. ) / " SeM i7eW -- Pe rre7 ft4c s 0 7 -7/72 Z 37 Requestee r 1(S -J S 0 itfO rz 7 O7 W, 472 772D (1) P4 Cfr Pe ' ' - ' 6 e;(714�v7 . /, L( /e06-der- //,Lr/75' 0✓ r 4 /�2�> _ /�G 4 RA-AC eei..x S/ S Lt/ 7kQ 'S fie' 5774e. 4) L 4 CI 0/,4Gc /,t.s e7041 Ok..- Project: � o f 4 Type n� arspectioc nD S� cU AddreI , ( 9 _ 5 . 1 20 y , (Date calle6 / i 4/ 6. ) Special instructions: Date wanted. � � ��� CO (� P.m. Requestee r 1(S -J Phone: INSPECTION NO. Approved per applicable codes. ••• INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Inspect ' Date: ' / 1 s2 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 4 61 F.eo cr" ,�L €C - .4G OK,6"S . A(07 / fi ` 1 4c-L- ,e4-7. W 0 1,, S T ��GC/i3 7_' ,4r /k r �� 4. .b Sc ,e,,, rr t A-As„�•�' �Dll/J ,x_rsp Aef e,:os cog_ z /f4d.d ,z xel,thxn(a - b'C J& 6 S 0 cam, , . 0 04 ro ,,d-s re. () C2 - r � �t(' ( J- C.GF/1 !/r �/ p 9fn/,iOfl: j lm w� ate called: (^/►1 5 /0 A Special in tructions:f g t Date wanted: Ov . Requester: i e io _ Phone: / r� 64' , S6 - . J �f Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 orrr�tions required p for to approval. 1 Date PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 0 0 Et] U $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: • ...ri _,.. 4 1 n j u s 4 ( 1 C 4 met: /11, Tp o Inspec ),( , A 5 i / 04 Date ca 1, : Spellyruction 9 Date wanted: P.m. Requester: P INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 Aproved per applicable codes. lnspe INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: .5f._ Weak &4 7T-/ 449fiA C4.'4 igg 49 Oil° /oe-s / 722 Or2116;40=7;Gtels Wore ZA.1 0 0 D Co L c1/14.115 (,L), 7)-/ 1 Z-At, 4(146.„S 06 ;(_(5 5o7if El $47.00 REINSPECTION IEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd„ Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: 1.04.1.41 144 ^.3.:Wvi • • COMMENTS: 0 4t:tg&--.14ezra 0 4^te Ar rA97“, 113 oat_4904772, q) P, e 4 4 - A e (A-67 gined604‘377wAt 6 $7 aLtE 1“e (;7A- o 6 /t4-7 4-4eAs 4 A - rne e ve - i) £C407 Cb,cc/t.ci .0 ,,,1-72--b 3M(c.Se TO, o c Au _ 1. 4-x -------- Requester: - , ,e/ _ Proyty Type of i po o me Date called: Special instructions: Date 14 0 0 a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone: EP] INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Insp Approved per agc4tle codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Dat ,9Z- cid 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: v.4%trAelitil • ..trft. v • • • . • • 1 COMMENTS: 47 1/ 7 4', rbie tf7 Ge/4-K-c- Pl7W/z5 0,4019) 4 i WIWI( 10 - 7 (b11-s7Xele 511e 6)c7 772 / 1-e9z9 P‘68, 7 M-47 0.60) # /4 0,0/ /5 /7/,3-/Ce4.7 Tv iee-iefri, ..-p444-A --PM' e4 __ 7Zeb—,1--,44/4- r , , 9-• i T}! 1 . 941 kg--ei t /0 c95.7 .,$ a,t-( /r c S/V-E4C SY*7 .t.^? /9Meer7/4‹, P ' 0 : i POO/ • USA . Typ Inspeetion. 071101 4 i WIWI( Ad . 5 /0A Date calle 00 L Special instructions: p ,r %. beig ,/ Date want a.m. /0 P.m Requestow o f IP° Phone. -... - - 4 ; ----- )2 - --- ".• INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPE€TION NO. CITY 9F TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 n Approved per applicable codes. orrections required prior to approval. Inspect A o $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd,, Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Date: 4.0 • ; ; .2. • ;•-• COMMENTS: (7) t o n i g ", co -60(4 c / 1 j7 9,-L( e e,t70,e/ae. Date called: I 7 10._q..1 a co Ico es A45 az.,(06. of .v itaifr Dateavg7b1: co a.m. 1 -0 . 1- ) 11 . • „„ext4 ,c • (.//- - C7 G-(4.r_ € 7 P /1 2 tet) // g� *- Alecteicizcl S77 c f)/ Pty .0.7224,S / 4e.- ypia pc iii/ela g17-4A(722 Projek. Lea:/ ta of Inspectior Address: 2-i4-r7 6 (4:0 PI, Date called: I 7 10._q..1 a co Ico Special instructions: 8 Dateavg7b1: co a.m. 1 -0 . 1- ) 11 . • Requester( Phone: g:x3....4,....c INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO., CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 981 .. 4 0 ,•' ' '- 0-0 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 pproved per applicable codes. j Corrections required prior to approval. $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Pr j ct: • Pr L L eod UsA Type ofq . p r zt a r i o i l iimerm„. C. AdAress: • • - s Date called: .- OC) Special instructions: • Date wanted _- :" -.-a-ott2P Requester:— i —LCIei , 4 t.so r- P hone: 1 4 - 2- a)6 ' LIGS 2_ INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 (206)431-3670 COMMENTS: 13 -ee 41(4 1.. 1 ItAYA y if tart oti Approved per applicable codes. Ei Corrections required prior to approval. If AL-a A 1 • I] $47.00 REINSPECTIO FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: 1 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 8 vd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. Receipt No: COMMENTS: e/e,kr..e..4.7 er) • 7 A Ad/, 2/e 74-) 5 ca, C 17L r „.. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Corrections required prior to approval. / 0 $47.OI INSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: (206)431-3670 . Addr s: 3977 s. I gOi p l Date called: .,: S ecial i structions: , et- - h— Let /- Date wanted: U ICIIrTO Requester: '., /0/ A 1 4715 - 5o z -zi 2..— INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 8 vd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. Receipt No: COMMENTS: e/e,kr..e..4.7 er) • 7 A Ad/, 2/e 74-) 5 ca, C 17L r „.. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Corrections required prior to approval. / 0 $47.OI INSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: (206)431-3670 Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: won-: e rn Za0 Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: FINALAPP.FRM n ., City of Tukwila Fire Department Project Naine . X11 L Li ra d 35,E S\\\1-\ CQ C` Address - 331 f 1 ?L Retaincurrent . inspection. schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM • Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Thomas R Keefe, Fire Chief Permit No S (;\ Suite # 12;M 1(I 60 Authorized Signature Date Rev. 2/19/98 T.F.D. Form F.P. 8 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-575-4404 • Fax: 206-575-4439 1' 0 AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS June 29, 2000 0-91M13445-0 M. A. Mortenson 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, Idaho 83702 Attention: Mr. Chuck Rauch Subject: Final Summary of Special Inspections Intergate East Tenant Improvements Building 2 Permit No. D990421 and M12000 -087 (generator) Tukwila, Washington Dear Mr. Rauch: As requested by your project superintendent, Mr. Donny Brandt, AGRA Earth& Environmental, Inc. (AGRA) respectfully submits this letter as our final summary of special inspections and materials testing for the above - referenced project. AGRA performed inspections for this project beginning on February 16, 2000 through April 14, 2000. Details of our inspections are described by Report Nos. 1 through 13 and corresponding laboratory test reports. These reports, copies of which were previously submitted, form the basis for this final summary of our inspections. AGRA performed inspections and testing for the following: 1. Reinforced Concrete; 2. Mechanical Couplers; 3. Epoxy Anchor Installation; 4. Structural Steel Erection and Welding; and 5. High- strength Bolting. In our opinion, the work which was inspected as referenced in our daily field reports was performed in general conformance with the approved plans and changes approved by the structure! engineer. If you have questions or desire additional information, please call at your convenience. Respectfully submitted AGRA Earth & Environmental Timothy Associate Ken S. Sahi, P.E. Associate cc: City of Tukwila Building Department RECEIVED JUL 0 3 2000 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 980344918 Tel (425) 820-4889 Fax (425) 821 -3914 Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 3/13/00 Placement: MIDDLE OF GENERATOR PAD. Strength (Pc): Required : 4000 psi @ 28 Days Time Mix ID: 4853 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: Truck #: 422 Ticket #: 128999 Plant #: Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 25 GALS Admixture: Batch Time: Sample Time: Finish Time: Test Result Spec ID # ID 7420 A B C D 1:48 2:50 3:30 Date Age Date Rec'd Tested (days) 3/14/00 3/20/00 7 3/14/00 4/10/00 28 3/14/00 5/8/00 56 3/14/00 6/12/00 90 Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Spilt, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar Distribution ASTM -C39 Nominal Specimen Size 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 Producer: Yes Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: • June 27, 2000 0-91M-13445-0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SARI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A Inspector: PHIL FRYBERGER Actual Specs• Slump (Inches) ASTM C -143: 4.5 5t1 Air Content ( %) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: WA Concrete Temp. ( °F): 63 50-90 Ambient Temp. ( °F): 40 N/A Weather: N/A Remarks: LOW BREAK OBSERVED @ 56 DAYS. REFERENCE REPORT #10, SET 4. Actual Area Compressive Strength Brk. Type/ % of (sq in) (!bs) (psi) Cure Req'd 28.27 61100 2160 SH 54% 28.29 99540 3520 CSP 88% 28.28 105540 3730 CSP 93% 28.27 115570 4090 CSP 102% AGRA cNGNECRING altNAL iCW ^CtaS 11 Vz.5 •2.41 %Vey. Suite ICO <I.xtsno, Was- one :c 'J.1A.. ?8034 - .915 • Tel 02518ZC -469 A,z (425) 821.391+ TO: Donny Brandt COMPANY M. A. Mortenson FAX NO. 206 - 277 -8184 FROM: Tim Hyden This tax is any intended for the addressee. It may contain privileged or confidential Information. My unauthorized disclosure is strictly prohibited. if you have received this transmission in error. please natty us immediately (collect) so that we may correct our transmission. Please then oastroy the original. Thank you. COMMENTS Donny: As requested our final letter is attached. I am also including the test report for the concrete that had initially been noted as a deficiency but made strength at 90 -days in case the City of Tukwila needs it with your letter. I will send a hard copy of this letter to the City as well. Please call if you have questions or need anything further. Thanks, Tim Hyden. ANNOUNCEMENTS: AGRA Earth 8 Environmental also has offices in Spokane and Tacoma, Washington Providing Geotechnical, cnvironmental & Materials Testing Services in 57 Offices Worldwide AGRA earn 3 Environmental, Inc. ,Re,v. Z'37) aJ -: :: /t.. 7t!E:Z2 7+ FACSIMILE COVER SHEET DATE: June 29, 2000 PROJECT: Inter -gate East, Building 2 FAX OPERATOR: Tim Hyden NO. OF PAGES; 3 (Including Cover Sheet) RECEIVED ; CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 1 4 2000 PERMIT CENTER 7 :iLo't? 1 ' ;'O Acef: 0 00-:Z -.nr AG RA i NGINMING G.GL I IOLUTrONS June 29, 2000 0-91M13445-0 M. A. Mortenson 280 N. 3'" Street, Suite 138 Boise. Idaho 83702 Attention: Mr. Chuck Rauch Subject: Final Summary of Special Inspections Intergate East Tenant Improvements Building 2 Permit No "0990421: and MI2000 -087 (generator) Tukwila, Washington Dear Mr. Rauch: As requested by your project superintendent, Mr. Donny Brandt, AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. (AGRA) respectfully submits this letter as ournnal summary of special inspections and materials testing for the above - referenced project. AGRA performed inspections for this project beginning on February 16, 2000 through April 14, 2000. Details of our inspections are described by Report Nos. 1 through 13 and corresconding laboratory test reports. These reports. copies of which were previously submitted, form the basis for this ;final summary of our inspections. AGRA performed inspections and testing for the following: Timothy Associate 1. Reinforced Concrete; 2. Mechanical Couplers: 3. Epoxy Anchor Installation :. 4. Structural Steel Erection and Welding; and 5. High- strength Bolting. Respectfully submitted AGRA Earth & Environmental Ken S. Sahi, P.E. Associate rgg cc: City of Tukwila Building Ceoartment AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 landartd, Washington USA 18034.6918 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Fax (425) 6214914 In our opinion, 'the work which was inspected as referenced in our daily field reports was performed in general conformance with the approved plans and changes approved by the structural engineer. If you have questions or desire additional information, please call at your convenience. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 1 4 2000 PERMIT CENTER :S0 - "s0 M . ?63 -i 7t:.tZ2S's7+ ' +43 7 414V3 c°Y -4C3: ::-it-or Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE. ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE Mix and Field Data Time Cast Date:: Placement: Strength (tf c): MixIO: 4853 Supplier. STONeNAY Loved et - Truck its: 422 Ticket ft: 125999 Plant 1t: - Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 25 GALS Admixture: - Batch Time: Sample Time: Finish Time: Test Result Spec ID ID 7420 A 9 C D ASTM -G9 3/13/00 MIDDLE OF GENEPATOR PAD. Required : 4000 psi @ 28 Days 1:49 2:50 3:30 Date Age Nominal Date Recd Tested (days) Specimen Size 3/14/00 3/20/00 7 6x12x0 3/14/00 4110/00 29 6x12x0 3/14100 5/8/00 56 6x12x0 3/14/00 8/12/00 90 8x12x0 Producer. Yes Others: 7tEEtZ2SZ7+ Actual Area No In) Report Date: Project x: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr. Architect: Englneer: PO Number: Contractor. inspector. PHIL FRYBERG2R Actual Spec,. Slump (Inches) ASTM C -143: 4.5 5s1 Air Content (1) ASTM C-231: N(A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. CF): 63 50.90 Ambient Temp. CF): Weather: WA Remarks: LOW BREAK OBSERVED REPORT s10, SET A. Break Types — (CM) Cone. (CSp) Cone .SpIIt. (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar June 27, 2000 0-91M-13445-0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE 099-0421 KEN SARI G8A GEORGE SUTLER ASSOCIATES NIA a. '►I, 7 , 4iet! 40 WA 58 DAYS. REFERENCE Compressive Strength Brk. Typal % of (lba) . (psi) • Cure Req'd 28.27 61100 2160, r SH 54% 28.29 99540 3528' . CSP 3a% . 28.28 105540 3730 CSP 93% . 28.27 115570 4090 CSP 102% RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUG 1 4 2000 PERMIT CENTER ,1dg: Z7 ':O- :Z -411f • ; • . ..r - • • • ' • • „ • • • • To: AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122" Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 98034.6918 Tel (425) 820-4689 Fax (425) 821-3914 M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 Attn: Chuck Rauch cc: City of Tukwila SAWORDPROCTIeld Document Trensmittals1130003113445.0.wpd JUN 2 2 4uu0 DEL DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL Date: June 20, 2000 Project No.: 0-91M-13445-0 Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 Project Manager: K Permit N Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associated field correspondence pertaining to the above-referenced project. SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Laboratory Report Document No. Set 4 Document Date 06/12/00 Transmittal Date 06/23/00 attn: Building Department Report No. Date Inspect or Deficiency Noted Corrective Action Closure Date & Report No. #10 Set 4 3/13 PWF 56 day test result, 93% of design strength =3730 psi Needs engineers acceptance, or wait for 90 day results M.A. Mortensen Field Document Transmittal •AGRA Earth & Environmental ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS PROJECT NAME: INTERGATE EAST PROJECT NUMBER: 0- 91M- 13445 -0 S:IWORDPROC'FIeld Document Transmittals %13000s113445.0.wpd DEFICIENCY LIST 0 -91 M- 13445 -0 Page 4 '� AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE ASTM -C39 Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 3/13/00 Placement: MIDDLE OF GENERATOR PAD. Strength (f'c): Required : 4000 psi @ 28 Days Mix ID: 4853 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: Truck #: 422 Ticket #: 128999 Plant #: Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 25 GALS Admixture: Time Batch Time: 1:48 Sample Time: 2:50 Finish Time: 3:30 Test Result Spec ID # ID 7420 A B C D Date Age Date Rec'd Tested (days) 3/14/00 3/20/00 7 3/14/00 4/10/00 28 3/14/00 5/8/00 56 3/14/00 6/12/00 90 Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar ■ Reviewed By Distribution Client: Yes File : Nominal Specimen Size 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 Producer: Yes Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Inspector: PHIL FRYBERGER Actual Specs. Slump (inches) ASTM C -143: 4.5 5±1 Air Content (%) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. ( °F): 63 50 -90 Ambient Temp. ( °F): Weather: N/A Actual Area Compressive Strength (sq in) (lbs) (Psi) 28.27 61100 2160 28.29 99540 3520 28.28 105540 3730 28.27 115570 4090 AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034-6919 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Fax (425) 821 -3914 June 12, 2000 0 -91 M- 13445 -0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A 40 N/A Remarks: LOW BREAK OBSERVED @ 56 DAYS. REFERENCE REPORT #10, SET 4. 34( 7 Brk. Type/ % of Cure Req'd SH 54% CSP 88% CSP 93% CSP 102% SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS _ Document Type Document No. Document Date Transmittal Date Laboratory Report Set 4 05/08/00 05/12/00 0 AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122 Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 98034-6918 Tel (425) 820-4669 Fax (425) 821-3914 Attn: Chuck Rauch cc: City of Tukwila To: M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 S WVORDPROCAFIeld Document TransmIttals113000s113445.0.wpd FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL Date: May 11, 2000 Project No.: 0-91M-13445-0 Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 Project Manager: Ke Permit No.: Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associated fiel correspondence pertaining to the above-referenced project. attn: Building Department Report No. Date Inspector Deficiency Noted Corrective Action Closure Date & Report No. 10 Set 4 3/13 PWF 56 day test result, 93% of design strength =3730 psi Needs engineers acceptance, or wait for 90 day results i.i.A. t.;u:tensen Field Document Transmittal *AGRA Earth & Environmental ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS PROJECT NAME: INTERGATE EAST PROJECT NUMBER: 0- 91M- 13445 -0 SIWORDPROC\FIeid Document Transmittals \13000s\13445-0.wpd DEFICIENCY LIST 0 -91M- 13445 -0 Page 4 s .a • 1, • AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 3/13/00 Placement: MIDDLE OF GENERATOR PAD. Strength (f'c): Required : 4000 psi @ 28 Days Time Mix ID: 4853 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: Truck #: 422 Ticket #: 128999 Plant #: Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 25 GALS Admixture: - Batch Time: Sample Time: Finish Time: Test Result Spec ID # ID 7420 A B C D 1:48 2:50 3:30 ASTM -C39 Date Age Date Recd Tested (days) 3/14/00 3/20/00 7 3/14/00 4/10/00 28 3/14/00 5/8/00 56 3/14/00 90 Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Split, (CSh) Cone Reviewed By Distribution Nominal CI nt: Yes File: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Actual Specs. Slump (inches) ASTM C -143: 4.5 5t1 Air Content (%) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. ( °F): 63 50 -90 Ambient Temp. ( °F): Weather: N/A Remarks: LOW BREAK OBSERVED @ 56 DAYS. REFERENCE REPORT #10, SET 4. Actual Area Compressive Strength Brk. Type/ % of Specimen Size (sq In) (Ibs) (psi) Cure Req'd 6x12x0 28.27 61100 2160 SH 54% 6x12x0 28.29 99540 3520 CSP 88% 6x12x0 28.28 105540 3730 CSP 93% Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar Producer: Yes Others: Inspector: PHIL FRYBERGER AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034 -6918 Tel (425) 820-4669 Fax (425) 821 -3914 May 8, 2000 0 -91 M- 13445 -0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A 40 N/A NOT IN CONFORMAWCE WITH PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS 1 SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Document No. Document Date Transmittal Date Inspection Reports Laboratory Report 12-13 Set 4 04/10-04/14/00 04/11/00 04/21/00 04/21/00 AGRA RECEIVED ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 127 Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 98034.6918 Tel (425) 820-4669 Fax (425) 821-3914 APR 2 4 REILD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL COMMUNITY • To: M.A. Mortensen DEVELOPMENT Date: April 18, 2000 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Project No.: 0 Boise, ID 83702 Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 Project Manager Permit Attn: Chuch Rauch Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and a e ield correspondence pertaining to the above-referenced project. cc: City of Tukwila SAWORDPROCTield Document Transmittals113000s113445-0.wpd attn: Building Department PROJECT NAME ' /50I . .o.r4 .6 .g / . AG o4+ s. 4 CS tspueS l I r� pe,'f I uzr < t✓e /c( i•, ee. fi o. i PROJECT NO. ✓11.4- avys -o REPORT NO. /Z ADDRESS 39/7 .5- 420 4 Al l ite Tow, 4 e...4- .,415.4 4 / , ' S s 7 ee t.'C!. �C1 . ; -1 2, S' L2 ?'C' h e / Pt v+ts / g 4 i PERMIT NO. o99 -ay2/ DATE 54/0-00 CLIENT r A f h% JNS01ti ' 2 Ore 7 c a !s/P1' iv+ Gov. Tili n,wc.e, G.i. ' cel:•..e/ Gh/^�e.0 c,-../ WEATHERR 2:IN,5 PAGE (indudReports) esTest Reports) /OF/ STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) "V AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. ARCHITECT 513/4 To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were Yes ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Corrected - Report No. AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE/PAGER NO. lSe Jee/ Y S - Wte 925/ CONTRACTOR C.. » b 1 ,1, eic_ / or". 1 .00U TYPEOOFIN/ L ?//��,M / l5'06INSPECTION eek•14 / , ❑ RE-INSPECTION COMMENTS �,` - �: v / . AG o4+ s. 4 CS tspueS l I r� pe,'f I uzr < t✓e /c( i•, ee. fi o. i h a✓ s---/Ax.../0/s. / Sv op.' - R /t..r l _r 4 /C/. _4( 4r1,t.0>P / 4G/2. Se, Ze 6440 l L �ar.•+ ir dr✓�i/ tan , 9 •-► /r, c,'e Qe. / P.Ni.1 -4 1' War L Ie � c • 6.,€ I CJ O✓L 5:'/4. 4,e/'•.l,t' (vc *le/ pe G✓/! 70 1.4bi q, US. %may sihAk/ f+e TZ /40,1`i E70 /r c e /tf/,, , rlre, 01 r .. 4-. .,415.4 4 / , ' S s 7 ee t.'C!. �C1 . ; -1 2, S' L2 ?'C' h e / Pt v+ts / g 4 i Of9» .t• 44-‘. e„ S,'te _Am,/, , ( 3 ,�" Ok zaeK'� c -, r ,.L � / c -dr t„ 1 sd/7 , XS -ire- . v /5, 14/c: seae �41S WAIT p e/ P { . , C r e i e l e . i ? F / A k i e r f Q Z o G/eIt 41 Y Z " , i ' e e . w y 6 / J / / / / / 02 ? t C/ C in 5 ; !l o M/ -7 /4 'C N�`� f J, S u gpo r" d.) �j ltI et+� 4‘et • h% JNS01ti ' 2 Ore 7 c a !s/P1' iv+ Gov. Tili n,wc.e, G.i. ' cel:•..e/ Gh/^�e.0 c,-../ P ei 9n Ii Codes cr<C s0€ , 'T,.c1T4 i 6/e4 7o ✓✓„C .mc.heote., <,S Oh 7/4 e4 t‘___. SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) "V SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were Yes ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Corrected - Report No. 1 AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE REVIEWED BY AG RA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 cN DAILY FIELD REPORT THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report Is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in lull. without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rev 8199) ,. r.... . . ':COMMENTS . .. U /� ei A . A ., / . / / / / .4e 1 vol s, ie. PS r7GCS d 'b lX,-, p, i4oi io. OT N'S4i S7/e i ar // „„ s,•k vs / ✓ ,D1 .4, Oa,. -,iii, c %. 4/,1 exi Ain*" 5 !ti, I /90A.. 4+0I10.,a I /7-3 ..„4-C9 4/4 9T 744e ve. FIN..., ..& Zekee..._ Ls .55=3 f5 - G 1 ,Pof',reat /3 i _i",se.c.- i A, C L! 4/ .4 (74 ho / Sm e t Z , A. 4,, /.. coil USG.. T�ir• o 4 ( ,t oa, s; -/e, oC✓w t. C cv.�4irc / oa „Ad/P. /1v7 ..ie te4 dn. l'ftlt. 4,i,4. .=/ "..i !/t•1, : ai s i -�� b r 7 , / ./.ke �fisc 9e � U i4/....-4- o he.,vei chi hr ec`.4e✓. •t o.. ct w) . 4 p�1� is e ., /S/ee c . - (.2c. /4„,,, . -"fried ` ce // /S/497 7'25 Acc/i7,1. / I __,Ior lr v,Z 7 Q.. 7 e WEATHER ,rddeL0 f PAGE (induda -est Rspats) / OF SAMPLES OBTAINED (NO./SIZE/TYPE) 41A SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were .4 Yes ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and sg,ifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Corrected - Report No. PROJECT NAME 2 EQS1 13/�� 0 PROJECT NO. ,09414 ''*0 REPORT NO. a 1114 ADDRESS ��`7 3v/7 S. 41 6 P /owe L // 7 4LY/ /. aid- PERMIT NO. /� o99-o(T z� DATE 9-&-oo CLIENT ,�/Af 1! /� , 1 444 10+. ./ WEATHER ,rddeL0 f PAGE (induda -est Rspats) / OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEER aide/ •`. AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. ARCHITECT 23 T34- AG� IELDRE PRESENTATIVE/PAGER NO. �4w:/. 1., V-7 0ert '3$f/ CONTRACTOR i l ../ h +10.. TYPE OF INSPECTION IEW INSPECTION .7 ❑ RE-INSPECTION AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE DAILY FIELD REPORT REVIEWED BY THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not Intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG1 8372 (Rev. 699) 00. 11:23A Mortenson Seattle 30-00. 0323s From-CEORCE BUTLI:1SOC. utst ..luu 14U. Data -Si tro GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Sy______ Cmlec 3y eotie.s.IPP211.0492. vilActo 1 q■4 /7 • ASUPPgster_s OtePPLarila - .14eleft. •C hos 1'erm4 taa 41 AS poSSidke • 3 11‘ kr -rs sxs,1 4 'ix 1 1 4 x 1 /4. Acf-.# P IG EA isios ov • • • I • • • • • ••••• el/ ••■•■ - mm=0. •■••• .1■1•110 .116 11, • 206-277 8184 • p 03 4134927240 ( T-539 p.uz/wi p.141) 4— " - -AiSr TILT 4.# tNku-IPAOrzi. pigkii4-0Ft*Y (2)YeA rwitirwiaa /ego AficwaS //izz &"41Vri itY attP6126 . CISS iaAri d tzigeZ (.154144 to 6 az. APpeavoicz • • • • • $ • OA. • PO ••• •••• •• • •••• • ••• r 00 11:23A Mortensen Seattle 2 T -00 06:06ae From- GEORGE BUM( IOC. • 114111ZIA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOOATES, INC. © — Cried By .DL�S 04.• - visr uPfT NkfiEs/GMM {t! 44;i J 'cur' 1rz7 Ir • care • 3127100 206 -277 8184 P.02 0134927240 1 -4ftl r.uuut rice * . 4' 1 /ili •- • RR *MO f -• .4 . S41 sr. . ZX CV l EriC LIT . _44x` /1f. 6d3 OF Six t * 4.aa 1■ AGRA Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE Mix and Fled Data Cast Date: 3/13/00 Time Test Result Spec ID # ID 7420 A B C D Reviewed By Distribution ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Strength (f c): Mix ID: 4853 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: - Truck #: 422 Ticket #: 128999 Plant #: - Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 25 GALS Admixture: - Batch Time: Sample Time: Finish Time: ASTM - C39 Placement: MIDDLE OF GENERATOR PAD. Required : 4000 psi @ 28 Days 1:48 2:50 3:30 Date Age Date Recd Tested (days) 3/14/00 3/20/00 7 3/14/00 4/10/00 28 3/14/00 56 3/14/00 56 Nominal Specimen Size 6x12x0 6x12x0 Clie Yes File: Yes Producer: Yes Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034.6918 Tel (425) 820.4889 April 11, 2000 Fax (425) 821 -3914 0-91M-13445-0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A Inspector: PHIL FRYBERGER Actual Specs. Slump (inches) ASTM C -143: 4.5 5±1 Air Content (%) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. ( °F): 63 50 -90 Ambient Temp. ( °F): 40 N/A Weather: N/A Remarks: LOW BREAK OBSERVED AT 7 AND 28 DAYS. REFERENCE REPORT #10, SET 4. Actual Area Compressive Strength (sq in) (Ibs) (psi) 28.27 61100 2160 28.29 99540 3520 Brk. Type/ % of Cure Req'd SH 54% CSP 88% SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Document No. Document Date Transmittal Date Laboratory Report Set 3 04/06/00 04/14/00 RECE1V!ED °AGRA APR 14 2000 ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122"" Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 98034 -6918 Tel (425) 820 -4689 Fax (425) 821 -3914 To: M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 Attn: Chuch Rauch COMMUNITY FIELD DOCFI'RANSMITTAL Date: April 10, 2000 Project No.: 0 -91 M- 13445 -0 Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg: 2 Project Manager: Ke Permit No Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associate correspondence pertaining to the above - referenced project. cc: City of Tukwila S:IWORDPROCWIeld Document Transmttals 13000s113445.0,wpd attn: Building Department . AGRA Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE ASTM -C39 Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 3/8/00 Placement: GENERATOR PAD FOOTING. Strength (fc): Required : 4000 psi @ 28 Days Time Batch Time: Sample Time: 3:25 Finish Time: Test Result Spec ID # ID 7391 A B C D Reviewed By Distribution ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Mix ID: 4853 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: Truck #: 414 Ticket #: 128130 Plant #: - Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 5 GALS Admixture: - 2 :25 Remarks: REFERENCE REPORT #9, SET 3. Client: Yes Date Age Date Rec'd Tested (days) 3/9/00 3/15/00 7 3/9/00 4/5/00 28 3/9/00 4/5/00 28 3/9/00 Nominal Specimen Size 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 File: es Producer: Yes Actual Specs. Slump (Inches) ASTM C -143: 5 5 Air Content ( %) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. ( °F): 56 50 -90 Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Inspector: MIKE McCOY Ambient Temp. ( °F): Weather: N/A Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034 -6918 Tel (425) 820 -4669 April 6, 2000 Fax (425) 821 -3914 0 -91 M- 13445 -0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A 42 N/A Actual Area Compressive Strength Brk. Type / % of (sq in) (Ibs) (psi) Cure Req'd 28.27 100790 3570 SH 89% 28.28 136770 4840 CSP 121% 28.28 138140 4880 SH 122% HOLD t SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Document No. Document Date Transmittal Date Laboratory Report Set 2 03/21/00 RECEVED MAR 31. COMMUNITY DEVELOF 03/31/00 2000 MENT r AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N,E. 122 Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 980344918 Tel (425) 820.4689 Fax (425) 821 -3914 To: M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 Attn: Chuch Rauch Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associated fie d correspondence pertaining to the above - referenced project. cc: City of Tukwila S:\WORDPROC'FIeld Document TransmiIIals113000s113445.0.wpd FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL Project Name: Intergate East attn: Building Department Date: March 28, 2000 Project No.: 0-91M-13445-0 Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 Project Manager: Permit No.• •AGRA Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE Mix and Field D Cast Date: Mix ID: Supplier: Load #: Truck #: Ticket #: Plant #: Batch Size: Water: Admixture: Time Batch Time: Sample Time: Finish Time: Test Result Break Types — (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar Reviewed By Distribution ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Placement: Strength (fc): Spec ID # ID 7285 A B C D ata 2/22/00 S.O.G. 9 TO 11, G TO F. Required : 4000 psi © 28 Days 4852 STONEWAY 302 124853 12 YDS 16 GALS 7:18 8:30 8:45 Date Age Date Rec'd Tested (days) 2/23/00 2/29/00 7 2/23/00 3/21/00 28 2/23/00 3/21/00 28 2/23/00 Client: Yes File: Yes ASTM -C39 Nominal Specimen Size 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 Producer: Yes Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Inspector: SATNAM SINGH Actual Specs. Slump (inches) ASTM C -143: 5.25 5 Air Content ( %) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. ( °F): 69 50 -90 Ambient Temp. ( °F): 60 Weather: RAIN Remarks: REFERENCE REPORT #2, SET 2. AGRA Earth & Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034-6918 Tel (425) 820-4669 T March 21, 2000ax (425) 821 -3914 0 -91M- 13445 -0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SARI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A N/A Actual Area Compressive Strength Brk. Type/ % of (sq in) (Ibs) (psi) Cure Req'd 28.27 101970 3610 SH 90% 28.27 151080 5340 CSH 134% 28.27 151590 5360 CSH 134% HOLD SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Document No. Document Date Transmittal Date Inspection Reports Laboratory Reports 10 -11 Sets 1, 3 03/13/00 02/16 - 03/08/00 03/22/00 03/22/00 � AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122' Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 980348918 Tel (425) 820-4889 Fax (425) 821-3914 To: M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 Attn: Chuch Rauch cc: City of Tukwila SAWORDPR0C1FIeld Document Tranemiltals \13000s113445-0.wpd RECEIVED MAR 2 7 2000 c ° DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL Date: March 22, 2000 Project No.: 0-91M-13445-0 Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 Project Manager: Permit N Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associat.- • ield correspondence pertaining to the above - referenced project. attn: Building Department PROJECT NAME - PROJECT NO. REPORT NO. ADDRESS 34 -j74. Mop/5 ri3e ,Cd;4 PERMIT NO. oq -ceial DATE 3 -a CLIENT da 4, 1r S WEATHER u PAGE (Indudss Tiet Reports) OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 6 e ,6)1.161 AGRA PR•l NAGERI*HONENO. „W �t Ti►� n1 ARCHITECT X AGRAFIELDRE ESE NTATIVEIPAGER Acre-411)(421,X_ TYPEOFFIIIN SSPPE �CTIO (�fJ /(�; NEW INSPECTION ❑ RE•INSPECTION CONTRACTOR �y� 8,7tisleAr4D-ft.- '�M :a.:... COMMENTS ... M 460 6714- 40c &I-iiticte.4 "Ixceo/11 at leititsx4,491e, A l ee, ,Q0._CAPel Zt<'. /tti4z/7 iilyezAd 7 ,s6e Aq -) / 3`7 �;lr�rl htisial}fehe- 71 /edLS e." r 44/. 6.5'sa -,4 i ' f eneIo. .1 pc.ck, I ___ rite e /4 & 4 ' 4 /4t u,e,g 1...5„,ilzse.)z,ezidc.r..... (1 V Z , 7� ' I i,U /ti . Ltikaie ®h -A4c, c,y /e, t . g rwi ,Vree*ta .y.,(__5,. SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZEITYPE) 6 WM ity i SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were /6Yes 0 Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. 0 No 0 Deficiency Corrected - Report No. •AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 AGRA ' IEL REPR SENTATIVE DAILY FIELD REPORT REVIEWED BY THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE jl" G REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rev.699) /CONCRETE l ' >, ASTM C -39, GROUT ASTM C -1019 MORTAR (TYPE ) CMU (TYPE ) PRISM UBC 21 -17 SHOTCRETE ACI 506 R OTHER ASTM C -780 ASTM C -140 P %I' f 14 —a PROJECT NO. a�� i.� /S/6 REPORT NO. v 34-17 ._.5 I Q o 7 LV / L't'IY PAGE Includes Tent OF eporb� DATE 3 i ti / 1 FIELD DATA BATCH DATA SUPPLIER ,5 TYPE OF CEMENT O 1 MIX NUMBER f WEIGHTS PERYARD DESIGN ACTUAL TICKET NUMBER /Ae g f g CEMENT (LBS.) I ltee e V= ' � 195 9/5. 14 €1.37) €1.37) TRUCK NUMBER 174,a2 A FLY ASH (LBS.) et Las BATCH SIZE, YD /0 COARSE AGG. (LBS.) it /q 5 1941 TOTAL PLACED I d OF /I, YDS COARSE AGG. (LBS.) '. , WATER ADDED, GALS. 0?-5-- COARSE AGG. (LBS.) - f tre t'Otits ALLOWABLE WATER, GALS. 57 FINE AGG. (LBS.) . /a51 0 / a s"/ c-bs DRUM REVOLUTIONS WATER (LBS.) 051 alvS Les BATCH TIME /.48° AIR ENTRAINMENT Cj9Le«►+ 1 7 b e7� SAMPLE TIME A.56 ADMIXTURE NO. 1 Z14ttlt 4 /P 6 i y FINISH TIME 3,C) ADMIXTURE NO. 2 0.114-0'44f ,Pia- oZt A. SAMPLE AND TEST DATA _ SAMPLE SET 1 OF 1 LABORATORY SET # I.D. # C4 Z Z a SAMPLE LOCATION: ,' idd /E' o 9e pod DESIGN STRENGTH wet PSI ®...7 f DAYS 'TEST DATA SPECIFIED ACTUAL TEST AGE (DAYS) 2 _,t,2 SLUMP (ASTM C -143) 6' yr SPECIMEN (NOJSIZE/TYPE) 4/ - 6 X!Z AIR CONT. (ASTM C -173/C -231) DATE SAMPLED ,3 , .13 .erb AMBIENT TEMP. ° F l a S DATE RECEIVED 3 - /q . SAMPLE TEMP. (ASTM C -1064) So-go 6,3 c ' CURING CONDITIONS t'/'e e UNIT WEIGHT (ASTM C -138) ,�--- HIGH/LOW TEMPERATURES YIELD (ASTM C -138) _,-""- 'Nob appropriate test methods If different from those indicated SAMPLE STORAGE LOCATION AND COMMENTS , ddle y ->, G'pri' . /2 AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE REVIEWED BY TEST REPORT THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHA E P - NDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19378 (Roy. 6/991 _ COMMENTS • 4 ? &( cVleif/te._C Oh s i 7•_ 4J I t"✓r.J C A r 12 -.4, 440(.-. . ey Nl %o G /'O".� et s.,./e_ QS r'e' L., r , 0I A rea ec ; eic. o," G/t s 4'( ,.1..v,s s f 1/ .& 'wee" F 0A 1 Z cboiwc ,~ 1( _71•r,4._ f✓oN -- c /s b fo A4 P 4...e./ 'e-- (:. /it_ _..„...6-/„/' ` list aif C. PX 13.75 Qsc .6-4 sT 4 � rr s / r // �f�rtt �as !'o� J 44 4.1e // 9 S 1 Ts 414 1104- cP 3 !le 1 42.— eAS "s1a ..- 4/1.1 C " . . C / / / fiI .' L bu ./7 C bL / i ✓ IC , e✓t- 4 S tr"t , LAY, c ps.,s u /. _ 0 e- de Q pc / 1 � f / � ` o .. — it CWi 4-P �d o�feGC`T•'or�_ I /�/C� �`!IC 11G�'�Cf ti R. ode r � etc s' het.. CG r� c4, 4,./s - 3l'4/ /silo, t ell,' 4 .4.4 im. 4/ ..4 / ...16 !_.�Ir) C. t rf 4 iia co ". fei.e.s...6e, 44,, :d sp�/ t" , /or�S S r. 0 e eto,...s.v <, IrtJ-2J • A f 5 . lee" /47 Di IG "p44t +e...1 pa. /L, 7C , WEATHER WE CJ /GTS4..... PAGE (IndudesTastRayons) / OF / SAMPLES OBTAINED (NO./SIZE/TYPE) / L / / SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all Items inspected as noted above were jirYes ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. 0 No ❑ Deficiency Corrected - Report No. PROJECT NAME 7e/yrit �qS T / .*t 7 / 2 PROJECT NO. /391/5--0 REPORT NO. /1 ADDRESS 35/7 S /-nt TY T , I e,, • , w,.4� PERMIT o79 -ay ;/ DATE 3// Woo CLIENT � // / -41 11 CAfar. WEATHER WE CJ /GTS4..... PAGE (IndudesTastRayons) / OF / STRUCTURAL ENGINEER e t /y L r coli AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. TM / Zs 2O -WO' ARCHITECT 6 L AGRA FIELD R PRESENTATIVE/PAGER NO. „/ G s .. L. y 766. 97s'4 CONTRACTOR ,r"1-40,�tifp,.` TYPE OF INSPECTION ANEW INSPECTION Bp1104. ❑ RE- INSPECTION •AGRA (. ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122"d Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 GRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE DAILY FIELD REPORT ./_ REVIEWED BY gay THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rev 6199) Fab -29 -O0 09:3Sam From- GEORGE 3;.;.1R ASSOC, GBIk GIORGE sUTIIIR A saoCIATIES, IwliwapM • Avoid eeeee One t'u Ri.b a FEE, 2f17 JIe i Dribv LartrlCJ. 662 }M1-jef: I Project Name: • McLeod - Tukwila Date: 2/29/00 Initiated By: Keri McGill With o To g: Donny Brandt, Mortenson Q Phone Coil Memo Copies to: • Original to File • Principal -In- Charge Project Manager • Project Architect • Consultant 51^:ti99i; i S nr(J UU.' p. f .41.4921240 Todd Moore Janice Phillips 2 Meeting Donny called and told me that expansion anchors were being used to fasten the channel backup at the new door openings instead of the Tapcon anchors that were called off on our drawings. Ile stated that the 3 expansion anchors that they tried to install were spoiling off the concrete at the edge of the door opening. The fasteners were shown to be fastened @ 2' -0" o.c. over the height of the wall. l told Donny that they could eliminate the fasteners below the top of door elevation. and begin fastening the channel at the first location above the door elevation, fastening at the rest of the locations over the height of the wall. t_ Owner Contractor • Job Site • Supplier • Other Project Record Project No.: 8952.15 Time: 9 am Job Site Visit According to Donnie, ` @a,. column line F, the two anchor bolts closest to the existing column (out of 4) are too close the column to be able to get a drill strong enough in the space needed to drill thru the base plate in order to drill and epoxy the anchor bolts to the footing. Donny asked if they could slot the holes to the outside of the plate 3/4" so they could install the bolts just to the side of the existing base plate. This would leave 5/4" clr. to the outside of the base plate. I told Donny to tack weld the bolt to the plate and plug weld the slot in the base plate. Donny stated that their was a lire main that conflicted 1 1/2" with some of the channels. He said that they would need to notch the channel 1 1/2" so they would not have to relocate The sprinkler line. Attached is a detail at the notch locations. Kim Pearse � AGRA Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE ASTM -C39 Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 2/16/00 Placement: S.O.G. 5.5 AND F.9. Strength (Pc): Required : 3000 psi @ 28 Days Mix ID: 4852 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: - . Truck #: 354 Ticket #: 124125 Plant #: - Batch Size: 9 YDS Water: 15 GALS Admixture: - Time Batch Time: 3:12 Sample Time: 4:30 Finish Time: 5:00 Test Result Reviewed By ( Distribution Client: Yes File: ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Spec ID # ID 7244 A B C D Date Age Date Rec'd Tested (days) 2/17/00 2/23/00 7 2/17/00 3/15/00 28 2/17/00 3/15/00 28 2/17/00 Remarks: REFERENCE REPORT #1, SET 1. Nominal Specimen Size 6x12x0 6x12x0 6x12x0 Producer: Yes Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar Inspector: LISA ROSS Ambient Temp. ( °F): 55 Weather: SUNNY AGRA Earth 8 Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034.8918 Tel (425) 820.4889 March 16, 2000 (425) 821 -3914 0 -91 M- 13445 -0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A Actual Soecs• Slump (Inches) ASTM C -143: 5 4±1 Air Content ( %) ASTM C -231: N/A Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: N/A Concrete Temp. ( °F): 76 50 -90 N/A Actual Area Compressive Strength Brk. Type/ % of (sq in) (ibs) (psi) Cure Req'd 28.27 102320 3620 SH 121% 28.27 148600 5260 CSH 175% 28.27 151770 5370 CSH 179% HOLD AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Attn: CHUCK RAUCH Specimen Type: CONCRETE ASTM - C39 Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 3/8/00 Placement: GENERATOR PAD FOOTING. Strength (ft): Required : 4000 psi © 28 Days Mix ID: 4853 Supplier: STONEWAY Load #: Truck #: 414 Ticket #: 128130 Plant #: Batch Size: 10 YDS Water: 5 GALS Admixture: - Time Batch Time: 2:25 Sample Time: 3:25 Finish Time: Test Result Spec ID # ID 7391 A B C D Reviewed By Date Rec'd 3 /9 /00 3/9/00 3/9/00 3/9/00 Date Tested 3/15/00 Distribution Client: Yes File: Yes Nominal Specimen Size Age (days) 7 6x12x0 28 28 Producer: Yes Others: Report Date: Project #: Project Name: Project Address: Building Permit: Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Contractor: Inspector: MIKE McCOY Slump (inches) ASTM C -143: Air Content ( %) ASTM C -231: Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: Concrete Temp. ( °F): Ambient Temp. ( °F): 42 N/A Weather: N/A Remarks: REFERENCE REPORT #9, SET 3. Actual Area Compressive (sq in) (Ibs) 28.27 100790 Break Types -- (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone - Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar AGRA Earth $ Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034-6918 Tel (425) 820 -4669 T March 16, 2000ax (425) 821 -3914 0-91M-13445-0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S. 120TH PLACE D99 -0421 KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A c ual Specs. 5 5 N/A N/A 56 50 -90 Strength Brk. Type/ % of (psi) Cure Req'd 3570 SH 89% HOLD °AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122'" Way, Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington 98034 -6918 Tel (425) 820-4689 Fax (425) 821 -3914 To: M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 cc: City of Tukwila S:\WORDPROCWIeId Document Transmiltals113000s113445.0.wpd C RECEIVED MAR 21. 2000 co MELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL UCVCLVt"'IUICIV I Date: March 16, 2000 Project No.: 0 - 91 M - 13445 - Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 . Project Manager: K Permit No. attn: Building Department Attn: Chuch Rauch Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associated field correspondence pertaining to the above - referenced project. SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Inspection Reports Document No. 8 - 9 Document Date 03/07 - 03/08/00 Transmittal Date 03/17/00 .:: COMMENTS PROJECT NO. &gym- 13e, '5 REPORT NO. 6 11 eA- Gn/ ..c T- mQ( layeA-awo- 64 a (.11o i� tzy- PERMIT NO. v 49_ ' 5zA DATE 3 - - -oe2 R e 11 che cit. Lia _eQ 4 h .24 C �a i ' � c�/OE A IOI WEATHER CGA PAGE (includes Test Reports) ) OF 1 � k t�A� - 21- T✓�G # Re aL/e Imo-+•, AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. - rim HV"E�`r Cti =yam' -440 ARCHITECT 6 i 1 — -' _ _■tf/• .2 . Cv - ' r i 4 ,,,i, Ca . • • .." ' .Sfif tarerti �i 4 el 4 9e b, c--�m or c� `mss � / w <<o t -[ t. ei t PI i fr arLS Q s. r 6-$ . 71 ,::A6 6. - /4) ez,A 4PLc C ete-C O Clr Q--L ..ems• _cq "tetsc . .t ) e . 7.' -6& G.-1 C Z . ,1 SAMPLES OBTAINED (NO./SIZE/TYPE) SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were mss 0 Preliminary Observations in general conformance with he approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Corrected - Report No. PROJECT NAME 1 r-g O — 695 r eL 7 PROJECT NO. &gym- 13e, '5 REPORT NO. 6 ADDRESS 3 4 7 S .- /. v .e aL TUk Geis A, PERMIT NO. v 49_ ' 5zA DATE 3 - - -oe2 CLIENT 'NOR 're-i✓S'Ilf WEATHER CGA PAGE (includes Test Reports) ) OF 1 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Gig 4e }u -r, F,k AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. - rim HV"E�`r Cti =yam' -440 ARCHITECT 6 i 1 — AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATI AGER NO. » 7 , J � ...S: ,I 6 F/ CONTRACTOR �I ^�.. ,t kele14;11c, zag ��6/� a� x. T YPEOFINSPECTION , ��e�� R ovC S . . r& CO RE- INSPECTION • AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 DAILY FIELD REPORT AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE REVIEWED BY THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. PROJECT NAME �� id)1 AftL, PERMOJECTNO. - -0 ` IIT ITJ N , 0 [ . -cut REPORTN< DATE 3-00 ADDRESS .3gI7 iao , PI CLIENT 8 WEATHER PAGE (Includes Test Reports) STRUCTURAL ENj ER co m er AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE ARCHITECT 6 . 8 A FIr S NTT� - ER NO. CONTRACTOR / 1 /" i 0(�5b(n �i�, 't,LLJ r�"j TY EW INSPECTION P IN ECTIO ❑ RE-INSPECTION COMMENTS 1 s 0041417 • r �^Q (t L s e34 , S lP0 L C_l14Lf ' 4 j&.53„ (-alle.t4e_ tdc.,S by P p plee.eci � /�r re ,4 c t & ,o i,45 r� w , - Arc° I S'fl G' Ad / rf % f l � � � 4� -- 5( t• Tr81 1, 1/4 4 n SAMPLES OBTAINED (NO./SIZE/TYPE) (g-f) -S' 4, IN 1 SUMMARY To the best In ge era,l of our knowled• :, all items inspected as noted above were es confor ance w the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Preliminary Observations 0 Deficiency Corrected - Report No. // .. AGR FIELD - EPRE ' ATIVE ✓ V REVIEWED BY !� AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122"" Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 DAILY FIELD REPORT THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERLttSPRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. CONCRET ASTM C -3 GROUT ASTM C -1019 MORTAR (TYPE ) CMU (TYPE ) PRISM UBC 21 -17 SHOTCRETE ACI 506 R OTHER ASTM C -140 ASTM C -780 P r`l4 ' ? V Jt( " 44 c)___ Pyq,IECTNO�� REPORT NO. / _Ar A ,-*---- -.-- PAAGGEE Reports) OF ) DATE 3C1 FIELD DATA . t� BATCH DATA SUPPLIER `- TYPE OF CEMENT "At— MIX NUMBER g'S WEIGHTS PER YARD DESIGN ACTUAL TICKET NUMBER / c;1-a(�Q CEMENT (LBS.) Li L.{ TRUCK NUMBER 4(.4 FLY ASH (LBS.) &3' BATCH SIZE, YD' f D ,� ` COARSE AGG. (LBS.) "- 7e 1 J 1 Q ' TOTAL PLACED (0 OF /' 6 YDS' COARSE AGG. (LBS.) WATER ADDED, GALS. 5 COARSE AGG. (LBS.) �--- ALLOWABLE WATER, GALS. 3c3 FINE AGG. (LBS.) 1 • 1310 DRUM REVOLUTIONS / WATER (LBS.) (D 1 ( -- BATCH TIME is X3 S AIR ENTRAINMENTnA I 6y 5 c w SAMPLE TIME 3 . " ADMIXTURE NO. 1 uRa4 ;)--/- .- t � ,),I .3 FINISH TIME �--' ADMIXTURE NO. 2 SAMPLE AND TEST DATA .""' SAMPLE SET OF ' � LABORATORY SET # I.D. # ( -- ?39/ SAMPLE LOCATION: � X 4 3 - r - C .�L14' 1 r - - I _ ` DESIGN STRENGTH co PSI ®a. AYS ''1GEM' DATA SPECIFIED ACTUAL TEST AGE (DAYS) •7 rsSS d SLUMP (ASTM C -143) .c SPECIMEN (NO./SIZE/TYPE)r 1-. ' _ ‘ p� '✓ / / " / l AIR CONT. (ASTM C -173/C -231) r' ---- -- DATE SAMPLED ` 7i _ AMBIENT TEMP. °F 41 ` ‘ DATE RECEIVED SAMPLE TEMP. (ASTM C -1064) s 5C3 ._ 50 CURING CONDITIONS Nookc-1- UNIT WEIGHT (ASTM C -138) HIGH/LOW TEMPERATURES YIELD (ASTM C- 138) ----- 'Note spproprtste test methods If different from those Indicated SAMPLE STORAGE LOCATION AND COMMENTS 1 ti / _Ar A ,-*---- -.-- AGR • FIELD REPRES TIVE REVIEWED BY AG RA L ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland ington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 TEST REPORT •THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely tor the Information of our client. This report is not Intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AGRA , — ENGINEERING GLOiAl SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122" Way; Sulta 100 Kirkland, Washington 98034-8918 Tel (425)820-4889 Fax (425) 8213914 To: M.A. Mortensen 280 N. 8 Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 Attn: Chuch Rauch cc: City of Tukwila FIELD: DOCUMENT TRANSMITTAL Date: March 8, 2000 Project No.: 0-91M-13445-0 Project Name: Intergate East Tenant Improvements Bldg. 2 Project Manager: Ken Sahi Permit Itz(1599-042:1 • Enclosed for your review and records are our most recent Daily Field Reports and associated field correspondence pertaining to the above-referenced project. SUMMARY OF FIELD DOCUMENT TRANSMITTALS Document Type Inspection Reports Laboratory. Report Document No. 3-7 Set 2 RECEIVE MAR 13 2000 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT Document Date 02/25-02/29/00 02/29/00 Transmittal Date 03/10/00 03/10/00 attn: Building Department COMMENTS .16, 4 4..4 �loo. s. A. ss (elide.: ' ,‘ ped•�'.,.s..._ AY , K.1a.. - Z // /M.L /c /A4 0 4-Enos It..... • ele 9.,, 1, ./ 1 41e,1 s I-e s4, ,... -44 ... > ,.,4.- o P ..plc .,h.-, .4 .._ 9 Aba L. 1-- Le/0.4 70 it pr'I✓,we_ /. -4, fFiS 1 .14. .(/V h/S. 4✓e... 4,44, Ol . /�e 4e. Z .414) 6 ' /YJ-I 1 .S4 / /H.f Rec., VV 4/"..._ . .4,46 L.•i/ it_ C9 `% g:1 .. r J /v /%s+t- Gi 4... lac/et�I 9.fre. "Oa 9, rC-Q1y. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER �j / GCo 'M A,R . _ Nil(' DA'iivIU ..4 :1 ( CONTRACTOR .�,////�/ Jl /Op 7 mSOr� SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) Al/4- SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were ❑ Yes p,//it ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No / ❑ Deficiency Corrected — Report No. PROJECT NAME !fie, - 9 4 4E f- T 3 / 4 02 PROJECT NO. c .1 - /3 l 'e - c7 REPORT NO. 3 ADDRESS /!/ 7fi ?Z. 7;;&.x/9/ 33 S /�.? L./A- PERMIT NO. 2 ? . nY2/ DATE r /Zs /oo / CLIENT ��J // O/14+fP"- WEATHER T dad r S AGRA PROJECT MANAGEPJPHONE NO. PAGE (Includes Test Reports) / OF / STRUCTURAL ENGINEER �j / GCo ARCHITECT v 6 BA- AGRA FIELD R RESENTATIVEJPAGER NO. fT ✓ s 7Zs- 746"13's TYPE OF INSPECTION NEW INSPECTION ,.:12 Ave Aj j ❑ RE- INSPECTION CONTRACTOR .�,////�/ Jl /Op 7 mSOr� • AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE REVIEWED BY DAILY FIELD REPORT THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rev. 699) ,:, *r C > , ' , ..%.,,, 1 .t; „ .:.: , .,.:,vrn, .._. INSP,.ECTIONDATA:X s. , T .Sa,��� =', � �:: ;.. .. :., ,:E;., , -� 169 At el d al shi /efGt s k f 6/1°1217 ( e iiie 144 111 4 44n. 4 1 /Y,�� 41 ge�iga etb ea k 6G /61 eastividive___ 4meer geokylaits -4-0 ate- 3 ‘ - 3 - a4^-1 `exhlee‹s c j4 ,f 4s sd ' 6/ 1/ 4 Ivor._ b2tafteel ezd tote 14/4 4l/zced ho /gs - tw he5a5 / ii) ) Ll de PoiPA A4 ‘605 epoke E'70 beg34/2e-gx,rgr y. 14.48 1isAti /e . a ,11k Weie-&q 01;/7 -8 • / fi ll. G4491 a'/ 444/4 ,414z 4 ..she ---, mAR 1. NOU . 'ryt! \Ar,; UNIT _:1 tl`,.7riiiri \17 PROJECT NAME .la � i � q k 2 PROJECT NO. O e iM - /3 C l�fS - a REPORT NO ADDRESS / PERMIT NO. DATE CLIENT i 45 / WEATHER 4/0945 PAGE (includes Test Reports) STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 4.����5% ii f� AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. / 54 g�de, ` ARCHITECT 614 AGRA FIELD REPR ENT TIVE/PAGERNO. plv'i / I /5 = to / / CONTRACTOR //� �y , Nt?. i eA4e97t TYPE OF INSPECTION 444419a NEW INSPECTION RE•INSPECTION OAGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820.4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821.3914 AGRA FJ LD REPRESENTATIVE INSPECTION REPORT SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) INSPECTION RESULTS To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. X ❑ No ❑ Preliminary Inspection ❑ Deficiency Corrected — Report No. REVIEWED BY THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report Is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. . .COMMENTS . PROJECT NO. D- 9/o1-'3 4"/P 1•l/E' -1.9/m/G A 2A 0 A/ S/ ?E Fee 2 reP /c re'e m SZCe. G I A/S ,oEe "ion/ A r F•L 0 ii/4 .c% ; V/ SIctl y /A/SPEcTE , 'TZ F /41E7 U/bL of Sii6,5 TABS 4 7bL TS (7)(7x 4) DA/ 1/A/E d F40 1 3 T /0 " AeES . l.f'/EL.as PAGE (includes Test Reports) ) OF / A s PEg Ere/e_ 1/ Fa.e 7- PZ 52.1015,3.10 WE6ec PEA PL1A/ le Specs , E'X c EP T A T a A/& Re ,9c ARCHITECT C48—h? A "?off !'Mt Tf ,c/E71D RE P61 eNE L4/6%£16-r/ r. 71-,0,4 L oCA "T/vi✓ • w/ 771 /)7A4 /LE,e. A L s a N o T/ CEO I e f :: . c4 q_ s I'tEAk TA 13s A - r - r 2 PL IA cEs LJEe.E No T . 44/4/✓40 vvg 7, colt,/ 1,0 Ty/ CoL UmA/ Li plc . ate tifEZE AT f ,JGL ftaE� AO Lt *, Cob IAtA/ Ll AiE r , e A./ , / i` !.d cD k f 'Z v c - - - � � ' • I. P 6 rte= , 42__.4 1,09 u i ! .... , ... ; . ,, _. SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) PriikH J '/,‘Ii: SUMMARY L f To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were ❑ Yes reliminary in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Observations Corrected - Report No. PROJECT NAME TN TER ∎., kts7 z. PROJECT NO. D- 9/o1-'3 REPORT NO. ADDRESS o 34 /7 g - /20 e PZ TUk LA//LA PERMIT NO. ,Dqq .. o42 / DATE Wit - �8 _e o CLIENT c M s 4 e rC�Seil WEATHER /� OYEe Ca PAGE (includes Test Reports) ) OF / STRUCTURAL ENGINEER / J 6.0e 6• 0v TZ. AGRA PROJECT M ( E � R 'f /P PH HONE ARCHITECT C48—h? AGRA FIELD RESENTATiVEIPAGERNO. g g T.,i, TA/#9-in �f TYPE OF INSPECTION Id NEW INSPECTION SS / F�� A/ V ❑ RE•INSPECTION CONTRACTOR /1/10,Q TEA /Sa/J Cot-44 •AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122nd Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 AGRA FIELD REPRESENT el REVIEWED BY DAILY FIELD REPORT THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rev. 6/99) 2,:-.z,... f ...COMMENTS ;` ,.}z ...... :.. A 6R A OA/ S re ANA PEAx.,e mg !.t/SPEc -yo cif -3/c/ck 7FfgEA2) ED ,Eoz tFPDX l ttf diaL1Ja/t at A 7 Lod(' G i Ai E r G' " .Q /Q l t ue; COL zbyA/S B■/SE' PL q e/ae r& h-ms,, er Z J L . le) Avso A esA/1- Z /1 /E "A- b 2 — A /0,er /, ex/z• Co Cu t,,,,/ ,BAse' ,. DATE 2 �9 - - G� 7 , ec---,, ¢_mac- erne o b GeJ� e, crieves24 te 4 47i7i 7 ��PO r F9 ed $ N , R eis .7_416, o7 re i Cc - 6.-7.. /. 7, ( -g - LCS /�}° _ 1 Ti At f/ - / V ✓ �Po Y �Ic�h�i� N.L.-7? i r � So % Gus '� Tr/R enDap R.c).Js . I-IoLe s 1.11E RE at.ourn/ C:941/ - L w/ • /� C�+/�r/o/2E"S3a ge /4A4p 6 AD/1657/re. Ad.slw Px.r7 -- Gins Po r / 4/ ,4N7) 'Me/ / A/see 762 7 ,e E.9 Ave- boys / o6sa.4 SOX a-S C �. r r % T12 E '- x.12 • „p„i'i t )tli?i1 SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were Yes ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Corrected — Report No. PROJECT NAME TA,/ "raw G A re �,Q,r r A614 #2 PROJECT NO. 0 -9/".4.91/e/5-0 REPORT NO. 6 ADDRESS 3 S- /2 N. - rukuia..,.st PERMIT NO. 399- 042/ DATE 2 �9 - - G� CUENT /n0, TEA/,Sod WEATHER 1 4/11' PAGE (Includes Test Reports) / OF j STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Cs EO■ e 4E BU T(- E4 AGRA PROJECT MANAGER/PHONE NO. - 77/# / /f041.444 ARCHITECT G 6 4 AGRA FIELD REPRESENTATIVE/PAGER NO. ..gf97n44,,1 S>A/cr f/ CONTRACTOR MO,e TEA/SOn/ lire TYPE OF INSPECTION [ INSPECTION EROX Y AAvc4C.0 A ❑ RE•INSPECTION AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E. 122n Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 AGRA FIELD REPRESENTA DAILY FIELD REPORT REVIEWED BY THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rev.8/99) COMMENTS PROJECT NO. 0 -ij fftt � TS± Pg ihy. el % 'XiemWeieteef gmbtee ADDRESS 3 lit 7 • /AO it Xiii6 //4 Avdow4e2 Wog, iite, /0,, to. Lea /unr4s b•ite. / lik 's" f1 0'f DATE Z. a = te A t)/0496 I WEATHER � li4 r )" ham E-ni E e m ehd att . 7 /, t 4.cr r a d 6 Ake m/ cr4,01A. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 404 Iga t..- ea. / nom �4rf' /mss ARCHITECT 1464 Alb? �r,Llee /-an, i%uurecl -eut ic# f !'Br n ssrl,k. l�,/sIddcsi4i 6 /CW4f, Y'/tr� ,ie cp ,Ws r e,.v dad � heriv. f iv /ec c. ∎ j 4a4bt Iva )194 OA ' x ' ,, oule,( /<b. yf f 7is /4/5 L M t r s /et. 424W t ure<s , 1)odItet/67t /s rd _ 0 1s Jif 44-44,41e-41. H PC IF:PVE b MAR 1 5 20I)(I SAMPLES OBTAINED (NOJSIZE/TYPE) COMM' INIn v SUMMARY To the best of our knowledge, all items inspected as noted above were /Yes ❑ Preliminary Observations in general conformance with the approved plans and specifications. ❑ No ❑ Deficiency Corrected - Report No. PROJECT NAME .. i�t PROJECT NO. 0 -ij fftt � TS± REPORT NO. ADDRESS 3 lit 7 • /AO it Xiii6 //4 PERMIT NO. o 99 -osl a i DATE Z. a = te CLIENT � � /I ��R i je f /� �'� `_ WEATHER � li4 r PAGE(IndudssTsstRpats) OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 404 Iga t..- AGRA PRQJECT MANAGERlPHONE NO. 7n lid ARCHITECT 1464 AGRA FIELDREPRE NTATNE/PAGERNO. u4414 f- c_ CONTRACTOR y, �. 4 t/v5[J1 l ' TYPE OF INNSPEC / ON / EW INSPECTION eitie IG�'I�4� ❑ RE-INSPECTION AGRA ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 11335 N.E.122n Way, Suite 100 Tel (425) 820 -4669 Kirkland, Washington 98034 Fax (425) 821 -3914 DAILY FIELD REPORT THIS REPORT IS CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING REVIEW BY OUR PROJECT MANAGER This report is provided solely for the information of our client. This report is not intended to be transmitted to a third party by any means, except in full, without written permission of AGRA Earth and Environmental, Inc. AG19372 (Rov.6/99) Mix ID: Supplier: Load #: Truck #: Ticket #: Plant #: Batch Size: Water: Admixture: Time Batch Time: Sample Time: Finish Time: Test Result Spec ID # ID 7285 A B C D Reviewed By AGRA Attn: CHUCK RAUCH ENGINEERING GLOBAL SOLUTIONS Report of Compression Test Results Client: M.A. MORTENSON 280 N. 8TH ST., SUITE 138 BOISE, ID 83702 Specimen Type: CONCRETE Mix and Field Data Cast Date: 2/22/00 Placement: S.O.G. 9 TO 11, G TO F. Strength (Pc): Required : 4000 psi © 28 Days 4852 STONEWAY 302 124853 12 YDS 16 GALS 7:18 8:30 8:45 Date Rec'd 2/23/00 2/23/00 2/23/00 2/23/00 Date Tested 2/29/00 ASTM - C39 Age Nominal (days) Specimen Size 7 6x12x0 28 28 Distribution Client: Yes FIIe: Yes Producer: Yes Others: Contractor: Actual Area (sq In) Report Date: Project #: Protect Name: Project Address: Building Permi Project Mgr: Architect: Engineer: PO Number: Inspector: SATNAM SINGH Slump (inches) ASTM C -143: Air Content ( %) ASTM C -231: Unit Weight (pcf) ASTM C -138: Concrete Temp. ( °F): Remarks: REFERENCE REPORT #2, SET 2. Compressive (lbs) 28.27 101970 Break Types — (Cn) Cone, (CSp) Cone _Split, (CSh) Cone Shear, (Sh) Shear, (Co) Columnar AGRA Earth A Environmental, Inc. 11335 NE 122nd Way Suite 100 Kirkland, Washington USA 98034 4918 Tel (425) 820-4669 February 29, 2 (425) 821 -3914 0-91M-13445-0 INTERGATE EAST 311 S 120TH PLACE KEN SAHI GBA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES N/A Actual 5.25 69 Ambient Temp. ( °F): 60 Weather: RAIN Strength Brk. Type/ % of (psi) Cure Req'd 3610 SH 90% HOLD Specs. 5 N/A N/A 50 -90 N/A RECEIVED MAR 13 2000 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT Fale7,3 -00 05:18pm From- GEORGE BUTLER.ASSOC. C g� Oi1OI. IOTLII! •1$OCI•TI$, INC. aesiNore • wHiNNe One Pine Ridge Pima tun? McIroxe Drke lesion, 662143621 Date: .. 02 -23 -00 No. of Pages-, ALL PAGES TRANSMITTED WILL BE CONSIDERED RECEIVED UNLESS NOTIFIED. TO: i Dave Larson FROM: Adam I. Kuehl SUBJECT: -Details Requested COMMENT • j Dave, please review and respond. Call if you have any questions. (913 - 492. 0400 X399) Original not follow Original will follow by (check one of the following): o Regular mail o Certified mail, Return Receipt Requested o Express Mail • Other: , cc: Janice Phillips, Todd Moore +0134027240 CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE 'RECEIVED T -000 P.01/05 F -032 FEB 2 3 2000 COMM UNITY Cover Pais !AA 913.02.720 • TeIepbe.e !13.4!2.0400 GBoject #: 8952.15 Project Name: McLeodUSA - Tukwila FAX #: 1- 206 -431 -3665 4 This facsimile transmission may contain confidential information belonging to the sender. The information is intended only for the use of the individual or entity to which it is addressed. If you are not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that any disclosure, copying, distribution, or taking of any action in reliance on the contents of this information is strictly prohibited, if you have received this transmission in error, please notify us immediately by telephone to arrange for the return of these documents. eeebe ciAiec.e.46 4840 1,0_E AeCicf rir cr 4/,e64//7 -- ,e�e/7Si19, 77 4 S / 06- 771 ,�,oaiZey , A/4 Af07— , e- Q vi. - "-'rr, / 47�(r� / - rfo7,ye. /4&_ °(..) •`�i1c��'ire��:fx' �ivW.; i�si :.�A!nr..�4.« «,- ._............ Fer43 -00 05:1Bpm From - GEORGE BUTLER ASSOC. CBR 01010i SWUM A1$OCSATII, INC. iegIi.s n • Anbhndt One Pine 84 Plan 8207 Haltom Drive Txnvoo, Lam 662144621 Project Name: Date: Initiated By: With g To o: o Phone Call Dave, Copies to: ® Original to File • Principal -In- Charge • Project Manager o Field Observer a Consultant McLeodUSA Tukwila 02 -23 -00 Adam I. Kuehl Dave Larson - Building Inspector 51 Memo o Meeting The above referenced project is permit # D99 -0421. Please review attached details along with the attached code information. Please supply confirmation that the details attached are acceptable to the City of Tukwila. SECTION 1004.3.4.3 IN THE 1997 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE - CORRIDORS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS. — EXCEPTION 1. ONE STORY'S LDINGS HOUSING GROUP F, DIVISION 2 AND GROUP S, DIVISION 2 OCCUPANCIES. — EXCEPTION 5. CORRIDOR WALLS AND CEILINGS NEED NOT BE OF FIRE RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION WITHIN OFFICE SPACES HAVING AN OCCUPANT LOAD OF 100 OR LESS WHEN THE BUILDING IN WHICH THE SPACE IS LOCATED IS EQUIPPED WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM THROUGHOUT. These exceptions to the code should allow the attached details to be used in the above referenced project. 8952.15 Todd Moore +6134627240 o Owner • Contractor o Job Site g Supplier • Other T -600 P.02/05 F -032 Prelim* Record Project No.: 8952.15 Time: 4:30 pm o Job Site Visit Chuck Rauch Donny Brandt Janice Philips Pagel F.b- ?3=00 05:18pm From -GEORG BUTLEP ASSOC, +9134027240 0 0 0 0 0• t. n:0:, urns• -..:c� RQUo -; MIMI) aar *M cLe od USA TUKWILA f CODE REVIEW PLAN 02- 23-00 T -900 P.03/05 F -032 INDICATES AREAS TO BE OF 1 HOUR F. CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED BY CODE. ALL OTHER AREAS INDICATED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCCUMENTS TO BE CONSTRUCTED AS ONE HOUR WALLS NOT REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING CODE. FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS FOR CORRIDORS INDICATED ON PLAN: SECTION 1004.3.4.3 IN THE 1997 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE — CORRIDORS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF FIRE RESISTIVE MATERIALS. — EXCEPTION 1. ONE STORY BUILDINGS HOUSING GROUP F. DIVISION 2 AND GROUP S. DIVISION 2 OCCUPANCIES. — EXCEPTION 5. CORRIDOR WALLS AND CEILINGS NEED NOT BE OF FIRE RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION WITHIN OFFICE SPACES HAVING AN OCCUPANT LOAD OF 100 OR LESS WHEN THE BUILDING IN WHICH THE SPACE IS LOCATED IS EQUIPPED WITH AN AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM THROUGHOUT. u n•+•v. • M.Nl.C1. Iw Mi.- MINN o...u. --y-,w Wag. War WY Manumits EXISTING 1/2 PLYWOOD DECKING. EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING. 1 TR SH TO ???? � 2 AN CHOR FIRE AK- AOOWLINE 2X4 FRAMING W/ METAL FASTENER. 91/4 • oi SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL EXISTING INSULATION. NEW AND EXISTING 4 X 14 PURIINS. 5 / TYPE 'X' GYP. B0. ATTACHED EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING. 5 / TYPE 'X' GYP. 80. ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK- SHADOWLINE 5/8 TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 6 MTh. STUDS EXISTING PLYWOOD DECKING. EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING. SCALE oi SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL A EXISTING INSULATION. EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING. 5 /8 TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED 20 GA. 3 RUNNER TRACK FASTENED TO EXISTING 2X4 le O.C. ANCHOR FIRE TRAK- SHADOWLINE TO FURRING CHANNEL W/ METAL FASTENER. 5 4 1 TYPE 'X' GYP. BO, ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK-SHADOWLINE 5 4' TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 6 MR. STUDS un -20 -00 04:10pm From - GEORGE BUTLSSOC, Clark OIORGI SUTLIR ASSOCIATES, INC. regles rs • •eghlfsds Otw Plue Ndle Pima 8207*Arm Dr* Lam, LOW 66214.3621 Date: 06 -20-00 No. of Pages: 2 TO: FROM: Rt D V .- JUN 2 U 2000 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT ALL PAGES TRANSMITTED WILL BE CONSIDERED RECEIVED UNLESS NOTI.i•IED. Ken Nelson Adam I. Kuehl OBA Project #: Project Name: SUBJECT: Draft Stops COMMENTS: Attached is a copy of the room in question for requiring the draft steps. The area does not exceed the amount specified in the Uniform Building Code, although the distance of 100 feet does. I would like to have a ruling on whether or not the draft stop will is a required. The space has an double automatic sprinkler system along with a FM200 fire supprossion system. The area of the room which exceeds the 100 feet in length is not the full v " of the building. (See plan) Please review and give me a judgement, I can be reached at ; 3-492 -0400 x399. o . Original will not follow _o Original will follow by (check one of the following): cc: o Regular mail o Certified mail, Return Receipt Requested o Express Mail o Other: 9134927240 T -211 P.01 /32 P -347 Ialbs 'rm& * Dl og2t Facsimile IransaaHlal Cover Page MX: 913.4 -7240 • b1opliene 913.412.0400 CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE 8952.15 McLoedUSA - Tukwila FAX #: 1- 206 - 431 -36(i3 GM 0 I00111 APPROVED JUN 2 1 2000 BUILDING DIVISION This facsimile transmission may contain confidential information belonging to the sender. The information is intended only for the use of the individual or entity to which it is addressed. If you are not the intended recipient, you are bereby notified that any disclosure, copying, distribution, or taking of any action in reliance on the contents of this t Jun -20 -00 04:11pm From - GEORGE BUTLF° ASSOC, c- n T -211 P.02/02 F -307 CBR GEORGE SUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. December 10, 1999 Mr. Ken Nelson City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 cerebrating years Engineers • Arehlthets City Center Square, Suite 1100 1100 Main Street Kansas City, Missouri 64105 -2168 Telephone (816) 421 -1300 FAX (816) 471 -0574 gba @gbutler.com http:/ /www.gbutler.com SUBJECT: McLeodUSA - Switch Center Ken: This is in response to the Letter of Incomplete Application #1 on the above referenced project. Enclosed please find completed ASHRAE 90.1 Lighting Worksheets, outlining the watts per square foot of new lighting for the facility as well as other miscellaneous electrical design information. Please note that this is a telecommunications switching and transmission facility that is generally occupied by only 4 people. With the exception of the office area, the building houses equipment and the only lights generally on in these spaces are the emergency fixtures. Each of the large equipment rooms (107, 110 and 112) have multiple switches, so that when people do enter the space only a section of the lights serving the room are energized. As for comment #2, the existing building wall insulation will be removed and replaced with new 8" batt insulation (R -19), as detailed on Sheet A5.01. The existing roof insulation (R -19) will remain. If you have any questions or need any additional information, please call me. Sincerely, GEORdE 1JTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Robert E. Page, Jr., P.E. GAIM IS O R4 Y J?. I S Uu J: I UYY. w p l Lenexa, KS • Kansas City, MO • O'Fallon, MO • Springfield, MO • Wichita, KS • St. Louis, MO • Lisle, IL Project Name: J McLeodUSA I Project Address: Date: 1 3417 S 120 Place, Building 2, Integrate East, Tukwila; Seattle, WA I J 12/10/99( Telephone: Designer: 'GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES t i (816)421 -13001 Telephone: Documentation Author: 'Rob Page I I (816)421 -13001 z � �� „r. a ............ • ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 -1989 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low -Rise Residential Buildings Distribution NA Each tenant with a connected load over 100kVA is provided with a separate distribution feeder. (5.4.1.2) Transformers E Electrical power feeders are subdivided by usage as required. (5.4.1.1) All required separate feeders have either permanent check meters or provisions for attachment of portable meters. (5.4.1.3 & 5.4.1.4) D Calculations for annual energy costs of transformer losses have been made and will be provided to the owner. (5.4.2.2) OWNER WILL CALCULATE LOSSES E Total transformer capacity (excluding utility transformer) a nnual energy costs of transformer losses Motors Completion 1501 $ /yr. (5.4.2) All motors in excess of 1 hp which are expected to operate more than 1,000 hrs per year meet or exceed requirements of Table 5 -1 as required. (5.4.3) E Motor horsepower ratings do not exceed 125% of the calculated maximum loads as applicable. (5.4.3.4) D The plans or specifications spell out the requirements for operations and maintenance information to be provided to the owner. (5.4.4) kVA . (5.4.2) ED ENTER CALCULATED El LOOK -UP (in std /code) Transformer Loss Worksheet (E -2) Transformer Calculations Attached . } : }: } r ry ':• }: i 4 :::v} } •i; }.': } }.' 4:}i'••i ?: }y::•, .v: .} .} .. . . v } } }:� :• :• •: ? ?� ?y: '• ��n� }'�� /.n�:h�::<;C..4::.:.vi; v/. F.::J: S; ..:: }.v: :S; �x}n.�J �..:•:S \h �'.: uv?:: ty<v�. �. �.^ � :•�. • :.�•:� ."i/i.•:` ) .Z} fj. .� }$ : /. :!:?. ::: },L.i ?n:• }l(.: }:: :::::. :•:$:•:: rives., .. :...:. :..:. .v:. ..::. • ASHRAE /IES Standard 90.1 -1989 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low-Rise Residential Buildings Compliance Approach Project Name: McLeodUSA Project Address: Designer: Date: 3417 S 120 Place, Building 2, Integrate East, Tukwila; Seattle, WA Telephone: (816)421 -1300 GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES 12/10/99 Documentation Author: Rob Page Telephone: (816)421 -1300 - - Prescriptive Method System Performance Method Cost Budget Method ssti �: ENTER LINKED (to another worksheet) CALCULATED LOOK -UP (in std /code) :..:: +::.v: ii:�:yy:.y •. v pry• };•..y :: 1 ::i. } }4 Exterior Lighting Exterior Lighting not intended for 24 -hour use controlled by photocell. (6.4.2.8) 1 kW 5 1: ° >': kW Installed ELP ELPA (6.4.1) Controls MThe installed lighting control points equal or exceed the required lighting control points in each and every room. (6.4.2.2) D Shut-off control in each space enclosed by ceiling high partitions. (6.4.2.1) D Controls readily accessible to personnel occupying the space (6.4.2.6) NA Hotel /motel guest rooms have master switches at the main door to turn off lights and receptacles (6.4.2.7) Interior Lighting D Fluorescent lamp ballasts meet or exceed the ballast efficiency faster (BEF) in Table 6 -4. (6.4.4.1) D Fluorescent lamps use multiple lamp ballasts with tandem wiring as required. (6.4.4.3) D Fluorescent lamp ballasts have a 90% or greater power factor. (6.4.4.4) 22 V�i: F: iRi: �• M4iilYlla�:`;: %'. %'v:•`.• ?:.. n. kW 5 (:::::::.::27:;: :. Installed ALP ILPA (6.5 or 6.6) !kW Lighting Power Control Credits Applied (6.4.3) Daylight Sensing Controls D Occupancy Sensors Programmable Timing Controls Lumen Maintenance Controls Lighting Control Points (L -5) Exterior Lighting Power Worksheet (L -2) Prescriptive Interior Lighting Power Worksheet (L -3) Performance Interior Lighting Power Worksheet (L-4) EJLTGSTD Output }.i: <; .: :.:i.. .: }..a.: :.:. <: i < %: < : , j, ;.:}c:: ::.;r..:<C`.`. •.t.. .:<:.; <;. `k: %`a }} % r :: ..:k:xr. ASHRAEIIES Standard 90.1 -1989 Energy Efficient Design of Now Buildings Except New Low•Rise Residential Buildings A Installed Exterior Lighting Power ;LJ4:: Kfiny }:<hKdE4}}`C•$n Project Name: Project Address: McLeodUSA 3417 S 120 Place, Building 2, Integrate East, Tukwila; Seattle, WA Date: 12/10/99 Designer: GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES Documentation Author: Rob Page Telephone: (816)421 -1300 Telephone: (816)421 -1300 Exterior Lighting Power Allowance - ELPA (6.4.1 & Table 6 -1) (Use either the ELPA table below or the LTGSTD software) B C 0 ENTER CALCULATED LOOK -UP (in std /code) D Exit (with or without canopy) Entrance (without canopy) High Traffic Entrance (with canopy) Light Traffic Entrance (with canopy) Loading Area 25 W /If of door opening 30 W /If of door opening 0.40 W /ft Loading Door Building Exterior Surfaces or Facades Storage and Non - Manufacturing Work Areas Casual Use Areas (gardens, etc.) Private Driveways or Walkways Public Driveways or Walkways Private Parking Lots Public Parking Lots 15 10 W /ft of canopies area 4 W /ft of canopies area 20 W /If of door opening 0.25 W /ft of illuminated surface 0.20 W /ft 0.10 W /ft 0.10 W /ft 0.15 W /ft 0.12 W /ft 0.18 W /ft 6000 Total ELPA » Linked to L -1 A B 4 F 250 C Total Installed ELP » D ............... Linked to L -1 m f• L sf. }r > }.., . Y } lv: £} ASHRAEIIES Standard 90.1 -1989 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low -Rise Residential Buildings Project Name: Designer: McLeodUSA Project Address: 3417 S 120 Place, Building 2, Integrate East, Tukwila; Seattle, WA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES Documentation Author: Rob Page Date: 12/10/99 Telephone: (816)421 -1300 Telephone: (816)421 -1300 Interior Lighting Power Allowance - ILPA (6.5 & Table 6 -5) A B C D Office Computer Equipment 3240 10124 1.81 2.1 E ILPA » ................... ................. >2:l ........................... .......................... ........................... ......................... ........................... ........................ ........................... ............... ............... ............... ............... Linked to L -1 Interior Lighting Power Design (6.42 & 6.43) A B C D E E CLP» ENTER ` 2 jigIN CALCULATED LOOK-UP (in std /code) F G 101/108 C 102 D 103 -106 A 107 B 109 A 110 A 111 A 112/113 A 114 C Mitiatires 4' Corridor Fluorescent 1'x4' Industrial Fluorescent 2'x4' Lensed Fluorescent 2'x4' Parabolic Fluorescent 2'x4' Lensed Fluorescent 2'x4' Lensed Fluorescent 2'x4' Lensed Fluorescent 2'x4' Lensed Fluorescent 4' Corridor Fluorescent tumuo 6 8 24 6 40 12 115 2 70 105 105 105 105 105 105 70 ��tlE>i�C1 35.0 420. i •• ......................... ................ E ALP» H Linked to L -1 f %f ' t }J;/ f 4 : n u .�.�r {:: v. { { :. .C.: 'f+ { i Yf • \\•• :SCA: • .:.,:'. • • " I ir" s.K...,: ...,:, ry ..;. I'4,•.• . ..,... ••••t•v y ....:.5. • Ai:a?, :.:*: .4. 1,1::;,:fije! 1:4: . '•:• • • • • k ta: .4 '..•:•'. .`v: r . .› ''::& l''.''' . 4:40:.::. Project Name: McLeodUSA Project Address: 3417 S 120 Place, Building 2, Integrate East, Tukwila; Seattle, WA Date: Telephone: 12/10/99 Designer: GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES (816)421-1300 Documentation Author: Rob Page Telephone: (816)421-1300 ASHFtAE/IES Standard 90.1-1989 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except New Low-Rise Residential Buildings Lighting Control Points (6.4.2.2, 6.4.2.3 & Table 6-2) A 101/108 102 103-106 107 109 110 111 112/113 114 324 432 588 1168 Space Descri R�om Area ption 476 2784 580 7690 120 66 " .s.46ssiis 9 • • 2 • 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 2 10 2 • r,•• : • : • • • : $ • .• • • G ENTER 3CALCULATED LOOK-UP (in std/code) H I J K L M May71c -00 08203A Morte• son Seattle 7iCc.nw arfi+ii 1 FACSIMILE COVER SHEET Please Deliver the Accompanying Pates To: A34 To: Firm: Fax Number: 0 7 0 4- q / 3 66 5 Re: ECEIVE MAY 1 0 2000 D EUE OPME N T pid eol_ us., J23.2:1/111- ... From: .fir! "."., I f;RA -A,DT Comments: SP PLEASE ASK ASK FOR: Donny Brandt Thank you. OUR FAX NUMBER IS Z06-Z77-1413.1 11111cCr ill: 11iIwgtolve %IIIIIIY j . Sessile Waver Sums.% _ sp= 4.7c d.1 206-.7 8184 McLeod USA 3311 South 120th Place Seattle, WA 98168 Telephone: 206 - 2774182 PI L.c s YOU WILL RECEIVE 3 PAGES OF COPY. INCLUDING THE COVER SHEET. IF YOU DO YOT RECEIVE THE CORRECT NUMBER OF PAGES. PLEASE CONTACT SENDER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AT 206 -277 -8133 INIAM k lmbi i6. 1'.ml Date: • •7 — /0 -00 P -01 May;10-00 08:03A Morter^gon Seattle Snit by Earth Consultants 3 ��J rMO UODU v May 9, 2000 Mortensen 1633 West Calle Zuniga Green Valley, Arizona 85614 Attention: Mr. Curt Wagner Subject: Reference: Oaar Mr. Wapner: Final latter Construction Monitoring - Piles 3417 South 120" Place Wilding 2 Tukwila, Washington Earth Consultants, Inc. Geotechnical Engineering Study E -2579 dated May 23, 1985 Earth Consultants. Inc. Proposed Tenant Improvements E- 2579 -27 dated January 6. 2000 ..w 206 - ?77 8184 \: Earth Consultants Inc. Collet 'MAW IisilOn cv., Ckiiii 1M L I vtvd% tlolleiiUt:14Afne■H. E-2579-27 A representative of Earth Consultants. Inc. (ECI) observed the installation of the six inch diameter steel pipe piles installed by McDowell NW from February 7 to 11, 2000. A total of twenty one 1211 piles were installed using a 1500 foot pound hydraulic hemmer. Thirteen piles were installed for additional slab support in the building and eight piles were driven for support of a generator pad outside the building. The plies were driven to a refusal criteria of fifteen (15) seconds per inch for three cycles. Pile depths ranged from fifty one (51) to seventy five (75) feet. Based on observations and the depths of the piles, It is our opinion the piles will support the twelve (12) ton axial design capacity. 1905. 1360) Pace N.C., 8ulte 2Ct 8eltewe. Wasnington 98005 Bellevue (425) 643.3760 FAX (425) 746-0860 Tali Free (888) 739.6670 P.02 May, 113-00 013:04A Mort ,Sent 14: Earth Consultants KMWIKRelims Kyle R. Campbell, P.E. Manager of Geotechnie *• Saaitt 206 8184 P.03 4Ub uuoU; Hu6/ eutuu 1 v, We 'appreciate the opportunity to information. please contact us. Emit Conmalievas, 3417 South 120 Place Seattle, Washington 1)4 99- 0 '1 2 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OIEORGI OUTLIER ASIOCIATI$, INC. NOV 3 0 tj PERMIT CENTER tsgiweers • Arsbitesfs One Pine Ridge Plaza 8207 McUwe Drive Luria, Kansas 66214 -3621 Building Permit STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS Job. No. 8952.15 McLeod USA Date 11/23/99 By _ KLM Chk'd By KNP Section G BA GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. 1 Design Loads / Design Concept 2 Eadsting Structure Framing Check 3 Structural Upgrade to Existing Structure 4 New Openings in Existing Exterior Walls 5 New Slab Design @ Battery Room L L sAstruc\stdlilAbuldIng\calcs 'EXPIRES: 16 1 LYAO DLL . L.okk LIVa L A- Job No ta q5 2, Date / / GB GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By g- Chk'd By Kew 1-5161\\ LOAcb I tiJ - 5P ( 4-l_ec' UsA- evu rnC D u.)1 LL CX.c.JPY / i3 '1 o.P 711-6. Sc»Lb/AJG )m iz. Vhf-. t P Y / 06 T/--6 UVF "L- L WITH T Cob &S S V62 1 y + 1'.)6 71-1/4E? cI2 7 ! -rV C -c.17' o `T e i s A< X 7 4 - (1 )1\,) MC C.5 C.). , / ni . , • • '.:* I . • r 1 ..• . . . .,••••••••-••"•-• ..:, .1 . ,, : .-... ', • , ,,...t....! . . • _ 7.7 77 17.4 7 7 „ ” • • • = ‘ • ' ',•• • ) ..r. • "•" ).1' 1,1•.,414 r=i1; • -,,, • J. • • . • ..: • 1 • .N • f. • I.": ' • • • ..; . , ..., •:. ":".T.15._i • . ''',...... '';.17,74-77--iti 'ea:- . .. • - - .- 1 7 '. : ` - ' - ' : 7Z . I r : :. ‘ . :'' ?. :'! .7 ;FT -* 7:'''"'',1":"."'''-7 i'i ' : 2 ' . • ..1.:.-- • ,, ',.. .n...,•Li•rf--■-.,,•:•.•:- .. •t"' ' ' A :: ;:-::.1.7..i.:Iti.f..4:4 . X ''' . • • . • ..z4,;.,,ym....,...,—....z----". - .- 471 .., .. ,.. ..1'..1-:.■.::: . .. .. .f , '..4.!..:;..iil -:'„'.. A .. . ../: • • . ......-es„....... , • ',' . 7 . ■ t. . ' ' - • ' " ..: .." ,..71 771 , *r•rl ... -../ :,. .'..,/ '..... .„„ • 1 • .. : ' •••• ..* ' , . ' ".1' ' ' • , .s.v.; s ,...1 .4.,.,,z.„,,,,,i, , , ... . • :...1.••.:.,.-1..,:::::" ..4. A ' """..'. `-': . - . • ., • , ...„....4••• ;; . ....... ..:........ . . . ...........,.,.. ..:............ ..,.....,.., , ,:.....„..,.,....,........,.„. , • ......„...„:„......._........„...„,...,..„...„:„..,..... . . .,. , .: .........,,.-.17.c..:.,4777-.:11zt:c,m-r..,11...,.. tn • T ,-.. --......,;,,,,..,-.! , - , !:.1. , ---, ..., ,..:- ; ,.. -... ;..... 7-7 st v .- • ' . •'""..'*-7:. -, t , ?;e;wei,f - ; ; .. ..,., :. . .; •..:.,.., i. , ! ,, z ....„, .,, .... . : • • ,: :Ek :-)e,•...•:,-... -,, : ..,- ; ) - , ... . . , , ...„ . - ... .,...,. .,:.. 1.1.: ._ ........!.............•........).a..i. ?..,......,.......,;.........,,:;:...,...... :-.:: ,.. • . "-'::" " . " I VIrg 3 : 474 "43W : ' ,' . 77 .4 -:, i • • -J si >•-. 'Fl ene - " .• • . . 1.4 • • • a • , ,P4• • • • 1, 1771,..10...:$70"rfr „, • • ,tit, A7,17, , •••••-• , • , r '... • 1.1%?,i7pr•VrIgr,n1 ' : • . — .„., • • ,...r•,•:::.--.'","1.-MT11.577'...7.15...te,r774174`4: • " • ' • •• • , • : • SI 1 • .1 •• f, ..?•••Ot ird,.1.1 • • • ..,4" , •.' '• • • 4,0 • •''' „„ • ••• • ,1 •••• . • • • • — 7: ' , 7, 7 3;I-14:•/.1te" -2. ' 1 •;• !'' ‘.""*" "'""."' • • • : • . • " -=•• • • Tr '..., " .. .' :. 1' .' ... . • . ' ' ' t • ''',..' ":., ' . . t ' ,..7.....‘i11. 6.. ;1 .., 1 y " ; .;•' V,:t7,. ..: •.11;.:::' .:— - . ..... -.. ••••••■ •••••••• v.? ••••• -..• -• • • ■••••••^:. ,. ....PI" ." "":" 1: . 1 , ... 117r4 ' ...7.. •..... I :: : • ‘..,::' *..:Ltol:Sit. ..4. : .. ,..-..... :.1. • e...Lv . .......-;. 4. 4 - - - .„..,.., ... . . ;4 • "" -- """..'w1r. z 7F-In't7r.*::"`L."'` '?'"1...."F ..': . e ••.) gi 11. ,:.. • • ■-•.:: .,•• 1. • ,.... . • . ..: , - - • . ' ,, . ••• •■• Vc 1.,..,-, .. . • . • • ...;.*:„'„: .....t.,;•. ,........,•*: 7.11 .f'1.c., .., „..-......-/"...".. . ... ..-:..,:..'r..i....,..4 ....:.4...2.-• • ..........:-... • 4-.............,... - .. ....,...„.. , • .... ..1.;••.' ••• :''''.-...C, 1-1- *"." 1 ••••."•71' . .”1 -- 1 - "..1";" 7771:,,r7.1T117., . !.."M=rn: 7 .*:: • • ' .. - .. 1 ...... 4, '' ■•.9 •• • ...' • ., ........... 4'....:..1....1.'.......:.......:i.......4.....,AA .4..11:-.4.....:.........:4,...4e....: . ..,.. . .,.,.... .., ;I ... • ',IA , .• ' . ••• , .. : t ..,,, - '' ,r,r-pc•,!..”..1...4Ittlrr •'•'''''""v• . • .^. eV7o.. ,V.I'v.ii..-..... • • . ., • ••■•• • ' - • ZiAli .2! ::: • • ;.:. -. . ... .;..,_ .. ...„. , • .• • • „ • • 4*. P;44 " • • • - - 1 - / t7 71 % 3 Z* 1:9 7.5 1i , . _ . A- MODEL NUMBER FAN OTY A B C L 0 OF CKTS IHOT (ODS) CONNECTION SIZE NET WEIGHT LBS. MODEL NUMBER FAN OTY A B C L C OF CKTS (ODS) CONNECTION SIZE NET WEIGHT LBS. GAS( LIQUID HOT GAS LIQUID Standard Models Oulat•Llna Modals 'CS'065 1 42 — 44 511/2 1 ( 1/2 1/2 295 'CS'063 1 42 — 44 511/2 1 1 1118 5/8 315 'CS'083L 1 42 — 44 511/2 1 I 7/8 5/8 295 'CD'063 1 42 — 44 51112 2 7/8 1/2 315 •CS'086 1 42 — 44 51112 1 I 7/8 1/2 315 •CS'119 2 82 — 84 911/2 1 11/8 7/8 425 'CD'104L 1 42 — 44 511/2 2 I 7/8 1/2 315 •CD'119 2 82 — 84 911/2 2 7/8 5/8 425 'CD'107C 1 42 — 44 511/2 2 I 7/8 1/2 335 •CS•127 2 82 — 84 911/2 1 11/8 7/8 495 'CD'130 2 82 — 84 911/2 2 1 7/8 5/8 425 CD'127 2 82 — 84 91112 2 1118 7/8 495 'C0'165L 2 82 — 84 91 1/2 2 718 5/8 425 CS 143 2 82 — 84 91 1/2 1 1 1/8 7/8 515 'C0'175 2 82 — 84 911/2 2 7/8 5/8 495 4 $55 'C0'143 "CS'179 2 3 82 122 — — 84 124 911/2 131 1/2 2 1 11 /8 1 1/8 7/8 7/8 515 500 • 'CD'205L 2 82 — 84 91 1/2 2 1 1/8 7/8 'CD'217C 2 82 — 84 911/2 2 I 1118 7/8 515 'CO179 3 122 — 124 1311/2 2 11/8 7/8 500 'CD'251L 3 122 — 124 13112 2 11/8 7/8 500 'CS'214 3 122 — 124 1311/2 1 15/8 11/8 840 •CD'258 3 122 — 124 131 1/2 2 t 1/8 7/8 _ 670 'C0'214 3 122 — 124 131 1/2 2 1 1/8 7/8 840 I 'CD'308L 3 122 — 124 131 1/2 2 1 3/8 1 1/8 (670 'CS'238 4 82 80 164 171112 1 15/8 1 1/8 740 'CD'291 3 122 — 124 1311/2 2 13/8 11/8 77315- 'CD•238 4 82 BO 164 1711/2 2 13/8 11 /8 740 'CD'330L 4 82 80 164 1711/2 2 13/8 11/8 741 'CS'276 4 82 80 164 1711/2 1 21/8 13/8 1025 'C0'415L 4 82 80 164 171 1/2 2 1 3/8 1 1/8 815 'CD'276 4 82 80 164 171 1/2 2 1 5/8 1 1/8 1025 •CD'360 4 82 80 164 1711/2 2 13/8 11/8 815 'CS'286 4 82 80 164 1711/2 1 21/8 11/8 1105 'CD'480C 4 82 80 164 1711/2 2 15/8 11/8 1025 'CD•286 4 82 80 164 1711/2 2 11/8 7/8 1105 'CD'5100 4 82 80 164 17112 2 1518 11/8 1158 •CS'358 6 122 — 124 1311/2 1 1318• 7/8' 1260 'CD'616L 6 122 — 124 1311/2 2 15/8 11/8 1380 •CD'358 6 122 — 124 131 112 2 11/8 7/8 1260 'CD'660L B 82 80 164 17112 2 15/8 11/8 1600 'CD'409 6 122 — 124 1311/2 2 15/8 11/8 1380 'CD'830L 8 82 60 164 17112 2 I 5/8 11/6 1750 'CD'477 8 82 80 164 17112 2 15/8 11/8 1600 'CO'960C 8 82 80 164 171 1/2 2 2 1/8 1 3/8 2090 'CD'672 8 82 80 164 171 1/2 2 2 118 1 1/8 2430 CD'1010C B 82 80 164 171 1/2 2 2 1/8 1 5/8 2640 •IDS size at marigold interconnection. Lteben supplied 6 Bald installed. i i i r 1_ L i !. i DIMENSIONAL DATA EYE BOLTS FOR LIFTING CONDENSER PROVIDED ON 4, 6 6 6 FAN MODELS ONLY OUTLET /INLET CONNECTION TYPICAL FOOTPRINT Table 3 Condenser Physical Data A 160 l ��l• f (457mm) 439/.• 0097mm) Figure 1 70" (1778mm) Figure 2 L 1/2• (12 7mm) DIAMETER ANCHOR BOLTS (TYP ) C 43 (11 374.• (962mm) HEIGHT TO TOP OF FAN GUARD 43'A' (1095mm) OUTLET/INLET CONNECTIONS ' — 12203mm) UNIT ANCHOR PLAN C 70" 8 Fan 159" 6 Fan (1778m01( s 87 n' 12213mm) C CENTER LEG PROVIDED ON 4 8 FAN MODELS ONLY FOR LEE-TEMP RECEIVERS: 4 LEGS FURNISHED FOR 1 FAN MODEL 6 LEGS FURNISHED FOR 2 & 3 FAN MODELS 8 LEGS FURNISHED FOR 4 FAN MODELS (ADDITIONAL LEGS INDICATED WITH DOTTED LINES) 37 S' (962mm) A CLEARANCE OF 361N 1914 4mm1 RECOMMENDED ON ALL SIDES FOR PROPER OPERATION AND COMPONENT ACCESS HEIGHT TO TOP OF FAN GUARD 434' (1095mm) • s • 22. 1352 -10 Tab 3 Table 11.1 General Oats Cooling Performance' Gross Cooling Capacity EER' Nominal CFM / ARI Rated CFM ARI Net Cooling Capacity Integrated Part Load Value' System Power (KW) Compressor No./Type Sound Rating (BELS) Outdoor Coil — Type Tube Size (in ) O.D. Face Area (sq It) Rows/FPI Refrigerant Charge (Lbs of R•22)' *Indicates both damn** and horizontal units. General Data By • Ton Downflow and Horizontal Units 10 Ton Downflow and Horizontal Units TC*102C3 C4. CW TC*120C3. C4. CW 107 COO 92 3.40013 000 102 300 9 4 1109 8 10 Ton Standard Efficiency 125.000 9.2 4,000/3.500 118.000 9.1' 12.83 2/ClimatJti® 2/Climatutt 9 2 9.2 HI- Performance HI-Performance 375 375 1603 18 67 2/16 2/16 Indoor Coll — Type Hi-Performance Hi-Performance Tube Size (in.) 375 .375 Face Area Isq ft) . 1050 1050 Rows/FPI 2 3/15 Refrigerant Control Short Cr Short Orifice Drain Connection No./Size (in) 1/0.75 PVC 1/0.75 PVC Outdoor Fan — Type Propeller Propeller No. Used/Diameter (in.) 1/26 1/26 Drive Type/No. Speeds Direct/1 Direct/1 CFM 7.000 7.700 No. Motors/HP 1/10 1/1.0 Motor RPM 1.125 1,125 Indoor Fan — Type FC Centrifugal FC Centrifugal No. Used 1 1 Diameter x Width (in.) 15 z 11 15 x 11 Drive Type/No. Speeds Belt/1 Belt/1 No. Motors 1 1 Motor HP (Standard /Oversized) 2.0/3.0 3.0/5.0 Motor RPM (Standard/Oversized) 1,740/1.740 1.740/3.450 Motor Frame Size IStandard /Oversized) 145T/145T 145T/145T Filters — Type/Furnished' Throwaway/yes Throwaway/Yes (No.) Size Recommenaea ) Downflow (2) 20x20x2.(2)16x20x2 (2) 20 x 20 x 2. (2) 16 x 20 x 2 Horizontal (2) 20 x 25 x 2.12) 16 x 25 x 2 (2)20x25x2.(2)16x25x2 7.1 /Circuit 8.5 /Circuit NOTES 1 Cooling Performance is rates at 95 F ambient. 80 F entering dry bulb 67 F entering wet bulb Gross rapacity does not include the elect o1 fan motor heat. ARI capacity is net and includes the elect of Ian motor Mat Units are suitable for operation to :20% of nominal cfm Rated r accordance with ARI Standard 210/240 or 360 2 EER is rated at ARI conditions and in accordance with ARI Standard 210/240 or 360 3. Integrated Pan Load value is based on ARt Standard 210/240 or 360 Units are rated at 80 F ambient 80 F entering ory bulb, and 67 F entering wet bulb at ARI rated cfm 4 Sound Ratings ratea in accordance win ARI Standard 270 or 370 5 Refrigerant cnarge 's an approximate value For a more precise value. see unit nameplate and service nstructions 6 Horizontal moaeis EER 9 4 IPLV 9 3. system power KW 12.55 014.u401..i 1.4. r r All dimensions are in inches. CURB DIMENSIONS CLEARANCE 48 CLEARANCE 36 gib 76 Dimensional 81/2 , 10 Ton standard Efficiency Data 7 /e CAA. Mac (UNIT CohTRa wino *CLEARANCE 18 HORIZONTAL 36 DOWNFLOW � TPICAL ROOF OPENING >> 42 N \/ 463/4 CLEARANCE 36 1 f L El El El • All dimensions are in inches. DOW11flOW Duct Connections — Field Fabricated Horizontal Unit Suppiy/Retum 411/4 Dimensional 8 10 Ton Standard Efficiency Data I /2 77 16 1/4' SUPPLY ./O RETURN 16" 36" SIC 20 1/16" 101/4 Tons Downflow Only Condensate Drain Size Condensate Drain Location Downtlow Horizontal A B C D F G H E J E K 3. 4, 5 13 22 11''. 2' , 3 39's 32 ". 1 . PVC 191/2 — 20 — 6'/, 71/2 15 22 "2 12' :a 3' . 3 42' s 35 "4 ;PVC 22 — — 2 81/2, 10 15 22 "2 12' 4 3 42's 35'4 ;PVC 22''e — 28 — 12'h 22''6 14''1 17 "',6 4'4 4 54' 47 1 NPT — 24's — 16 15, 171/2 26'•6 22 "2 18'16 4'. 4 "4 62' , 6 54 ''1a 1 NPT — 25se — 6 20, 25 26'1 28 19' 4' . 4 "4 76 68 1 NPT — 26 — 5 Tons Downflow Only Condensate Drain Size Condensate Drain Location Downflow Horizontal A B C D F G H E J E K 3, 4 13 22 11". 2' a 3 39''e 32 "4 1 . PVC 19 — 20 — 5.6,7.7' 15 22 "2 12'16 3'4 3'e 42"e 35 ". 1 4 PVC 22 — — 2 8' 22'''6 14 11 2 17 4'6 4 "4 54' 47 1 NPT — 24 — 16 10, 121/2 26' '6 22 "2 18 '16 4'4 4 "4 62' '6 54" 1 16 1 NPT — 25; — 6 15.25 26'•e 28 19' 4'' 4''. 76s sta 68 1 "se 1 NPT — 261. - 5 Condensate Location Table 86.1 Standard Efficiency Units Table 86-2 High Efficiency Units Dimensional 3.25 Ton Data S U P P L Y L — — A w J w Downflow Condensate Location 86 E R E T U R N C " Horizontal Condensate Locution t• r L L L f l L i I � Table 87 -1 Accessory Net Weights (Lbs) Model No TCs036.048.060C TC*037,049 TC.075.090C.0900 TCu061,074.086C.091 D. TCx102C.12 TCD 103C TCD150C TCD180B TC0121,151C, TCD210C TCD240B TC0181.211.241C TCO3008 301C TCH103. 150C TCH180B.210C TCH121,151C TCH300B.301 C Table 87 -1 (Continued) TCH240B TCH181,211.241C Unit Model No. TCo036, 048. 060C TCu037.049 TCu075.090C,0900 TCw061.074,086C.0910 102C. 120C TCD103, 150C Weights 3 -25 Ton Economizer Outside Air Damper Oversized High' Low' Power Roof Motor Static Static Net Manual Motorized Exhaust' Curb' Adder Drive Drive 40 32 40 32 35 40 32 35 65 32 60 80 32 75 80 35 32 75 32 35 50 32 60 65 32 75 65 32 75 All Zone 6.23 KW 27.36 KW Sensors 240/480V 240/4801/ 1 20/20 1 80 5 26/26 26/26 65 82 5 2 75 165 5 2 — 95 205 5 2 2 95 235 5 2 95 235 N/A N/A 2 5 2 — 5 2 2 5 2 — N/A N/A 2 Electric Heaters 54 KW 240/480V 3 1 28/21 31/27 38/32 TCD180B. 210C 1 28/21' 31/27 38/32 TCD121.151C TCD240B TCD181,211,241C TC/3300E4.301C TCH103, 121C, 150C TCH180B. 2100 TCH121,151C TCH240B TCH181,211. 241C TCH300B, 301C NOTES. '1 Net weight chaula be aacea to unit weight when ordering factory installed accessories, 2 For 600V heaters net r.e'gms are same as 480V heaters. 3. To estimate shipping weght add 5 lbs to net weight. 4 Oownllow only 5 27.36 KW Heaters no! aa,,aole for TCe061C. 6 Not available on all mooeis ISee Fan Performance tables for specific models) 7 9.23 KW Healers not avalldble for TC*210C. 8 TC102.300 factory rstalled options to econonuzers, multiply net capacity x 99, EER x 97. For oversized motors, multiply net capacity x 98. EER x 93. This is provided in comoilance with ARI cendicatan program. *Indicates both bownlaw and horizontal units. 1 87 1 "~ 72 KW 240/480V 33/27 40/32 43/34 1 — 33/27 40/32 43/34 1 28/21 31/27 38/32 — 1 28/21' 31/27 38/32 — 1 — 33/27 40/32 43/34 1 — 33/27 40/32 43/34 , fT L. 1. Tons 7, 71/2 TC*090C/TC*086C Single Compressor TC*090DRC*091D Dual Compressor *Inocates both clowntlow and horizontal units Weights Table U-1 Maximum Unit And Comer Weights (Lbs) And Center Of Gravity Dimensions (In.) Unit Maximum Weights (Lbs) Corner Weights (Os) Center of Gravity (In.) Model No. Shipping Net A B C D Length Width 3 TCD036C/TCD037C 702/731 541/571 184/192 137/139 99/107 120/133 36/36 19/20 4 TC*048C/TC*049C 731/765 559/592 190/196 138/147 106/114 123/135 36/37 19/20 5 TC*060C/TC*061C 751/821 579/633 194/284 143/156 109/121 134/152 36/38 20/21 6. 6',.. TC*075C/TC*074C 819/852 630/663 196/207 162/173 123/130 150/153 39/40 21/21 878/861 689/673 229/213 177/173 130/130 153/156 39/39 20/21 940/953 751/765 264/265 182/188 130/135 175/176 36/37 81/2 TC*102C/TC*103C 1064/1393 857/1094 298/353 217/291 144/203 197/246 37/43 —....10 • TC*120C/TC•121C 1086/1753 1385 302/468 225/357 150/242 202/317 38/46 .-- 121/2 TC*150CiTC*151C 1460/1776 1161/1408 389/474 307/349 205/248 260/337 42/45 15 TC*180B/TC*181C 1739/2309 1371/1850 482/635 350/464 227/317 312/434 45/52 171/2 TC*210C/TC*211C 1820/2380 1452/1921 500/643 378/495 247/341 327/442 46/53 20 TC*2408/TC*241C 2285/2470 1820/2011 614/692 462/523 319/343 425/453 53/53 25 TC*300B/ TC*301C 2395/2475 1930/2016 651/695 490/524 338/343 451/454 53/53 NOTE I Corer *eights are given for intomiation only 8V?-25 ton rnoaels must oe supported continuously by a curb or equivalent frame support. 2. Wegnts are approximate Horizontal ana ctownliow unit ana corner weights may vary slightly A I CENTER OF GRAVITY WIDTH CENTER Of GRAVITY 1 CENTER OF GRAVITY 0....... LENGTH se 20/20 20/26. 20/29 26/30 28/35 28/35 35/34 35/34 e • GB Job No 8 / Date 0/An GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By 4. Chk'd By L L L L 4A-L.L0,.; = m Me usit seG-i+le H5c k X i5'riNG �SUCTV1¢E Ff2,.165'16ULc,4 GW5G4. I STS F04. /5 IC, 71- 2 � f' �. . PCXL) N5 Ft-1Z_ en.A ILL t / D C404.4_. LL. C GS, k GLv -r✓1 W M ;,- COLS , -f- I LIES �. • /o C Git5e,4 000c5.1 S pc X'Pm L 6X1.57716 .2k v"brs e 2 k o,C, 3,06&;4 ;Z = 5,1(0;0 D14)65' I Z kg C) i1), . C 2 ; ra,acadA zz s23 /b }--(e) ; 6s, 7 0,1 1 (6J 114 k- c c r C GB Job No (54152 ' Date // GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Bye r 1 Chk'd By gx° e .,. 8 . o t5- Poe. Dg-s IU RAZLi q p,o, £ (/4 PURL. / us ' —p " — ..1aS,LS6 _ 'aSC'il4b 5 = 10o,3;17 _ = 71 7, (o ;44 `/ 11 = 2os0 riceeiZ; ✓13)-• f's i Z lg ,p /h. . ri 8) '�� U / G V Y 1 J B) i n �24 4, 4 ) Acu.› uN + 2 i` 0, ‘23 = w p c I '1'._,leod USA / ubi IJC, & LF g= z.. ,0s, E 1.80a,aoc "a Z. )(g ) S 2.2.5 in� .4 2o21S )1'3 A- - (o = 222 ,75 / l,kc.4...) = 2. OO , 1 22S; n = 2 qc tDo /b -tff !1d) 2c7 ( mcr .) 5J� (3° DiJakri 6(4LL () 1 ) �S S & Thm Wkwho s �i 't (0/ LL au 64, UPLoAo�4). General Information Description Dead Load klft Live Load klft Point #1 DL LL @ X ft Results Reactions & Deflections Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Reactions... DL @ Left LL @ Left Total @ Left DL @ Right LL @ Right Total @ Right Max. Deflection @ X = L L 1 1. 1 (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC ..rmembor..0.4 6L i).6. IAM N 4-1 a0 8A4 ok'-=6 0/0 .6#0105 Mmax @ Cntr k-ft 0.0 @ X = ft 0.00 Max @ Left End k-ft 0.0 Max @ Right End k-ft -166.6 fb : Actual psi 0.0 Fb : Allowable psi 0.0 Bending OK k 0.00 k 22.13 k 0.00 k 0.00 k 0.00 k 0.00 k 22.13 k 22.13 in 0.000 ft 0.00 Multi-Span Steel Beam 0.0 0.0 Bending OK 0.00 22.20 22.20 0.00 22.20 22.20 0.000 0.00 Scope : 0.74 0.74 0.74 15.60 15.60 8.830 111.0 0.0 30.00 8.83 -222 -166.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bending OK 22.20 22.13 22.20 15.60 0.00 22.13 22.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.000 0.00 Title: WICL eaCi . Job # Dsgnr: K. LyY) Date: gq6z, Description : 11151,q7 Page 1 1 Fy - Yield Stress UAW:Mr Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports S p i n Span Information Span ft 8.83 60.00 8.83 Steel Shape End Fixity Free-Fixed Fixed-Fixed Fixed-Free . _ _ . Load Duration Factor 1.00 Loads 1 • 1 -------- KW-0601732, V5.0 15-Mar-1997 VAIIQ/1/41S- OINJ & ) i v i e k " ( i011 wo V E, kl) OP AO Ace,SLZ Multi-Span General Information Description Fy - Yield Stress 36.00 ksi Load Duration Factor 1.00 Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports Span Information Span ft 8.83 60.00 8.83 Steel Shape End Fixity Free-Pinned Pinned-Pinned Pinned-ptted 'r Loads I Dead Load Live Load Point #1 DL LL @ X Mmax @ Cntr @ X = Max @ Left End Max @ Right End fb Actual Fb : Allowable 0.0_ Scope : Steel Beam ----as_ ■ Title : P1e...e0C1 j5i J�# eqszis Dsgnr: p Date: Descripti n : Page 1 I k/ft k/ft 0.12 0.74 0.12 k 2.60 2.60 ft , 8.830 _ Results 0.0 191.8 0.00 24.40 0.0 -27.6 0.0 0.0 Bending OK Reactions & DefleCtions - Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Reactions... DL @ Left LL @ Left Total @ Left DL @ Right LL @ Right Total @ Right Max. Deflection @ X = • k-ft ft k-ft k-ft • psi. psi (6) 1583-97 ENERCALC 0.0 0.0 Bending OK 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bending OK k. 0.00 18.02 32.06 k 3.66 26.38 31.00 k 0.00 0.00 0.00 k 0.00 21.68 58.44 k 0.00 21,68 58.44 k 0.00 0.00 0.00 k 21.68 58.44 -31.00 k , 21.68 58.44 -31.00 in 0.000 0.000 0.000 ft 0.00 0.00 0.00 g22-.1 .2743 _ . KW-0601732 V5.0.1,.f5-Mar-1997 L L L L GB Date I// ell GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By 41-A1 Chk'd By C.,OWM IBS Job No 2, ! S G!- 4 �x tsr.. 712uc_Ti.p Yl- I G L,D-Z l�cL�o� t15A /0 x 1 Z s q qz. ,0l % 151 bW&S 1, boo COD , = 13ODFs , 1Qe /el ' _ _ � _ 2 L -; We o.a(oolcio zitl& C.= 0 d Z ( Cp I + Cc.a k G C,p = +- gi(41130c)_ r r I4- ‘P-ho113cc Z 44 In �? o,$) c =0.8+ - '0:7 - 0.. 4 7 1 3 Cp - o .3 2 *LLOLA = 1 3ODPs; (Oa z� = y/(C ; t.0w 'V F ' 1 )'1(e i osi 60CI,,(7 - 46,-SL too()) GO 6,11/76-7jr L i Job No &q 2, i5 Date ///7/ GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By L Chk'd By C EGC S-K isTi STewucro2.E O (L JOSS I 6 ?J t o4 Osh �► Le-s L TO 3 G AI T V LOLS 2 T) Les ( 11. x Z. J zok J ►� fY1L..L OO .t'JJ-G6 o • ` /z ?L. ( D‘L SPIt 4 u.A -v - 5TM. 1.0A--t) _ o, - L.(.., k- 5 u MAgY MiST'S 26-AMS 4- C O ACg e.s7' ,,E Job No e ' ? 2. /S 1/1 .(. e d US Date i / ! / % /_L q .117 7/e GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By 1■ Chk'd By GB D� = 15 ps LL = 25.psiF (Sw•5H-T / n ?UreL) I) �f7zu crviez GRA-as y x /4 PLau IUS Irl(1 1 ( orb ( ' � z ,� _ � 2q lb -Pt 3 eu Ir, to 2 4 X as G/ M AskN exi57. /o x r 22 CLJrvi J S EX6T. 24 4 6,c. Il)Ju -) /AJT*42PV.0. + ATe PAgALAY akiV l I 1170 GLL& LAri4 tJrJ t � &x 1.5r, 20( S' C.Ir4ELK 1015TS FDL 126DV o 5PA 'J = 2OSO p5, Lk) < <j- p oN V ISr/IJG So15S SF 54+1 1 oF. A 116 (3.010E1 ( )=r 4' G r ge._4 IN) , krr c.dik- 6/1 z 300 0 ( 0 o ©I� - 61Q "Z, 4. aOo 112-P-. c .SZ3 tE�sM,] 3g4e= _ 3S 4. ( o 00 � 5, 3{0�n) d, L n ) r A LL. l r L L L L i c� G = ll t,7 Zf5 ' )l65p5 Job No Date GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By 1 Chk'd By or ,,�� �� \Q ADL 'VS GI C g 5-4 ISi , .UeLi Iv IAJAL - D-4 bp/1; 13•" ( c.)af)p .)J at-i 0,01)/ 3B Lieri 3is410,900, c00ps; A = /..t9? L/19 gigo • J nne•M I .S arc) . 5x r Ns w -` o A - 3 x 1 t A-i24CLM (rP) o . 0 Mc_ us4 (iz 7 /7. n GU - 3 /(0o i- — (opJJ -/T J �� 2Zl .Q� vrL % ) R - 2vc'.pi - G2q'- 7%') =1: 246S Si P I.1 •T -T1g / uz4 / o i- , L ouJ LOA D = 2_ o (/, /s).-.. 277 Z 0 (>56 llod (3' /z ") cd, JAILS /A MGM e (S cOLWIA ) NG P Z �, C LOA DLTABLF(PLO - ROOF (NON -SNOW Loam ARESU 125%) r t. t L 1 .. i How TO USE THIS TABLE 1. Determine the total load on the beam or header in pounds per lineal foot (plf). 2. Locate under SPAN a span that meets or exceeds the required beam or header span (center -to- center of bearing). 3. Scan from left to right within the SPAN row until you find a cell where the maximum TOTAL LOAD meets or exceeds the required loads. For stiffer deflection criteria, use the 1/240 values. 4. The dimensions of the beam are shown at the top of the column of the selected cell. 5. If the selected beam is too deep or the MIN.END /INT. BEARING length is too long, continue scanning to the right to find a wider beam that may require less depth and less bearing length. 1W WIDTH 3%* WIDTH - SPAN 9%s' 9%' 11'' 11 %' 14' 91/4"9W_ ' 11 11W 14' 16' 18" TOTAL LOAD 920 950 1165 1246 1537 1840 1899 2330 2492 3074 3673 4330 8' DEFLECTION L/240 877 943 1754 1887 MIN. END /INT.BEARING 3.3/8.1 3.4/8.4 4.1/10.3 4.4/11.0 5.4/13.6 3.3/8.1 3.4/8.4 4.1110.3 4.4/11.0 5.4113.6 6.5/16.2 7.6/19.1 TOTAL LOAD 616 648 889 948 1157 1231 1295 1779 1896 2314 2735 3186 10' DEFLECTION L/240 470 507 813 943 940 1014 1626 1887 •, — MIN. END /INT.BEARING 2.7/6.8 2.9/7.2 3.9/9.8 4.2/10.5 5.1/12.8 2.7 /6.8 2.9/7.2 3.9/9.8 4.2/10.5 5.1/12.8 6.0/15.1 7.0/17.6 TOTAL LOAD - 367 397 618 685 927 734 793 1236 1369 1854 2177 2518 12' DEFLECTION L/240 279 301 488 569 899 558 603 977 1137 1798 MIN. END/INT. BEARING 2.0/4.9 2.1/5.3 3.3/8.2 3.6/9.1 4.9/12.3 2.0/4.9 2.1/5.3 3.3/8.2 3.6/9.1 4.9/12.3 5.8/14.5 6.7/16.7 TOTAL LOAD 233 252 413 483 685 466 504 827 967 1370 1766 2080 14' DEFLECTION 1/240 179 193 315 367 586 357 386 629 735 1171 1698 MIN. END/INT. BEARING 1.5/3.7 1.6/4.0 2.6/6.4 3.017.5 4.3110.7 1.5/3.7 1.6/4.0 2.616.5 3.0/7.5 4.3/10.7 5.5113.7 6.5116.2 TOTAL LOAD 156 169 279 327 523 312 338 558 654 1046 1348 1686 16' DEFLECTION L/240 121 131 214 250 401 242 262 428 501 803 1171 1626 MIN. END/INT. BEARING 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 2.015.0 2.3/5.9 3.7/9.3 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 2.0/5.0 2.3/5.9 3.7/9.3 4.8/12.0 6.0/15.0 TOTAL LOAD 109 118 196 231 374 218 236 393 461 749 1061 1328 18' DEFLECTION L/240 86 93 152 178 286 171 185 304 356 573 840 1171 MIN. END /INT.BEARING 1.513.5 1.513.5 1.6/4.0 4.9/4.7 3.0/7.5 1.513.5 1.513.5 1.6/4.0 1.9/4.7 3.0/7.6 4.3110.7 5.3113.3 TOTAL LOAD 79 85 143 168 274 157 170 285 336 548 811 1072 20' DEFLECTION L/240 63 68 112 131 211 125 136 223 262 423 621 870 MIN. END /INT.BEARING 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.8 2.516.2 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.8 2.5/6.2 3.619.1 4.8/12.0 TOTAL LOAD 44 48 81 96 158 87 95 162 191 4 471 668 24' DEFLECTION L/240 37 40 65 77 124 73 79 130 153 248 367 516 MIN. END/INT. BEARING 1.5/3.5 1.513.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.7/4.4 1.5/3.5 1.513.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.7/4.4 2.6/6.4 3.619.1 LOAD 26 28 49 58 98 51 56 98 116 195 294 420 I TOTAL 28' DEFLECTION L/240 23 25 41 49 79 46 50 83 97 158 234 330 MIN. END/INT. BEARING 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1,513.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.9/4.8 2.7/ 6.8 TOTAL LOAD 31 37 63 31 34 62 74 127 193 278 32' DEFLECTION L/240 28 33 53 31 34 56 65 106 158 223 MIN. END/INT. BEARING 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.5 1.5/3.7 2.1/5.2 LOA DLTABLF(PLO - ROOF (NON -SNOW Loam ARESU 125%) r t. t L 1 .. i How TO USE THIS TABLE 1. Determine the total load on the beam or header in pounds per lineal foot (plf). 2. Locate under SPAN a span that meets or exceeds the required beam or header span (center -to- center of bearing). 3. Scan from left to right within the SPAN row until you find a cell where the maximum TOTAL LOAD meets or exceeds the required loads. For stiffer deflection criteria, use the 1/240 values. 4. The dimensions of the beam are shown at the top of the column of the selected cell. 5. If the selected beam is too deep or the MIN.END /INT. BEARING length is too long, continue scanning to the right to find a wider beam that may require less depth and less bearing length. TOP FLANGE HANGER SUPPORT MEMBER (HEADER) Msceou ' LVL 2 OR MORE pIECES 134" PARALL.AM PSL 3sh OR WIDER Pnawsass' PSL TSM$L (STRAND LSL DOUGLAS NR_.ARCH, SOUTHERN PINE GLTV 7500 6000 7400" 5750 7000 HGLTV 10500 6000 7800 7325 8665 HWU 6000 5500 5500 5500 6000 �) MIT 2650 2000 2000 2000 2500 WPU 4490 4490 4490 4490 4165 77."" minimum depth suorsc" member reau -ea ( HGLTV only. TOP FLANGE HANGERS The hanger values listed are for dry service conditions only. Contact your Trus Joist MacMillan or Simpson Strong -Tie° representative when sizing hangers for wet service conditions (Service Levels 2 and 3). 14 -r HGLTV GLTV \! HWU --.� I WPU MIT - The minimum support width for top flange hangers (except GLTV and HGLTV) is 3 1 /2" or wider Microllam° LVL, Parallam'e PSL, TimberStrand'a LSL, glulam or 4x4 or larger solid -sawn lumber. ',LTV and HGLTV hangers require 3 %z" minimum support width. The minimum support width for all face mount hangers is 2 ". FACE MOUNT HANGERS HU HGUS I) Value may be increased for duration of load. GENERAL NOTES • Hanger capacity may be more or less than that of the supported Parallam' PSL member; therefore, both the hanger and Parailam PSL capacities must be checked. • Hanger capacities shown are based on the assumption that the hanger is supported from Trus Joist MacMillan products or Douglas fir -larch or southern pine species support members. For other conditions, contact your Trus Joist MacMillan representative for assistance. • Leave 'As" clearance between end of Parallam° PSL member and support member or hanger. NAILING REQUIREMENTS Hangers can only achieve maximum capacity if all round and triangular nail holes (when present) are filled with the proper nails. • Top flange and face mount hangers: 16d (31/2") common nails into the header and l0d x 11/2" nails into the supported member, Exceptions - HU410 through HU416: 16d (31/2") common nails into the supported member - GLTV, HGLTV, HGUS series and HU610 through HU616: 16d (31/2") common nails into the supported member. The hangers listed are manufactured by Simpson Strong -Ties' Company, Inc. For additional information, please refer to current Simpson Strong -Tie's Company, Inc. literature. TABLE A - MAXIMUM LOAD (LBS.) • Loads in Table A may not be increased for duration of load. (1) GLTV and HGLTV require 31/2' minimum header width. (2) Load may be increased to 6335 lbs. for supp orted m I GB I Lokl 1 .. GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Job No ea % 2,, �S Date /// //q j / /h.� Chk'd By By C!, ! SX 1ST d E )C CLUaL .4M - = l000� .3JkY /,goo 000psi = Z'1 fps; , 2qj V. F� = ! ps; of /.4 4 toNoe►+< 1 4 �ct�9 , \, 64D r 600 41 it4,K2 4C. 14 I AV-4)0S ,` - . F 6 0 /05f -- Ssc me 4 7 4 bps t.)04ST cAse >lU Ti '.. Tc, s ' �O p ( 2- frVvI'. S )4., • • l..).D t 040 W L rcaroNr (2'- op S -�' ,�DPvc ( -43 `�)(! 2 (9 / - -- /D") (ACrUk� �SiGN Cep � �"- Le—c 1 UsA �Gr:��fl fa .5 PAcs . okS t2t� �- fi 9, 5p(f = /33 ,014 / 4- Sp..) = p,Q� ( 60' - (S = z = z /. 7 ,Je l o b �0 ��v s� (II 23 3 7 -s �2 r/ v iz. \I = 3/.1.44 �' otz 4 4 c 4 .. 2 .5 + r .c�t� A-� R. = 72 g ZI) rD = S ps4. 150 No Li vs L.oA - D oN Gcn25-c ottic, Loki) = , z,f /SD AG -rvkL WkDt Sops A- - Ac U1/4 / i 2 P •Tn our toGtiy V • 4o,q 1 2 U = 4,3 it- 45,7 WI* :,4427. -444 V = t .9 Jz v 12 .4yf - L., cY & Td T?orT, CSC Feom col. tom As 1)0eAT JN A C4 I ii IL IL IL L • ' • IA4 cwizet■JScie, General Information Inforrnalion Description Fy - Yield Stress 36.00 ksi . Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports Span Information Span ft , 8.83 60.00 8.83 Steel Shape End Fixity • Free-Pinned Pinned-Pinned Pinned-Free Loads •- - - - - Dead Load k/ft ._. Live Load k/ft Point #1 DL LL k @ X ft Point #2 DL k LL k 1.00 @ X ft 55.000 Results - Mmax @ Cntr @ X = Max @ Left End Max @ Right End fb : Actual Fb : Allowable Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Reactions... k-ft ft k-ft k-ft psi psi, 0.0 0.0 Bending OK Bonding OK 'Reactions & Deflections DL @ Left LL @ Left Total @ Left DL @ Right LL @ Right k 45 Total @ Right Max. Deflection in @ X = ft (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC r.eve.....VerroovatagoVmmur se. 0.18 1.33 0.18 4.--- Di- k- 131...t.l.) • 2.72 1.00 2.72 ak I L-- 5.000 8.830 0.0 0.00 0.0 .0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Multi-Span Steel Beam Load Duration Factor 572.5 0.0 30.00 8.83 -31.0 -31.0 -31.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bending OK k k 0.0 (440 4.31 .. .31 2.72 0.00 0.00 45.21 45.21 45.21 45.21 0.00 0.00 45.21 0.00 45,21 0.00 0.000 0.000 0.00 8.83 • Title : Dsgnr: Description: Scope : 1.00 Date: Job It 1 Page 1 I fW czabbsk.)562. pAuC.A\ = 49. I • 12- ki (D1 / j ci VZ- i .. 3 k 4" 1-1 ,11 6:\st NV) 6/1 -0601732, V5.0.1, 15Mar-1997 , r c L General Information Description Span Steel Shape End Fixity Loads (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC Gan1D.S..1562 C.oA -.o yopsF �o�F Multi -Span Steel Beam Fy - Yield Stress 864•1 Load Duration Factor 1.00 Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports Span Information ft 8.83 60.00 8.83 Free - Pinned Pinned - Pinned Pinned - Free Dead Load k /ft Live Load k/ft 1.08 1.33 1.08 61- D(„,. L.L.. Point #1 DL k 1.00 LL k 21.70 21.70 r:-- D L f" LL . @ X ft 5.000 8.830 Point #2 DL k 1.00 LL k @ X ft 55.000 Results Mmax @ Cntr k -ft 0.0 369.8 ) 0.0 @ X = ft 0.00 0 8.83 Max @ Left End k -ft 0.0 -233.7 -233.7 Max @ Right End k -ft ligalW -233.7 0.0 fb : Actual psi . I . • 0.0 0.0 Fb : Allowable psi 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bending OK Bending OK Bending OK Reactions & Deflections • Shear @ Left k 0.00 40.90 31.24 Shear @ Right k 1.24 40.90 21.70 Reactions... DL @ Left k 0.00 1.00 1.00 LL @ Left k 0.00 71.14 71.14 Total @ Left k 0.00 72.14 72.14 DL @ Right k 1.00 1.00 0.00 LL @ Right k 71 _ 71.14 0.00 Total @ Right k 72.14 0.00 Max. Deflection in • • .0 0.000 0.000 © X = ft 0.00 0.00 8.83 Title : Mc Lead Dsgnr: k„ L44/N Description : Scope : Job# Sf52, Date: Hi) J sjG Page KW- 0601732, V5.0.1, 15- Mar -1997 „L ki / C.() NJ Da LISCC. OM O / General Information Description Fy - Yield Stress 36.00 ksi Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports Span Information Span ft 8.83 60.00 8.83 Steel Shape End Fixity Free-Pinned Pinned-Pinned Pinned-Free Loads I Dead Load k/ft. Live Load k/ft 0.82 1.33 0.82 4--- Point #1 DL k LL k 16.30 1.00 16.30 4---- Di-4- 0.- @ X ft 5.000 8.830 Point #2 DL k LL k 1.00 @ X ft. 55.000 .._,......_. Results --- - Mmax @ Cntr k-ft 0.0 Ca7j..0- 0.0 @ X = ft 0.00 30.00 8.83 Max @ Left End k-ft 0.0 -175.9 -175.9 Max @ Right End k-ft -175.9 0,0 fb : Actual psi 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fb : Allowable psi 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bending OK Bending OK Bending OK Reactions & Deflections Shear @ Left k 0.00 C400...... 23.54 Shear @ Right k 37g4 Zino ..--- 16.30 Reactions... DL @ Left k 0.00 0.00 0.00 LL @ Left k 0.00 64.44 64.44 Total @ Left k 0.00 64.44 64.44 DL @ Right k 0.00 0.00 0.00 LL @ Right k 64.4 64.44 0.00 Total @ Right k 64.44 0.00 Max. Deflection in 0.000 0.000 @ X = ft ' 0.00 0.00 8.83 (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC Title : Dsgnr: Description : Scope : Multi-Span Steel Beam Load Duration Factor 1.00 Date: Job # Page 1 6:1 KW-0601732, V5.0.1, 15-Mar-1997 c� Date 11 /I (D /Qg GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Chk'd By ST2v6 (..)?6i(2.4-7Z ActLL L To G (1) rzl(LSts) ( I. ts) pie) V aV i/a/ k.) - o. 2is des ► •260,7 Z?c,; -, J/'!0 si ® MIS ?p.-I ) pv = ?: = � use �5� /s 5, 9 ; 2.00:750)(33") P o ► Job No g952 IS , �� , a R)e- r , IC:sl WA-3) .(4 K.F(1-6) -= P 5'1 7 eiDtda45‘1 TV �NT VDU >:i ErS, . SC 1‘7. ZS I F ►..-r,- t•J k- 4.-'ie_EUT 4k? L 6L:5 TO u?. P. -4-r Ti -Sr TO TH E , SPOQS 1�C Srgs,oG 71-ta i ;� Ti ri-tc- GLue-LA - AA cA-w i i Lev6 - k.._ . 0 6 , •M aivl i -g- IL/ o L2 Bic-;' ►�D ��'� $ M . ID C N... t Aeg M o T TFFF ST L kaArA., A+ T GLL6LA 4k 1714fru.v4 _ - ate 2 L4-r- Na" CEZ The V2 WV. ' S7 , � �Z•�r - .7,CX (1 J ,,n kLL•io \iAru4L.0 = 2e , 2 ki. 1/ = 40, 7 - /,5o x V AL.vLiJ r r. i L L i GB Job No Date GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By 4U/I a 4 3 1 " I1�.. f=-1 1) 6 N e'A W{ 14- I T7 D?J9C-L 'a51. -Ym I L) a f g00, 000 ),&190.,44.S ac7 000 k. s CeM'ogioD h ..� ., o = I rbx?� .Gw I, 4000 -As r7wi Chk'd By . 1 G l e4.0 Lid -I►1 tJ.� sr-L. -77, , c7 Qo k c o i os i ne r,o 2221 4 2 1 GIS" 34(p .G� , i�� enS C : /s Atlecci Usk A3 = 7, 6014. _ /2.3.051 1 0 cvu vgr-itc rs r=4 TG Wo6D ! 3� )46p/itn) 3 So7 i 3 A ; 6 ) y +-op ; 3 = 2 314 l e4 4 /\ i I..)c ryiat 'Isur c / tJC R-71 k ic ... ' r wool 222,15 L ' 20 Z I S.6 1725( i f a, 5 - r�. .I 23, (�S0 l5 .�o -! 1 31) l Acr L 6 5 2 41 STS = C = sus f 4- (Iz) 0,7 Z 0k6, C 3 >44 = 2CpC0 pS' Cb ku,o.a = 24-0D 61 (l, j& r, 7 (zo f 5 i 24LOoos i 15-r. og- / .s W Q, 33. Qtr O, Z6,12S6 ZY /Oco z9q le) `�'. ki -r� z �J X /.5elk F(baAie 8.53') (2tai rvyr I' . • n�. / D „f c General Information Description Fy - Yield Stress 36.00 ksi Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports Span Information Span Steel Shape End Fixity Loads Dead Load Live Load Dead Load Live Load Start End Point #1 DL LL @ X Point #2 DL LL @x Results Mmax @ Cntr @ X = Max @ Left End Max @ Right End fb : Actual Fb : Allowable Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Reactions... DL @ Left LL @ Left Total @ Left DL @ Right LL @ Right Total @ Right Max. Deflection @ X = (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC ft : Free Pinned Pinned-Free k/ft k/ft k/ft k/ft ft ft 8.830 2.72 ft k k. ft k-ft ft' k-ft k-ft psi. psi. Bending OK Bending OK Bending OK Reactions & Deflections k 8.83 60.00 8.83 0.18 - 1.33 3 0.18 • ta 0.0 0.00 0.0 -31.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 4.31 k 0.00 k 0.00 k 0.00 k 1.66 k. 44.21 45.87 in 0.000 ft ' 0.00 Multi-Span Steel Beam 0.03 8.000 52.000 1.00 2.72 5.000 8.830 1.00 55.000 585.0 0.0 8.83 -31.0 -31.0 -31.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 41.56 1.66 44.21 45.87 1.66 44.21 45.87 0.000 0.00 Load Duration Factor Title : Dsgnr: Description : 4.31 2.72 1.66 44.21 45.87 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.000 8.83 Scope : 1.00 Date: Job # Page 1 I KW-0601732, , 154k-1997 - L L t V i 47 '3E :41 L240 0 °a aFgn Ca- 5 ^OC 032 • t'M •:� n, acrert _ 18.00 2a 00 1800 24 00 30 L'0 en A C'.! •.. . _ .. LC JI.cn AC'.+ V kLt..a c ,.) = ZS .:8.00 ArLs,o1,0 = 2:82.1—..e4-(z) x200 48.00 SZ I L L (VE L,&,J Osk Date "/ ( /q/ 44 Job No. v 75Zk j S GB GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By Chk'd By G - & 'sr/ 6L.LLA-;44 = L ► , S(o -- GA 3 LaCyt..cT Le n ov&Z, L N - 1+ d Pert c..41)e- P = (i , 33 r 0.3 (s" Az) = y,sk = 37. 0 a(�.� s /9( , o�s1 > 190,0 w ArM utJ & 44.4)EL 4-rv1. w/L.L P Z (1,33 f- o,3pik i7V /z) j V ; 3G,z- D.(C0.7S 4.7 „) S //Ors T14 S' rzeL r Sk M PA,LT (...r SIJEc -T r0 T k Gov& LA-W ' TO Tie -# tJSP 71 LOA DTI T'-H- ST'L, l3F *fr TZ) Job No '2'q Z ■ 15 Date I ka l`1 CI GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By e.-LA Chk'd By GB piecx/ , . 6 sC BTi , 8a04 ( sic,) lvoo Fo2 = J c1 s, 4). a / b s 7, s //; /L ) L /-f- Pi)u our p_ (STL, 3M (An') y (' -a" SPA , ITT', •L,A -u66s ,.��,2� wv4� Gwac -r7 1 l'AC3 J / 1 7• x ( 1 y ww 4/ ") -v /S-1/ /S, Foa. L +° : No O c L TA-8 1123 's/St,O €,i 3o a c7+-As IL- IC.'4 "7 - r— g."/3-z" 2-26 i / ' 4 4. D.10 co =T. n ( a 5 27 ZIA v5A • ��T�p 7 -486 Fasteners 7.3.7 Withdrawal Loads Table 7.24 may be used to determine the withdrawal design values for lag screws installed in the side grain of a member consisting of either sawn lumber or glued laminated timber. This table is based on specific gravity. Table 7.25 contains withdrawal values for softwood glued laminated timbers based on species used for laminating. If possible, lag screws should not be loaded in withdrawal from end grain. When this condition is unavoidable, the design value as determined from either table is multiplied by 0.75. The withdrawal design value may not exceed the tensile strength of the lag screw at its net (root) section. A depth of engagement of the lag screw thread in its lead hole of 7 diameters for species with specific gravities of G > 0.60, 8 di- ameters for species with specific gravities of 0.60 >_ C > 0.50, 10 diameters for species with specific gravities of 0.50 >_ G > 0.40, and 11 diameters for species with specific gravities of 0.40 <_ G where withdrawal load Wis in lb per inch based on the depth of the embedment of the threaded portion excluding the tapered gimlet point. The required depth of penetration to develop the allowable tension stress of the lag screw is shown in Table 7.26. 7.3.8 Lateral Loads The design values for the most commonly used connections of lag screws can be obtained from Table 7.22 for wood to wood connections and from Table 7.23 for wood to steel connections. Depth of Penetration (p) of Lag Screw Required to Develop Allowable Tension Stress in Lag Screw, in. °' Diameter Southern Douglas Spruce Western White Red in. Pine Fir -Larch Hem -Fir Pine -Fir Woods Oak Oak t B 4 5 a 2 7 16 3 8 s Ti; 4 1 13.0 11.0 8.9 6.8 5.0 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8 15.0 12.7 10.3 7.8 5.7 4.9 3.6 3.0 TABLE 7.26 Depth of Penetration p, in. 18.8 16.0 12.9 9.8 7.2 6.2 4.5 3.8 2.6 19.5 16.5 13.3 10.1 7.4 6.4 4.7 4.0 2.7 24.6 20.8 16.8 12.8 9.4 8.1 5.9 5.0 3.4 8.5 5.8 4.4 3.2 2.8 2.1 1.7 1.2 9.7 8.2 6.6 5.0 3.7 :3.2 2.:3 2.0 1.4 'Based on tensile stress to steel of 20,000 psi and diameter of lag screw at the root of the threads t).• 'The depth of penetration p does not include the Gimlet Point. `Table 7.22 contains the design values i main member with a wood side met: ; ifor loading perpendicular to grain in bot: 1 member Z, These lateral design values . pde grain of a two member joint compris : -i; ; .; parallel or perpendicular to grain. N 4`penetration in the main member have bee ;;Tables 7.22 and 7.23. If metal side plates thicker than 4 in. ar t` Table 7.23 should be reduced in propor screw. The allowable stresses for the met:. When it is more convenient to use el termining lag screw design values or wh tables, the lag screw design values can bt - (7- 17)- (7 -19). Design values for loading at an angle of be determined by use of the tables and r. Eq. (7 -12). When the load acts perpendicular to . 'end grain of the main member parallel t be determined by use of Eqs. (7-17)-(7 - thus obtained must be multiplied by th i ot • where k = -1 + Dt,F,. Z = 4K8 Z = 2.8(2 + R e )K D Z = 3Ke kDh,FCn, d-G (2(1 + Re) + I R R = Fed Fe,• = thickness of side membe+ F = dowel bearing strength t (psi) (see Table 7.21), F = dowel bearing strength F = bending yield strength o D = unthreaded shank diamt Ke = 1 + (8,,,°x °) ( degret 9 = maximum angle of load in a connection (degree: TABLE 7.23 Lag Screw Design Values (Z) for Single Shear (two member) Connectionsa' with I" ASTM A36 steel side plate, or ASTM A446; Grade A steel side plate (for t < 1 ") G = 0.55 Mixed G.= 0.46 Maple G = 0.50 G = 0.49 Douglas Fir G = 0.67 Southern Douglas Fir. Douglas Fir. (S) Hem-Fir Lag Red Oak Pine Larch Larch (N) (N) Steel Side . S:rew Plate Diameter Zs Z, Z, Z, Z, Z. Zt Z, Z. Z t, inches D inches lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. 3 gage t, = 0.239" C "330 260 310 230 300 220 300 210 290 200 450 330 410 290 .s 280 400 270 390 260 550 390 510 350 ,490 330 480 320 470 310 7" 700 480 650 430 620 400 620 400 600 380 870 580 810 520 780 490 770 480 750 460 1290 820 1190 720 1140 680 1140 670 1100 640 1810 1100 1660 960 1600 910 1580 890 1540 860 2420 1410 2220 1240 2130 1170 2120 1140 2060 1100 I 3130 1760 2870 1540 2750 1460 2730 1430 2650 1380 1.; 3930 2150 3610 1880 3460 1770 3430 1750 3340 1670 14 4840 2580 4440 2260 4260 2120 4220 2090 4100 1990 300 230 270 210 260 190 260 190 260 180 400 300 370 270 360 250 3611 250 350 240 500 350 460 320 440 300 440 290 430 280 7 gage 7 270 210 250 180 240 170 240 170 230 160 4 = 0.179" 370 270 340 240 330 230 330 230 320 220 460 320 420 290 410 270 400 270 390 260 10 gage 7 250 190 230 170 220 160 220 160 210 150 I, - 0.134" - 350 260 330 230 310 220 310 210 300 210 440 310 400 280 390 260 390 260 380 250 11 gage 250 190 230 170 220 160 220 160 210 ISO 4 = 0.12" , 350 260 320 230 310 210 310 210 300 200 430 310 400 270 380 260 380 250 370 240 12 gage 7 240 190 220 170 210 160 210 150 210 150 4 = 0.105" - 350 250 320 220 110 210 300 210 300 2011 430 300 400 270 380 250 380 250 370 24)) 14 gage 7 240 180 220 160 210 150 210 150 200 1411 t, = 0.075" 7.482 C= Lag G = 0.43 Spruc. Steel Side Screw Hem-Fir 1 ' Plate Diameter t, D Zi Z, Z. inches inches lbs. lbs. lbs. 3 gage 4 = 0.239" i+ 10 gage f, = 0.134" 1; 11 gage I, = 0.12" TO 12 gage I, = 0.105" 7� 14 gage ; t, - 0.075" TABLE 7.: 280 200 280 370 250 370 460 300 450 580 370 580 730 440 ' 720 1070 610 1060 1490 820 1480 1990 1050 1980 2570 1310 2550 3230 1600 3200 3970 1910 3930 250 180 250 340 230 340 420 270 410 7 gage ; 220 160 220 s, - 0.179" —, 310 210 310 380 250 380 210 150 210 290 200 290 360 240 360 200 140 200 290 190 290 360 230 360 200 140 200 290 190 280 360 230 350 200 140 190 Sources ANSI /NR,PA NDS -1991, National Dunn Ave., NW. Washington, DC 20036. 'Tabulated lateral design values IZ) for lag screw cc factors (Table 7.1). 1 Tabulated lateral design values 1Z) are for ••full di: with lag screw axis perpendicular to wood fibers. am F, = 70,000 psi for D = i" F„ - 60.000 psi for D F, = 45,000 psi for D z �" "Tabulated lateral design values iZ) are based on do and 45.000 psi for ASTM A446. Grade A eel. 111102 Ingit- ..� 4 < - g! T= ee, ts d n - • V d 7 w . -. - LT S • G • d tv W ▪ a rD In 0 -4 co 0. ., � a' O � • ' o e3 P? In o 0 w 11' d° a',* "z7 p _ ", C ca o tT •9-.. 5. "3 d O a y . n c, =' c ▪ = w Cr 0 to C .-., .= l� 5 Cr •< O.. El 0 t1. w > -o• ` G a cr• 0 n "t ;"' f 7,- 0 n r a o .1 O I 5 • , 0 n ) a G n • 5 v b 5 C — I,, y , e. g 0, o 'a 'L7 d tTa •. - p• • w 3 0 0 •-3 o co m ) • -es m c- 0. ~ `y p o n O E F. -8 f E. ° 3 t. Douglas Fir-Larch Hem -Fir Softwo Specks Douglas Fir South E• TABLE 7.25 Withdrawal Design Values for Lag Screws in Softwood Glued Laminated Timber" . Lag Bolt Diameter D' y q asumnim o o 6 n ▪ n a E- tl CI . n w 0 S � 7 • d A w d w r 1 5 3 7 I 9 5 3 7 Growth 1 I ++ Ili+ 8+ Ili+ 2+ Ills Rr 4+ B+ 1 r 1 R+ 1 4r Species Ratc• 0. 250 0.3125 0.375 0.4375 0.500 0.5625 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 Southern Dense 260 307 352 395 437 477 516 592 664 734 802 868 Pine Medium Grain 260 307 352 395 437 477 516 592 664 734 802 868 Coarse Crain 1(37 198 226 254 281 307 332 381 428 473 516 559 179 266 305 342 378 413 447 513 576 6 36 695 752 212 243 273 302 330 357 409 459 508 554 600 137 163 186 209 231 253 273 313 • 352 389 425 • 460 California Close Redwood Grain 186 220 252 283 312 340 369 423 475 525 574 621 199 235 269 302 334 364 395 453 508 562 613 664 `Normal load duration, dry service conditions. Design values for load in withdrawal in lb /in. of penetration of threaded part into side grain of the laminations receiving the point. ° Refer to Table 3, AITC 117 — Design (4) for species, rate of growth, and location of lumber used in various combinations. For other species refer A to Table 7.24 for withdrawal design values based on specific gravity obtained from Table 7.21. •D = shank diameter. N IJ 1J I■ IJ l.+ so T J 00 .D C 00 lo to to Co 00 •� 'N t.11 to y.. •h o IJ 1- -I W 1• 4 Cr. .D O .D 9. 00 1- • 4 i. U, U. 1 T • J --• T .e. O• J J J .O O to 00 1. .0 J .0 5/8" N to W W J , U C -- $J 1. to O CD W T O W • 1. 0. 00 .D O J— U, .O 1. A 1. Y IJ U T vD W W J CO s U, tr. 0. — N .O 1- W 00 IJ -- J 00 00 .0 .O -- Co O T W CO :A 3/4" N ' O W W to to 00 UI U. CO CO t0 -- J IJ J— J L L 1. A . - N t- U IJ 00 W .D is to to U, J O NJ LA U'. 00 U 47 tJ, U. T J J •L O. T W A .D CO .D .D O .O — J ■■• W W A T 7/8" '.+ W W A .A A o-. J 00 O N to so W .O N CO 4. 1. i■ U. o f .0 O to W O CO U U U'. D. I J T 00 — to 14 O J T T -,1 J W U, W .D T T i. to .O pp O CO CO J N J .D J W s- . Itoa t... O N A T v .D J to W— .D . 'A W U. J T U. is J T c....11 -.4 A W A A . J p CO ff N T N .D -4 O .4 N 00 LO CO CO 1 -1/8" 111102 Ingit- ..� 4 < - g! T= ee, ts d n - • V d 7 w . -. - LT S • G • d tv W ▪ a rD In 0 -4 co 0. ., � a' O � • ' o e3 P? In o 0 w 11' d° a',* "z7 p _ ", C ca o tT •9-.. 5. "3 d O a y . n c, =' c ▪ = w Cr 0 to C .-., .= l� 5 Cr •< O.. El 0 t1. w > -o• ` G a cr• 0 n "t ;"' f 7,- 0 n r a o .1 O I 5 • , 0 n ) a G n • 5 v b 5 C — I,, y , e. g 0, o 'a 'L7 d tTa •. - p• • w 3 0 0 •-3 o co m ) • -es m c- 0. ~ `y p o n O E F. -8 f E. ° 3 t. Douglas Fir-Larch Hem -Fir Softwo Specks Douglas Fir South E• TABLE 7.25 Withdrawal Design Values for Lag Screws in Softwood Glued Laminated Timber" . Lag Bolt Diameter D' y q asumnim o o 6 n ▪ n a E- tl CI . n w 0 S � 7 • d A w d w r 1 5 3 7 I 9 5 3 7 Growth 1 I ++ Ili+ 8+ Ili+ 2+ Ills Rr 4+ B+ 1 r 1 R+ 1 4r Species Ratc• 0. 250 0.3125 0.375 0.4375 0.500 0.5625 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 Southern Dense 260 307 352 395 437 477 516 592 664 734 802 868 Pine Medium Grain 260 307 352 395 437 477 516 592 664 734 802 868 Coarse Crain 1(37 198 226 254 281 307 332 381 428 473 516 559 179 266 305 342 378 413 447 513 576 6 36 695 752 212 243 273 302 330 357 409 459 508 554 600 137 163 186 209 231 253 273 313 • 352 389 425 • 460 California Close Redwood Grain 186 220 252 283 312 340 369 423 475 525 574 621 199 235 269 302 334 364 395 453 508 562 613 664 `Normal load duration, dry service conditions. Design values for load in withdrawal in lb /in. of penetration of threaded part into side grain of the laminations receiving the point. ° Refer to Table 3, AITC 117 — Design (4) for species, rate of growth, and location of lumber used in various combinations. For other species refer A to Table 7.24 for withdrawal design values based on specific gravity obtained from Table 7.21. •D = shank diameter. ;.. J t --- T T -E Ii-Ir" 3/4" 19/32" 1/4 3/4' 9/16 "-",. 2" r's° 3/4" 15/32" r ' 3/4" 7/16" l .. 7 .. 1- 19/32" I .. 7 .. 1-1/2" t• 1 .. 2 " 1- 5/16" S 1/4" 1/4' 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1-1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 4" T 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2-1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" T -E 1 -3/32" 1- 1/16" 1- 1/32" 31/32" 15/16" 2- 3/32" 2 " 1- 29/32" 1- 13/16" 1- 23/32" 1 -5/8" S 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/ 1/2" 1/ 7 " 2 " 7 " 2" T 1 -1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1 -1n" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/ 3 " 3 " 3 " T -E 1- 11/32" 1- 5/16" 1- 9/32" 1 -7/32" 1- 3/16" 1- 3/32" 2-13/32" 2-5/16" 2-7/32" S 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 7 en r re. 2 -I /2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 - 1/2" T 1 -3/4" 1 -3/4" 1 -3/4" 1 -3/4" 1 -3/4" 1 -3/4" 3 -1/ 3 -1/2" 3 -1/2" 3 -1/ • T - E 1 19/32" 1 - 9/16" 1 17/32" 1 15/32" 1 - 7/16" 1 11/32" 2- 13/16" 2- 23/32" 2-5/8" S ;.. 1 I . T -E I - 2 .. 1- 27/32" l .. 2 .. I- 13/16" I .. 2 " 1- 25/32" I .. 2 .. 1- 23/32" I - 7 .. I- 11/16" l .. 7 .. 1- 19/32" I .. 7 .. 1-1/2" l .. 7 " I- 13/32" 1 .. 2 " 1- 5/16" S 1 -1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1-1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 4" T 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2-1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" T -E 2- 11/32" 2 -5/16" 2- 9/32" 2- 7/32" 2 -3/16" 2- 3/32" 2 " 1- 29/32" 1- 13/16" 1- 23/32" 1 -5/8" S 2 " 2 " 2 " 7 " 7 " 2 " 7 " 2 " 7 " 5 .. T 3 " 3 " 3 " 3 " 3 " 3 " 3 " 3 " 3 " 7• -1 2 2-13/16" 2-25/32" 2-23/32" 2 2- 19/32" 2-13/32" 2-5/16" 2-7/32" S 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2-1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 7 en r re. 2 -I /2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 2 -1/2" 6" T 3 -1n" 3 -1n" 3 -1n" 3 -1/2" 3 -1/2" 3 -I /2" 3 -1/ 3 -1/2" 3 -1/2" 3 -1/ T -E 3- 11/32" 3- 5/16" 3- 9/32" 3- 7/32" 3-3/16" 3 -3/3 2- 29/32" 2- 13/16" 2- 23/32" 2-5/8" S 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 7" T 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" T -E 3- 27/32" 3- 13/16" 3- 25/32" 3- 23/32" 3- 11/16" 3- 19/32" 3 -1/2" 3- 13/32" 3- 5/16" 3- 7/32" 3 -1/8" S 3 -1/2" •3 -I/2" 3 -12" 3-1/2" 3-1/2" 3 -1/2" 3 -1/2" 3-1/2" 3 -1/2" 3 -1/2" 3 -1/2" 8" T 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4 -12" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4 -1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4 -1/2" T -E 4- 11/32" 4- 5/16" 4- 9/32" 4- 7/32" 4- 3/16" 4- 3/32" 4" 3- 29/32" 3- 13/16" 3- 23/32" 3 -5/8" S 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 9" T 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" T -E 4- 27/32" 4- 13/16" 4- 25/32" 4- 23/32" 4- 11/16" 4- 19/32" 4-1/2" 4- 13/32" 4- 5/16" 4- 7/32" 4 -1/8" S 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4 -12" 4 -1n" 4 -12" 4 -1/2" 10" T 5-1/2" 5 -1/2" 5-1/2" 5-1/2" 5-12" 5 -1/2" 5 -1/2" 5 -1/2" 5 -12" 5 -1/2" 5-1/2" T -E 5- 11/32" 5- 5/16" 5- 9/32" 5- 7/32" 5- 3/16" 5- 3/32" 5" 4- 29/32" 4- 13/16" 4- 23/32" 4 -5/8" S 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" 5" II" T 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" T -E 5- 27/32" 5- 13/16" 5- 25/32" 5- 2 3/3 2 " 5- 11/16" 5- 19/32" 5 -1/2" 5- 13/32" 5- 5/16" 5-7/32" 5 -1/8" S 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 12" T 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" T -E 5-27/32" 5- 13/16" 5- 25/32" 5- 23/3 5- 11/16" 5- 19/32" 5 -In" 5- 13/32" 5- 5/16" 5- 7/32" 5 -1/8" "Thread length (T) for intermediate is less. Source: ANSI /NF „PA NDS -1991, National Design Specification for Wood Construction, AFPA, 1250 Connecticut Ave., NW, Wash- ington, DC 20036. al lag screw lengths (I.) is ti”, or! the nominal lag screw length plus 0.5 ", whichever GB Job No elf 2.1S Date UM Prq GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By K Chk'd By 1 774-‹z kJ L) Ca -UM l LS I\1�G r °D UST. . GoLS. Tv I 1 . Loh- A 1JE6: cr A300,b GDu G KJ SrEe z ►� � P 6 4,44 Jo_ &o 'opsf 0 C L E T S Ts '7)(7)( 1 �,7r-r c s xx. = Z9 . - r - s P'IL'Yz) -i V 12=29.742.4- 6,4-12_ (am- = ' Q _ Z. c Hoc. k Ov���runN � 116 Pv LS i i ' = 1/4. = 2 i V ( 3.0' 415 K I ' I L J g 1 /JF. ►J x?- PG n " P / L - & c,A-P pc-042- t 5T 0 0 /► j ' of n McLeod IMTL, TWk- 0.01:10 cs( cam,) - Piu.v60 =7' 4D 72) n/l or - * _ 2 , 2) .(d ' - 3S, General Information Description Fy 60,000.0 psi Spans Considered Continuous Over Supports ACI Dead Load Factor 1.40 f'c 3,000.0 psi Stirrup Fy 60,000.0 psi ACI Live Load Factor 1.70 . Span ft 2.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Beam Width in 36.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Beam Depth in 18.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 End Fixity inned - Pinned inned - Pinned inned - Pinned inned - Pinned inned - Pinned finned - Pinned finned - Pinned inned - Pinned Concrete Member Information Reinf: Center .411n2@ 12.O0i Left .00in2@ O.00in Right Loads Point #1 DL k 37.40 LL k 46.40 `G @ X ft 1.170 •�r5 .. 7 oIJ (t.0c -T 1 S Results 4,sjo t7J-� ..� 1 ✓• i Mmax @Cntr k-ft 7 6� � 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 @ X = ft . 16 O 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Mn' Phi k-ft , 41111° 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Max @ Left End k -ft • 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mn ' Phi k -ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Max @ Right End k -ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mn' Phi k -ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Shear © Left k 65.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Shear © Right k 65.90 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 R & Deflectio bL @ Left k 18.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 LL @ Left k 23.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Total @ Left k ' 41.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 DL @ Right k 18.78 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 LL @ Right k 23.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Total @ Right k 42.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Max. Deflection in •0.001 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 @ X = ft 1.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Shear Stirrups - - - - - .__ __ _.... Stirrup Rebar Area in2 0.220 0.220 0.220 Spacing @ Left In 5.36 0.00 0.00 Spacing @ .2'L In 5.36 0.00 0.00 Spacing @ .4•L in. 5.36 0.00 0.00 Spacing @ .6•L in. 5.24 0.00 0.00 Spacing @ .8•L In 5.24 0.00 0.00 Spacing @ Right in 5.24 0.00 0.00 Query Values Location ft 0.00 0.00 Moment k -ft 0.0 0.0 Shear k 0.0 0.0 Deflection in 0.0000 0.0000 (c) 1983.97 ENERCALC 0.60 0.0 0.0 0.0000 Title : Dsgnr: Description : Scope : Multi -Span Concrete - Beam 0.220 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0000 0.220 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0000 Date: 0.220 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0000 Job # Page 1 0,220 0.220 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0000 0.0000 KW- 0601732, V5.0.1, 15- Mar -1997 IL L 1. Axial Load X-X Axis Moment Plate Height Plate Width Pier Height. Pier Width fc Fy LDF Summary Plate Design Min. Req'd Plate Thick 0.867 in Analysis Type 3 Tension Force per Bolt 0.000 k Bearing Stress 670.77 psi Max Plate Capacity for Allow. Bearing (c) 1983•97 ENERCALC 65.40 k 0.00 k-ft 13.000 in 7.500 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 3,000.0 psi 36.00 ksi 1.000 0.00k Steel Column Base Plate General Information • • I Description. Steel Section Section Depth Section Width Flange Thick Web Thick Anchor Bolt Data Dist. from Plate Edge Bolt Count per Side Tension Capacity Bolt Area TS7x7x1/4 7.000 in 7.000 in 0.250 in 0.250 in Allow Concrete Bearing Per ACI 10.15 0.0 psi Per AISC J9 0.0 psi Plate Analysis for Specified Thickness Plate Thickness 1.0000 in Max Allow Plate Fb Actual fb Page s I 1.500 in 2 8.800 k 0.440 in2 27,000.0 psi 20,285.3 psi KW-0601732, V5.0.1, 15-Mar-1997 * 7 e". L • Job No. g% S V/Lxd,r1 Date 4 11 Seet GEORGE BUTLER ASSOaATES, INC. By V■LIA4 Chk'd By cax_vi.m.s t..) aRx<e1/4"Atz 4407-S COL (4)(-- ). ( , 3y 110.44 psi, f it0) IOC ‘o 1 054" 1)L. %. 16 p 10 1 0-44 - Coo- ;SPTC ee 0 b GHS IF I TI okl M. CCU- 1 ::P 07 : 0 eMci" (6 0' z/2.4'-q".7i..24/_ 7'/L"). 2 Pa 7 8, use (y) MI I) 96 q " _,TALL.oix) 398405 4 = RG1L 38.2k ' GB GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Job No, q62, IS , .�i lJ� Date 1 (6 / "�'I " e_. By Chk'd By G K C'T1 LT' L ? aL. Lw EA)) N45 r*StC 1A)1 fJZ 8oaiph seqSM C . 2 se = 3 w► Lb) e �2zG C H-T' ?ANSI- = 2(0 " 770, W, 4-0 / -o To T TO l.0,F. Q w ND k = Ce C ItA) 1, 04, 23 4P;L 2; ldp E 64 D, 001\bato aock.. CA) = 5.sJi2 (1 pe_r) = 64,5 SitAx= 4, D (d .3X1, DX�� ) _ 77.61 60c4-T,P. 0 4-3 /11-.4 Jep ,(0,3YI 27,5 ,7C4 1'p LOD 0,710,3XI10. e "`'y, of GB GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By 4.(--6 Chk'd By u _ II Job No 65 S I V LLe USA Date W I Vf'T' JNG{ TT 1 'Q.r 13 Ic -v Qs rY1kN'ncavaz L i � LT- UP P4 -NaL. �- Vae- 6. C►tAuNGL //°....\/64.T1') a� . TA LoA- D TID Pue-Li v S I 7 . 7 ' 45a. =Eh, = 2L, lopsab, 4 /9,0e* S� 4 ) y 3 ps# u5& / Q. e w, !=0 "oa 5'-o" — — — um6 e MAl Tel3 , rZ Or' gSe c i2 rc� 0,67 =-/180 psi-) = 7 2, y pi* � RS?. C6 13,75 's cl'S13 v , i Mi b To Pu L_I 16 T14 /-i 7724 L- C(oxt3,Z a =to k Q Tim To MME s53)//s,75' I IJrO -�-► 3 k 4 ` k e- o 4 �� is 3z41/ ()''.(';''‘`‘'°- 1156 rl-IS SA c c TA-Pcot 2'_D "SPA . ,Ks" . r 72 Lf PJ4 (2]) W i 4/5 L1.v , c�51i 3 //b X 3 4. C Gnu itp) P, =2j r`, w C.r ldl'1'L. m LtoD x.0261 i-5 of N General Information Description Steel Section Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu Distributed Loads DL LL ST Start Location End Location Summary Center Defl. Left Cant Defl Right Cant Def ...Query Defl @ (c) 1983.97 ENERCALC #1 Actual Moment 6.177 k -ft fb : Bending Stress 8.283 ksi fb / Fb 0.925: 1 Shear 0.969 k fv : Shear Stress 0.400 ksi fv / Fv 0.028: 1 Force & Stres Summary -0.696 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in C8X13.75 Pinned - Pinned 0.000 0.000 0.000 25.50 ft 0.00 ft LL & ST Act Together 0.00 ft 12.75 ft -0.696 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Title : Lepel Dsgnr: 141..1/0 Description : Scope : Steel Beam Design Job# BfGZ, 1' Date:) 111■5 1! f Fy 36.00ksi Load Duration Factor 1.33 #2 # #4 #5 #6 #7 A c11)40. .Y k/ft k/ft 0 .672 k/ft :. am n Using: C8X13.75 section, Span = 25.50ft, Fy = 36.0ksiEnd Fixity = Pinned - PinnedFy = 36.00ksi, Lu = 12.75ft, LDF = 1.330 Allowable 6.682 k -ft 8.959 ksi 34.906 k 14.400 ksi Max. Deflection DL Defl / Length DL +LL Defl / Length « -- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted - -» DL LL LL +ST LL LL -ST Maximum Only 0 Center 0 Center 0 Cants 0 Cants Max. M - 6.18 k -ft 6.18 k -ft Max. M - k -ft Max. M @ Left k -ft Max. M @ Right k -ft Shear @ Left 0.97 k 0.97 k Shear @ Right 0.97 k 0.97 k -0.696 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 0.000 in Reaction @ Left 0.97 0.97 0.97 k Reaction @ Rt 0.97 0.97 0.97 k Section Properties Steel Section C8X1 3.75 Weight 13.65 #/ft r -xx 2.984 In Depth 8.00 in lxx 35.80 in4 r -yy 0.611 in Web Thick 0.303 in Iyy 1.50 in4 Misc 0.560 in Width 2.343 in Sxx 8.950 in3 Flange Thick 0.390 in Syy 0.841 in3 Area 4.02 in2 Beam OK -0.696 in 0.0:1 439.4 : 1 Page 1 II KW- 0601732, V5.0.1, 15- Mar -1997 f G (et k- CA& 00 C Ia K.S. Z Description General Information Steel Section Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu Summary Using: C6X8.2 section, Span = 8.83ft, Moment fb : Bending Stress fb / Fb Shear fv : Shear Stress fv / Fv Steel Section C6X8.2 Depth Web Thick Width Flange Thick Area C6X8.2 Pinned - Pinned Bm Wt. Added to Loads, LL & ST Act Together 8.83 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 8.83 ft Fy = 36.0ksiEnd Actual 0.079 k -ft 1.938 ksi 0.072 : 1 0.036 k 0.027 ksi 0.002 : 1 Force & Stress Summary « -- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted - -» LL LL +ST LL LL +ST Maximum Center Center p Cants @ Cants Max. M + 0.08 k -ft Max. M - Max. M @ Left Max. M @ Right Shear @ Left k Shear @ Right k Center Defl. 0.000 0.000 in Left Cant Defl 0.000 0.000 in Right Cant Def 0.000 0.000 in ...Query Defl @ 0.000 0.000 in Reaction @ Left 0.04 0.04 0.04 k Reaction @ Rt 0.04 0.04 0.04 k Section Properties - Y DL Only 0.08 0.04 k 0.04 0.04 k 0.04 -0.055 in -0.055 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 6.00 in 0.200 in 1.920 in 0.343 in 2.40 in2 Steel Beam Design Weight lxx IYY Sxx Syy Title : MeLead Dsgnr: 44♦1 Description : Scope : Fy Load Duration Factor 1.00 Fixity = Pinned - PinnedFy = 36.00ksi, Lu = 8.83ft, LDF = 1,000 Allowable 1.107 k -ft 27.000 ksi 18.967 k 14.400 ksi 0.000 0.000 0.000 -0.055 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8.15 #/ft 13.10 in4 0.69 in4 4.367 in3 0.492 in3 r -xx r -yy Misc Job# 45 cc& Date: 1016/ 11 36.00ksi Beam OK Max. Deflection -0.055 in DL Defl / Length 1,909.8: 1 DL +LL Defl / Length 1,909.8: 1 k -ft k -ft k -ft k -ft 2.336 in 0.537 in 0.511 in Page 1 (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC KW-0601732, V5.0.1, 15-Mar-1997 I ll i J w i w Pt4ZLi General Information Description Steel Section Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu Point Loads Dead Load Live Load Short Term Location Summary #1 4.710 Actual Moment 2.346 k -ft fb : Bending Stress 6.447 ksi fb / Fb 0.470: 1 Shear 0.727 k fv : Shear Stress 0.606 ksi fv / Fv 0.042: 1 Center Defl. Left Cant Defl Right Cant Def ...Query Defl @ Reaction @ Left 0.52 Reaction @ Rt 0.73 Section Properties -0.057 in -0.002 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 Scope : SteelvBe Design AccruN LY I. 0 Using: C6X8.2 section, Span = 8.00ft, Fy = 36.0ksiEnd Fixity = Pinned•PinnedFy = 36.00ksi. Lu = 8.00ft, LDF = 1.330 Allowable 4.993 k -ft 13.720 ksi 17.280 k 14.400 ksi Title : J' Dsgnr: 4 Description Job# OK2,, Date: ► ► 1151 C6X8.2 Fy 36.00ksi Pinned - Pinned Load Duration Factor 1.33 8.00 ft Bm Wt. Added to Loads, 1 0.00 ft LL & ST Act Together (� �/0c i.4-6 �� - 0.00 ft il�I 8.00 ft -pp -► utk)✓a 1 04-50 # 2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 k I k k CedxrS ft Beam OK SZ C• Max. Deflection -0.057 in DL Defl / Length 48,544.6: 1 DL +LL Dell / Length 1,687.9: 1 Force & Stress Summary 1 « -- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted - -» DL LL LL +ST LL LL +ST Maximum Only Ca Center 0 Center @ Cants 0 Cants Max. M + 2.35 k -ft 0.07 2.35 k -ft Max. M - k -ft Max. M @ Left k -ft Max. M @ Right k -ft Shear @ Left 0.52 k 0.03 0.52 k Shear @ Right 0.73 k 0.03 0.73 k -0.057 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.03 0.52 0.03 0.73 -0.057 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.52 0.73 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in k k Steel Section C6X8.2 Weight 8.15 1//ft r -xx 2.336 in Depth 6.00 in lxx 13.10 in4 r -yy 0.537 in Web Thick 0.200 in Iyy 0.69 in4 Misc 0.511 in Width 1.920 in Sxx 4.367 in3 Flange Thick 0.343 in Syy 0.492 in3 Area 2.40 in2 Page 1 (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC ICW0601732, V5.0. 5- Mar -1997 Anchor Diameter Anchor Embedment Shear Strength 3145 psi Hard Rock Concrete Shear Strength Lightweight Hollow Block 3/16" 1/4" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" 852 lbs. 1604 lbs. 731 lbs. 1058 lbs. Anchor Diameter Embedment Depth (inches) 1" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/2 "* 1 -3/4 "* 3/16" 1/4" 209 lbs. 406 lbs. 357 lbs. 615 lbs. 468 lbs. 851 lbs. 547 lbs. 984 lbs. Anchor Diameter Embedment Depth (inches) 1" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/2" 1 -3/4" '3176 ' /4" 341 lbs. 718 lbs. 581 lbs. 1138 lbs. 863 lbs. 1537 lbs. 1059 lbs. 18660 lbs. 4.7.3 PERFORMANCE ULTIMATE PULLOUT IN CONCRETE (3145 psi) ULTIMATE PULLOUT IN HOLLOW BLOCK Test NCH 3748 /Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory ULTIMATE SHEAR STRENGTH ITW RamseuRed Head, 1994 Not to he reprinted without written permission. rrERamset/Red Head TAPCON Test NCH 3932 /Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory Test NCH 3932 /Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory ANCHOR SYSTEMS -A40- * Embedment in solid portion of hollow block /&T 21, *NOTE: Indicated pull -out and shear failure values were obtained in tests witnessed by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory personnel. Designated holding power depends on the quality of the masonry material, depth of embedment and proper hole size. These figures are offered only as a guide and are not guaranteed in any way by Illinois Tool Works Inc. The figures indicate average ultimate pull -out and shear failure values. A safety factor of 4:1 or 25% of ultimate pull -out value is generally accepted as a safe working load. However, reference should always be made to applicable codes for the specific safe working ratio. MI values are based on close tolerance holes drilled with Ramset/Red Head Tapcon carbide drill bits. Performance of the Tapcon"' anchor may vary in extremely hard concrete aggregates. Consult your Ramset/Red Head representative for further information. As in the case with all applications. Ramset/Red Head can only suggest typical fasteners for typical applications and that the connection design is the sole responsibility of the Building Design Engineer, Architect or otherwise responsible person charged with the design of the connection. For further product information please contact the nearest Authorized Ramset/Red Head Distributor. NOTE: The fixture thickness being anchored and the depth of embedment in the masonry material determines the anchor length. A minimum of I" and a maximum of 1-3/4" embedment is recommended. Hole depth must be a minimum 1/4" deeper than the anchor embedment. Tapcnn Anchors must be installed using all Ramset/Red Head system components (Tapcon Anchors, Condrive Tools, and Tapcon Drill Bits) in order to qualify for 1TW Ramset/Red Head system support. .1) Part Number Description Head Style Drill Point Drill & Tap Capacity Max. Material Attachment Applications 1271000 1272000 9 -15 x 1" 9 -15 x 1 -1/2" HWH HWH Gimlet Gimlet .012 -.048 .012 -.048 0 -.250 0 -.750 • Wall panel to wood 1273000 9 -15 x 2" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 .500 -1.250 structure. 1275000 9 -15 x 2 -1/2" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 1.000 -1.750 • Panel over insulation to 1276000 9 -15 x 3" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 1.500 -2.250 wood. 1277000 12 -14 x 3/4" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 --- • Stitching of wall panel. With 1/2" Bonded Washer 1262000 9 -15 x 1" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 0 -.250 • Roof and wall panel to 1264000 9 -15 x 1 -1/2" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 0 -.750 wood. 1267000 9 -15 x 2" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 .500 -1.250 • Panel over insulation to 1268000 9 -15 x 2 -1/2" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 1.000 -1.750 wood. 1269000 9 -15 x 3" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 1.500 -2.250 1270000 12 -14 x 3/4 "* HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 - -- • Stitching of roof and wall "With 9/16" O.D. Bonded Washer. panel. PULLOVER VALUES (average lbs. ultimate) Fastener Steel Gauge Dia. Equivalent 26 24 22 20 18 9 Unwashered 465 623 815 1049 1549 9 Washered 515 674 875 1100 1627 12 Unwashered 527 699 863 912 1185 12 Washered 587 744 915 993 1246 SHEET STEEL GAUGES Gauge Decimal No. Equivalent 18 .048" 20 .036" 22 .030" 24 .024" 26 .018" 28 .015" 30 .012" PULLOUT VALUES IN STEEL (average lbs. ultimate) Fastener Dia. Steel Gauge 26 24 22 20 18 9 171 252 329 401 634 12 199 271 360 426 656 PULLOUT VALUES IN WOOD (average lbs. ultimate) Fastener Dia. Embedment in 2" x 4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/2" 9 198 328 571 728 872 ''-- 12 210 335 FASTENER VALUES Fastener (dia -tpi) Tensile (lbs. min.) Shear (avg. lb / orque (min. in. lbs.) 9 -15 1800 1200 50 12 -14 2778 2000 92 TRUGRI P T M GT M ETAL -TO -WOOD FASTENERS Selector Guide Performance Data The values isted are ultimate averages achieved under laboratory conditions and apply to Buildex manufactured f applied to these values for resign purposes. Installation Guidelines 1 A standard screwgun with a depth sensitive nosepiece should be used to install TruGrip. For optimal fastener performance, the screwgun should be a minimum of 4 amps and have a RPM range of 0 -2000. ilk. Adjust the screwgun nosepiece to properly seat the fastener. A. New magnetic sockets must be correctly set before use. Remove chip build -up as needed. TH- Buildex .411.. BUILDING IDEAS THAT WORK TM 1349 West Bryn Mawr Avenue Itasca, Illinois 60143 630/595 -3500 FAX: 630/595 -3549 ©1996 Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 24 Product Report No. 40811 eners only. Appropriate safety factors should be .111. Overdriving may result in torsional failure of the fastener or stripout of the substrate. . The fastener must penetrate beyond the metal structure a minimum of 3 pitches of thread. Properly Seated Washers r i Underdnven Correctly en Overdnven Driv TruGripT"' GT and Building Ideas that WorkTM are trademarks of ITW Buildex and Illinois Tool Works Inc. 7 Job No Date GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By (L L Chk'd By or PA &1 k:- '►PAL L 1 N Q- cr r 5D - (2 v9 ; z�8 5.35 Ti-1-12-4) ao1,T 3 1de A 3 = 5.3,E I 6h / Ali kL L.DA -b , e)N fficiActi u SA 1) X21 LL_ X 1 tPAr L_ 3 " ( (44) ' /Z" $ 432-g - Rao M-0c,/ -to/as - 8801 # c.5. - , Z,- 1 X4"BvLT V = 9.8k— S 14F-b O �- P / A- :-... 4 ,,,l(r_. ... 4:201:6; PLA21-1 P 7i j J /,/ u. 4- crvA-c. b 1st' TO 48 #42Lvku = O,ail .'L = co 0 (30z30) (zC d1. Anchor Dia. Hole Dia. Embed- men* 2000 psi Concrete 3500 psi Concrete 6000 psi Concrete Tightening Torque (Ft -Lbs) No. Of Anchors per Cartridge No. Of Anchors E2 dd ge Cartridge Tension (Lbs) Shear (Lbs) Tension (Lbs) Shear (Lbs) Tension (Lbs) Shear (Lbs) 1" - - 1653 - - - 418 41 1/4" 5/16" 2 -1/4" - - 2818 - - - 3 -5 180 18 3" - - 3599 - - - 133 13 1 -1/2" - - 3426 - - - 162 16 3/8" 7/16" 3 -3/8" 6660 5085 8567 6009 10621 5941 13 -18 72 7 4 -1/2" - - 10603 - - - 55 5.5 4100 40 4 fp 9/16" 4 -1/2 "_ � 11308 8854 14499 17410 8801 13905 10603 22 -35 40 30 4 3 6" 2 -1/2" - - 8775 - - - 40 4 5/8" 3/4" 5 -5/8" 16770 13163 22880 16458 24194 17089 55 -80 18 2 7 -1/2" - - 29456 - - - 13.5 1.3 3" 12625 26 2.6 7/8" 29667 15982 3Zi 20347 33759 24482 106 -160 12 1.2 8R 9 .9 3 -1/2" - - 18650 - - - 18.5 1.9 7/8" 1" 7 -7/8" 35257 21548 37714 30295 41023 32573 185 -250 8 0.8 10 -1/2" - - 51211 - - 6 0.6 4" - - 25034 - - - 14 1.4 1" 1 -1/8" 9" 43306 25236 45608 38026 44835 46416 276 -330 6 0.6 12" - - 63053 - - - 5 0.5 5" - - 37100 - - - 8.4 0.8 1 -1/4" 1 -3/8" 11 -1/4" - - 53000 - - - 370-660 3.7 0.4 15" - - 64925 - - - 3 0.3 Anchor Embedment E Recommended Anchor Spacing S Minimum Anchor Spacing S.,," Recommended Edge Distance m Minimumn Edge Distance m," 4.0D < 8.0D 8.0D < 10.0D >10.0D 2.00E 1.50E 12D I.00E 0.75E 6D 1.00E 1.00E 10D 1.00E 0.50E 5D L EPCON SYSTEM Safe working loads for individually installed anchors under static loading conditions should not exceed 25% of anchor's ultimate load capacity. •• Shallower embedments can be used, but values will be lower than shown, job site test as needed. Performance values arc based on the use of high strength threaded rod. Spacing and Edge Distances for Ceramic 6T" Epoxy Anchors I. f • EPCON SYSTEM Where D = anchor diameter Note: For reduction factors please refer to ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Report #4285, located in the Approvals section of this manual. ° ITW Ramset/Red Head, 1994 Not to be reprinted without written permission. -E22- MEMBER SPAC- ING O.C. (In.) WIND LOAD CODE GAGE 5 PSF 1 15 PSF I 20 PSF I 25 PSF I 30 PSF 1 35 PSF ] 40 PSF DEFLECTION LIMIT 1/240 L/360 L /600 L/240 1/360 1/600 L/240 L/360 1/600 L/240 L /360 1 /600 L/240 L/360 L /600 L/240 1/360 1 /600 L/240 L/360 1 /600 ft. - In. ft. - In. f1- in. f1- In. ft. - In. f1- In. tt. - In. f1- In. ft. - In. ft - In. ft. - In. tt. - In, ft. - In. f1- In. ft. - In. ft. - In. ft. - In. ft. - In. ft. - in. It - In. ft. - In. CWN 20 12 34 -10 30 -5 25 -8 24 -2 21 -1 17 -9 21 -11 19 -2 16 -2 20 -4 17 -9 15 -0 19 -2 16 -9 14 -1 18 -2 15 -11 13 -5 17 -1 15 -2 12 -10 16 31 -7 27 -7 23 -4 21 -11 19 -2 16 -2 19 -11 17 -5 14 -8 18 -6 16 -2 13 -7 17 -1 15 -2 12 -10 15 -10 14 -5 12 -2 14 -9 13 -10 11 -8 24 27 -7 24 -2 20 -4 19 -2 16 -9 14 -1 17 -1 15 -2 12 -10 15 -3 14 -1 11 -11 13 -11 13 -3 11 -2 12 -11 12 -7 10 -8 12 -1 12 -1 10 -2 CSJ 20 12 36 -2 31 -7 26 -8 25 -1 21 -11 18 -6 22 -9 19 -11 16 -9 21 -2 18 -6 15 -7 19 -11 17 -4 14 -8 18 -11 16 -6 13 -11 18 -1 15 -9 13 -4 16 32 -10 8- 24 -2 22 -9 19 -11 16 -9 20 -8 18 -1 15 -3 19 -2 16 -9 14 -2 18 -1 15 -9 13 -4 16 -11 15 -0 12 -8 15 -10 14 -4 12 -1 24 28 -8 25 -1 21 -2 19 -11 17 -4 14 -B 18 -1 15 -9 13 -4 16 -4 14 -8 12 -4 14 -11 13 -9 11 -8 13 -10 13 -1 11 -1 12 -11 12 -6 10 -7 CSW 20 12 37 -6 32 -9 27 -8 26 -0 22 -9 19 -2 23 -7 20 -8 17 -5 21 -11 19 -2 16 -2 20 -8 18 -0 15 -3 19 -7 17 -2 14 -5 18 -9 16 -5 13 -10 16 34 -1 29 -9 25 -1 23 -7 20 -8 17 -5 21 -6 18 -9 15 -10 19 -11 17 -5 14 -8 18 -9 16 -5 13 -10 17 -4 15 -7 13 -1 16 -3 14 -11 12 -7 24 29 -9 26 -0 21 -11 20 -8 18 -0 15 -3 18 -9 16 -5 13 -10 16 -9 15 -3 12 -10 15 -4 14 -4 12 -1 14 -2 13 -7 11 -6 13 -3 13 -0 11 -0 CWN 18 12 37 -10 33 -1 27 -11 26 -3 22 -11 19 -4 23 -10 20 -10 17 -7 22 -2 19 -4 16 -4 20 -10 18 -2 15 -4 19 -9 17 -3 14 -7 18 -11 16 -6 13 -11 16 34 -5 30 -0 25 -4 23 -10 20 -10 17 -7 21 -8 18 -11 16 -0 20 -1 17.7 14 -10 18 -11 16 -6 13 -11 18 -0 15 -8 13 -3 17 -2 15 -0 12 -8 24 30 -0 26 -3 22 -2 20 -10 18 -2 15 -4 18 -11 16 -6 13 -11 17 -7 15 -4 12.11 16 -6 14 -5 12 -2 15 -8 13 -9 11 -7 15 -0 13 -1 11 -1 CSJ 18 12 39 -4 34 -4 29 -0 27 -3 23 -10 20 -1 24 -9 21 -8 18.3 23 -0 20 -1 16 -11 15 -5 21 -8 18 -11 15 -11 20 -7 17 -11 15 -2 19 -8 17 -2 14 -6 16 35 -9 31 -2 26 -4 24 -9 21 -8 18 -3 22 -6 19 -8 16 -7 20 -11 18 -3 19 -8 17 -2 14 -6 18 -8 16 -4 13 -9 17 -10 15 -7 13 -2 24 31 -2 27 -3 23 -0 21 -8 18 -11 15 -11 t9 -8 17 -2 14 -6 18 -3 15 -11 13 -5 17 -2 15 -0 12 -8 16 -4 14 -3 12 -0 15 -7 13 -8 11 -6 CSW 18 12 41 - 35 -11 30 -3 28 -6 24 -11 21 -0 25 -11 22 -8 19 -1 24 -0 21 -0 17 -9 22 -8 19 -9 16 -8 21 -6 18 -9 15 -10 20 -7 18 -0 15 -2 16 37 -4 32 -8 27 -6 25 -11 22 -8 19 -1 23 -6 20 -7 17 -4 21 -10 19 -1 16 -1 20 -7 18 -0 15 -2 19 -6 17 - 14 -5 18 -8 16 -4 13 -9 24 32 -8 28 -6 24 -0 22 -8 19 -9 16 -8 20 -7 18 -0 15 -2 19 -1 16 -8 14 -1 18 -0 15 -8 13 -3 17 -1 14 -11 12 -7 16 -4 14 -3 12 -0 CWN 16 12 40 -7 35 -6 29 -11 28 -2 24 -7 20 -9 25 -7 22 -4 18 -10 23 -9 20 -9 17 -6 22 -4 19 -6 16 -6 21 -3 18 -7 15 -8 20 -4 17 -9 15 -0 16 36 -11 32 -3 27 -2 25 -7 22 -4 18 -10 23 -3 20 -4 17 -2 21 -7 18 -10 15 -11 20 -4 17 -9 15 -0 19 -3 16 -10 14 -3 18 -5 16 -1 13 -7 24 32 -3 28 -2 23 -9 22 -4 19 -6 16 -6 20 -4 17 -9 15 -0 18 -10 16 -6 13 -11 17 -9 15 -6 13 -1 16 -10 14 -9 12 -5 16 -1 14 -1 11 -11 CSJ 16 12 42 -3 36 -11 31 -1 29 -3 25 -7 21 -7 26 -7 23 -3 19 -7 24 -8 21 -7 18 -2 23 -3 20 -4 17 -1 22 -1 19 -3 16 -3 21 -1 18 -5 15 -7 16 38 -4 33 -6 28 -3 26 -7 23 -3 19 -7 24 -2 21 -1 17 -10 22 -5 19 -7 16 -6 21 -1 18 -5 15 -7 20 -1 17 -6 14 -9 19 -2 16 -9 14 -2 24 33 -6 29 -3 24 -8 23 -3 20 -4 17 -1 21 -1 18 -5 15 -7 19 -7 17 -1 14 -5 18 -5 16 -1 13 -7 17 -6 15 -4 12 -11 16 -9 14 -8 12 -4 CSW 16 12 44 -2 38 -7 32 -7 30 -8 26 -9 22 -7 27 -10 24 -4 20 -6 25 -10 22 -7 19 -0 24 -4 21 -3 17.11 23 -1 20 -2 17 -0 22 -1 19 -4 16 -3 16 40 -2 35 -1 29 -7 27 -10 24 -4 20 -6 25 -3 22 -1 18 -8 23 -6 20 -6 17 -3 22 - 19 -4 16 -3 21 -0 18 -4 15 -6 20 -1 17 -6 14 -9 24 35 -1 30 -8 25 -10 24 -4 21 -3 17 -11 22 -1 19 -4 16 -3 20 -6 17 -11 15 -1 19 -4 16 -10 14 -3 18 -4 16 -0 13 -6 17 -6 15 -4 12 -11 CWN 14 12 43 -7 38 -0 32 -1 30 -2 26 -5 22 -3 27 -5 24 -0 20 -3 25 -6 22 -3 18 -9 24 -0 20 -11 17 -8 22 -9 19 -11 16 -9 21 -9 19 -0 16 -0 16 39 -7 34 -7 29 -2 27 -5 24.0 20 -3 24 -11 21 -9 18 -4 23 -2 20 -3 17 -1 21 -9 19 -0 16.0 20 -8 18 -1 15 -3 19 -9 17 -3 14 -7 24 34 -7 30 -2 25 -6 24 -0 20 -11 17 -B 21 -9 19 -0 16 -0 20 -3 17 -8 14 -11 19 -0 16 -7 14 -0 18 -1 15 -9 13 -4 17 -3 15 -1 12 -9 CSJ 14 12 45 -3 39 -7 33 -4 31 -5 27 -5 23 -2 28 -6 24 -11 21 -0 26 -6 23 -2 19 -6 24 -11 21 -9 18 -4 23 -8 20 -8 17 -5 22 -8 19 -9 16 -8 16 41 -2 35 -11 30 -4 28 -6 24 -11 21 -0 25 -11 22 -8 19 -1 24 -1 21 -0 17.9 22 -8 19 -9 16 -8 21 -6 18 -9 15 -10 20 -7 18 -0 15 -2 13.3 24 35 -11 31 -5 26 -6 24 -11 21 -9 18 -4 22 -8 19 -9 16 -8 21 -0 18.4 15 -6 19.9 17.3 14 -7 18.9 16 -5 13 -10 18.0 15 -8 CSW 14 12 47 -5 41 -5 34 -11 32 -11 28 -9 24.3 29 -11 2G- 1 22 -0 27 -9 24.3 20 -5 26 -1 22 -10 19 -3 24 -9 21 -8 18 -3 23 -9 20 -9 17 -6 16 43 -1 37 -8 31 -9 29 -11 26 -1 22 -0 27 -2 23 -9 20 -0 25 -2 22 -0 18 -7 23 -9 20 -9 17 -6 22 -6 19 -8 16 -7 21 -6 18.10 15 -10 24 37 -8 32 -11 27 -9 26 -1 22 -10 19 -3 23 -9 20 -9 17 -6 22 -0 19 -3 16 -3 20 -9 18 -1 15 -3 19 -8 17 -2 14 -6 18 -10 16 -5 13 -10 CSJ 12 12 50 -5 44 -1 37 -2 35 -0 30 -7 25 -9 31 -9 27 -9 23 -5 29 -6 25 -9 21 -9 27 -9 24 -3 20 -5 26 -4 23 -0 19 -5 25 -3 22 -0 18 -7 16 45 -10 40 -0 33 -9 31 -9 27 -9 23 -5 28 -10 25 -3 21 -3 26 -10 23 -5 19 -9 25 -3 22 -0 18.7 24 -0 20 -11 17 -8 22 -11 20 -0 16 -11 24 40 -0 35 -0 29 -6 27 -9 24 -3 20 -5 25 -3 22 -0 18 -7 23 -5 20 -5 17 -3 22 -0 19 -3 16 -3 20 -11 18 -3 15 -5 20 -0 17 -6 14 -9 CSW 12 12 52 -11 46 -2 39 -0 36 -8 32 -0 27 -0 33 -4 29 -1 24 -6 30 -11 27 -0 22 -9 29 -1 25 -5 21 -5 27 -8 24 -2 20 -4 26 -5 23 -1 19 -6 16 48 -0 42 -0 35 -5 33 -4 29 -1 24 -6 30 -3 26 -5 22 -4 28 - 24 - 20 -8 26 -5 23.1 19 -6 25 -1 21 -11 18 -6 24 -0 21 -0 17 -8 24 42 -0 36 -8 30 -11 29 -1 25 -5 21 -5 26 -5 23 -1 19 -6 _24 -6 21 -5 18 -1 . 23 -1 20 -2 17 -0 _21 -11 19 -2 16 -2 21 -0 18 -4 15 -6 20 jrM6 c2 1/1417-. 311). 5 For W111! f Load - -8 Th ids NOTE: Reference Wind Load Notes page 16. A PIR -T A-P 19 'A GE GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. By Chk'd By •:.-:•••••.' • ' • 7 Job No 52. IS Date / / 22 111 CtiEck 13 A-TTea.Y LOAi KJ6 /43.719 Pt/i76. Pfle_Leael c.)5A. — — ri 74 , ciepht 4>F Siqb - lic)e,-4e4-kfr_=64"Ive"-urs Z.C.S 2 1 0 ° A.f& s , ovea_ . ki P)Ls.s a c (G, WI o k.. CAPA-e- TY lk) 47 40 03'S "• SZ 0 )673.7Go Sfis - /fAi 70o , General Information Dead Load k/ft 0.09 Live Load k/ft 0.58 Query Values Title : Dsgnr: Description : opppe: Multi-Span Concrete Beam Date: _ Page 1 ' • Description Fy 60,000.0 psi All Spans Considered as Individual Beam ACI Dead Load Factor 1.40 f'c 3,000.0 psi Stirrup Fy 60,000.0 psi ACt Live Load Factor 1.70 ��onc,eteMe��ber �mforr�mtior -'------------------'----' ---- -- ---- -'--' U , Span ft e.00 o»o 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 I A Beam Width in 12.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Beam Depth in 7.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 �� End ..' Pinned ~.. ',~.. �.�' Pinned �="' Pinned inned inned inned inned ^�.~"' .. .--- ~- Pinned --- .---_ �-_ --- �--- --_ Pinned --- Pinned -- Pinned � -~- .^^~- ~^ - _ � .. _ ^ ~-- n�nr�on�, "'="" ""~ -- c�_ ' � �v� v Left Right Loads Mmax @ Cntr k-ft C.5-D- uo 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 @ X~ ft 3.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ouo 0.00 0.00 0.00 Mn* Phi k-ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mom@ Left End k-ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mn* Phi k-ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Max © Right End k-ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mn°Phi k-ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Shear @ Left k 3.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Shear @ Right k 3.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 __ __ U u bL © Left k 0.27 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 00 0.00 U'@Left k 1.74 0.00 ouo 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Total @ Left k 2.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 DL @nigh, k 0.27 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 LL @ Right k 1.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Total © Right x' 2.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Max. Deflection in 'o.ous 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 @ X~ ft 3.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 �M�� '-- -- ' ' --- -'-- Stirrup Rebar Area in2 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.820 Spacing @ Left in 2.50 0.00 0u0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Spacing @.c°L in 999.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Spacing ©.zrL in 999.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Spacing @.o^� in 999.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Spoving@ .u°L in 999.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0u0 Spacing @ Right in 2.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 U n Location ft 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Moment k-ft 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Shear k 0.0 ou 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Deflection in 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 (c) 1983-97 ENERCALC • KW-0601732, V5.0.1, 15-Mar-1997 m EL IL 4543 MORTENSON The Construction Organization A OTA own 1 *e�* *e�* INES 700 MEADOW LANE NORIPI NM =MOO REGISTERED ARCHITECT 14144 PAUL KENT PEARSE STATE OF WAShING1ON cLeodUSA New Switch Center 3417 South 120 Place Seattle, Washington 98178 PROJECT MANUAL 11-23-1999 GBA SWINE MIMI RECEIVED AMOSATIIIN INO. CITY OF TUKWILA limillasere • isaltsets NOV 3 0 19:313 anus • Masa • Nab Coma* Hadquimin PERMIT CENTER Lama Kamm MU NOT Maim Wm 918.492,0100 99 0 L I I r L TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL 01001 GENERAL CONDITIONS 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05310 STEEL DECK 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07841 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10425 SIGNS 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 114 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11700 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ITEMS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12511 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13000 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100 VALVES 15145 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING 15782 ROOFTOP UNITS 15783 INSTALLATION OF PREPURCHASED ROOFTOP AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15891 METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15932 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15975 STAND -ALONE CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16441 SWITCHBOARDS 16442 PANELBOARDS 16461 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 16950 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING Project Specifications - Table of Contents McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SECTION 01001 - GENERAL CONDITIONS D . Where conflicts exist between AIA Document A201 and the Contract Manual prepared by M. A. Mortenson, the Contract Manual shall govern. 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. GENERAL CONDITIONS • "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987, Articles 1 through 14, inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is incorporated as fully as if herein set forth. For brevity, AIA Document A201 is also referred to in Contract Documents as "General Conditions." General Conditions of the Contract for Construction apply to all phases or parts of the Work. This document is on file for review at Architect Engineer's office or at Owner's office. END OF SECTION 01001 01001-1 SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 through 16 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples to verify that products, materials and systems proposed for use comply with provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Coordination Drawings: Special type of Shop Drawing that show relationship and integration of different construction elements that require close and careful coordination during fabrication or during installation to fit in restricted space provided or to function as intended. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a Transmittal Form. Attach one copy of Transmittal Form to each required number of sets or copies of submittal. Submittals not so transmitted shall be returned to Contractor unreviewed. 1. Submittals shall be based upon requirements of each Specification Section. a. Submittals containing information of more than one Specification Section shall be returned for resubmittal. B. Submittal Identification: Contractor shall assign submittal designations utilizing following format and system. 1. Each transmittal form shall have an identification using specification Section Number. 2. Contractor shall assign submittal identification utilizing following as an example of format and system: a. For first submittal of Section 09300 - Tile; Number for this submittal would be 09300 - 1A, (1A) designates that this is first time submitted from this Section. If this submittal is marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected ", then resubmittal would retain identification 09300 -1 but the (A) would be changed to read: 09300 -1 B; if required, next resubmittal would be identified to read: 09300-1C, until this submittal is approved. b. For second submittal of Section 09300 - Tile; Number for this submittal would be 09300 -2A; if not approved, then resubmittal to read: 09300 -2B. C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal to Owner sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 - 1 1. Include following information on each print: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, related construction activities and other submittals that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work, to review submittals concurrently for coordination, so processing will not be delayed. Architect and Owner reserve right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with another submittal until related submittals are received. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 5 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. M. A. Mortenson will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. c. Allow 7 days for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of Contractor's failure to transmit submittals through M. A. Mortenson to Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor (if applicable). f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of Specification Section. I. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 2. Prior to submittal to Architect and M. A. Mortenson, Contractor shall stamp Shop Drawings and Product Data to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken, indicating: a. Verification of field dimensions and quantities. b. Verification of field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data. c. Review and coordination of submittal data with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 3. Submittal not recording Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken shall be returned to Contractor unreviewed. 4. Provide a clear space 4" x 5" on Shop Drawings and Product Data to record Architect and M. A. Mortenson review and approval markings and action taken. E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for handling. Transmit each submittal with approved Transmittal Form. Submittals containing information about more than one item or one Specification Section will be returned unreviewed. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned without action. 1. Record relevant information and requests for data on Transmittal Form. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 - 2 • i i McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Include Contractor's signed certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fast -track Considerations: Due to the condensed nature of the construction schedule for this project, facsimile transmission of submittals (one copy) directly to the Architect for "preliminary" review will be allowed as approved by the Construction Manager. "Preliminary" review will not relieve the Contractor of the duty to formally submit as outlined in this section. G. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not waived or relieved by Architect's or M. A. Mortenson's review of submittals. H. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not waived or relieved by Architect's or M. A. Mortenson's review, unless written acceptance of specific deviation is given. I. Unsolicited Submittals: Unsolicited submittals will be returned to sender without action. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Provide Shop Drawings as complete submittals, no partial sets. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. B. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. C. Shop Drawings include but are not limited to the following: fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, design mix formulas, templates and similar drawings. Include the following: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 5. Compliance with specified standards. D. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full -size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2" x 11" but no larger than size of Contract Drawings. E. Submittal: Submit one (1) correctable translucent reproducible print and four (4) blue- or black -line prints of each drawing. Submit prints without folds; flat sheets, if size permits, or rolled in tubes. 1. Architect will review and stamp drawings marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. 2. Architect will retain one (1) print of each drawing. M. A. Mortenson will retain two (2) prints of each drawing, send one (1) print of each drawing to Owner, and return reproducible and one (1) print to Contractor. F. Do not use or permit Shop Drawing prints without Contractor and Architect stamps indicating action taken to be used in connection with construction. G. Submit Coordination Drawings where required for integration of different construction elements. Show construction sequences and relationships of separate components where necessary to avoid conflicts in utilization of space available. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 - 3 H. Distribution: Furnish prints to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others as required for performance of construction activities. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Coordination Drawings shall be submitted for the Switch Room with all HVAC, electrical, fire protection, and Owner - furnished equipment shown. 1. Do not proceed with installation until applicable print of Shop Drawing is in installer's possession. 2. One print shall be marked up and maintained by Contractor as a "Record Drawing." A. Collect standard printed data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." B. Product Data includes but is not limited to; printed information such as manufacturer's product specifications and installation catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. C. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Data includes information on several products, clearly mark copies to indicate applicable information only. Include following information: 1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 4. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 6. Notation of coordination requirements. 7. Provide copy of manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) where applicable.. D. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of Contract Documents has been confirmed. E. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data to Architect and Owner, where selection of options or colors by Architect is required. F. Submittals: Submit five (5) copies of each required Product Data submittal to Architect; submit two (2) additional copies where copies are required for maintenance manuals. 1. Product Data submitted with extra information not clearly marked or deleted shall be returned to Contractor without review for resubmittal. 2. Architect will review and stamp product data marked with action taken and corrections required. 3. Architect will retain one (1) copy, M. A. Mortenson will retain two (2) copies (one (1) copy for Owner) and return all other copies to Contractor. a. One copy shall be marked up and maintained by Contractor as a "Record Document." 4. Unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of Contract Documents, submittal may serve as final submittal. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 - 4 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Do not use or permit copies of Product Data without Contractor and Architect stamps indicating action taken to be used in connection with construction. G. Distribution: Furnish copies to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others as required for performance of construction activities. 1. Do not proceed with installation until applicable copy of Product Data is in installer's possession. 1.6 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self - explanatory action stamp. Stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate action taken: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Submittal marked "Reviewed," that part of the Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 2. Final- But - Restricted Release: Submittal marked "Furnish As Corrected," that part of the Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: Submittal marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittal marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be used at Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. C. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or recdrd purposes, for special processing or other Contractor activity, submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 - 5 SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents. w 1. Project Record Documents required include: I a. Marked -up copies of Contract Drawings. b. Marked -up copies of Shop Drawings. c. Marked -up copies of Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders. d. Marked -up Product Data submittals. 1.... e. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. f. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically. B. Specific expanded requirements of this Section are included in individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. C. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store apart from Contract Documents used for construction. L. Do not permit use for construction purposes. Maintain in good order, and in a clean, dry, legible condition. Protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire- resistant location. Provide access for reference and inspection by Architect or Owner during normal working hours. 1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Mark -up Procedure: During construction period, maintain a set of blue- or black -line prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record Document purposes. 1. Mark Drawings to indicate actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Give attention to information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of conduits, piping, and ductwork. I d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Changes made by Change Order. g. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 2. Mark completely and accurately record prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions. Where Shop Drawings ( are marked, show cross - reference on Contract Drawings location. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3. Mark record sets with red erasable colored pencil; use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 4. Mark important additional information which was shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 5. Note construction change directive numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification. B. Responsibility for Markup: Individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is the installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, is required to prepare the mark -up on record Drawings. 1. Accurately record information in an understandable Drawing technique. 2. Record data as it has been obtained. At concealed installations, record and check mark -up prior to concealment. C. At time of Substantial Completion, submit Record Drawings to Architect (through M. A. Mortenson) for Owner's records. Organize into sets, bind and label sets for Owner's continued use. 1.4 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL A. During construction period, maintain one copy of the Project Specifications, including addenda and modifications issued, for Project Record Document purposes. B. Mark Project Specifications to indicate actual installation where installation varies from that indicated. Note related Project Record Drawing information, where applicable. Give particular attention to selection of product options, substitutions, and information on concealed conditions that would be difficult to identify or measure and record. C. In each Specification Section where products, materials or units of equipment are specified or scheduled, mark the copy with the proprietary name and model number of the product furnished. D. Record name of manufacturer, supplier, installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with record Product Data submittals and maintenance manuals. E. Note related record Product Data, where applicable. For each principal product specified, indicate whether Product Data has been submitted in maintenance manual instead of submitted as record Product Data. F. Upon completion of mark -up, submit record Project Specifications to Architect (through M. A. Mortenson) for Owner's records. 1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. During construction period, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal for Project Record Document purposes. 1. Mark Product Data to indicate actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Product Data submitted. Include significant changes in product delivered to site, and changes in manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. 2. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 - 2 . Note related Change Orders and mark -up of record Drawings, where applicable. Upon completion of mark -up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to Architect (through M. A. Mortenson) for Owner's records. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in the manual, instead of submittal as record Product Data. 1.6 . MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS a. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. b. Documented qualification of installation firms. c. Performance testing. d. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. e. Final inspection and correction procedures. END OF SECTION 01720 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record - keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for use and reference. Submit to Architect (through M. A. Mortenson) for Owner's records. 1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to following: PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING A. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait until the end of the Project. Architect will periodically review record documents to assure compliance with this requirement. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 - 3 SECTION 01730 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for: 1. Preparation and submittal of operating and maintenance manuals for building operating systems or equipment. 2. Preparation and submittal of instruction manuals covering preservation, care and maintenance of architectural products and finishes. 3. Instruction of Owner's operating personnel in operation and maintenance of building systems and equipment. B. Special operating and maintenance data requirements for specific equipment or building operating systems are included in Specification Sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintenance Manual Preparation: Use personnel trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved. 1. For written instructions, use personnel skilled in technical writing to extent necessary for communication of essential data. 2. For Drawings or diagrams, use draftsperson to prepare Drawings clearly in an understandable format. B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: Use experienced instructors trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved. 1.4 MANUAL APPEARANCE A. Prepare manuals in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. Organize into suitable sets of manageable size. Where possible, assemble instructions for similar equipment into a single binder. 1. Binder: Provide heavy -duty, commercial quality, 2 inch thick, 3 -ring vinyl covered binder, sized for 8 -1/2" by 11" paper. Provide a clear plastic sleeve on spine and a pocket inside each cover. a. Where two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data, correlate data in each binder into related groupings in accordance with Project Specifications table of contents. Cross - reference binders where necessary. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington b. Identify each binder on the front and spine, with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL ", Project title and Project number. Indicate a volume number for multiple binders. 2. Dividers: Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate Section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Provide a typed description of product and major parts of equipment included in Section on each divider. 3. Text Material: For written material, use manufacturer's standard printed material, or if it is not available, provide specially prepared data, typewritten, on 8 -1/2" by 11", 20 pound white bond paper. 4. Drawings: Where used, provide reinforced binder tabs on punched edge of drawing and bind in manual. Fold drawing up to 11" by 17" to same size as text pages and use as a fold -out. 1.5 MANUAL CONTENT a. Over -sized Drawing: Place drawing, neatly folded to fit in front or rear pocket of binder. Insert a typewritten page indicating; drawing title, description of contents and drawing location at the appropriate location in manual. A. In each manual include information specified in individual Specification Section, and following information for each major component of building equipment and controls: 1. General system and equipment description. 2. Design operating instructions. 3. Copy of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. Record Drawings 5. As- builts of automated controls. 6. Start-up or Commissioning sheets. 7. Troubleshooting Guides. 8. Manufacturer's Installation, Maintenance and Safety Information. 9. Equipment Shop drawings and Product Literature. 10. Copies of warranties. 11. Repair instructions including spare parts listing. 12. Sources of required maintenance materials and related services. 13. Operation Instructions for normal and test modes. 14. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 15. Table of Contents. 16. As- builts of all riser diagrams. 17. Point/address listing of all devices. B. Organize each manual into separate Sections for each piece of related equipment. Each manual shall contain following: 1. Title Page: Provide in a transparent plastic envelope as first sheet of each manual. Provide following information: a. Subject matter covered by manual. b. Name and address of the Project. c. Date of submittal. d. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. e. Name and address of Architect; f. Cross reference to related systems In other volumes of operating and maintenance manuals. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 - 2 L L t i. r_ McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Table of Contents: After Title Page, include a typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged systematically according to Project Specifications format. Include a list of each product included, identified by product name or other appropriate identifying symbol and indexed to content of the volume. a. Where more than one volume is used, provide a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each binder of the set. 3. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard printed data, provide sheets that are pertinent to part or product installed. Mark each sheet to identify each part or product included in installation. Where more than one item is included, identify each item, using appropriate references from Contract Documents. Identify only data or items that are applicable to installation, delete (clearly mark -out) references to information that is not applicable. 4 Written Text: Where manufacturer's standard printed data is not available, and information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance, or it is necessary to provide additional information, prepare written text to provide information. Organize in a consistent format with separate headings for different procedures and in a logical sequence of instruction for operating or maintenance procedure. 5. Drawings: Provide specially prepared drawings to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate relationship of component parts of equipment or systems, or to provide control or flow diagrams. a. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of Manuals. 6. Warranties, Bonds and Service Contracts: Provide a copy of each warranty, bond or service contract in appropriate manual for information of Owner's operating personnel. Provide written data outlining procedures to be followed in event of product failure. 1.6 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit six (6) copies of each completed manual, in final form, to M. A. Mortenson for distribution. See to Specification Sections for additional requirements of various pieces of equipment and operating systems. B. Equipment and Systems: Provide the following for each piece of equipment and each building operating system. Not required for Owner - furnished equipment and systems. 1. Description: Provide a complete description of each unit and related component parts, include the following: a. Equipment or system function. b. Operating characteristics. c. Limiting conditions. d. Engineering data and tests. e. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's Information: For each manufacturer of a component part or piece of equipment provide the following: a. Printed operating and maintenance instructions. b. Assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. c. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 - 3 3. Maintenance Procedures: Provide information detailing essential maintenance procedures, ' • • include the following: a. Routine operations. b. Trouble-shooting guide. C.' Disassembly, repair and reassembly d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. Operating Procedures: Provide information on equipment and system operating • procedures, include the following: a. Start-up procedures. • b. Equipment or system break-in. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. • d.. Regulation and control procedures. e. Instructions on stopping. Shut-down and emergency instructions. •.• • g. • Special operating Instructions. 1.7 INSTRUCTION OF THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL END OF SECTION 01730 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or system as the basis of instruction. Review contents in detail to, explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Applicable) OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 - 4 tJ U 5. Servicing Schedule: Provide a schedule of routine servicing requirements. • 6. Coordination Drawings: Provide Contractor's Coordination Drawings. Provide as-installed color-coded piping diagrams, where required for identification. 1 1 A. Prior to final inspection, instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon place and time. t. LI LI ft t‘: SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to General Conditions for terms of Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for products and installations: See individual Sections of Project Specifications. 3. Certifications, other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of warranty on the Work that incorporates products, nor does it relieve sub- contractors, suppliers and manufacturers required to countersign special warranties with Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties: Preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by or incorporated in Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for Owner. 1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that was damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate warranty by written endorsement. Reinstated warranty shall be equal to original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to comply with Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 - 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable). END OF SECTION 01740 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Owner reserves right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. A. Submit written warranties to Owner prior to date certified for Substantial Completion. If Owner's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a date for warranties other than date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by Owner, by separate agreement with Contractor during construction period, submit properly executed warranties to Owner within ten (10) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by Contractor, or Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by required parties. Submit a draft to Owner for approval prior to final execution. 1. See individual Specification Sections for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. C. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two (2) copies of each warranty and bond properly executed. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on table of contents of Project Specifications. 1. Binder: Heavy -duty, commercial quality, durable 3 -ring vinyl covered 2 inch thick, for 8-1/2" by 11" paper. Provide a clear plastic sleeve on spine and a pocket inside each cover. a. Identify binder on front and spine with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS ", Project title, Project number, and name of Contractor. Indicate a volume number for multiple binders. 2. Dividers: Heavy paper with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark each tab to identify product or installation. Provide a typed description of product or installation, including name of product, and name, address and telephone number of installer. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 - 2 SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 1.5 SUBMITTALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building. 2. Patching and repairs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for record document requirements. 4. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 5. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Building Owner's (Landlord) or Tenant (McLeodUSA) property. B. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's Landlord or Tenant ( McLeodUSA] property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. C. Propose dust control measures, relating to demolition sequence. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Building Owner nor Tenant ( McLeodUSA) assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted. C. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the course of this Contract. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner. 1. Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work. 2. Do not disturb asbestos or any material suspected of containing asbestos except under the procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Building Owner's on -site operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Building Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Building Owner and to governing authorities. B. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Building Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Building Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Erect temporary protection, such as railings, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. C. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 2. Protect air - handling equipment. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 3 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply . with governing environmental protection regulations. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain portable fire- suppression devices during flame - cutting operations. 4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On -site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 6. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations. B. Remove existing floor covering indicated on drawings. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 4 'C . Disposal Transport demolished materials off Building Owner's property and legally dispose of ".them. 3 8 CLEANING Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations: END OF SECTION 02070 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 5 "ti SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY B. Cast -in -place concrete includes the following: 1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs -on- grade. 3. Equipment pads and bases. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slab -on- grade. 2 Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete paving and walks. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement admixtures, curing compounds, and others if requested by the Engineer. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. D. Design mixes for each concrete mix including results. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material design and extent to that indicated for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests on soil as well as slump air content, temperature, and compressive strength for placed concrete. D. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. 1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "A -C or B -B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form," Class I. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. D. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, adjustable - length, removable or snap -off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in the concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M Grade 400), deformed. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 1 i r i 1 i I. L i 1 1 1 I 1 a. Air -Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Air -Mix or Perma -Air, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co. d. MB -VR or Micro -Air, Master Builders, Inc. e. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. Sika AER, Sika Corp. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain -steel bars, ASTM A 615 / A 615M, Grade 60 cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. C. Normal - Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect. D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. E. Water: Potable. F. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. G. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: H. Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp. b. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Eucon WR -75, Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. f. Metco W.R., Metaicrete Industries. g. Prokrete -N, Prokrete Industries. h. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp. I. High -Range Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Super P, Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. b. Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. f. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries. g. PSPL, Prokrete Industries. h. Sikament 300, Sika Corp. J. Water- Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Q -Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. b. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc. f. Accel -Set, Metalcrete Industries. K. Water- Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. PSI -R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daratard -17, W.R. Grace & Co. d. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc. e. Protard, Prokrete Industries. f. Plastiment, Sika Corporation. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two - component, semi - rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. (305 g /sq. m), complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. C. Moisture - Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene- coated burlap. D. Water -Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g /L. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: a. Highseal, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Sealco - VOC, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Safe Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp. d. Aqua -Cure, Euclid Chemical Co. e. Dress & Seal WB, L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc. g. Vocomp -20, W.R. Meadows, Inc. h. Metcure, Metalcrete Industries. i. Stontop CS1, Stonhard, Inc. 1) Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp. 2) Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co. 3) Weld- Crete, Larsen Products Corp. 4) Everweld, L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5) Herculox, Metalcrete Industries. 6) Ready Bond, Symons Corp. 1) Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co. 2) Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. 3) Day -Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp. 4) SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co. 5) Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co. 6) Hornweld, A.C. Horn, Inc. 7) Everbond, L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 8) Acryl -Set, Master Builders Inc. 9) Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc. 10) Acrylpave, Metalcrete Industries. 11) Sonocrete, Sonneborn - Chemrex. 12) Stonlock LB2, Stonhard, Inc. 13) Strong Bond, Symons Corp. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington E. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film- forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aquafilm, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co. c. E -Con, L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Confilm, Master Builders, Inc. e. Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries. F. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be Incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co. b. Specification -Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. c. Resi -Bond (J -58), Dayton Superior. d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co. e. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc. f. Epabond, L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. g. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc. h. Rezi -Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc. i. Metco Hi -Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries. j. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod, Sika Corp. k. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc. I. R -600 Series, Symons Corp. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES 2.6 ADMIXTURES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Prepare design mixes as indicated. 1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing. 2. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 15 percent of cement content by weight. B. Submit written reports to Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Engineer. C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. Exterior Pavement - 3500 psi, 28 -day compressive strength; water - cement ratio, 0.54 maximum, 6% ± 1% air - entrained. 2. Footings and Floor Slab - 3000 psi, 28 -day compressive strength; water - cement ratio, 0.57. Footings to be 6% ± 1% air - entrained. Floor slab to be non air - entrained. D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 4 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 3. Concrete containing high -range water - reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches (200 mm) after adding admixture to site - verified 2 - 3 inch slump concrete. 4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using in Work. A. Use water - reducing admixture or high -range water - reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Use high -range water - reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with water - cement ratios below 0.50. D. Use air - entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of 6.0 plus or minus 1.0 percent for all mixes. 1. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a surface hardener: 0 to 2 percent air. E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (29 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's Manual of Standard Practice. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder /barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal. D. Provide temporary openings for clean -outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder /barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. B. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. C. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -grade at points of contact between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Provide joint fillers, joint sealants, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. E. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -grade to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by one -fourth of slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide by one -fourth of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. 2. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. 3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 ft. (4.5 m) in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). 4. Provide joint fillers, joint sealants, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 5 Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. A. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. 3.6 PREPARING FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low -VOC, form - coating compound before placing reinforcement. B. Do not allow excess form - coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in -place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust - preventative material. Rust - stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand - spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. F. Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. H. Hot - Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water - soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 L McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4. Use water - reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough- Formed Finish: Provide a rough - formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form- facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth - Formed Finish: Provide a smooth - formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as -cast concrete surface obtained with selected form - facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo; and where indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power- driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power- driven floats or by hand - floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -11 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation - control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not Tess than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture - retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified. D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods: 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water -fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 inch (100 mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. E. Provide moisture - retaining cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete such as paint, resilient tile, sheet vinyl, carpet, or high build epoxy. G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method. 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture - retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 3.12 REMOVING FORMS 3.13 REUSING FORMS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form - removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in Tess than 14 days or until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form - facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form - facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form - facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form - coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect. B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh (1.2 mm) sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spells, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spelling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. E. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. F. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Engineer. 3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Contractor will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as directed by Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air - entrained concrete. c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive- strength specimens. d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive- strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field -cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive- Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) more than the first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 L END OF SECTION 03300 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 4 Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3:4 MPa). Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready -mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section " Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and miscellaneous steel framing. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high- strength bolted slip - critical, direct - tension, or tensioned shear /bearing connections. 4. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products, including the following, comply with requirements. 1. Structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 2. Shop primers. 3. Nonshrink grout. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single -Angle Members." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings." 3. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 4. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- - Steel." 1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, Instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 B. Cold- Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Hot - Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. E. Carbon -Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65 -35 (ASTM A 27M, Grade 450 -240), medium - strength carbon steel. F High- Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148, Grade 80 -50 (ASTM A 148M, (Grade 550 -345). G. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold - finished carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B. H. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows: I. High- Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 2.2 PRIMER A. Primer: SSPC -Paint 25; red iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil and alkyd primer. 2.3 GROUT 1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for all other shapes except for structural steel beams. 2. High- Strength, Low -Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Steel: ASTM A 572 (ASTM A 572M), Grade 50 for structural steel beams. 1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). 2. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon - steel, hex - head bolts; and carbon -steel nuts. 3. Washers: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). 1. Finish: Hot -dip zinc - coating, ASTM A 153, Class C. A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage- Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water - reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30- minute working time. 2.4 FABRICATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 1. Identify high- strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) and maintain markings until steel has been erected. 2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 3. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. 4. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. 5. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded. C. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame -cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Shop install and tighten nonhigh- strength bolts, except where high- strength bolts are indicated. B. Shop install and tighten high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high- strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip - critical, direct - tension, or tensioned shear /bearing connections. C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. 2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back- side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds % inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high- strength bolted with slip - critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows: 1. SSPC -SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning." McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 �r? 1 l r t L 1 , 3.1 EXAMINATION 1, PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to . manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Apply a 1 -coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). A. Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. 2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. D. Shop - bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. In addition to visual inspection, shop - welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option if the testing agency finds the visual inspection to be unsatisafactory. 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2 -2T." 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. f A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements. B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 ERECTION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Install and tighten nonhigh- strength bolts, except where high- strength bolts are indicated. B. Install and tighten high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high- strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip - critical, direct - tension, or tensioned shear /bearing connections. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6 rrF ? 1 1. 1. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. A. Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. D. Field- bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. In addition to visual inspection, field- welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option if the testing agency finds the visual inspection to be unsatisfactory. 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2 -2T." 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 3.6 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section "Painting." END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 7 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for touchup and repair painting of deck. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified. C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Research reports or evaluation reports of the.model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence steel deck's compliance with the building code in effect for the Project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- - Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." C. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. STEEL DECK 05310 - 1 PART2- PRODUCTS 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Buildings Co. 2. ASC Pacific Inc. 3. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 5. Epic Metals Corp. 6. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc. 7. Robertson A United Dominion Co. 8. Roof Deck, Inc. 9. United Steel Deck, Inc. 10. Verco Manufacturing Co. 11. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp. 12. Walker Div. of Butler Manufacturing Co. 13. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling- Pittsburgh Steel Corp. 2.2 ROOF DECK 2.3 ACCESSORIES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top flange stiffening grooves to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Decks ", in SDI Publication No. 29, and the following: 1. Prime - Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A611,GRADE C minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and bottom surface shop primed with gray or white baked -on, lead- and chromate -free rust - inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT -P- 664. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Span Condition: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated Steel Thickness: As indicated. A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion - resistant, low- velocity, powder- actuated or pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners; or self - drilling, self- threading screws. C. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion - resistant, hexagonal washer head; self - drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 (4.8 mm) minimum diameter. STEEL DECK 05310.2 t r. L 1 t. i c d McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Rib Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, 0.0359 -inch- (0.91 -mm -) thick minimum ridge and valley plates, finish strips, and reinforcing channels, of same material as roof deck. F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z- Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material and thickness as deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. G. Weld Washers: Manufacturer's standard uncoated -steel sheet weld washers, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick with 3/8 -inch (9.5 -mm) minimum diameter prepunched hole. H. Flat Receiver Pan: Manufacturer's standard size, single -piece steel sheet, 0.071 -inch- (1.8 -mm -) thick minimum units, of same material as deck panels. Cut holes for drains in the field. I. Steel Sheet Accessories: ASTM A 446, G 60 (ASTM A 446M, Z 180) coating class, galvanized according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). J. Repair Paint: Lead- and chromate -free rust - inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT -P -664. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection. D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 3.4 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: As indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. 1. End Joints: Lapped, 2 inches minimum. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, as indicated, using one of the following methods: 1. Mechanically fasten with self - drilling No. 10 diameter or larger carbon steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: D. Roof Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z- closures to deck according to SDI recommendations to provide tight - fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by the Contractor will perform field quality - control testing. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spot welds, and abraded areas on bottom surface of prime - painted deck immediately after installation and apply repair paint. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking Is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310 - 4 :�coue. v.. SECTION 05500 -. METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Steel ladders. 2. Loose steel lintels, bearing plates and leveling plates. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Miscellaneous metal trim. 5. Pipe bollards. 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete for Miscellaneous Concrete." 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural -steel framing system components. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements. A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. C. Welding Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" article. A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." 3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.6 COORDINATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing Product Type (manufacturing method) and as follows: 1. Cold- formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 2. Hot formed steel tubing: ASTM A501 C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. D. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT -P -664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field- applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 1 1 B. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold - applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Bolts and Nuts: Regulat hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with nex nuts, ASTM A 563. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 2.5 GROUT McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated Toads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat Toss. I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.7 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. B. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8 -by -3 -inch (10- by- 64 -mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches (406 mm) apart. C. Bar Rungs: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. F. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung by a proprietary process. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mebac; IKG Borden. b. SLIP -NOT; W. S. Molnar Company. 2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural -steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete work. B. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 4.. 1. Exterior. 2.12 PIPE BOLLARDS adjacent construction retained by frami and supports. Cut, dhU, and tap units to receive hondwore, hangers, and similar items. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded 'ointn, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 mm) from corners, and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the foliowing locations: A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and desi nating finishes. B. Finish meta fabrications afte assembly. 2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-di galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard Iisted below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron 2. AGTMA153/A153K4. for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Primin uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." McLeodUSA, Smattlm, Washington C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in uoncrmte, sprayed-on finoprooOng, or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevlces, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. METAL FABRICATIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through - bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4: At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 3.2 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core - drilled holes as indicated. After bollards have been inserted into holes, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface. END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 f j SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative- treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne - treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire- retardant - treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities of treated materials. C. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire- retardant - treated wood products with requirements indicated. D. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. E. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence fire- retardant - treated wood compliance with building code in effect for Project. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility for Fire - Retardant - Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire- retardant- treated wood product from one source and by a single producer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. C. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb /cu. ft. (4.0 kg /cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 t f. t C. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.3 FIRE - RETARDANT - TREATED MATERIALS McLeod USA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Where fire- retardant - treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire- retardant - treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide fire- retardant - treated wood acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which a current model code research or evaluation report exists that evidences compliance of fire - retardant - treated wood for application indicated. B. Interior Type A: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1. Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities are not reduced below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment. 3. Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and concealed locations in roofs and exterior walls. D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Provide the following grades and species: 1. Grade: Construction or No. 2. 2. Species: Douglas fir - larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board -size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species. 2.6 STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant- treated plywood panels with grade, C -D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated. 2.7 FASTENERS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire Brads and Staples: FS FF -N -105. C. Power - Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M) F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER -272 for power- driven staples, P- nails, and allied fasteners. 2. Fastening schedule of applicable building code. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 1_ 1, 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions of above-referenced guide. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Plywood Backing Panels: Screw to supports. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 06100 - 5 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Laminate -clad cabinets (plastic- covered casework). 2. Plastic - laminate countertops. 3. Shop finishing of woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1. Plastic laminates. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior woodwork. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork. A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large -scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.8 COORDINATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Single- Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork specified in this Section. B. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that woodwork meets requirements of grades specified. A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet -work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium - Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2. 4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. B. High- Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high - pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Laminart. c. Nevamar Corp. d. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Urea - formaldehyde. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets. C. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMAA156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. E. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of BHMA A156.9. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Custom. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating. 2.5 CASEWORK TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 1. Grade: Custom. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 D. Wood Species: Red oak, rift sawn. f $ 2.6 LAMINATE -CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC- COVERED CASEWORK) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate -clad cabinets. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High - pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP -50, 0.050 -inch (1.270 -mm) nominal thickness. 2. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42, 0.042 -inch (1.067 -mm) nominal thickness. 3. Vertical Surfaces: GP -50, 0.050 -inch (1.270 -mm) nominal thickness. 4. Edges: GP -50, 0.050 -inch (1.270 -mm) nominal thickness. 5. Edges: PVC T -mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish where indicated. D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: High - pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP -28. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: a. Refer to Drawings for Plastic Laminate selection. 2.7 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops. 1. Grade: Custom. B. Type of Top: High - pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: GP -50, 0.050 -inch (1.270 -mm) nominal thickness. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: 1) Solid colors. 2) Patterns. 3. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 5. Core Material: Exterior -grade plywood. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION 2.8 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK WOOD TRIM A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. 1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at the fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and ornamental work and the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate -clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative overlay. D. Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed -grain wood before staining and finishing. E. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open -grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 1. Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and before filling. F. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60- degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 1. Grade: Custom. 2. AWI Finish System TR -6: Catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop - fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with specified sealant. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. G. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer /prime coats were applied in the shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop - applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. BHMA numbers are used below to designate hardware requirements, except as otherwise indicated. B. Butt Hinges: 2 -3/4 -inch (70 -mm), 5- knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095 -inch- (2.4 -mm -) thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: B01521. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 • 'Catches: As follows: • • '• 1. . Magnetic Catches: B03141. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards: B04071. ' 1.. Shelf Rests for Standards: B04081. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 and rated for the following loads: • 1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf (440 N). 2. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf (670 N). 3. r Pencil Drawer Slides: 45' lbf (200 N). END OF SECTION 06402 • • . Palls: Wire pulls, 5 inches (127 mm) long,.2-1/2 inches (62 mm) deep, and 5/16 inches (8 mm) in diameter. F. Shelf Rests: B04013. Door Locks: E07121. • Drawer Locks: E07041. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington ' • • 06402 - 8 1:0 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Exposed building insulation. 3. Vapor retarders. 1. Surface - Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire - Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for safing insulation. 2. Division 7 Section "EPDM Single -Ply Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound attenuation insulation installed as part of metal- framed wall and partition assemblies: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. A. Single- Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test- response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by-moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Unfaced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool or rock wool; with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indices of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Thermal Resistance: R =13. C. Unfaced, Slag- Wood /Rock -Wool -Fiber board Insulation: ASTM C612, maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indices of 15 and 0, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and of the following density, type, thermal resistivity, and fiber color: 1. Nominal density of 4 lb /cu. Ft. (64 kb /cu. M), Types IA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu x in. At 75 deg F(27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 2. Fiber Color: Regular color, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.076 perm. B. Vapor - Retarder Tape: Pressure - sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 I . McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self - locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch(0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches(50 mm) square. 2. Spindle: Copper- coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch(2.67) mm in diameter, { length to suit depth of insulation indicated. B. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016- inch(0.41 -mm) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1 -1/2 inches(38 mm) square or in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap. C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION L 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. 1 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instruction applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate ( location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and Insulation encapsulates 1 piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to product thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in • completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal- framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. D. Stuff glass - fiber, loose -fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib /cu.ft. (40 kg /cu.m). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor- retarder tape according to vapor - retarder manufacturer's instructions. D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor- retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor- retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 PROTECTION Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is" subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately .' after installation. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 SECTION 07841 - THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1. Walls and partitions. B. Related Sections include the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. This Section includes through - penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire- resistance -rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for safing insulation and accessories. 2. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 3. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For the following constructions, provide through - penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire - resistance -rated non -load- bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection -rated openings. B. F -Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with F- ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire- resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through - penetration firestop systems with T- ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire- resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire- protection -rated openings. 4. Penetrating items larger than 4 -inch (100 -mm)- diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross - sectional area. D. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture - resistant through - penetration firestop systems. 2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. E. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread ratings of Tess than 25 and smoke - developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. A. Product Data: For each type of through - penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through - penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through - penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through - penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) and are nontoxic to building occupants. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through - penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through - penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain through - penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is [UL,j [ITS,] Warnock Hersey or another agency performing testing and follow -up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 2 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Through - penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. Through - penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through - penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through - penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) ITS in "Directory of Listed Products." 3) Warnock Hersey. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through - penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through - penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through - penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through - penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through - penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through - penetration firestop systems indicated for each application on Drawings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. DAP Inc. 3. Firestop Systems Inc. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. Instant Firestop Mfg. Inc. 6. International Protective Coatings Corp. 7. Isolatek International. 8. Nelson Firestop Products. 9. NUCO Industries. 10. RectorSeal Corporation (The). THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 3 11. Specified Technologies Inc. 12. 3M Fire Protection Products. 13. Tremco. • 14. United States Gypsum Company. 15. Johns Manville. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Compatibility: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through - penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through - penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming /damming /backing materials, including the following: a. Slag- /rock - wool -fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming /damming /backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire -rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through - penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through- Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. B. Latex Sealants: Single- component latex formulations that after cure do not re- emulsify during exposure to moisture. C. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water - resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. D. Pillows /Bags: Reusable, heat - expanding pillows /bags consisting of glass -fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral - fiber, water - insoluble expansion agents and fire- retardant additives. E. Silicone Sealants: Moisture - curing, single- component, silicone- based, neutral- curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through - penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through - penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through - penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through - penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through - penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming /damming /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B . Provide final ,protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. • END OF SECTION 07841 .7 cLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 07841 - 6 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. d. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2. Division 7 Section " Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing. 3. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for through - penetration firestopping systems. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been producted and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without staining or deterioration of joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water - resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint - sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint - Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 1 L 1. 1 L I_ 1_ PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid- applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint - Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint- Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90, B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic- rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 2.6 JOINT- SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to 3 }, control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed -cell material with a surface skin. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. C. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 a. Concrete. b. Masonry. a. Metal. b. Glass. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: 3. Remove Iaitance and form - release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: JOINT SEALANTS 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 07920 - 5 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT - SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Single- Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Chem -Calk 900; Bostik Inc. b. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corporation. c. DyMonic; Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, [G,] A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: 6. Applications: a. Exterior joints around perimeter of doors, windows, glass wall assemblies, and louvers. b. Exterior joints at penetration of walls by piping, conduit and other services or equipment. c. Thresholds. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 r 3.7 LATEX JOINT - SEALANT SCHEDULE 1. END OF SECTION 07920 Control joints. A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: Products: Provide one of the following: a. AC -20; Pecora Corporation. b. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. Tremflex 834; Tremco. 2. Applications: a. Interior joints around perimeter of doors, windows, and louver frames. b. Interior general caulking and sealing. 3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT- SEALANT SCHEDULE McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints [ACS -#]: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: [ a. AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints [ACS -#]: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. BA -98; Pecora Corporation. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.. SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames, and fire rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections: The following requirements contain re uirements that relate to this Section: ` 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonary Assemblies" for installing anchors into and grouting frames f_. in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping. 3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in steel doors and sidelights. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions. 5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames. L 1.3 SUBMITTALS !_ A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. [.. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI /SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire- test - response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 1. Temperature -Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard - wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: 2.2 MATERIALS a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products. c. Curries Co. d. Steelcraft. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial - quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M). B. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc - coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M), commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478 -inch- (1.2 -mm -) thick steel sheet; 0.0516 -inch- (1.3 -mm -) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 • 2.3 DOORS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Steel Doors: Provide 1 -3/4 -inch- (44 -mm -) thick doors of materials and ANSI /SDI 100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy -duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0478 -inch- (1.2- mm-) thick cold - rolled steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy -duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel sheet faces. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, sidelights, and other openings, according to ANSI /SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0516 -inch- thick cold - rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, continuously welded construction for exterior applications and interior applications. 2. Fabricate frames for interior openings over 48 inches (1220 mm) wide from 0.053- inch -thick (1.3 mm) steel sheet. 3. Form exterior frames from 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel sheet. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -door frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179 -inch- (0.45 -mm -) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not Tess than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, electrolytic zinc coated or metallic- coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177 -inch (4.5 mm) diameter steel wire complying with ASTM A510 (ASTM A510M) may be used in place of sheet steel. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI /SDI 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards: a. Vertical steel stiffeners. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between non -fire -rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold - rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 1. At exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Fully channel glass cutouts with galvanized channel. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. G. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal - insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal -rated assemblies with U -value rating of 0.41 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.33 W /sq. m x K) or better. H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. I. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface - applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface - applied hardware may be done at Project site. J. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." K. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359 -inch- (0.9 -mm -) thick steel or 0.040 -inch- (1 -mm -) thick aluminum. 1. Provide screw - applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 1 2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the 'type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc - dust - content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not Tess than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD -P -21035 or SSPC -Paint 20. B. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air -dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT -P -641, Type II. 2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC -SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC -SP 8 (Pickling). B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field- applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. In masonry construction, install at least 3 (or one every 16 inches) wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T- shaped anchors. 2. In metal -stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel -stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI /SDI 100. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 Fire -Rated Doors: ' Install with clearances specified in 'NFPA 80. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1. Fixed windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes Architectural Grade aluminum windows of the performance class indicated. Window types required include the following: A. Performance class number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. 1. Structural test pressure, wind Toad test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 2. Water - leakage- resistance test pressure is equivalent to 20 percent of the design pressure with 8 Ibf /sq. ft. (383 Pa) as a minimum for Architectural Grade windows. A. General: Provide aluminum windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated. B. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency based on the following criteria: 1. Design wind velocity at Project site is 70 mi. /h (113 km /h). 2. Heights of window units above grade at window centerline are indicated on or can be determined from the Drawings. Consult with the Architect, if necessary, to confirm required loading and test pressures. 3. Test Procedures: Test window units according to ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, ASTM E 331 for water penetration, and ASTM E 330 for uniform Toad deflection and structural performance. C. Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance for type, grade, and performance class of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with requirements of AAMA 101, Section 3, "Optional Performance Classes," for higher than minimum performance class. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -1 1.5 SUBMITTALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Air - Infiltration Rate for Fixed Windows: Not more than 0.06 cfm /ft. (1.09 cu. m/h per m) of area for an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa). 2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 20 percent of the design pressure. 3. Uniform Load Deflection: No deflection in excess of 1/175 of any member's span during the imposed Toad, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 60 Ibf /sq. ft (2873 Pa). 4. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any member's span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 40 Ibf /sq. ft. (1437 Pa). 5. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be "thermally improved," provide units tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503.1 showing a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 50. 6. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U -value maximum of 0.69 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.9 W /sq. m) x K at 15 -mi. /h (24 -km /h) exterior wind velocity, when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. 7. Forced -Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 30 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 588. 8. Thermal Movements: Provide window units that allow thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature when engineering, fabricating, and installing aluminum windows to prevent buckling, opening of joints, and overstressing of components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of window required, including the following: 1. Construction details and fabrication methods. 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. 4. Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of window required including information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following: 1. Layout and Installation details, including anchors. 2. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50) scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = 1 foot (1:20) scale. 3. Full -size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 4. Location of weep holes. 5. Panning details. 6. Hardware, including operators. 7. Window cleaning provisions. 8. Glazing details. 9. Accessories. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 L 4- 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Samples for initial color selection on 12 -inch- (300 -mm)- long sections of window members. Where finishes involve normal color variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. E. Samples for Verification: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. F. Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type, grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing of current window units within the last 5 years. Test results based on use of down -sized test units will not be accepted. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of aluminum windows similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum windows from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic effects of aluminum windows and are based on the specific window types and models indicated. Other aluminum window manufacturers whose products have equal performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic effect. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." A. Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fixed Windows: a. Alenco Commercial Division. b. Capitol Products Corp. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 2.2 MATERIALS 2.3 HARDWARE 2.4 ACCESSORIES c. Custom Window Company. d. DeSCo Windows. e. EFCO Corporation. f. Graham Architectural Products Corporation. g. Peerless Products, Inc. h. TRACO. i. Wausau Metals Corporation. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not Tess than 22,000 -psi (150 -MPa) ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick at any location for main frame and sash members. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed -in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot -dip zinc - coated steel or iron complying with requirements of ASTM B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Compression -Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4. 1. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fin of semirigid plastic sheet of polypropylene. E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these Specifications for selection and installation of sealants. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion- resistant material compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is intended. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4 i, L 9 I 1 I 2.5 FIXED WINDOWS A. Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class F -AW40. 2.6 FABRICATION 2.7 FINISHES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. B. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low- conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal -to -metal contact. 1. Provide thermal -break construction that has been in use for not Tess than 3 years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 2. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062 -inch- (1.6 -mm)- thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. 3. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. 4, Glazing Stops: Provide screw - applied or snap -on glazing stops, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish to match window units. C. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing" of these Specifications and AAMA 101. A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker). 1. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of industry colors and color densities. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.2 INSTALLATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and sill plate is level. 1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installing window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the Work. B. Set window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. 1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in appendix to AAMA 101. C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as shown on Shop Drawings, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the Work. 1. Sealants, joint fillers, and gaskets to be installed after installation of window units are specified in another Division 7 Section. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct on -site tests for air and water infiltration with window manufacturer's representative present. The Architect will select units to be tested. Tests not meeting specified requirements and units having similar deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency selected by the Architect. 1. Air - Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests according to requirements of ASTM E 783. Allowable infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated. 2. Water- Resistance Tests: Conduct tests according to requirements of ASTM E 1105. No water leakage is permitted. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 6 END OF SECTION 08520 Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after; installing windows. Comply with requirements of 8 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and maintenance. PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer, that ensure window units are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 7 0 t SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges. 2. Key control system. 3. Lock cylinders and keys. 4. Lock and latch sets. 5. Bolts. 6. Exit devices. 7. Push /pull units. 8. Closers. 9. Overhead holders. 10. Miscellaneous door control devices. 11. Door trim units. 12. Protection plates. 13. Sliding door equipment. 14. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. 15. Sound stripping for interior doors. 16. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms). 17. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. 18. Thresholds. 19. Power supply to door controls. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet hardware. 2. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with hollow metal frames. 3. Division 8 Section "Sectional Overhead Doors" for weatherstripping and slide bolt. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in- service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. D. Substitutions: If substitutions are offered in lieu of specified material, Architect may require samples of both specified item and proposed substitute. Physical samples will be returned to supplier following Architect's determination of equality. All substitutions will be subject to approval by the DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Architect. No substitution request shall be considered after time required prior to bid as set in Section 01630. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE ' � A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 1.7 GUARANTEE A. Provide two year guarantee against defects in all hardware, including electrical components, with additional twenty -three year extension for door closers and an additional three year extension for exit devices under provisions of Section 01700, as evidenced by manufacturer's published warranty. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. PBB, Inc. 2. Key Control System: a. Major Metal Fab, Inc. 3. Cylinders and Locks: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 a. PDQ Industries, Inc. 4. Flush Bolts: a. Rockwood. 5. Exit/Panic Devices: Doma Door Controls, Inc. 6. Overhead Closers: Dorma Door Controls Inc. 7. Door Control Devices: Dorma Door Controls Inc. 8. Door Trim Units and Latch Protectors: Rockwood. 9. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: Rockwood. 10. Door Stripping and Seals, thresholds, Automatic Drip Seals, Sound Striping, Door Bottoms, and Astragals: Reese Enterprise, Inc. 11. Door Stops: Rockwood. 12. Electric Strikes: Von Dupin. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI /BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI /BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. D. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self- tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. E. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru- bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru -bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru -bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template - produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out -Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2250 mm) or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (750 mm) of additional height. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches (2150 mm) or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new masterkey system for Project. B. Multiple - Building System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new grandmasterkey system for Project. C. Existing System: Grandmasterkey the locks to the Owner's existing system, with a new masterkey for the Project. D. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great - grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. E. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6 -pin tumbler cylinders. F. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. G. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise Indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE." Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. I. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 1. Deliver keys to Owner's representative. 2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self - locking key clips, receipt forms, 3 -way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the Project. 2.7 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3- piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide dust -proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides nonrecessed strike for bolt. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8 -inch (16 -mm) minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1 -inch (25- mm) minimum throw for all dead bolts. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch- (13 -mm -) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. 2.8 PUSH /PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru - bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 2.9 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Access -Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Where required in hardware groups, provide units designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release and close door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts. 1. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders complying with UL 228. D. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. E. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's published twenty -five (25) year warranty for surface and floor closers and ten 910) year warranty for overhead concealed closers. 2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self- tapping screws. B. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) Tess than door width on pull side by height indicated. 1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage) (1.3 mm). 2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, Tight, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient bumper material: 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled. 2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push -pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix " -NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." E. The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI /BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. 1. Finish: US26D (626), or US32D (630) as indicated in Groups. Door closers to be painted aluminum lacquer. Push plates and pull plates and nonferrous butts to be US32D (630). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl- rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8 I 1 r 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUP 1 - 117 -B, 117 -C GROUP 2 - 112 -A, 113 -B, 111 -B McLeod USA, Seattle, Washington operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. D. Six -Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of Iatchsets and Iocksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: 1. Examine and re- adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. 2. Lockset Designs: Provide one of the Iockset designs designated below. Butts BB51 *1 Each Butt Hinge Stanley Bronze 4 -1/2" x 4 -1/2" Electronic Transfer Hinge, 4 wire, US26D 1 Door Closer TS93 -1 PT 1 Latch Protector 321 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1 -1/2" LDW x .050 1 Door Stop 483 1 Set Seal 797 1 Threshold S483AV 1 Door Bottom 597CP 1 Extended Rain Awning R201A full width of fame head 1 Electric Strike 6211 *1 Exit Device Von Duprin E9875, 06 Lever Design US26D with 992 RX Trim 3' Device Wiring are to be furnished under other Sections. * 1 WSE card reader 1 x Sentrol 1078 W concealed contact Butts BB81 *1 Stanley Steel 4 -1/2" x 4 -1/2" electric transer hinge, 4 wire US26D DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9 *1 Schlage Electrified Montise E9080, 06 Lever Design, US26D with AE option US26D 1 ' Door Closer TS93 -1 T (T593 -1 PT at Door 101 -B) 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1 -1/2" LDW x .050 1 Wall Bumper 409 1 Set Seal 797 1 Mortised Automatic Door Bottom 372A 1 Electric Strike 6211 Wiring are to be furnished under other Sections. *1 Sentrol 1078 W Concealed Contact * WSE Card Reader GROUP 3 - 105 -A, 106 -A Butts BB81 1 Privacy Lock MR 176 BSN - Escutcheon Trim 1 Door Closer TS93 -1 T 1 Wall Bumper 409 1 Set Seal 797 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1 -1/2" LDW x .050 GROUP 4 - 100-A, 101 -A, 102 -B Butts BB81 1 Each Butt Hings BB81 1 Lockset MR 148 BSN - Escutcheon Trim 1 Wall Bumper 409 1 Set Sound Seal 797 GROUP 5 - 107-A, 109 -A Butts BB81 1 Lockset 115 BSN - Escutcheon Trim 1 Door Closer TS93 -1 PT 1 Wall Bumper 409 1 Set Seal 797 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1 -1/2" LDW x .050 GROUP 6 110 -A, 111 -A, 115 -A, 113 -A, 117 -A, 112 -B Butts BB81 1 Set Automatic flushbolts 1842 1 Lockset MR 116 BSN - Escutcheon Trim 2 Kickplates - 12" x 1-1/2" LDW x .050 2 Door Stop 440 1 Set Seal 797 2 Meeting Stile Seals 129CV 1 Dustproof Strike 1880 1 Door Closer - Coordinator Device TS93 GSR GROUP 7 - 114 -A Butts BB81 1 Lockset MR 116 BSN - Escutcheon Trim 1 Door Closer TS93 -1 PT 1 Door Stop 440 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -10 • . . , L 1 1 1. 1 ' Set Seal 797 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1-1/2" LDW x .050 GROUP .8 - 104-A, 116-A, 118-A, 114-B Butts BB51 1 Each Butt Hinge BB51-EL-4 1 Exit Device ES9300 - Trim 2 Kickplates - 12" x 1-1/2" LDW x .050 2 Door Closers TS93-1 PT 2 Doors Stops 483 1 Set Seal 797 2 Meeting Stile Seals 129CP 1 Threshold S483AV 2 Door bottoms 597CP 1 Extended Rain Awning R201 A full width of frame head *1 Sentrol 1078W concealed contact Wiring to be furnished under other Sections. GROUP 9 1 Padlock 1-3/4" x 1" schackle GROUP 10 1 Key Control Cabinet and System 201-6080 GROUP 11 1 Weatherstripping set by overhead door supplier 1 Slide bolt for padlock by overhead door supplier. GROUP 12 Butts BB81 1 Privacy Lock MR 176 BSN - Escutcheon Trim 1 Wall Bumper 409 1 Set Seal 797 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1-1/2" LDW x .050 GROUP 13 102-A . • , McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE Butts E3B51 *1 Each Butt Hinge Stanley Bronze 5" x 4-1/2" electric transfer hinge, 4 wire, 0510B 1 Door Closer TS93-1 PT 1 Latch Protector 321 - 1 Kickplate - 12" x 1-1/2" LDW x .050 1 Door Stop 483 1 Set Seal 797 1 Threshold S483AV 1 Door Bottom 597CP 1. Extended Rain Awning R201A full width of fame head 1 Electric Strike 6211 : ; • • * Indicates to be supplied by security contractor. *1 Exit Device Von Duprin 35 E370L-06, RX 313 AN, 3'. Exit Device with electric trim Wiring are to be furnished under other Sections. • • , ' • „ . • • . 08710 - 12 1. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: I. 1. I . 1 1 1. Windows units. 2. Entrances and other doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on drawings are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project Toads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in the thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Tinted and heat- absorbing glass thicknesses (1/4 ") for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. 2. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: GLAZING 08800 - 1 d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Insulated Window Unit Lites: Not less than 1/4" (6mm). C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on material's actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F 67 deg C, ambient; 180 deg F 100 deg C, material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour meters per second at 33 feet 10 m above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. Design Wind Load is 90 mph; Exposure B. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 second or less. c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch 25 mm, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic -glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated -glass lites. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12- inch - 300 -mm- square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12- inch - 300 -mm- long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. GLAZING 08800 - 2 Oit 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington F. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. G. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. SIGMA Publications: TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and TB -3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification Zabel of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL). D. Glazer Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in- service performance. E. Single- Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat - treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. 3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. 4. Wired glass of each construction indicated. F. Single- Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. GLAZING 08800 - 3 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg F (4 deg C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated -Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by coated -glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b., the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in Product Date Sheets at this end of this Section. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3 (glazing select). 1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington GLAZING 08800 - 4 2.3 HEAT- TREATED FLOAT GLASS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong -held) or horizontal (roller- hearth) process, at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks. 2.4 HEAT- TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. 1. Kind FT (fully tempered where indicated). B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heat - treated glass by one of the following companies. 1. Glasstemp, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. HGP Industries. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Pilkington Libby - Owens -Ford. 2.5 COATED FLOAT GLASS A. General: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article and in schedules at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) coated float glass, except provide Kind FT (fully tempered) products where coated safety glass is indicated. B. Pyrolytic- Coated Float Glass: Float glass with solar- reflective metallic -oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, complying with requirements specified in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.6 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 11 (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: a. Mesh m1 (diamond). B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Polished Wired Glass: a. Ashai Glass Co. /Ama Glass Corp. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd. c. Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd. GLAZING 08800 - 5 2.7. INSULATING GLASS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. 2. Provide heat- treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. 2.8 GLAZING TAPES d. Pilkington Glass Ltd. A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.1. a. PT1 303 Glazing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc. b. S -M 5700 Poly -Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee - Morehead, Inc. c. Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, polyvinyl choride foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5. C. Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod: 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. GLAZING 08800 - 6 E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.10 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members. B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation as follows: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. GLAZING 08800 - 7 3.4 TAPE GLAZING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant- substrate testing. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1250 mm) (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage Immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. GLAZING 08800 - 8 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. PRODUCT DATE SHEET 1 - INSULATING GLASS A. Classification of Units: Class CBA per ASTM E 774. B. Air Space Width: Nominal ' /z inch (12 mm) measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass Iites at unit's edge. C. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: manufacturer's standard sealants. D. Spacer Specifications: Aluminum with mill or clear - anodized finish. 1. Desiccant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 2. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 3. Color of Spacer: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. E. Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Thickness of Each Lite: 0.23 inch. 2. Uncoated Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass at window units. Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Class 1 (clear) float glass at door units. 3. Uncoated Clear Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass at window units. Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Class 1 (clear) float glass at door units. PRODUCT DATE SHEET 2 - ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANT A. Base Polymer: Neutral- curing silicone. B. Type: S (single component). C. Grade: NS (nonsag). D. Class: 25. GLAZING 08800 - 9 , ' . • GLAZING • ' •:. • E. Use(s) Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). • Uses Related to Glazing Sub strates: • END OF SECTION 088 -•'•••!'•::,'-••• • • ••••:•••••••':•••,' • • ,••••••;• : • •••'••::, • • •'.'• •:••,,: ';•• • .•• . , ' • •• • ,•:: •••:..'••••••;••••:••••••••:•, ••• :•••;•••••:;:: . • •-•'• • • • • • • , • • • • 08800 - 10 i 1 .. SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonload- bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 3. Sound attenuation blankets installed in gypsum board assemblies. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping systems and fire- resistance -rated joint sealants. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum board assemblies. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting of gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire- resistance ratings indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single- Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Single- Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. D. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire - Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner provided in fire- resistance -rated assemblies indicated is labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 2 i 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS a. Clark Steel Framing, Inc. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Dale Industries, Inc. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. f. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia - Pacific Corp. c. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS 1. Thickness: 20 GA. CSJ as follows: 2. Depth: As indicated. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating for framing members attached to and within 10 feet (3 m) of exterior walls. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch- (5 -mm -) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and with 2 -inch- (50.8 -mm -) deep flanges. D. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining continuity of the assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except configuration, of thickness indicated for studs and width to accommodate depth of studs indicated with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate gypsum board thickness. 1. Offset Configuration: Shadow -line design with offset projecting out from depth of stud. 2. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated in the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Fire Trak" manufactured by Fire Trak Corp. E. Furring Brackets: Serrated -arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion - resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3 F. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M), length and width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) where indicated. G. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end -to -end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm). B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Type X where required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) unless otherwise indicated. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows: 1. Type: Type X where required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and where indicated. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip or electrolytic process, or steel sheet coated with aluminum or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated. c. L -bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L- bead where indicated. d. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated. e. One -piece control joint formed with V- shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 4 s P 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. c. AII- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 2. Job -Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. c. AII- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot - grouting hollow metal door frames. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick. D. Sound - Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral -Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast -in- anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. a. Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. b. Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire- resistance -rated assemblies where indicated. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire- resistance -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor /roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6 D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Single -Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA -600, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch (12.7 -mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. B. Install sound - attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible. E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches (813 mm) wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. H. Form control joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to 9.5 -mm -) wide joints to install sealant. J Isolate perimeter of nonload- bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm -) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. B. Moisture Resistant Wall Substrates: 1. Install water - resistant gypsum backing board panels where indicated. Install with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install cornerbead at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L -bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 3. Install U -bead where indicated. D. Install control joints at locations indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8 1 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION END OF SECTION 09255 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per ASTM C840. 1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 2. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated. F. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or taping compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, ail- purpose or topping compound. G. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. For skim coat, use joint compound specified for third coat, or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration. H. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound. A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9 . PART 1 - GENERAL L L L l 1.2 SUMMARY 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full -size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. C. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer. B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1 1. Fire- response tests were performed by UL, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow -up services. 2. Surface - burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 3. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.7 COORDINATION 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full -size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for each type indicated: (types are designated and located by drawing finish schedule.) 1. Type A: 24" x 48 ", white. a. Armstrong World Industries, Minatone Cortega No. 703. b. The Celotex corporation, Hytone Baroque No. BET -194. c. USG Interios, Inc. Auratone Omni Fissured No. 332. 2. Type C: 24" x 48 ", white, plastic coated. a. Armstrong World Industries, Minaboard Cortega No. 761. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 b. The Celotex Corporation, Hytone Baroque No. BET -197 PG c, USG Interiors, Inc. Duratone Omni Fissued No. 345P Plastic Coated. 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3. C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish for type of system indicated. D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cast -in -Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Cast -in -place anchors. b. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. c. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC service condition (mild). 2. Postinstalled Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc - Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design Toad (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 - inch- (2.69 -mm -) diameter wire. F. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 G. Hold -Down Clips for Non - Fire - Resistance -Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings consisting of acoustical panels weighing less than 1 lb/sq. ft. (4.88 kg /sq. m), provide hold -down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands. b. AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 1. Furnish cast -in -place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less- than - half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 I 3.3 INSTALLATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings -- Seismic Zones 0 -2." 3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies -- Seismic Zones 3 & 4." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or roof deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, or drilled -in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 END OF SECTION 09511 t.. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. '2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 4: Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction and where indicated; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3.4 CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE 1. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, GO1 (Z001) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. c. Face Design: Flush face. d. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum sheet as standard with manufacturer. e. Cap Finish: Painted white. 09511 - 6 Iit PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 SUMMARY SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full -size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product furnished complies with requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY,. STORAGE, AND HANDLING C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. A. Maintain a temperature of not Tess than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, class, wearing surface, and size of resilient tile flooring installed. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT TILE A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Mannington Commercial "Essentials" 122 "Glacier." RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 2 1 1 i 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland- cement -based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 3 B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal Tess than one -half of a tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in basket -weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built -in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. H. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop floor to remove marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651 - 4 • ••••• .• • • • ' • ' • RESILIENT TILE FLOORING cLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. • Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09651 09651 - 5 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. 2. Resilient flooring accessories. 3. Resilient carpet accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring." 2. Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings." McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each product color and pattern specified. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base and accessories certifying that each product furnished complies with requirements. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with ASTM F -1861, Type I and with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 1. Minimum 1/8" thickness. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 Viola is L 1 2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1_ A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland- cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece,, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. Install premolded outside corners before installing straight pieces. 5. Install premolded outside and inside corners before installing straight pieces. C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer. 1. Cover resilient products installed on floors with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 3.5 . RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Rubber Wall Base: 1. Products: As follows: a. Carpet Base: Roppe P108 Silver Gray. b. Base at Vinyl Composition Tile and concrete floors: Roppe P108 Silver Gray. 2. Outside Corners: Premolded. 3. Inside Corners: Premolded for formed on job. 4. Surface: Smooth. B. Rubber Accessory Molding: 1. Products: As follows: a. Transitions Strips: To match adjacent color. END OF SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 4 4 a 5 1_ McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1_ SECTION 09680 - CARPET 1 _ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet, carpet cushion, and installation. 1 _ B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 3 Sections for curing compounds and other concrete treatments compatibility with carpet and carpet cushion adhesives. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for materials and installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 L . Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of carpet material, carpet cushion, and installation accessory specified. Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire- 1 _ test - response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate. i C. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built -in cabinets, and ` locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following: L_ 1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 3. Seam locations, types, and methods. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 1 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 8. Transition details to other flooring materials. 1 D. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following: I" 1. 12 -inch- (300-mm-) square Samples of each type of carpet material required. q P Y P q 2. 12 -inch (300 -mm) Samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. I . E. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings. 1 CARPET 09680 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington F. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet and carpet cushion, including manufacturer's recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain - removal products and procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire- test - response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. 2. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. C. Store materials on -site in original undamaged packages, inside well - ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions." B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. C. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours (14.6 kg /1000 sq. m/24 hours) when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F (12.7 deg C). D. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in CARPET 09680 - 2 I I 1 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete -Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the following: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1. Carpet manufacturer. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent Toss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. C. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide carpet. by Bentley, "Pebblepointe," No. PB32B -6639, "Shadow." 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. C. Adhesives: Water - resistant, mildew- resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the following: CARPET 09680 - 3 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. 1. Carpet manufacturer. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Concrete - Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete -slab primer, according to manufacturer's directions, where recommended by the following: A. Direct Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue- Down." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open- bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation. 1. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face - beater element. 3.5 PROTECTION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." CARPET 09680 - 4 - . „. CARPET 09680 - 5 • , . . McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Initaller;.that ensure carpet is withOUt darnage'or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion: y... SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY a. Anodized aluminum. A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory- finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Metal lockers. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. e. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: PAINTING 09900 -1 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: 1.3 DEFINITIONS b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. . Copper. e. Bronze and brass. a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic- marking paint. 2. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for traffic- marking paint. 3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 5. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for preparation of wood surfaces. 6. Division 6 Section "interior Architectural Woodwork" for preparation of woodwork surfaces. 7. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 8. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 9. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings. A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a glass range between 5 and 20 when measures of a 60 degree meter. A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish -coat material indicated. PAINTING 09900 - 2 t; e. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PAINTING 09900 - 3 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 4. Architect's approved equal. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best - quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint - material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the Architect's samples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. PAINTING 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 09900 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire - brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. PAINTING 09900 - 5 3.3 APPLICATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. PAINTING 09900 - 6 t 1 f t i. t C 1 i McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass- smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. PAINTING 09900 - 7 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop - primed items. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Full - Gloss, Alkyd - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust - inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust - inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Glidden: 3) PPG: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 5205 Glid -Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. 6 -208 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. First and Second Coats: Full - gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior /Exterior Alkyd- Urethane Gloss Enamel. 2) Glidden: 4500 Series Glid -Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel. 3) PPG: 6 -282 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Gloss -Oil Enamel. B. Zinc- Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc - coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Full - Gloss, Alkyd - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 8502/8520 Mirrolac -WB Interior /Exterior Waterborne Flat DTM Primer and Finish. 2) Glidden: 5205 Giid -Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. 3) PPG: 90 -709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior /Exterior Primer /Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. b. First and Second Coats: Full- gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior /Exterior Alkyd- Urethane Gloss Enamel.. 2) Glidden: 4500 Series Glid -Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel. 3) PPG: 6 -282 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Gloss -Oil Enamel. PAINTING 09900 - 8 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 1. Epoxy /Polyurethane: 2 finish coats over a primer with non -slip finish. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General Concrete Floor: Interior concrete floors except where otherwise indicated (see finish schedule). a. High solids polyamine epoxy, 96% solids by volume. Apply at 6 -8 mils dry film thickness. b. Intermediate and Top Coats: High solids polyamine epoxy, 98% solids by weight. Apply at 6 -8 mils dry film thickness per coat. B. Battery Room Floors: High solids chemical resistant epoxy floor coating; 2 finish coats over a primer with non -slip finish. 1. Primer: High solids polyamine epoxy, 96% solids by volume. Apply at 6 -8 mils dry film thickness. 2. Intermediate and Top Coats: High solids polyamine Novolac epoxy, 97% solids by volume. Apply at 6 -8 mils dry film thickness per coat. C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces including ceilings and walls. 1. Semigloss, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex - based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Glidden: 3) PPG: 50801 Wonder -Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer - Sealer. 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer - Sealer. 17 -10 Quick -Drying Interior Latex Primer - Sealer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 39XX Wonder -Tones Semi -Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 2) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3) PPG: 88 -110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo- Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. D. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork: 1. Waterborne, Satin - Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of a waterborne, clear -satin varnish over a sealer coat and a waterborne, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste -wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 2) PPG: None required. None required. b. Stain Coat: Waterborne, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 41 XX WoodWorks Waterborne Interior Stain. PAINTING 09900 - 9 2) PPG: 77 -302 Rez Interior Semi - Transparent Stain. c. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 2) PPG: d. First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 2) PPG: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 4200 WoodWorks Waterborne Quick -Dry Clear Sealer. 77 -30 Rez Interior Quick -Drying Sealer and Finish. 4300 WoodWorks Waterborne Crystal Clear Finish, Satin. 77 -49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. E. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer. a. Primer: Quick- drying, rust - inhibitive, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 2) Glidden: 5207 Glid -Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White. 3) PPG: 6 -208 Speedhide Interior /Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic - latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Glidden: 3) PPG: 39XX Wonder -Tones Semi -Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. 6 -6 Speedhide Interior Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater. c. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Glidden: 3) PPG: 39XX Wonder -Tones Semi -Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. 88 -110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo- Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. F. Zinc - Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc - coated metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 2) Glidden: 5207 Glid -Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White. PAINTING 09900 - 10 1) Devoe: 2) Glidden: 3) PPG: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington PPG: 90 -709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior /Exterior Primer /Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic - latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 39XX Wonder -Tones Semi -Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. 88 -110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo- Lustre Semi -Gloss Latex. 1_ PAINTING 09900 - 11 f I' 1 SIGNS SECTION 10425 - SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Panel signs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 2. Division 16 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 3. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large -scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large -scale details of wording and lettering layout. D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in- service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. 10425-1 B. Single- Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. C. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs: 2.2 MATERIALS a. ABC Architectural Signing System. b. APCO Graphics, Inc. c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. d. Best Manufacturing Company. e. Mohawk Sign Systems. A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types: 1. Transparent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "clear," provide colorless sheet in matte finish, with Tight transmittance of 92 percent, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM D 1003. 2. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. C. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended. 2.3 PANEL SIGNS A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. SIGNS 10425 - 2 r. B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: 1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 2. Corner Condition: Square corners. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington . Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. Laminated Sign Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness indicated using the manufacturer's standard process. D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. E. Subsurface Copy: Apply copy to the back face of clear acrylic sheet forming the panel face by process indicated to produce precisely formed opaque images free from rough edges. 1. Use reverse silk- screen process to print copy; overspray the copy with an opaque background color coating. 2. Use Dupont Chromalin heat- and pressure - laminated photopolymer film system to form copy and background color. F. Raised Copy: Machine -cut copy characters from matte - finished opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 1. Panel Material: Matte - finished opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 2.4 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION a. The manufacturer has the option of selecting either process indicated above. A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. 2. Install ADA and room signage on the latch side of room door; mounting height interior shall be 60 Inches above the floor to the centerline of the sign. 1 SIGNS 10425 - 3 B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: • 3.2 • CLEANING AND PROTECTION A After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double- sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured. Protect 10425-4 c SECTION 10605 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Division 2 Section "Chain Link Fences and Gates" for chainlink fencing. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting wire mesh partitions. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Heavy -duty wire mesh partitions. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: A. The types of weaves for the wire mesh specified in this Section are as illustrated and defined in ASTM E 437 and its Appendix X4.2: 1. Intercrimped: Similar to plain weave with extra crimps between the intersections. A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified, consisting of manufacturer's specification, technical data, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of wire mesh partitions, including plans, elevations, and large -scale details showing anchorage and accessory items. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. D. Samples of a 12 -by -12 -inch (300 -by- 300 -mm) wire mesh panel constructed of specified frame members, wire mesh, and color charts. A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing wire mesh partitions similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in- service performance. WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 . 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations for wire mesh products by accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication and delivery schedules with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee location dimensions and proceed with fabricating wire mesh products without field measurements. Coordinate wall, column, floor, and ceiling construction to ensure that actual location dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acorn Wire and Iron Works, Inc. 2. G -S Company (The). 3. Hoosier Fence Co., Inc. (The). 4. Indiana Wire Products, Inc. 5. Kentucky Metal Products Co. 6. King Wire Partitions, Inc. 7. Lakeside Wire and Iron Co. 8. Miller Wire Works, Inc. 9. SpaceGuard Products. 10. Wire and Iron Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 853. B. Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M). D. Cold- Rolled Steel Channels: Formed from steel sheet. E. Square Steel Tubing: Cold- formed structural steel tubing, ASTM A 500. F. Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M). G. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Commercial - quality, hot - dip- coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653, with G60 or A60 (ASTM A 653M), with Z180 or ZF180 coating. WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-2 dliot r L 2.3 HEAVY-DUTY MESH PARTITIONS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Mesh: 0.192 -inch- (4.9 -mm -) diameter, intercrimped steel wire woven into 2 -inch (50 -mm) diamond mesh, securely clinched to frame members. B. Frames: Provide cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items shown or necessary for partition installation. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Frame Members: 1- 1/2- by -3/4 -inch (38- by- 19 -mm) cold - rolled steel channels with 3/8 -inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolt holes approximately 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 2. Horizontal Reinforcing Members: 1- 1/2- by- 3/4- by -1/8 -inch (38- by- 19- by -3 -mm) cold - rolled steel channels with wire woven through or two 1- by -1/2 -inch (25- by- 13 -mm) steel channels bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh, and secured to vertical members. Provide number of horizontal reinforcing members to suit panel height as recommended by partition manufacturer. C. Stiffening Bars: Provide flat steel bar stiffener posts between abutting panel frames. Size as recommended by partition manufacturer for partition height required. Increase size of stiffening bars, if required, to maintain partition rigidity. D. Top Capping Bars: 3 -inch (75 -mm) by 4.1 -lb (1.9 -kg) steel channels, secured to top framing member with 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm -) diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c. E. Corner Posts: 2- by- 2- by -1/8 -inch (50- by- 50- by -3 -mm) steel angles with floor shoe and 3/8 -inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolt holes to align with bolt holes in vertical frame members. F. Line Posts: Where partition runs exceed 20 feet (6 m) without intersecting or connecting to overhead framing, furnish 3 -inch (75 -mm) by 4.1 -1b (1.9 -kg) steel channel line posts with 5- by- 18- by -1/4 -inch (125 -by- 450- by -6 -mm) steel base plates located at recommended intervals to ensure partition rigidity and stability. G. Floor Shoes: Cast metal, sized to suit vertical framing and to provide approximately 3 inches (75 mm) of clear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal frame members. Furnish units with set screws for leveling adjustment. 2.4 DOORS AND WINDOWS A. Sliding Door (8' -0" high x 4' -0" wide): Door frame of 1- 1/2- by- 3/4- by -1/8 -inch (38- by- 19- by -3 -mm) steel channels with 1- 1/2- by -1/8 -inch (38- by -3 -mm) flat steel bar cover plates on 4 sides. Provide door with two 4 -wheel roller- bearing carriers, box track, bottom guide channel, and mortise -type cylinder lock operated by key outside with recessed knob inside. Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. B. Cylinders for locks are specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2.5 FABRICATION A. Do not use components Tess than sizes indicated. Use larger -size components as recommended by partition component manufacturer. B. Provide bolts, hardware, and accessories for complete installation. WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 3 • C. Finish: • Manufacturer's standard, shop-applied enamel finish. Provide manufacturer's standard finish color. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting • drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and • miscellaneous items having integral anchors embedded in concrete or masonry construction. 1 / 4 : . • Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site 3.2 INSTALLATION A Erect partitions plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place, complying with . Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. • • B. Provide additional field bracing as shown or necessary for rigid, secure installation. Installer to provide additional clips and bracing as required. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust moving components for smooth operation without binding. B. Touch up damaged finish after completing instailation using field-applied paint to match color of shop-applied finish. END OF SECTION 10605 ............ McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington • ' • .. • • WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605 - 4 i L t 1 1 s i 11: SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Microwave ovens. 2. Refrigerator /freezers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for plumbing connections to residential appliances. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks, waste disposers, and instant hot - water dispensers. 3. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. C. AGA and ANSI Standards: Provide gas- burning appliances that carry the design certification seal of AGA and that comply with ANSI Z21- Series standards. D. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: 1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to ANSI /AHAM HRF -1. E. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy -cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough -in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Microwave Oven: 10 -year limited warranty for in -home service on defects in the magnetron tube. 2. Refrigerator /Freezer: Five -year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide appliances manufactured by: 1. Amana Refrigerator, Inc. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Hotpoint. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Microwave Oven: Freestanding microwave oven, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. 1. 700 watt output with 10 power levels and timed, temperature - controlled cooking. 2. Oven Door Type: Counterbalanced, white glass oven door with observation window and towel bar -type handle. 3. Microwave Oven Controls: Solid -state electronic, touch -type controls 4. Clock Type: Digital. B. Side -by -Side Refrigerator /Freezer: Freestanding, two -door refrigerator with side -by -side freezer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. 1. Side -By -Side Refrigerator /Freezer: Provide a freestanding, frost -free, two -door, side -by -side model refigerator /freezer on adjustable rollers, with five shelves minimum in each door. 2. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values, measured according to ANSI /AHAM HRF -1 and certified by AHAM: a. Total volume: 21.0 cu.ft. b. Refrigerator volume: 14.0 cu.ft. c. Total shelf area: 25.0 sq.ft. d. Ice maker, cubes. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 2 r_ I. l C l I . 1 . . . 2.3 FINISHES 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Porcelain- Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory- applied porcelain - enamel finish over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. Provide white. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Built -in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 3 SECTION 11700 - OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: ... <.. rH w.., en uam. rww...... er..,. �» w., r........... ww .. +.,........._..,...._....... A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Coordinate the work of this Section with related trades. 2. Verify applicable dimensions at the jobsite. 3. Install new and existing items of Equipment Furnished by Owner. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 and Division 9: Backing and /or equipment support structures. 2. Division 15 and Division 16: Rough -in and connection of mechanical or electrical services. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. It shall be the Owner's responsibility to submit shop drawings, manufacturer's literature and any necessary technical installation information required by the Contractor to complete his responsibility under this Section. Refer to Section 01300 for guidance with submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT RESPONSIBILITY A. This article defines symbols which have been assigned to equipment items specified in other sections of these specifications in order to designate contract responsibility for such equipment items. 1. General: Assignment of any equipment responsibility symbol to equipment items shall define the Contractor's responsibility for the item of equipment. a. Verification of utility requirements for approved equipment items. Upon request, the Owner will make available dimensions and power characteristics of Owner - furnished items. b. Proved for utility rough -ins for equipment items where required, irrespective of equipment responsibility designation unless specifically noted otherwise. 1) Rough -in locations, sizes, capacities, etc. shall be as noted. OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ITEMS 11700 - 1 2.2 MATERIALS Responsibility Symbol List: Note that "0" designates the Owner and that "C" designates the Contractor. Each item of equipment is assigned to one of the following responsibility categories: 0.F.C.I. Furnished by the Owner; installed by the Contractor. The Owner and the Contractor will coordinate deliveries of equipment to coincide with constructions schedule, thereby minimizing storage of equipment before installation. O.F.O.I. Furnished by the Owner; installed by the Owner. C.F.C.I. Furnished by the Contractor; installed by the Contractor. 1. The Owner will: a. Furnish all standard integral parts of equipment noted below. b. Tailgate deliver items to site. The Contractor shall: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington If the owner substitutes item similar to that specified, there shall be no change in rough -in cost unless substitution occurs after rough -in is completed or rough - in involves changing of the utilities or capacity different from that required by item originally specified. a. Receive item at site and give written receipt for item at time of delivery noting visible defects or omissions; if such declaration is not given, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for such defects and omissions. Refer to Section 01630 Product Handling and Protection. b. Store item until ready for installation. c. Uncrate, assemble and set item in place. d. Install items in accord with manufacturer's recommendations, instructions, and shop drawings under supervision of manufacturer's representative, supplying labor and material required and making mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections necessary to operate equipment. A. Owner - furnished and contractor - Installed (OFCI) items shall be indicated on the Drawing and as follows below: 1. Office furniture as shown on Drawings. 2. Markerboards. 3. Final connectors to Power Room equipment. B. Owner - furnished and Owner - Installed (OFOI) items shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as follows below: 1. Telephone switching equipment. 2. Telephone service equipment for local telephone service. 3. Office furniture as shown on Drawings. OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ITEMS 11700 - 2 A, ws • W.r i►a PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION lon McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the installed work and materials of other trades. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation Sequencing: Verify and coordinate any special conditions such as unusually large sized components, etc., which may affect easy installation of equipment items. Owner shall not be responsible for the cost of removing or replacing completed construction which might conflict with the installation requirements of any equipment item. B. Install Owner - furnished items in strict accord with Owner - Supplied shop drawings, product data, and written instructions. C. Refer to Drawings for specific installation and installation materials requirements. D. Prepare surfaces, form openings, install backing and anchor plates and provide all other incidental work as required for installation of Owner - furnished items. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the installed work and materials of other trades. B. In the event of damaged, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 EQUIPMENT LIST A. The following items of equipment shall be furnished and installed as part of this Project in accordance with the following descriptions and responsibility assignments: Item Responsibility Description Transport Room Equipment OFOI Provided and installed by Owner. Switches OFOI Provided and installed by Switch Vendor. Local Telephone Equipment OFOI Provide electrical outlet. Battery Room Equipment OFOI Provided and installed by Owner. END OF SECTION 11700 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ITEMS 11700 - 3 t r SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS i.. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS L i 1 .. 1 i 1 .. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes venetian blinds. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blind specified. Include printed data on physical characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and relationship to adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Include manufacturers full range of color selections. E. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Louver: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 2. Valance: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. F. Schedule of horizontal louver blinds using same room designations indicated on Drawings. G. Maintenance data for horizontal louver blinds to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 1 PART2- PRODUCTS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Test Method: Passes NFPA 701. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS a. Hunter Douglas, Inc. b. Kirsch. c. Levolor Corp. d. Architect's approved equal. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS B. Tilt Operation /Finish: Manual with wand. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds identical to those tested for the following fire- test - response characteristics as determined by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of horizontal louver blind from one source and by a single manufacturer. A. Field Measurements: Check actual horizontal louver blind dimensions by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds, Aluminum Louver Slats: A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard as follows: 1. Aluminum. 2. Nominal Louver Width: 1 -inch (mini blinds). 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 1. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind. 2. Tilt: Full. C. Cord -Lock Operation: Cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. 1. Position of Cord Lock: Right side, unless otherwise indicated. 12511-2 WIG 2.3 FABRICATION B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self - lubricating materials. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Cord Equalizers: Self- aligning to maintain horizontal louver blind position. E. Valance: Match color of louvers. F. Mounting: Wall. G. Colors and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide horizontal louvers complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns for horizontal louver blinds of type indicated. A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029 for each horizontal louver blind unit consisting of louvers, rails, cord locks, tilting mechanisms, tapes, and installation hardware. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than jamb to jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than head to sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. D. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; support blind units under conditions of normal use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of horizontal louver blinds. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass lites. 1. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington CLEANING Clean blind surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect, before time . . of Substantial Completion. . Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable:to manufacturer and;. Installer that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion: END OF SECTION 12511 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 4 SECTION 13000 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. The Conditions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and Modified General Conditions, and the General Requirements of the specifications, apply to work covered by this section. B. Comply with mechanical and electrical specification divisions, as applicable. Refer to other specification divisions for coordination of work. C. All wall construction shall be slab -to -slab in FM -200 protected areas. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of FM -200 fire suppression systems; wet -pipe and preaction sprinkler systems; and the detection, control, and alarm signaling for each suppression system. B. Each FM -200 fire suppression system shall include controls and other components required to provide a functioning system and shall include an initial charge of FM -200 gas. C. FM -200 protected areas shall be (1) Switch Room, (2) Transmission Room, (3) Co- locate Room, and (4) DC Power Room. Provide a separate and complete FM -200 system for each area as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of a preaction sprinkler system for the Electrical Room and the installation of a preaction sprinkler system for the FM 200 protected areas. E. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of wet -pipe sprinkler protection for all areas of the facility with the exception of the FM -200 and preaction sprinkler protected areas. F. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of separate air sampling smoke detection systems to serve the Switch Room, Transmission Room, Co- locate Room, and DC Power Room. G. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of addressable ceiling smoke detection in the Switch Room, Transmission Room, Co- locate Room, DC Power Room, and Electrical Room; and addressable duct smoke detection for HVAC equipment as shown on the drawings. H. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of an ADA and NFPA compliant audio /visual annunciation system to notify the building occupants of a fire alarm. I. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of a fire protection control panel to monitor, control, and alarm all of the above systems. The control panel shall be addressable and shall serve as the control center for all of the detection, suppression, and alarm systems serving the building and for all related HVAC equipment functions. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G UOBb952%a 52 10'411 10000 wpa 13000 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington J. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the installation of a remote annunciator panel to indicate room of origin, device address, and system alarms to fire department personnel entering the facility. K. All fire alarm system devices shall be addressable, and all devices of each type shall be UL- listed, FM- approved, and the product of a single manufacturer. 1.3 GOVERNING AUTHORITIES A. Each FM -200 fire suppression system and associated detection system shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards: 1. NFPA 2001, Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. 2. NFPA 12A, Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems. 3. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. 5. ANSI B31.1, Power Piping. 6. Factory Mutual Approval Guide. 7. Factory Mutual Data Sheet 5 -48, Automatic Fire Detectors. 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard No. ICS -6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 9. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory with Quarterly Supplements, and UL Standard No. 268, Safety Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards. 11. Applicable Federal, State and Local Codes. Should a conflict exist between standards, the most stringent shall apply. B. The FM -200 fire suppression system shall be Factory Mutual approved and the system design shall be UL listed. Also, wherever a UL standard has been established for a particular type of material or equipment, such materials and equipment provided on this project shall meet those requirements, and where applicable, system components shall bear the UL and /or FM approval labels. C. The Fire Protection Control Panel shall be Factory Mutual approved for all of the monitoring, detection, suppression systems release, and signaling functions specified herein. D. The wet -pipe and preaction sprinkler systems shall comply with NFPA 13 and the installation shall be Factory Mutual approved. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and details of each FM -200 fire suppression system and the Fire Protection Control Panel concurrently to the local governing authorities and the Architect. Receive approval from each before installation work is started. B. Submit shop drawings, calculations and details of each FM -200 fire suppression system to the manufacturer's home engineering office for review. Receive written approval from the manufacturer's home engineering office before installation work is started. Contractor shall forward a copy of manufacturer's approval to Owner. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G W Bv3904052.10SPed13000 wpd 13000 - 2 1.5 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION A. Upon completion of the FM -200 system design, and prior to any installation work, submit six (6) copies of the following data to the Architect for approval. Allow 10 days for review. All submittals shall be complete. Partial submissions will not be accepted. 1. The following information shall be provided for each hazard area: 2. The following pipe and nozzle calculation information shall be provided for each hazard area: 3. Include drawings to illustrate detector zoning and placement within each hazard area. 4. Include schematics for fire protection control panel, including circuit diagrams for detectors, cylinder control heads, manual pull stations, abort circuits, and audio and visual alarms. 5. Provide complete working drawings of the proposed systems showing locations of discharge nozzles, FM -200 storage containers, electrical control panels, manual release stations, abort switches, and audio and visual alarms. 6. Provide manufacturer's descriptive data for all components. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Examine other work shown on the drawings and the conditions at the job site. Coordinate the routing of the work with other construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. Pipe routing and nozzle locations shall be selected as required to avoid equipment, plumbing drain pipes, HVAC piping and ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical bus ducts, wiring, conduits, and structural elements. Provide pipe offsets as required to complete the installation. Prefabricated items shall be modified as required to fit the job site conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL . n3.v... Y. 4.41 a. Dimensions and volume. b. Design temperature. c. FM -200 volume factor. d. FM -200 required. e. Size and fill- weight of FM -200 cylinders. f. FM -200 volumetric concentration. g. Standby battery calculations a. Discharge time. b. Flow rate per nozzle. c. Type of nozzle. d. Pipe sizes. e. Nozzle thread and orifice sizes. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 0 J013■895N952 1USpe010000 wpd McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Provide an engineered FM -200 modular total flooding fire suppression and alarm system in each location indicated on the drawings. Central storage fixed -pipe systems will be considered if substantial cost savings can be demonstrated. Submit written details of central storage fixed -pipe cost savings at the bid due date for owner evaluations and approval. 13000 - 3 2.2 FM -200 PRODUCTS AND SUPPLIES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. The system design shall be in compliance with the limits and guidelines outlined in the manufacturer's design manual and operation and maintenance manual. C. System design shall be designed for a 7% concentration for the volume of each protected area. 1. The discharge time shall not exceed 10 seconds. 2. After system discharge, a minimum concentration of 7% shall be maintained for a period of 10 minutes. The maximum concentration shall be under 8% for this period. D. System design shall be based on the following criteria: 1. Maximum coverage shall be 900 SF per nozzle, or the manufacturer's maximum listed spacing, whichever is less, in all spaces where the floor -to- ceiling height is 8 feet or higher. 2. Maximum coverage shall be 600 SF per nozzle, or the manufacturer's maximum listed spacing, whichever is less, in all spaces where the floor -to- ceiling height is lower than 8 feet. 3. Spacing between nozzles shall be limited to a maximum of 30 feet in each direction. 4. Nozzle clustering will not be accepted. E. System shall be manufactured by Fike Protection Systems, Blue Springs, Missouri. F. The vendor shall have the capability to service and recharge the FM -200 system with factory- trained technicians. Necessary components, hardware, FM -200 gas, equipment, and personnel shall be available to provide twenty -four hour emergency service. A. FM -200 cylinders shall be constructed of high- strength steel alloy, conforming to applicable requirements of the Department of Transportation regulations on transportation of hazardous materials. Containers shall be securely mounted. Cylinders manifolded together shall be of the same size and agent fill- weight. B. Operation of each cylinder discharge valve shall be by means of burst disk activation operated by an electro- explosive initiator assembly. The cylinder valve shall be equipped with a pressure gauge for continuous monitoring of the cylinder pressure and a safety outlet to relieve pressure build -up automatically. C. Cylinders with 100 pounds or more of capacity shall each be equipped with an integral liquid level indicator for measuring the quantity of FM -200. The indicator shall be a "graduated dipstick," which will sense the position of an internal float containing a magnetic component, which rides on the liquid level. D. Discharge nozzles shall be one -piece aluminum and shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer which provides the greatest dispersion for the application. FM- approved orifice sizes shall be selected by the manufacturer. Provide deflector plates. E. Piping shall be black or galvanized steel, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM A -53 or A -106, and ANSI B -31.1. Steel pipe conforming to ASTM -120 shall not be used. F. Fittings: 1. Malleable iron, 300 pound class, ASTM A -197, plain or galvanized. 2. Ductile iron, 300 pound class, ASTM A -445. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 13000 - 4 G 1.1013095243952 lO 5j cI3000 wpd 1_ 1 ' 3. Steel, 1000 pound class ASTM A-234. 4. Stainless steel, Victaulic style 77 flexible coupling. G. isted han d supports at intervals dictated by ANSI B31 1 All piping, nozzles, and supports shall be restrained so that no unacceptable movement, either vertical or lateral, occurs other than normal movement anticipated within the restraining device. Piping shall be supported to prevent hazardous movement during discharge, H. Electrical Conductors: Provide all required electrical wiring for the entire system. Conductors shalt consist of insulated copper, in metal conduits. Conduits shall be supported independent of the ceiling grid system and all utilities/ductwork. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide power to the fire protection control panel, control circuits and relays for all isolation and fire/smoke dampers, necessary wiring to interface with the building's security system, and monitoring circuits to the alarm interface box in the Switch Room. 2.3 FIRE PROTECTION CONTROL PANEL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. The control panel shall be addressable and serve as the control center for all of the detection, suppression, and atarm systems serving the buitding. Detection and suppression release circuitry shati be separated loops). The control panet shall be surface-mounted in the open office area. It shall incorporate all necessary components for the systems' operations herein specified and shall be UL Iisted and FM approved. The controt unit shalt be modular in construction; operate on a primary input electrical power source of 3-wire, 120 volts ac, single-phase, 60 hertz; and shall provide 24 volt dc full wave rectified output to power detectors, extinguishing releases, and alarms. System shall include, but not be limited to, "on," "normal," and "trouble" lights for all circuit supervision. LED's shati be provided for first atarm, second atarm, FM-200 discharge, and the disable switch for FM-200 cytinders. Panel shatt be Fike Cheetah. B. The unit shall provide the following functions for each zone: 1. Monitor alt smoke detection circuits and initiate r conditioning shut-off circuits. 2. Operation of alt preaction sprinkler and FM-200 discharge, door hotder, and damper circuits. 3. Operation of alt audible and visual pre-alarm and alarm signals. 4. Provide primary power and control backup power for the entire system operation. 5. Provide interconnection to remote monitoring and alarm equipment. Refer to the Point List on drawing E3.01. 6. Provide supervision of the following circuitry: a. Input power status. b. Detection circuits. c. Manual pull puti station circuits. d. FM-200 discharge circuits. e. Preaction sprinkler discharge circuits. f. VVmtexflow and sprinkler valve tamper switches. g. Alarm circuits. h. Time delay | ito I . '----~-- j. Abort switch circuits. k. FM-200 storage cylinders. I. Ground fault supervision. m. DC power circuit. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 0 110018002‘0951M3pep3000 °= 13000 - 5 n. .Relay faults. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G:UGBbD52b952.t 0,4410 3000 wpd 2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 2.5 CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS A. Switch Room, Transmission Room, Co- locate Room, and DC Power Room McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. The detection systems shall be fully supervised, Class A type, and shall be based on a cross - zones or verified detection concept. D. A common trouble indicator, audio and visual, shall be located on the control panel and shall indicate any ground or open in the detection circuitry. Each detection zone shall have an independent trouble lamp. A ringback feature shall be provided with a "silence - normal" two - position switch which shall sound the trouble horn if the switch is in the silence position when the trouble is cleared. E. The system shall include auxiliary relays as necessary for shutdown of air handling units and isolation dampers. F. The control panel shall be provided with a factory- furnished release circuit disable switch to inhibit actuation of the release circuit. Operating the disable switch shall cause the panel to show a trouble condition. G. Provide necessary control panel power supply and control wiring. Wiring shall consist of insulated copper conductors in metal conduits. A. A remote annunciator panel shall be located adjacent to the primary entrance designated by the local fire department. Panel shall provide an alpha- numeric display of the following: 1. Room name and number of fire alarm origin, 2. Address and type of device(s) in alarm, and 3. Suppression system(s) which have activated. B. Provide framed 8 -1/2" x 11" floor plan of facility adjacent to the annunciator panel identifying room names /numbers and devices /addresses utilized on the annunciator panel. 1. The air sampling system in prealarm condition shall: a. Provide visual and audible signals at the control panel. b. Provide visual and audible signals (slow horn) throughout the protected space. c. Transmit a prealarm (first alarm) signal to the remote monitoring system. 2. The air sampling system in alarm condition shall: a. Provide visual and audible signals at the control panel. b. Continue to provide visual and audible signals (slow horn) throughout the protected space. c. Transmit a signal to the temperature control system to shut down the air handling unit(s) serving the room and close isolation dampers. d. Should a period of ten minutes pass without initiation of the first ceiling smoke detector, the air sampling system shall automatically reset, the isolation dampers shall open, and the air handling unit(s) shall restart. 3. The first ceiling smoke detector in alarm condition shall: a. Reinitiate visual and audible signals at the control panel. b. Reinitiate visual and audible signals (slow horn) throughout the protected space. 13000 - 6 c. Transmit a second alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. d. Lock out the air handling unit(s) serving the space so they cannot automatically restart. 4. The second ceiling smoke detector in alarm condition (release alarm) or a manual pull station operation shall: a. Light an indicator lamp indicating the system is in a 30- second time delay count (no time delay if manual pull station activated). b. Release the first interlock to the preaction sprinkler valve. c. Reinitiate visual and audible signals (fast horn) throughout the protected space. d. Transmit an alarm signal to the fire department. e. Transmit a third alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. f. Provide visual and audible signals (bells) throughout the building. 5. FM -200 discharge shall occur when the 30- second time delay times out (no time delay if manual pull station activated). a. Lamps shall Tight on the control panel to indicate that the system has discharged. b. Visual strobe(s) located immediately outside the protected area shall flash. c. Audible signal throughout the protected space shall change to steady horn. 6. Operation of a remote manual station shall cause an immediate discharge of FM -200. The manual stations shall bypass any time delay for the automatic activation system and shall override abort switches. a. Transmit a signal to the temperature control system to shut down the air handling unit(s) serving the room and close isolation dampers. b. Transmit an alarm signal (manual discharge) to the remote monitoring system. c. Provide visual and audible signals (bells) throughout the building. 7. Fusing of a sprinkler head (loss of air pressure in piping system) shall: a. Release the second interlock to the preaction sprinkler valve. b. Provide visual and audible signals at the control panel. c. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. B. Electrical Room 1. The first ceiling smoke detector in alarm condition shall: a. Energize a bell located inside the protected area. b. Provide visual and audible signals at the control panel. c. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. 2. The second ceiling smoke detector in alarm condition shall: a. Release the first interlock to the preaction sprinkler valve. b. Transmit an alarm signal to the fire department. c. Transmit a second alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. d. Provide visual and audible signals (bells) throughout the building. 3. Fusing of a sprinkler head (loss of air pressure in piping system) shall: a. Release the second interlock to the preaction sprinkler valve. b. Provide visual and audible signals at the control panel. c. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. C. Wet -pipe Sprinkler System FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G'UOBMYSZ5952.10■pec110000.wpd McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 13000 - 7 1. Initiation of a supervisory switch shall: a. Provide a visual and audible signal at the control panel b. Transmit a trouble signal to the remote monitoring system. 2. Initiation of a flow switch shall: a. Provide a visual and audible signal at the control panel. b. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote monitoring system. c. Transmit an alarm signal to the fire department. d. Provide visual and audible signals (bells) throughout the building. D. System Supervision 1. Initiation of any system supervisory condition shall: a. Provide a visual and audible signal at the control panel. b. Transmit a trouble signal to the remote monitoring system. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2.6 REMOTE MANUAL CONTROLS (PULL STATIONS) A. Electrical remote controls shall be provided and located inside the rooms (Switch, Transmission, Co- locate, and DC Power) next to each exit from the protected areas. The manual station switches shall be dual action and have break -glass rods to guard against accidental use. Warning signs shall be placed on each station indicating that operation of the station will cause FM -200 discharge. 2.7 ABORT SWITCHES A. Abort switches shall consist of a deadman type momentary contact pushbutton switch which, while depressed, shall interrupt the automatic FM -200 discharge circuits. Locate and clearly identify an abort switch next to each manual pull station. Coordinate and verify that a telephone jack is installed adjacent to each abort switch. Audible and visual alarms, with an audible silence and ringback feature, shall operate at the control panel upon any abort condition or fault in the abort circuitry. Depressing of the button shall not reset the time delay. 2.8 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Detectors shall be individually addressable, photoelectric and ionization, high sensitivity, analog type; UL listed and FM approved. The detector assemblies shall consist of a detector head and twist lock base. All smoke detectors shall be provided with a status indicating LED for visual supervision and auxiliary contacts for remote annunciation. The detectors shall be able to be manually calibrated from the control panel and shall be automatically self - calibrating on a weekly basis. B. Spacing of detectors shall be on 20 -foot centers (400 square feet), with no Tess than two detectors (one photoelectric and one ionization) in a protected space. 2.9 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Duct detectors shall be addressable, photo - electric type, FM approved. B. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 01.10010952 8052 1OSpec113000 wp0 13000 - 8 1 11 r C. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor - control circuit. D. Duct Detector Housing: Provide smoke detector duct housing assembly to facilitate mounting an _: analog photoelectric detector along with a standard relay detector mounting base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 300 and 2000 feet per minute. Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube which extends into the duct air stream at least one -half the distance of the duct width. Provide drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing. E. Provide remote alarm LED and Remote Test Station for each detector associated with a rooftop . unit. i 1 1. Lamp and test station shall be flush - mounted in a single gang wall plate. 2.10 AIR SAMPLING SYSTEM A. The early warning air sampling system shall be tested and approved by Factory Mutual, both as a stand -alone system and in conjunction with the Building Fire Protection Control Panel. The system shall separately monitor and alarm two zones. A remote display unit shall be provided adjacent to the building fire alarm panel. B. The system sensitivity shall be 0% to 0.12% obscuration per foot. A prealarm signal shall be initiated at 0.06% and an alarm signal at 0.12 %. C. The piping network shall be engineered by the manufacturer with sampling points spaced at a maximum of 15 feet on center. The piping system shall be designed to ensure equal sensitivity at each sampling point and shall include alternating high and low sampling points, relative to the ceiling and top of equipment, and directly in front of each return air grille. D. Piping shall be CPVC and shall be independently supported at a maximum of 6 feet on center. E. Both the system design and final installation shall require written approval by the manufacturer or an authorized distributor /representative. 2.11 AUDIBLE ALARMS A. Audible alarms for FM 200 systems shall meet the minimum requirements of 84 decibels at 10 feet. Audible alarms shall be provided inside protected areas adjacent to visual alarms. Audible alarms to notify the building occupants of a fire alarm shall be located as shown on the plans and shall provide a minimum of 80 decibels throughout the facility. B. Alarm bells shall be six -inch, 24 volt DC type, and shall be wired to the control panel to signal water flow. C. Alarm horns shall be a 24 volt DC type and shall be wired to the control panel to signal smoke detector initiation and FM -200 discharge. 2.12 VISUAL ALARMS FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G v0e1595M52 I SpoC QOO wpJ McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Visual alarms shall be a flashing strobe light type. Visual alarms shall be provided inside FM -200 protected areas as required by the system manufacturer to enable clear viewing from any point in the room. Visual alarms shall be provided outside of FM -200 protected areas above each door that exits the protected areas. 13000 - 9 B. Visual'alarms indicating a fire alarm shall be ADA and NFPA 72 compliant, wall or ceiling mounted strobe lights, located as shown on the plans with candela ratings selected to provide proper coverage. 2.13 FUNCTIONAL TEST A. System design shall permit full testing of discharge circuitry, abort circuitry, power shutdown circuitry, air - conditioning shut -off circuitry, damper circuitry, etc., without discharge of the FM -200 and without disconnecting the FM -200 supply from the system. 2.14 BATTERY SYSTEM A. Battery backup of the entire fire protection control panel and FM -200 system, including detection, alarm, actuation, and supervisory systems is required. The backup system shall be designed such that, upon primary failure backup power automatically services the system with no delay or interruption of any kind. The battery backup system shall be capable of powering the system for a period of not less than 24 hours in a normal standby condition, at the end of which time it shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm condition for a period of not less than 10 minutes. The trouble horn and light shall be activated to indicate that the system is operating on battery power. 2.15 SIGNAGE A. Warning and instructional signs shall be provided and posted on each door entering FM -200 protected areas. All signage recommended by NFPA 2001 shall be provided. 2.16 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS A. The design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, identification, and testing of the system shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of the BOCA, FM, and NFPA codes and standards noted. Systems shall be hydraulically designed for a 0.15 gpm /sq. ft. density over the largest compartmented area up to maximum of 2500 square feet. An outside hose stream demand of 250 gpm shall be included. Recent flow and pressure information shall be obtained from the city of Tuckwila, or a flow test shall be conducted prior to the system design. 1. Installation of entire system shall be accomplished by a manufacturer of approved sprinkler equipment, his representative or licensee, who is now and has been engaged in the installation of automatic sprinkler systems for the past five years. 2. Conceal all sprinkler piping in rooms with ceilings. 3. All devices and equipment shall be UL listed and FM approved. 4. Sprinkler heads in rooms with ceilings shall be white, semi - recessed, glass -bulb type. Sprinkler heads in areas without ceilings shall be brass upright type. All heads shall be 165 °F, 1/2-inch orifice, quick response type. 5. Provide and install a waterflow switch for each sprinkler zone and an electrical supervisory switch for each listed indicating control valve in the system. 6. Provide and install a flashing strobe light on the exterior of the building to indicate water (fire) flow inside the facility. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G U0131E952■E952. 1065pec1I3 Owed McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 13000 - 10 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 7. All equipment of each type (i.e., sprinkler heads, valves, switches) shall be products of a single manufacturer. B. Steel Pipe 1. ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black and galvanized, plain and threaded ends, for welded, threaded, cut - groove, and rolled - groove joints. 2. ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5 -inch sizes and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness for 6 -inch sizes, with plain ends, black and galvanized, for rolled - groove and welded joints. C. Fittings 1. Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, 250 -psig (1725 kPa) minimum pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement -mortar lining. 2. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, with threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, seamless or welded; ASME B16.9, buttwelding; or ASME B16.11, socket - welding type for welded joints. 4. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 5. Grooved -End Fittings for Steel Pipe: UL- listed and FM- approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings. D. Couplings for Grooved -End Steel Pipe and Grooved -End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C606, ASTM A 536 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 malleable -iron housing, with enamel finish. Include synthetic- rubber gasket with central- cavity, pressure- responsive design; ASTM A 183 carbon -steel bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. E. Fire Protection Service Valves: UL- listed and FM- approved. Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type. 1. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: Cast - bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. 2. Indicating Valves, 2 -1/2 Inches and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded ends, and integral indicating device. a. Indicator: Electrical 120 volts a.c., prewired, single- circuit, supervisory switch. 3. Gate Valves, 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger: Iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends. 4. Swing Check Valves, 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast -iron body and bolted cap, with bronze disc or cast -iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends. F. Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections. 1. Waterflow Indicators: UL 346, electrical- supervision type, vane -type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single -pole, double- throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125 volts a.c. and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts d.c.; complete with factory-set, field- adjustable retard FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS GU0818932N952.1O$pecil3000 wp0 13000 - 11 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington element to prevent false signals, and tamper -proof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed. 2. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for valves, electrical- supervision type, SPDT (single -pole, double- throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full open position. G. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems. Factory fabricated according to MSS SP -58. Fasteners for fire protection systems shall include UL listing and FM approval. 1. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex -head, track bolts and nuts. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 2.17 PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Provide FM- approved, electric /pneumatic double interlocked type preaction sprinkler systems. Both types of smoke detectors serving the space must be in alarm and the supervisory pressure must be relieved from the piping system before the deluge valve shall open to fill the system with water. B. Sprinkler heads, densities, piping, valves, etc., shall be as specified in the previous section. Piping shall be galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The FM -200 system shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer's design manual and operation and maintenance manual by personnel fully experienced in FM -200 fire detection and suppression systems. Craftsmen shall be fully skilled in the trades involved with the installation, and currently licensed in systems and alarms by the state. B. Agent manifolding and piping shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 2001. C. Threaded connections: Use suitable thread lubricant and apply to male threads only. D. Pipe shall be reamed, blown clear, and internally swabbed with appropriate solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly. E. The electrical installation shall comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and applicable electrical specification sections. F. No sprinkler piping shall be routed through or over FM -200 protected spaces. 3.2 TESTS A. Upon completion of the installation, calculations shall be revised to reflect as -built conditions and resubmitted for approval. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS ouoet952ue95:.10sue03000.wvd 13000 - 12 AiC i B. Upon completion of the FM -200 system installation, a representative from the manufacturer's home engineering office shall inspect the installation to certify the system has been installed per manufacturer's recommendations and per approved design drawings and specifications. Contractor shall provide manufacturer's certification /approval to the Owner prior to conducting tests. C. Upon completion of the FM -200 system installation, FM -200 contractor shall verify that all items on the "FM -200 Protected Area Construction Checklist" (Appendix A) have been completed. Contractor shall complete the attached checklist and forward to Owner. D. Upon completion of the FM -200 system installation, FM -200 contractor shall provide a scale for on- site weighing of tanks or shall provide manufacturer's written certification that tank's installed weight matches factory tested weight and cylinder tagged weight. E. Upon completion of the installation, the following functions shall be tested: 1. Audible and visual signals. 2. Abort and manual pull stations. 3. Actuator circuits. 4. Air handling and equipment shutdowns. 5. All control panel functions. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington F. Upon completion of the FM -200 system installation, the following tests shall be performed in the presence of the Architect and owner's Representative. 1. A puff test utilizing nitrogen to demonstrate continuity of piping with free unobstructed flow. 2. An enclosure integrity test per NFPA 12A. 3. The piping shall be pneumatically tested in a closed circuit for a period of 10 minutes at 150 psig. At the end of 10 minutes the pressure drop shall not exceed 10 percent of test pressure. When pressurizing piping, pressure shall be increased in 50 psi increments. 4. All tests shall be conducted by experienced personnel according to the fire detection equipment manufacturer's recommended methods and procedures, and in accordance with the requirements of the governing authorities. 5. The governing authorities shall be given the opportunity to participate in the tests. A minimum of 10 days notice shall be given by the Contractor to the governing authorities. 6. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the protected area has been adequately sealed to prevent excessive leakage. Should the system fail to meet the functional or other test requirements specified herein, a retest of system shall be conducted. The contractor shall be responsible for all costs, including the Owner's costs, associated with each retest. 7. Submit six (6) copies of all test reports to the Architect for review. 8. Prior to final acceptance of the FM -200 system(s), submit four (4) copies of approved test reports, approved as -built drawings, and all previously outlined manufacturer's certifications to the Owner and to the Architect for review. G. Upon completion of the sprinkler systems, each supervised valve shall be closed and a trouble signal at the Fire Protection Control Panel verified. Each sprinkler zone shall also be flow tested and alarm signals verified. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 13000 - 13 G.V0B1E95218952 1015pec113000 wpd H. Upon completion of the detection and alarm systems, each ceiling smoke detector, manual pull station, and audible /visual device shall be tested and each address verified. I. All tests shall be scheduled per the Owner's requirements. All costs associated with testing (including local authority fees, etc.) during or after normal working hours shall be included in the Contractor's bid. 3.3 CERTIFICATION A. Submit a certificate to the Architect upon completion of each FM -200 fire protection piping system. The certificate shall state that the work has been completed and tested in accordance with NFPA 2001, that there are no defects in the system, and that it is operational. B. Test procedures and certificate format shall be as indicated in NFPA 2001 unless otherwise directed by the governing authorities. 3.4 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final acceptance, operation and maintenance training shall be provided to each shift of the Owner's operating personnel. Training shall include emergency procedures, abort functions, system control panel operation, troubleshooting procedures, and maintenance and safety requirements. A training area will be provided by the Owner, in the same building as the protected area. Dates and times for the training periods shall be coordinated with the Owner not less than one week prior to each session. Provide a written report of system operation, reset, and instruction procedures. 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prior to final acceptance of the fire detection, suppression, and alarm system(s), provide four (4) copies of complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Manuals shall include catalog cuts, diagrams, list of part numbers and manufacturer's name, all test data and FM reports, and descriptive data covering proper testing, operation, and maintenance of the system(s) installed. 3.6 USE OF UTILITIES A. Temporary utility connections which may be required shall be installed, maintained and removed by the Contractor at his own expense. Removal of such connections shall be accomplished prior to final acceptance of the systems. 3.7 CLEAN -UP 3.8 INTERRUPTION OF OWNER OPERATIONS FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS G.UOB1D052‘0952. f S{31113000 wpd McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. The Contractor shall clean up each area to the maximum extent possible at the end of each working day, and shall remove and dispose of debris and trash daily. A. Installation of the fire protection and alarm systems shall not interfere with the installation and check -out of the owner's equipment, which may occur concurrently with the systems' installation work. All work shall be planned carefully in advance to preclude any damage to the facility or equipment. 13000 - 14 END OF SECTION 13000 9 WARRANTY A. All equipment, workmanship and materials, including installation, shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years after the date of final acceptance by the Architect for beneficial use by the Owner. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 0110810932113952.104pKi13000.wpd 13000 - 15 I,.sIMeNl�. Mr/ FM -200 PROTECTED AREA CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST To be completed and submitted by General Contractor prior to Acceptance Testing with Architect and Owner's Representative. 1. Are there any visible perimeter wall penetrations? Below ceiling Above Ceiling Yes No Yes No 2. Are there any known structural floor slab penetrations? Yes No 3. Are all ceiling tiles properly clipped down to prevent lifting in the event of an FM- Yes No 200 discharge? 4. Are there any missing ceiling tiles? Yes No 5. Has the space changed from the original design? Yes No If Yes, has FM -200 Contractor been informed? Yes No 6. Have all control dampers been installed and are spring closing type? Yes No 7. All doors in relation to protected areas contain sweep, close and latch Yes No automatically and promptly. Check for gaps. 8. Tag all agent storage containers with FM -200 fill weights. Done 9. Is each agent storage container securely braced? Yes No 10. Verify that wall can withstand discharge thrust of agent storage container. Yes No 11. Verify that agent storage container pressure gauge reads 360 psi at 70 degrees Done F. Specify on each storage container tag. 12. Are all edges around perimeter walls sealed? Yes No 13. Are all edges around window mullions sealed? Yes No 14. Is all FM -200 piping securely braced? Yes No 15. Are there any nozzles obstructed by equipment or cabling? Yes No 16. Do local codes require Fire Marshal to be present for test? (If so, contractor Yes No shall notify.) 17. Clean all detectors. Done 18. Check all supervised functions. (Example: Remove detector from ceiling; result Done should be trouble condition.) 19. Smoke detectors installed in all bases. Yes No 20. Each detector put into alarm using smoke and its location verified on fire Yes No protection control panel. 21. Check abort operation and verify that abort is activated after second alarm and Yes No not after first alarm. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS - APPENDIX A G.UOB■8952b952 10■pec■13000a wpd FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS - APPENDIX A McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 13000 A -1 With abort button depressed after second alarm, pull manual release to verify Yes that it overrides abort. 23. Check 30 second timer after second alarm and before discharge. Set at exactly Yes 30 seconds. Verify that alarm is sent to fire department upon second alarm and not first alarm. 25. Verify that signal is sent to remote security panel upon first alarm. 26. Verify that batteries are installed in fire protection control panel. Yes No 27. Verify prealarm bell sounds upon first alarm. Yes No 28. Verify evacuation hom sounds after the second alarm. Yes No 29. Verify visual strobe lights inside and outside protected area flash as specified. . Yes No 30. Verify that all waming and instructional signs have been installed on entering Yes No protected area. ENERGIZE ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS AND HVAC EQUIPMENT FOR EACH OF THE FOLLOWING TESTS. PERFORM EACH TEST SEPARATELY. 31. Switch off Interlock for "NC System Shut -down" at control panel. Does NC Yes equipment shut down? 32. . Create a first and second alarm on control panel. a. Each A/C unit shunt -trip activated? b. Each control damper closed? General. Contractor Representative's Signature Date FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS - APPENDIX A 0 JOB% 09S7.1OSpap10OOOaf wpd McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No 13000 A - 2 rat FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS - APPENDIX B G.U08■095210962.10400190001) wptl FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS - APPENDIX B GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S CHECKLIST 1. Has "Contractor's Application for Acceptance of FM -200 System Installations" been submitted for review? 12. Verify that any temporary utility connections which may have been used are removed. 13. Provide written warranty for a period of five (5) years for all equipment, workmanship, and materials, including installation. Date shall be from the period of final acceptance of system by the Architect for beneficial use by the Owner. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Following approval of "FM -200 Protected Area Construction Checklist" and prior to final acceptance: 2. Set date of final test. Done 3. Inform local fire marshal of FM -200 system test (if required). Yes No 4. Inform McLeodUSA representative, Architect, and Engineer 10 days prior to Done scheduled tests. 5. Inform local authorities a minimum of 10 days prior to scheduled tests. Done 6. Has manufacturer provided written approval of design and installation? Yes No 7. Submit six (6) copies of all test reports to the Architect for review. Done 8. Submit four (4) copies of approved test reports, as -built drawings, and Done manufacturer certifications for final acceptance of the FM -200 system(s). 9. Submit to the Architect a certificate stating that the work for each FM -200 system Done has been completed and tested in accordance with NFPA 2001, that there are no defects in the system, and that it is operational for final acceptance. 10. Verify with a signed report that operation and maintenance training has been Done provided to each shift of the Owner's operating personnel. Provide a written report of the system operation, reset and instruction procedures. All to be done for final acceptance. 11. Submit four (4) copies of complete operation and maintenance manuals prior to Done final acceptance. Yes No Done Done General Contractor Representative's Signature Date Upon completion of all items listed above, Contractor may at that time submit signed report for final acceptance. 13000E -1 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.1 GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Submittals: Submit data according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. Comply with ASME 81.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings. B. Joining Materials: Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for joining materials. C. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep - pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. D. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. E. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B; premixed and factory- packaged; 5000 -psi (34.50MPa), 28 -day compressive strength; nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 1.3 EXECUTION 1. Size: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation and completely cover opening. 2. Finish: Polished chrome plate. A. Piping Systems: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. 1. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. 2. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. 3. Install piping in concealed interior locations. 4. Install piping free of sags and bends. 5. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. 6. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1 -inch (25mm) clearance around insulation. 7. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 8. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. 9. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: a. Chrome - Plated Piping: Cast - brass, one - piece, with set - screw, and polished chrome - plated finish. Use split- casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington b. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped - steel. c. Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped -steel and chrome - plated finish. 10. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. 11. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. 12. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements. 13. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. a. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22 "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 14. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. a. Install unions in piping 2 inches (50mm) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having 2 inches (50mm) or smaller threaded pipe connection. b. Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. B. Equipment Installations: Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. 1. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. 2. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. 3. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 4. Install equipment giving right -of -way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 5. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. C. Erection of Metal Supports and Anchorage: Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. D. Demolition: Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated. 1. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. 2. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety. 3. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site. 4. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation. E. Cutting and Patching: Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. 1. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 i IT r i L 1 .. 1 .. 1 SECTION 15100 - VALVES 1.1 GENERAL 1 VALVES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Summary: This section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system sections. B. Submittals: Submit Product Data for each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building service piping and ASME 831.1 for power piping. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As required to suit system pressures and temperatures. B. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. C. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator features: 1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever Handles: For quarter -turn valves 6 inches (DN150) and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves. D. Threads: ASME B1.20.1. t.., E. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. F. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18. Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F (450 deg C) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves. G. Gate Valves, 2 -1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP -80; Class 125, 200 -psi (1380 -kPa) cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 300 -psi (2070 -kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast - bronze body and bonnet, solid- bronze wedge, copper - silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon - impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable -iron handwheel. H. Ball Valves, 4 Inches (DN100) and Smaller: MSS SP -110, Class 150, 600 -psi (4140 -kPa) CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2 -piece construction; chrome - plated brass ball, standard port for 1 /2 -inch (DN15) valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4 -inch (DN20) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections: 1. Operator: Vinyl- covered steel lever handle. 2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. 3. Memory Stop: For operator handles. I. Plug Valves: MSS SP- 78, 175 -psi (1200 -kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast -iron body and bonnet, cast - iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or Teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections; square head operator and loose wrench. 15100 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington J. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP -80; Class 125, 200 -psi (1380 -kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300 -psi (2070 -kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast - bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon bronze -alloy stem, Teflon - impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable -iron handwheel. 1.3 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. K. Globe Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP -85, Class 125, 200 -psi (1380 -kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast -iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass -alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon - impregnated packing with cast -iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast -iron handwheel. L. Swing Check Valves, 2 -1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP -80; Class 125, 200 -psi (1380 - kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300 -psi (2070 -kPa) CWP; horizontal swing, Y- pattern, ASTM B 62 cast - bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections. M. Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP -71, Class 125, 200 -psi (1380 -kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast -iron body and bolted cap, horizontal -swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections. EXECUTION Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow. Install in a horizontal position with hinge pin level. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe /tube connections: 1. 2. 3. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low- pressure steam service. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2 -1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged. I. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements. J. Domestic Water Systems Applications: Use the following valve types: 1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast -iron body to suit piping system. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600 -psi (4140 -kPa) CWP, with stem extension. 3. Plug Valves: Neoprene -faced plug, Buna N packing. 4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast -iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or Teflon disc. VALVES 15100 - 2 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington p. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-Plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat. 7. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated. VALVES 15100-3 SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 PRODUCTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Submittals: Submit product data and shop drawings according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory- fabricated according to MSS SP -58. 1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field - applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Powder - Actuated Drive -Pin Fasteners: Powder - actuated -type, drive -pin attachments with pull -out and shear capacities appropriate for supported Toads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval. C. Mechanical- Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull -out and shear capacities appropriate for supported Toads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections. C. Comply with MSS SP -69 and SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. D. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP -69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, and at changes in direction of piping. F. Install powder- actuated drive -pin fasteners in concrete using operators that are licensed by powder- actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder- actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. G. Install mechanical - anchor fasteners in concrete according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded. L. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and length as required to accommodate pipe movement caused by expansion and contraction. M Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS END OF SECTION 15145 ■ • ; • 15145 - 2 iJj I al) 413 l 1-1N 01,1 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k- value, thickness, and accessories. B. Quality Assurance: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory. 1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Glass Fiber Insulation: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. 1. Jacket: All- purpose, factory- applied, laminated glass - fiber- reinforced, flame - retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil having self - sealing lap. 2. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F -1, jacketed flexible blankets. a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum, at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed. a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Density: 10 average maximum. 4. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow -up service. a. Lagging Adhesive: MIL- A- 3316C, non - flammable adhesive in the following Classes and Grades: 1) Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation, sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber insulation. 2) Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces. b. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F. 5. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for outside service. B. Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass - fiber- reinforced, flame - retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 1 a. Tape Width: 4 inches. b. Cloth Standard: MIL- C- 20079H, Type I. c. Tape Standard: MIL- C- 20079H, Type II. D. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water - based, fire- resistive composition. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F. 1.3 EXECUTION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E 96. b. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 781. C. Accessories and Attachments: Provide the following accessories: 1. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per sq. yd. A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt. B. Installation, General: Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each mechanical system. 1. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. 2. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F. 3. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces. 5. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier. 6. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier. 7. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive. 8. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage - per - gallon rate. 9. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. 10. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: a. Fibrous glass ducts. b. Factory- insulated terminal boxes. c. Nameplates and data plates. d. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems. e. Fire protection piping systems. f. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. g. Chrome - plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled. C. Pipe Insulation Installation, General: Unless otherwise indicated, install pipe insulation as follows: 1. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 2 0.1 MY* •..ww.v.-...w.Ynaw.* E. Duct Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, install duct insulation as follows: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation. 3. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints. 5. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: a. Pull jacket tight and smooth. b. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3- inches wide, and of same material as insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of butt strip and space 4 inches on center. c. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center. d. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints, over staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. e. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe. 6. Fire -Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire -rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with firestopping or fire - resistant joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 for firestopping and fire- resistant joint sealers. 7. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. 8. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field- fabricated segments of insulation around flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive. a. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. b. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1 -pipe diameter, which ever is greater. c. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire or tape. d. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3- inches pipe size with premolded insulation. 9. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors." For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches and taper and seal insulation ends. a. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. D. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation Installation: Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound. 1. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as follows: a. Smaller Than 24 Inches: Bonding adhesive applied in 6- inch -wide transverse strips on 12 -inch centers. b. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 3 F. Jackets: Unless otherwise indicated, install jackets as follows: 1. Foil and Paper Jackets (FP): Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal joints and 3-inch-wide butt strips at end joints. • c. Overlap joints 3 inches. d. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier compound. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington a. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. .- Applications: Materials and thicknesses are specified as follows: I 4 1. Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems: a. • Domestic Cold Water: Glass fiber material (W thickness) with vapor barrier and "K" jacket. b. Domestic Hot Water: Glass fiber material (W thickness) with vapor barrier and "K" jacket. 2. • Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems: a. Domestic Hot Water: Insulate exposed hot water piping with glass fiber material (34" thickness) with vapor barrier and "K" jacket. 3. Duct Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following duct systems: a. Interior Concealed Supply and Return Air Ductwork: Glass fiber material (1-1/2" thickness) with blanket vapor barrier. H. • Pipe Insulation Schedules: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include: 1. Field-Applied Jackets: K - Foil and Paper. 2. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size. END OF SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 4 , SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 PRODUCTS B. Pipe and Tube Fittings: As follows: A. Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Comply with ASME 831.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. A. Pipes and Tubes: The application of the following pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods required for plumbing piping systems are indicated in "Pipe and Fittings Applications" Paragraph. 1. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. 3. Plastic (PVC), DWV Pipe: ASTM D 266 5, Schedule 40, plain ends. 1. Wrought- Copper, Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22. 2. Cast- Copper - Alloy, Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast - copper -alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball- and - socket joint, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder -joint and threaded ends. a. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 4. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Classes 150 and 300, hexagonal stock, with ball- and - socket joint, metal -to -metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends having threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. 5. Plastic (PVC), Schedule 40, Socket -type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2466. C. Joining Materials: Solder, brazing, and welding filler metals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 1. Join PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2665. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground: Use the following: 1. 3 -1/2 Inches and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; wrought- copper or cast - copper -alloy pressure fittings; copper unions; bronze flanges; and solder joints with 95/5 Tin - Antimony solder (no lead). B. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: 1. 1 -1/2 to 4 Inches: Plastic (PVC) DWV Pipe; PVC socket -type drain, waste and vent pipe pattern fittings; and solvent cemented joints. PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Water Distribution Piping Installation: Install with 1 /32- inch -per -foot (1/4 percent) slope downward toward drain. D. Drainage and Vent Piping Installation: Install PVC drainage and vent piping per ASTM D 2665. 1. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, except where another slope is indicated: a. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent). b. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent). 2. Install engineered sanitary drainage and vent systems, in locations indicated, as indicated and as follows: a. Combination Waste and Vent Systems: Comply with standards of authority having jurisdiction. E. Compression Joint: Make with neoprene gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. F. Hubless Joint: Make with neoprene gasket and sleeve or clamp. G. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated. H. Drain Valves: Install drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" on each plumbing equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping system. I. Hangers and Supports Installation: Section "Supports and Anchors." 1. Install hangers for horizontal sizes: Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Size Max. Span (Inches) (Feet) Upto3 /4 7 5 1 7 6 1 -1/4 7 7 1 -1/2 9 8 2 10 8 Pipe Material PVC Plastic Pipe Copper Tubing - 1 -1/4 Inches and Smaller Copper Tubing - 1 -1/2 Inches and Larger 3. Pipe Attachments: Install the following: Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod Copper Tube Max. Span Min. Rod Diameter (Feet) (Inches) 2. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports: 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 Horizontal In Feet 4 6 10 Vertical In Feet 4 10 10 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 2 MAr Connections: Connect as follows: Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight horizontal runs. 100 feet and Tess. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install cold -water supply piping runouts of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code, to plumbing fixtures and drains. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. Inspect and test piping systems following the procedures of the authority having jurisdiction. Cleaning: Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of the authority having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15410 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 3 I d, 1 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.1 GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Submit Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow - control rates. B. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of CABO A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90 -480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101 -336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people. D. Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102 -486, "Energy Policy Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures. E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. F. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing -in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified. 1. Electric Water Coolers: ARI 1010 and UL 399. 2. Emergency Equipment: ANSI Z358.1. 3. Enameled, Cast -Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1 M. 4. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2. 5. Porcelain - Enameled Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 6. Stainless -Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M. 7. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. B. Lavatory/Sink Faucet Standards: Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar- type- fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold -water indicators; 2.5- gpm- (0.16 -Us -) maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome - plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor. C. Miscellaneous Fitting Standards: Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. Include polished, chrome - plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors. 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028. 3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M. 4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034. 1 D. Miscellaneous Component Standards: Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing fixtures, equipment, and appliances. 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1 1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1 M. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME 81.20.1. 4. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 5. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1. 6. Supports: ASME A112.6.1 M. 1.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for potable, hot- and cold -water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing -in data when roughing -in data are not indicated. B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following: 1. Chair Carriers: For wall- hanging lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water coolers. 2. Reinforcement: For floor- mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed, box - mounted, electric water coolers. 3. Fabricate reinforcement from 2 -by-4 -inch or 2 -by -6 -inch (38- by -89 -mm or 38 -by- 140 -mm) fire- retardant - treated -wood blocking between studs or 1/4 -by -6 -inch (6.35 -by- 152.4 -mm) steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs. E. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold -water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 2. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold -water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 3. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold -water supplies, offset drain, trap, and waste to wall. 4. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture. F. Plumbing Fixture Installation: Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing -in drawings, and referenced standards. H. Install floor - mounted, floor - outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals. I. Install toilet seats on water closets. J. Install tanks for accessible, tank -type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment. K. Fasten wall- hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington L. Fasten floor - mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls. M. Fasten recessed, wall- mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. N. Fasten wall - mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. O. Fasten counter - mounting plumbing fixtures to casework. P. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture. Q. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop valve is not specified. 1. Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position. R. Install water - supply stop valves in accessible locations. S. Install faucet, laminar -flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. T. Install supply, flow - control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. U. Install faucet, flow - control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. V. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated. W. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. X. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep- pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Y. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1 -part, mildew - resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Z. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. AA. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment. BB. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. CC. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. DD. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. EE. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington FF. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. • GG. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, and flushometer valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream. • HH. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. II. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. JJ. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. KK: Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner. LL. Provide plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES ) 15440 - 4 4 A. Submittals: Submit Product Data for each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified and Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. _ B. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME i 1. t 1 i t I s 1 SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING 1.1 GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: 1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." 2. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant- Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves." E. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled. F. Summary: This section includes refrigerant piping used for air - conditioning applications, including pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties, special duty valves, and refrigerants. G. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and installation of piping to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected equipment. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, drawn temper. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, annealed temper. C. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought- copper streamlined pattern. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg -1 (Silver). E. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 500 -psig (3450 -kPa) working pressure and 275 deg F (135 deg C) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged -brass or bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless -steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless -steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder -end connections. F. Packed -Angle Valves: 500 -psig (3450 -kPa) working pressure and 275 deg F (135 deg C) working temperature, forged -brass or bronze body, forged -brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder -end connections. G. Check Valves -- Smaller than 1 -Inch NPS (DN25): 500 -psig (3450 -kPa) operating pressure, 300 deg F (149 deg C) operating temperature; cast -brass body, with removable piston, PTFE seat, and stainless -steel spring; straight- through globe design. Valve shall be straight- through pattern, with solder -end connections. H. Check Valves -- Larger than 1 -Inch NPS (DN25): 450 -psig (3100 -kPa) operating pressure, 300 deg F (149 deg C) operating temperature; cast - bronze body, with cast - bronze or forged -brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall be straight - through or angle pattern, with solder -end connections. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 - 1 M. Refrigerant: Per manufacturer's requirements. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington I. Service Valves: 500 -psig (3450 -kPa) pressure rating, forged -brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder -end connections. J. Straight- or Angle -Type Strainers: 430 -psig (2960 -kPa) working pressure; forged -brass or steel body with stainless -steel wire or brass - reinforced Monel screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with solder -end connections. K. Moisture /Liquid Indicators: 500 -psig (3450 -kPa) operating pressure, 200 deg F (93 deg C) operating temperature; forged -brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color -coded moisture indicator, and solder -end connections. L. Permanent Filter -Dryer: 350 -psig (2140 -kPa) maximum operating pressure, 225 deg F (107 deg C) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought - copper fittings for solder -end connections; molded -felt core surrounded by desiccant. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Aboveground, within Building: Hard copper tube. B. Belowground: Soft copper tube. C. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. D. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." E. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. F. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. G. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full- thickness insulation. H. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent. 1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all Teaks have been eliminated. 2. Do not insulate hot gas and liquid refrigerant lines from the indoor cooling units to the outdoor condensing units serving switch rooms. I. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically. J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 - 2 L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down. M. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure - regulating valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators. N. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions. 0. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors. P. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15 procedures. Q. Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Provide the following types according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP -69: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) in length. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet (6 m) or longer supported by a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 280). a. 1/2 Inch (12.7 mm): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.3 mm). b. 5/8 Inch (15.9 mm): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.3 mm). c. 1 -1/8 Inch (28.6 mm): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.3 mm). d. 1 -3/8 Inches (34.9 mm): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.3 mm). e. 1 -5/8 Inches (41.3 mm): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). f. 2 -1/8 Inches (54 mm): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). g. 2 -5/8 Inches (66.7 mm): Maximum span, 108 inches (2700 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 6. Support pipe from floor with maximum spans typical with pipe hanger installation requirements. R. Pipe Joint Construction: Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 1. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent formation of scale. S. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions. T. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems. U. Install pressure - regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. V. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME 831.5, Chapter VI. REFRIGERANT PIPING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 15530 - 3 END OF SECTION 15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington . Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests as 27-psig vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Repair leaks using new materials; retest. y.: Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements. Z: Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with • trichloroethylene. • AA. Charge system per manufacturer's instructions. 1. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 2. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 3:- Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system. • 15530 - 4 • _Op - 104Z I f. I. l i i is SECTION 15782 - ROOFTOP UNITS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals: Include Product Data and Shop Drawings for each unit. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Rooftop Units, 7 -1/2 to 20 Tons: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. 1. Casing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion - protection coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2 -inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting Tugs. 2. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves or direct -drive fans; and with permanently lubricated motor bearings. 3. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor bearings. 4. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor. 5. Compressors: Serviceable, semihermetic, or fully hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters. a. Safety Controls: Manual -reset type for low pressure, high pressure, and compressor motor overload protection. 6. Electric Heat: Manufacturer's standard construction, electric resistance, factory wired for single -point wiring connection, with overcurrent and overheat protection devices. 7. Economizer Control: Return- and outside -air dampers, power exhaust, outside -air filter, fully modulating electronic - control system with adjustable mixed -air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy - control device. 8. Thermostat: Staged heating and cooling with manual or automatic changeover on standard subbase. 9. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in discharge -air duct, to de- energize unit. 10. Operating Controls: Factory- installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and communicates with central control processor. a. Control Outputs: 2 -stage heating, 2 -stage cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and economizer damper operation. b. Control Sensors: Return - air - temperature sensor, fan airflow- proving switch, dirty- filter switch, discharge- air - temperature sensor, room - temperature sensor, and night- setback - override switch. ROOFTOP UNITS 15782 - 1 END OF SECTION 15782 ROOFTOP UNITS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington c. Control Features: Day /occupied modes for high or low enthalpy and night/unoccupied mode. B. Roof Curbs: Manufacturer's standard, minimum 16 inches high, insulated with corrosion- protection coating, gasketing, factory- installed wood nailer, according to NRCA standards. Motors: Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory- installed motors. 1: Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. 2. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level, according to NRCA's written installation instructions. Install and secure rooftop units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Install piping to allow service and maintenance. F. Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate return -air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of unit. G. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections. H. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 15782-2 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SECTION 15783 - •INSTALLATION OF PREPURCHASED COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 1.1 GENERAL A. Summary: This section includes installation and startup of prepurchased air - conditioning units. B. Submittals: Include Product Data and Shop Drawings for each unit. 1. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations and size of field connections. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field- installed wiring. 3. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. a. Include maintenance manuals for prepurchase equipment in mechanical equipment documentation binder. 4. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled (as identified in the National Electrical Code, Article 100). E. Comply with NFPA. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide components shown on the drawings which are not provided by the unit manufacturer. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install units level and plumb. E. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance. 2. Water and Drainage Connections: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Plumbing Piping." Provide adequate connections for condensate and humidifier system. Provide pitch and trap as manufacturer's instructions and local codes require. 3. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping. INSTALLATION OF PREPURCHASED COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15783 - 1 • ' • • .' . ..„ . '• • • • • .'. • . F: . Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections. END OF SECTION 15783 ••■ ' ' • 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor. ,Ground .equipment: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. - INSTALLATION OF PREPURCHASED COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15783 - 2 SECTION 15891 - METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 1.1 GENERAL: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Submittals: Submit product data on sealing materials, volume control dampers, flexible ducts and connectors. B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except as indicated otherwise. 1.2 PRODUCTS: A. Sheet Metal Materials, General: Provide the following materials where indicated. Package and mark sheet metal materials as specified in ASTM A 700. 1. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality, ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90, mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for 36 -inch length or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. D. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide, glass - fiber- fabric reinforced. E. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic /silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal. F. Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent - release- curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT -S- 001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. G. Fire - Resistant Sealant: Provide two -part, foamed -in- place, fire- stopping silicone sealant formulated for use in a through - penetration fire -stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire- resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Fire - Resistant Sealant: Provide one -part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through - penetration fire -stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire- resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil 851"; General Electric Co. c. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant"; Dow Corning Corp. d. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP -25 "; Electrical Products Div. /3M. e. "RTV 7403 "; General Electric Co. f. "Fyre Putty "; Standard Oil Engineered Materials Co. METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Hangers and Supports: Provide the following hanger and support components as indicated: 1. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 2. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod. a. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4 -1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, for sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters. 3. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self- tapping metal screws, compatible with duct materials. 4. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36. a. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot - dipped - galvanized steel shapes and plates. J. Rectangular Duct Fabrication: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1 -3 through 1 -19, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations. 3. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the following pressure classifications: a. Supply Ducts: 3 inches water gage. 4. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard," Figure 1 -4, unless they are lined or are externally insulated. K. Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1985 Edition, Figures 2 -1 through 2 -10. L. Round And Flat Oval Duct Fabrication: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet. 1. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts with spiral lockseam construction, except where diameters exceed 72 inches. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal butt - welded seams. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3 -2 for galvanized steel gages. 2. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figure 3 -1, RL -1, RL -4, or RL -5. Seams Types RL -2 or RL -3 may be used if spot - welded on 1 -inch intervals. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3 -2 for galvanized steel gages. METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 2 1 0 1 a. Mitered Elbows: Fabricate mitered elbows with welded construction in gages specified below. i L 1 i r I 1.: 1 3. 90- Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figures 3 -4 and 3 -5 and with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct. 4. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance. 5. Elbows: Fabricate in die - formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of die - formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements: 1) Mitered Elbows Radius and Number of Pieces: Unless otherwise indicated, construct elbow to comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3 -1. 2) Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 2 inches: a) 3 to 26 inches: 24 gage. b) 27 to 36 inches: 22 gage. c) 37 to 50 inches: 20 gage. d) 52 to 60 inches: 18 gage. e) 62 to 84 inches: 16 gage. a) 3 to 14 inches: 24 gage. b) 15 to 26 inches: 22 gage. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3) Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure classes from 2 inches to 10 inches: b. Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die - formed elbows for 45- and 90- degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2- and 4 -1/2 -inch) elbows with gored construction. c. Round Elbows 9 to 26 Inches: Standing seam construction. d. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints. e. Couplings: Slip -joint construction with a minimum of a 2 -inch insertion length. M. Manual Volume Control Dampers: Factory- fabricated multiple- or single - blade, or opposed -blade design, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Stiffen damper blades to provide stability under operating conditions. Provide locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Provide end bearings or other seals for ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches or higher. Extend axles full length of damper blades. Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 1. Steel Frames: Hat - shaped, galvanized -steel channels, minimum of 16 gage, and with mitered and welded corners. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts. 2. Roll- Formed Steel Blades: 16 -gage galvanized steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. N. Isolation Dampers: Low leakage control damper equal to Ruskin Model "CD60." Frame construction: 5" x 1" x 16 gauge galvanized steel. Blade construction: Air foil shaped, 14 gauge thickness, maximum 6" wide. Seals: Extruded vinyl blade edge seals and flexible metal, METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 3 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington compression type jamb seals. Finish: galvanized. Damper shall be "spring closed" and "powered open" with 120V motorized damper actuator. O. Damper Control Hardware: Zinc - plated, die -cast core with a heavy -gage dial and handle made of 3/32- inch -thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. Provide center hole to suit damper operating rod size. Provide elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. P. Fire Dampers: UL labeled according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Q. Backdraft Dampers: Medium duty backdraft damper equal to Ruskin Model "BD2 /A1." 1. Frame Construction: 6063T5 extruded aluminum, .090" wall thickness. 2. Blade Construction: .025" formed aluminum, extruded vinyl edges. 3. Finish: Mill. 4. Maximum leakage at 1" w.g. Pressure Differential: 15 cfm /sq. ft. 5. Operating Pressure: Blades start open at .03" w.g.; blades fully open at .10" w.g. 6. Maximum Velocity: 1000 FPM. Flexible Ducts: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. 1. Flexible Ducts - Insulated: Factory- fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1 -1/2- inch - thick, glass fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. a. Reinforcement: Steel -wire helix encapsulated in the inner liner. b. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film. c. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film. S. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless steel band with cadmium - plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action. Provide in sizes from 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards. B. Install fire and smoke dampers according to the manufacturer's UL- approved printed instructions. C. Install fusible links in fire dampers. D. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. E. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints. F. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. G. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum. H. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. I. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 4 r L t 0 1 .. 1 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington J. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any. �._ K. Install insulated ducts with 1 -inch clearance outside of insulation. L. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. M. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. N. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. O. Non - Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1 -1/2 inches. P. Seam And Joint Sealing: Seal duct seams and joints as follows: 1. Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations. 2. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams. 3. Pressure Classification Less than 2 Inches Water Gage: Transverse joints only. 4. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation. Q. Hanging And Supporting: Install and support ducts as follows unless indicated otherwise: 1. Rigid Round, Rectangular, and Flat Oval: As indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 4 -1 through 4 -3 and Figures 4 -1 through 4 -8. 2. Horizontal Ducts: Within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection. 3. Vertical Ducts: At a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. 4. Upper Attachments To Structures: Allow for a load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test) load, but are not limited to the specific methods indicated. R. Connections: Make duct connections as specified below unless indicated otherwise: 1. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2 -7 and 2 -8. 2. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2 -16 through 2 -18. 3. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figure 2 -19. S. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve required air flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems. T. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris. END OF SECTION 15891 METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 5 r 1 :1 1 1_ 1 :1 1 I. 1 I SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 1.1 GENERAL McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. ADC Compliance: Test and rate registers, grilles, and diffusers in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062, provide Certified Ratings Seal on each unit. B. ARI Compliance: Test and rate registers, grilles, and diffusers in accordance with ARI Standard 650. C. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers, dampers, and shutters in accordance with AMCA Standard 500, provide Certified Ratings Seal on each unit. D. NFPA Compliance: Construct and install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A, and 90B. E. Submittals: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, assembly -type shop drawings, and maintenance data. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on diffuser schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule: 1. Diffuser Faces: [ a. Square (SQ): Square housing, core of individually adjustable blades, perforated face, round neck connection. 2. Diffuser Mountings: a. Lay -In (L -I): Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar. 3. Diffuser Finishes: a. White Enamel (W -E): Semi -gloss white enamel prime finish. E. Manufacturers: Titus or approved equal. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15932 - 1 1.3 'EXECUTION ' , • A. General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in • • accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface . r installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on construction plans. END OF SECTION 15932 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15932.2 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington SECTION 15975 - STAND -ALONE CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 1.1 GENERAL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components. C. Control system consists of 24v thermostats for control of heating - cooling equipment. D. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. E. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical Product Data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, installation instructions, and startup instructions. F Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer specializing in control system installations. G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in- service performance. H. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system. I. Comply with NFPA 90A. J. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Control Systems and Components: a. Trane. B. Room Thermostats: Thermostats shall have mercury switches with adjustable heating and cooling anticipation and manual system switching (control voltage 24v). Temperature range 40° to 90° F. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Install equipment as indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate 48 inches (1524 mm) above floor. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. STAND -ALONE CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 -1 Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Start, test; and adjust control systems. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. STAND-ALONE CONTROL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT 15975 -2 ;4 r t 1_ r i i_ t. i i 1 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1.1 GENERAL: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Test and balance work will be provided by the Owner's representative. The following requirements are for test and balance work to be accomplished by the Owner's representative and associated work by the mechanical contractor. B. Test and balance shall be performed by a NEBB or AABC licensed agency only. The balancing agency shall have at least three years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects similar to this project. Provide a complete test and balance report upon project completion. Test and balance all equipment and air distribution devices to capacities indicated on the design documents. Adjust drawings as required. Report condition and operation of all controls and controlled devices. C. Balance all system components to within 10% of design quantities indicated. Measure and record operating characteristics at all equipment for comparison with design capacities scheduled. D. Note where initial measurements indicates equipment to be operating at conditions significantly different from scheduled capacities (greater than +/- 10 %). Note any discrepancies between design requirements and installed conditions, and report same to project manager in writing as soon as possible. Determine cause of discrepancies and identify modifications required to correct problems. If modifications to correct problems cannot be determined, provide measurements /recordings which may included, but not limited to the following: entering and leaving air temperatures, pressures, velocities, and flow rates for all fluids (air, water, etc.); all electrical operating characteristics (voltage, amp, watts); unit model numbers, component sizes, and operating speeds (both motor and driven equipment rpm's). E. Recalibrate controls in areas associated with this work to insure proper operation. Adjust cooling setpoints to 74 °F and heating setpoints to 72 °F, or within dead -end of thermostats provided. F. Balance all new and existing air handling equipment (terminal air units, fans, fan coil units, etc.) serving tenant space under this contract. Balance to the total or the air quantities of the air distribution devices served, or to the total air quantities for the base building design drawings (copies on file with landlord). G. Balance all air distribution devices (diffusers, registers, and grilles) to the air quantities indicated on the drawings. Balance outside air to quantities indicated. H. Codes and Standards: 1.2 FINAL REPORT: 1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." 2. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. A. General: Typewritten or computer printout in letter - quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3 -ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. Six (6) copies required for each site transmitted to the project manager. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 1 • 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. ` 1. Unit Data Include the : a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and slze. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. 3. Test Data: Include design arid actual values for the foliowing: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches w.g. c. Fan d. Discharge static pressure in inches w.g. e. Filter in inches w.g. f. Outside airflow in cfm. Q. Return airflow in cfm. h. Outside-air damper position. |. Return-air damper position. D. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: Include the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. System Diagrams: lnclude reduced size copy of HVAC drawing with outlets and equipment keyed to report data or schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single- C. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air handling units with coils, include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. ` c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number f. Unit arrangement and class g. Discharge arrangement. ht Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Sheave dimensions, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. FuU-Ioad amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 -2 y line diagrams and include the : a. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches w.g. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches w.g. e. Suction static pressure in inches w.g. E. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross - section and record the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. System and air - handling unit number. b. Location and zones. c. Duct static pressure in inches w.g. d. Duct size in inches. e. Duct area in sq. ft. f. Design airflow rate in cfm. g. Design velocity in fpm. h. Actual airflow rate in cfm. i. Actual average velocity in fpm. j. Barometric pressure in psig. F. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington G. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report as applicable. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 3 ' • ", • • e. Report date. 9: Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing agent who certifies the report 10. Summary of contents, including the following: a. • b. C. d. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING END OF SECTION 15990 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. 14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following: Settings for outside, return, and exhaust air dampers. • Conditions of filters. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentages of maximum pitch diameter. Settings for supply air, static pressure controller. • 15990 4 0 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Concrete equipment bases. 4. Electrical demolition. 5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 6. Touchup painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Comply with NFPA 70. til 1.5 COORDINATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance require- ments. A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and ar- range in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies and building owner. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity- metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company provid- ing electrical power and other services. D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by fin- ished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors." E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field - finished surfaces, coordinate installa- tion of identification devices with completion of finished surface. F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Material: Cold- formed steel, with corrosion - resistant coating acceptable to authorities having ju- risdiction. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click - type hangers. D. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. E. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory- fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body con- structed of malleable -iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish. F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type. G. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self- adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating. 2. Color: Black letters on orange background. 3. Legend: Indicates voltage. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 2 wd MOO i 1 ' 1 1 C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick. D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, viny tape with the following features: 1. Not (ess than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded forpermanantdiraot-buria|oen/icm. 3. Embedded continuous metaltic strip or core. 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or , self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and Ietters. F. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. G. Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving eb»ck, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. 2.3 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place 2.4 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METI-IOOS 1M050~3 H. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Pre- printed, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish si ns, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. |. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, ChootarXV||, Part 1910.145. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate b igns with 0.0396-inoh. gal- vanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. J. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Ge|f-toppinQ, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stain- Iess-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet. C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.3 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U- channel system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click -type clamp system. D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200 -lb design load. 3.4 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U- bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for se- curing hanger rods and conduits. C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 4 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps. F. Spring -steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable -iron hangers for 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet -metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core - drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire - rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise in- dicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indi- cated: 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw -type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring- tension clamps on steel. a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 7. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws. 8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and mainte- nance of equipment. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 5 1. Phase A: Black. 2. Phase B: Red. 3. Phase C: Blue. 4. Neutral: White. 5. Ground: Green. C. Self- Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. a. Fire Alarm System: Red. b. Security System: Blue and yellow. c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. d. All Other Raceway Systems: Color as per ANSI 13.1. 1. Phase A: Yellow. 2. Phase B: Brown. 3. Phase C: Orange. 4. Neutral: White with a colored stripe or gray. 5. Ground: Green. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identifica- tion with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes . and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows: 1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap- around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place ad- jacent bands of two -color markings in contact, side by side. 2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested areas. 3. In lieu of color banding for raceways, pull box covers, junction box covers, and blank outlet box covers shall be painted different colors for various systems. Colors shall be as per ANSI 13.1. 4. Colors: As follows: E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit num- bers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color- coding may be used for volt- age and phase identification. F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior under- ground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and com- munication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single line marker. G. Color -code new 208/120 -V system secondary service, feeder, and branch - circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows: H. Color -code new 480/277 -V system secondary service, feeder, and branch - circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows: I. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chap- ter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of elec- trical systems and of Items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic - laminated instruction BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 6 Naas i 1 i is i t i i i signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal- backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. J. Install engraved - laminated emergency- operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8 -inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations. 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire- resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation require- ments are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 3.7 CONCRETE BASES 3.8 DEMOLITION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both di- rections, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recom- mendations and setting templates for anchor -bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive- strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Divi- sion 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or dis- turbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be de- molished, in their entirety. C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. D. Remove demolished material from Project site. E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relo- cation. 3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 7 3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION END OF SECTION 16050 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ` Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electricity- metering components. 6. Concrete bases. 7. Electrical demolition. 8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 9. Touchup painting. A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Divi- sion 9 Section "Painting." 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufac- turer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 8 Yds ��µ SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Ground rods. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electri- cal Testing Association to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 -1 B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. Chance /Hubbell. b. Copperweld Corp. c. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. d. Framatome Connectors /Burndy Electrical. e. Ideal Industries, Inc. f. O- Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. g. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green - colored insulation. C. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. D. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. E. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. Fab- ricate and install as indicated. 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted- pressure -type connectors, or compression type. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 2 rebio 2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel. a. 750 MCM THWN 54880BE b. #4 /0 THWN and Bare 548666E c. #2 THHN 54856BE d. #6 DLO 548526E McLeod USA, Seattle, Washington C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic - welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions. D. Lugs 1. All lugs shall be 2 -hole, long barrel, tinned solid copper unless otherwise specified in this document. Lugs shall be Thomas and Betts series 548##BE or equivalent for standard conductors. E. Water Pipe Clamps: UL- listed and designed for appropriate pipe and conductor sizes. F. Anti - Oxidation Compound 1. All bolted grounding connections, interior and exterior, shall be made with Thomas and Betts KOPR- SHIELD (TM of Jet Lube Inc.) no other compound will be accepted. Coat all wires before lugging. Coat all surfaces before connecting. B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper -clad steel. 1. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches in diameter. 2. Ground Rods: Rods shall be 5/8 inch steel, clad with a pure copper jacket of not less than 0.012 inches thick, 10 feet long. �.. _ C. XIT Rods: 1. All XIT rods shall be 2 1/8" O.D. type K copper with a wall thickness of 0.083" and shall be 20 feet in length. 2. The copper pipe shall be filled with non - hazardous Calsolyte. 3. The backfill material shall be natural clay Lyncolnite. 4. The cover shall be industrial polyplastic, Lyncole Model XB -11, for non - traffic areas, and concrete, Lyncole Model XB -12, for traffic or paved areas. 5. Accepted Products: Lyncole Model XIT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 . 3.1 APPLICATION A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 3 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Exothermic - Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts. F. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned copper conductor, size and type indicated. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding con- ductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways un- less they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Where applicable, bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless oth- erwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. 3. XIT rods as required shall be installed using the procedure below, see drawings: a. Auger a vertical hole in the earth with a minimum diameter of 6 inches. For "L" shaped XIT rods, dig a trench 12 inches wide. b. The hole shall be 10 foot 6 inches or 6 inches greater than the vertical length of the rod. c. Remove the sealing tapes from the bottom of the unit only. Tapes must be saved and made available to the Inspector to verify removal and proper installation. For "L" shaped models, remove only the tape on the horizontal section. d. Position the XIT unit in the hole. e. Add 4.5 parts water to 1 part Lyncolnite (14 U.S. Gallons to one 50 pound bag), constantly stirring until mixture reaches a slurry consistency. Use 100% Lyncolnite for earth backfill. Two bags of Lyncolnite is shipped with each 20 foot rod and is sufficient for a 6 inch diameter hole, larger holes will require more Lyncolnite. "L" shaped units are shipped with four pages of Lyncolnite; ensure that the bottom leach holes are in contact with Lyncolnite beneath. f. Pour mixed backfill around rod in augured hole. Fill up to red "Bury to Here" marker —Do not overfill. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 4 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington g. Place XIT box with cover over the top of the rod so that the cover is at grade level. Use backfill or grout to stabilize box around the rod. Keep the breather holes free of obstruction and debris. The top of the box should not contact the top of the rod. h. Remove the top sealing tape ONLY after backfill is complete. This prevents soil from blocking the breather holes. Tapes must be saved and made available to the Inspector to verify removal and proper installation. B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic- welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect -type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adja- cent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors within 5 ft. of building entrance. E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors. Jumper shall be at least 750 KCML. F. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service en- trance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor. G. Inspection hand hole of fiberglass construction, 12 inches by 24 inches by 30 inches deep shall be installed for inspection of and connection to the exterior ground system, see drawings. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot - tin - coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 4. Coat indicated connections with T &B Kopr - Shield. B. Exothermic - Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure -type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure -type connectors. D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a ground- ing bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 5 Hardware 3.5 GRADING AND PLANTING END OF SECTION 16060 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression -type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped -type connections between conductors and ground rods. F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indi- cated, use those specified in UL 486A. G. Compression -Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumfer- ential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indica- tion that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of in- sulation and cable. 1. All hardware, bolts, nuts, washers and belleville washers shall be 18 -8 stainless steel, see lug detail. Every connection shall be bolt -flat washer - buss -lug -flat washer- belleville washer -nut in that exact order. Back -to -back lugging, bolt -flat washer -lug- buss -lug -flat washer- belleville washer -nut, in that exact order, is accepted where necessary to connect many lugs to a buss bar. Stacking of lugs, buss - lug -lug, is not acceptable. 2. Where connections are made to steel or any other dissimilar metal or where indicated, a Thomas and Betts dragon tooth washer model DTW### shall be used between the lug and steel, bolt -flat washer - steel- dragon tooth washer -lug -flat washer - belleville washer - nut. A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section. Re- establish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed pav- ing as indicated. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 6 WNW L L L L t i I SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and termi- nations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance require- ments. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and la- beled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- tory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations. B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by Engineer. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 -1 3 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Wires and Cables: a. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co. b. Carol Cable Co., Inc. c. Senator Wire & Cable Company. d. Southwire Company. 2. Connectors for Wires and Cables: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION a. AMP Incorporated. b. General Signal; O- Z/Gedney Unit. c. Monogram Co.; AFC. d. Square D Co.; Anderson. e. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 2.2 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. UL- listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. B. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5. C. Conductor Material: Copper. D. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller branch circuits; stranded conductor for larger than No. 10 AWG, control circuits, motor and transformer connections. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. UL- listed, factory- fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements and as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with re- quirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2 Woos I r 1 .: 1_ L L l i t i 1 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance: THWN, in raceway. B. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. D. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. F. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. and follow surface contours where possible. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer - approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire /cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. L D. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." F. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Firestop- ping." G. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Meth- ods." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum. B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material. D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. E. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as Indicated and instructed by manu- facturer. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 3 1 . „ •••••• .." END. OF SECTION 16120 • . . , • . • • • •••••• • . . l';,„ CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . , •• ,• • . • • . • •. . ' . • . • • • " , McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 16120-4 A. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART "1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- :'-.'tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section: 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1. Raceways include the following: a. RMC. b. EMT. c. LFMC. d. RNC. e. Wireways. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following: a. Device boxes. b. Outlet boxes. c. Pull and junction boxes. d. Cabinets and hinged -cover enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box sup- ports. 3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor -box service fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. D. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclo- sures, and cabinets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide raceways and boxes specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- tory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation." C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Metal Conduit and Tubing: RACEWAYS AND BOXES a. Anixter Brothers, Inc. b. Carol Cable Co., Inc. c. Flexcon, Inc.; Coleman Cable Systems, Inc. d. Grinnell Co.; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. e. Monogram Co.; AFC. f. Triangle PWC, Inc. g. Wheatland Tube Co. 2. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing: a. Cantex Industries; Harsco Corp. b. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. c. Cole -Flex Corp. d. Hubbell, Inc.; Raco, Inc. e. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. f. Thomas & Betts Corp. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 16130 - 2 1 Conduit Bodies and Fittings: 4. Metal Wireways: 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. Fittings: Compression type. C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. D. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit/tubing materials. 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. B. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. 2.4 METAL WIREWAYS a. Crouse - Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries. b. Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electrit Co. c. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. O- Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. f. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet -PLM. g. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Keystone /Rees, Inc. c. Square D Co. Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division. b. Crouse - Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries. c. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. d. Hoffman Engineering Co.; Federal- Hoffman, Inc. e. Hubbell Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. f. Hubbell Inc.; Raco, Inc. g. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. h. O- Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. i. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet -PLM. j. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. k. Thomas & Betts Corp. A. Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 3 s ' B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold - down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for com- plete system, C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to com- ply with NFPA 70. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged -cover type. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.5 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast -Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast box with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Boxes: NEMA OS 2. 2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast -Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. 2.7 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS A. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio - frequency- resistant paint. B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and remov- able front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal bar- riers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where re- quired for freestanding equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with in- stallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 4 1 1 1 i L. L 3.2 WIRING METHODS 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods: 1. Exposed: Rigid steel, except as noted. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC with RMC elbows and stub -ups. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC with RMC elbows and stub -ups. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor - Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4. B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods: 1. Exposed: EMT, except as noted. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor - Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic. A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch trade size. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. D. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. E. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." H. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. I. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved por- tion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. J. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise Indicated. K. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. For interme- diate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 5 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington L. Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance consider- ing the type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. M. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. N. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. 1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections sub- ject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. 2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. O. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1 outside the box. P. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc - coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. R. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2 -Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90- degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where neces- sary to comply with these requirements. S. Install raceway sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL- listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the follow- ing points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. T. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver - operated, threaded flush plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. U. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semi - recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use Iiquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 6 , • • • , ' • , • , • , V. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. W. See section 16050 for raceway identification requirements. [ 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufac- turer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. • 3.5 CLEANING A. • On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Re- move burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 16130 - 7 f. L i L L L L I I SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ' GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Legends for receptacles and switch plates. C. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: WIRING DEVICES 16140 . 1 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Straight -Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy -Duty grade, NEMA 5 -20R, except as noted. B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed - through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5 -20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2 -3/4 -inch- deep outlet box without an adapter. C. Isolated- Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated - ground receptacles. 2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Snap Switches: Heavy -duty, quiet type. 2.4 WALL PLATES Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate- Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04 -inch- thick, Type 302, satin - finished stainless steel. 2.5 FINISHES Wiring Devices: a. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices. b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. d. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Pass & Seymour /Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. Multioutlet Assemblies: a. Airey- Thompson Co. b. Wiremold. A. Color: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 Moan I McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. C. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone /power service poles are installed to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, iden- tify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. 2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine - printed, pressure- sensitive, abrasion - resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch - circuit equipment grounding conductor. B. Isolated- Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolated - ground conductor routed to designated iso- lated equipment ground terminal of electrical system. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque - tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times. B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Replace damaged or defective components. 3.5 CLEANING A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Standby Rating: Power output rating equal to the power the generator set delivers continuously under normally varying load factors for the duration of a power outage. B. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. C. Steady -State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage within the operational bandwidth, expressed in Hertz or cycles per second. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule: Indicate delivery date as well as the submission date for the shop drawings, installation drawings, Factory and Site Acceptance Test Procedures and O &M manuals. B. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance. Include the following: 1. Outline drawings of the engine generator set showing overall dimensions, power and control wiring entrance locations and lug sizes. Drawings shall include a cross - sectional view of the entire assembly showing the basic engine, radiator, exhaust silencer, etc., indicating overall height with mounting details of the entire assembly. 2. Estimated fuel consumption at rated load and recommended fuel line sizes. 3. Interconnection detail drawing showing all related field control and power connections. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer installed and portions that are field installed. 4. Literature describing in detail the equipment proposed, and all possible operating modes. 5. A complete review of this specification, noting for each paragraph whether or not the proposed equipment complies with the project specifications, or deviates in some fashion. For each deviation, a justification for that deviation must be given. 6. Thermal damage curve for generator. 7. Time - current characteristic curves for generator protective device. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication details, dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power and control connections and differentiate between factory- installed and field- installed wiring. 4. Fuel tank outline drawings, wiring and piping diagrams, pump data and controls. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. E. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection records relative to compliance with performance requirements. F. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report. G. Factory prototype tests shall include all requirements of NFPA 110 and the following: 1. Maximum power level (maximum kW). Maximum motor starting capacity (maximum kVA) and voltage dip recovery within seven (7) cycles of applied Toad. 2. Structural soundness (Short Circuit and Endurance Test). 3. Engine - generator cooling air requirements: a. Transient response and steady -state speed control and voltage regulation. b. Generator temperature rise per NEMA MGF1- 22.40. 4. Harmonic analysis and voltage waveform deviation per MIL - STD -705B, method 601.4. 5. Three -phase short- circuit test for mechanical and electrical strength. With system operating at rated volts, amps, power factor, and speed, the generator set must build up and perform normally without manual interventions of any kind such as re- setting of circuit breakers or other tripping devices when the short circuit is removed. 6. Failure mode test for voltage regulator. With engine - generator set operating at no load, rated speed and voltage, the AC sensing circuit to the regulator must be disconnected for a period of at least one -hour. The engine - generator set must be fully operative after the test, and without evidence of damage. 7. Endurance testing is required to detect and correct potential electrical and mechanical problems associated with typical operation. H. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. I. Factory Test Reports: For units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. J. Factory Production Model Tests: 1. Before shipment of the equipment, each engine - generator set shall be tested under rated Toad and power factor for performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Testing at unity power factor only is not acceptable, since kilowatt output is affected by the higher generator efficiency at unity power factor, and the KVAR for motor starting and regulation loads varies with power factor. 2. Test shall include: a. Single step Toad pickup per NFPA 10 -1985, paragraph 5- 13.2.6. b. Transient and voltage dip responses and steady state voltage and speed (frequency) checks. c. Fuel consumption (No load, 1/4, 3/4, and Full load). d. Generator temperature rise by resistance method. e. The Owner or his authorized representative shall have the option of witnessing these tests. A summary of the test results shall be submitted for review. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 2 i 1- i r J i K. Exhaust Emissions Test Report: To show compliance with applicable regulations. L. Sound measurement test report. M. Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. N. Field test report of tests specified in Part 3. O. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Drawings: a. Upon completion of the on site testing, a complete set of "as built" drawings shall be furnished for the diesel generator set, consisting of the following: 2. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions. P. Warranty Documentation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1) Equipment outline, showing front and side plan views, electrical power one line diagram, conduit entrances, and equipment ratings 2) Schematic drawings and Wiring diagrams. 3) Interconnection wiring diagram, showing all field interconnections between genset, paralleling switchgear, and other remote devices (i.e., engine pre heaters, remote annunciator, and fuel tanks). 4) Material list, cross referenced to schematics for component identification A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project with eight hours' maximum response time. Supplier shall maintain a parts and service facility within 20 miles of user location and offer 24 -hour emergency service. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxiliary components specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Comply with NFPA 70. F. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system. G. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 3 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from such hazards. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace packaged engine generator and auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. The warranty shall be administered by the supplier of the equipment. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One for every ten of each type and rating, but not less than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but not less than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion -air filters. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. A coordinated assembly of compatible components: Caterpillar model 3512, rated 1000 kW standby, 480 /277 -volt, 60 Hz, 0.8 pf. 2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by Caterpillar. The packaged engine generator shall be furnished by McLeod. These detailed specifications are for contractor information only. B. Output Connections: Three phase, four wire. C. Safety Standard: Comply with ASME 815.1. D. Nameplates: Each major system component is equipped with a conspicuous nameplate of component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model and serial number of item. E. Limiting dimensions indicated for system components are not exceeded. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 4 w' 2.3 GENERATOR -SET PERFORMANCE FOR SENSITIVE LOADS C. Steady -State Voltage Modulation Frequency: Less than 1 Hz. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington F. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. G. Skid: Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on a concrete foundation. Skid is free from sharp edges and corners. Lifting attachments are arranged to facilitate lifting with slings without damaging any components. H. Spring Isolators: Vibration isolators with seismic restraints between genset frame and base tank. I. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on a metal plate permanently attached to skid. Diagram indicates location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and location of center of gravity. A. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine to meet performance requirements in paragraphs below is permissible. 1. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed. B. Steady -State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. D. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step -load increase or decrease. Voltage recovers to remain within the steady -state operating band within 0.5 second. E. Steady -State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. F. Steady -State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there are no random speed variations outside the steady -state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. G. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2 -Hz variation for a 50 percent step -load increase or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within the steady -state operating band within three seconds. H. Output Waveform: At no load, total harmonic content measured line to neutral does not exceed 5 percent total with no slot ripple. The telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50. I. Sustained Short- Circuit Current: For a three - phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, the system will supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full -load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or any other generator system component. J. Excitation System: Performance is unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load. K. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 1, system requirements. 16231 - 5 2.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Engine generator system withstands the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 30 to plus 50 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 6000 feet. 2.5 ENGINE A. Four -cycle diesel, turbo - charged, aftercooled. B. Comply with NFPA 37. C. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF -2. D. Rated Speed: 1800 rpm. E. Maximum Piston Speed: 2250 fpm. F. Lubrication System: Pressurized by a positive - displacement pump driven from engine crankshaft. The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Controls flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit is capable of full flow and is designed to be fail -safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances. G. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 37. System includes the following: 1. Redundant Main Fuel Pumps: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. 2. Relief /Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. 3. Fuel -water separator 4. Means for hand priming. H. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric- immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment. 2.6 GOVERNOR A. Woodward 2301, factory set for isochronous operation. 2.7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator -set skid and integral engine- driven coolant pump. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 6 4 i 1 9 t 'L ti 1 l 1 J 1 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Radiator: Rated for specified coolant. 1. Radiator Core Tubes: Nonferrous -metal construction other than aluminum. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Fan: Driven by multiple belts from engine shaft. C. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene - glycol -based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. D. Temperature Control: Self - contained, thermostatic - control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. E. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging -, ultraviolet -, and abrasion - resistant fabric. 1. Rating: 50 -psig maximum working pressure with 180 deg F coolant, and noncollapsible under vacuum. 2. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. 2.8 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM A. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37. B. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine- mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine. C. Low -level Alarm Sensor: Separate device operates alarm contacts at 75 percent of normal fuel level. D. High -Level Alarm Sensor: Separate device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at 106 percent of normal fuel level. E. Piping Connections: Include fuel suction and return lines to fuel storage tank; fuel supply; and return lines to engine, local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line, and tank drain line complete with shutoff valve. F. Base - mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory- installed and - piped, listed and labeled fuel oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for twenty -four hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Containment Provisions: Provide spill containment collar around fill fitting that channels spillage into tank and UL- listed rupture basin integral to unit with leak detection and alarm at control panel and remote annunciator. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM A. The critical grade exhaust silencer shall be provided complete with mounting brackets for installation as shown on the drawings. The silencer shall be a reactive type with compressed acoustical insulation between double steel shell construction. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 7 B. The silencer shall be GT Exhaust Systems or approved equivalent. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Condensate Drain for Silencer: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to muffler drain outlet through a petcock. D. Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless -steel pipe. E. Exhaust Piping External to Engine: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded, black steel, with welded joints and fittings. F. Exterior of silencer shall have a high temperature rated black coating guaranteed against failure or rust for the duration of the general warranty. 2.10 STARTING SYSTEM A. Description: 24 -V electric, with negative ground and including the following items: 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine- cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article above. 2. Cranking Motor: Two heavy -duty units that automatically engage and release from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in "Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article above to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by generator set manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid - resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater is arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in "Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article above. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. 7. Battery- Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid -state voltage regulation and 35 -A minimum continuous rating. 8. Battery Charger: Current - limiting, automatic - equalizing and float - charging type. Unit complies with UL 1236 and includes the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing- charging rate of 20 A is initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a lower float - charging mode and continues operating in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage arranged to close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition closes contacts that provide a battery- charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall- mounted cabinet. g. Manufacturer: Sens or approved equal. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 8 oat. A 2.11 CONTROL AND MONITORING 1. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Functional Description: When the mode - selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote - control contacts in one or more separate automatic - transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of the generator set. When the mode - selector switch is switched to the on position, the generator set manually starts. The off position of the same switch initiates generator -set shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency -stop switch also shuts down the generator set. B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method isolates the control panel from generator -set vibration. C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Solid state control panel with backlit LCD display. Include functions required by NFPA 110 for a Level 1 system, and the following: 1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine - coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating -oil pressure gage. 7. Running -time meter. 8. Ammeter - voltmeter, phase - selector switch(es). 9. Generator - voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank leak alarm. 11. Fuel tank high -level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices, and wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine, generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's standard. E. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data link transmission of indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in another Section. F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. Include audible device and silencing means. Also include indications for high fuel level and fuel leak detection and output circuit breaker contact position. 2.12 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A, Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded -case, electronic -trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long -time and short -time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault. 2. Trip Settings: Matched to generator thermal damage curve as closely as possible. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 9 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 5. Auxiliary Contacts: Two "a" and two "b" contacts. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2.13 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements. B. Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H. Designed for 130 deg. C maximum temperature rise over 40 deg. C ambient. Actual temperature rise as measured by resistance method at rated load shall not exceed 105 deg. C. D. Stator - Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. PMG excitation uses no slip or collector rings, or brushes, and is arranged to sustain generator output under short- circuit conditions as specified. System shall use rotor - mounted silicon diodes with surge suppressors in parallel with field windings. G. Enclosure: Dripproof. H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. I. Voltage Regulator: Solid -state type by Basler or Newage, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. 1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output- voltage operating band. 2. The voltage regulator shall include an under frequency rolloff torque-matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency (Sea Level only) below a threshold of 58 -59 Hz (48 -49 Hz on 50 Hz system). The torque- matching characteristic shall include differential rate of frequency change compensation to use maximum available engine torque and provide optimal transient load response. Regulators which use a fixed volts per hertz characteristic are not acceptable. J. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. K. Windings: Two - thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. L. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum, based on unit -rated standby kVA. 2.14 OUTDOOR GENERATOR -SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: Prefabricated or preengineered skid - mounted walk -in enclosure with the following features: 1. The generator shall be completely housed in a weatherproof enclosure. The enclosure shall ensure a maximum noise level not to exceed local code ordinances as measured at property line. The enclosure shall have 6 hinged, common locking doors three on each side to allow PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 -10 I. 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington adequate access to engine and generator, a rear control panel access door, and 4 point lifting system. 2. Construction shall be all welded 14 gauge steel with framing members as required to meet seismic zone conditions. All seams shall be primed and sealed. Interior insulation shall have a UL listed flame spread rating of 25 or less and shall be fastened to the enclosure interior with a galvanized perforated steel skin. The rear enclosure wall shall be fully removable to facilitate installation. 3. Structural Design and Anchorage: Adequate to resist loads imposed by 100 -mph wind. 4. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled operating at one -half or less of rated voltage sized to prevent condensation. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions and built -in key locks. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with insect/rodent screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation while excluding exterior dust and rodents. 7. Thermal Insulation: As required to maintain winter interior temperature within limits required by components. 8. Finish: An alkyd resin primer shall be applied to all non galvanized surfaces. The finish coat shall consist of two applications of a aliphatic urethane enamel in a color to be specified by the architect and be suitable for a salt air environment. B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 100 percent of rated load continuously with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. C. Louvers: Fixed - engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. D. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Dampers are closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating. Motor operated with spring return to open. E. Interior Lights: With switch. Factory- wired, vaporproof -type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. F. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired. GFCI type. G. Wiring: All components shall be factory-wired to a 100 -amp, 208/120 volt, 3 -phase 24 -pole load center mounted in the enclosure. 2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Include prototype testing and Project - specific equipment testing (testing of equipment manufactured specifically for this Project). B. Prototype Testing: Performed on a separate engine generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with those required for Level 1 energy converters in Paragraphs 3.2.1, 3.2.1.1, and 3.2.1.2 of NFPA 110. 2. Generator Tests: Comply with IEEE 115. 3. Components and Accessories: Items furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype have been tested to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. C. Project - Specific Equipment Tests: Factory test engine generator set and other system components and accessories before shipment. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 11 1. Full load run. 2. Maximum power. 3. Voltage regulation. 4. Transient and steady -state governing. 5. Single -step load pickup. 6. Safety shutdown. D. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND GENERAL COMMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine roughing -in of cooling- system piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing, installation and testing of the McLeodUSA furnished packaged generator set. 3.2 CONCRETE BASES A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged engine generators. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions, and with NFPA 110. B. Set packaged engine generator set on concrete bases. 1. Support generator -set mounting feet on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal wedges having small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1 -1/2 -inch gap between pump base and foundation for grouting. 2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until generator is level. C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of drivers and accessories. D. Install cooling- system piping, accessories, hangers and supports, and anchors for complete installation. 1. Extend drain piping from heat exchangers to point of disposition. E. Install exhaust - system piping for diesel engines. Extend to point of termination outside structure. Size piping according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install condensate drain piping for diesel- engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping from low points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of disposition. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 12 atm 1 1 G. Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow - measuring system components and make connections according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. 1. Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturers' submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Proceed with equipment startup only after wiring installation is satisfactory. 2. Remove neutral bonding jumper, if present. I. Provide flexible connections to the generator as recommended by the manufacturer. J. Check all isolation mountings for proper operation prior to start up. K. Connect the generator neutral to the main bound neutral bus for proper operation of the G.F.I. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect water supply to cooling system. 3. Connect cooling- system water supply and drain piping to diesel- engine heat exchangers. Install flexible connectors at connections to engine generator and remote radiator. 4. Connect exhaust - system piping to diesel engines. B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections. C. Ground equipment. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing. B. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality - control testing. C. Tests: Include the following: 1. Tests recommended by manufacturer. 2. InterNational Electrical Testing Association Tests: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical and mechanical test stated in NETA ATS for emergency engine generator sets, except omit vibration baseline test. Certify compliance with test parameters for tests performed. 3. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, the following: PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 13 a. Single -step full -load pickup test. b. Load test consisting of/z -hour at 25% Toad, 1/2-hour at 50%, 1/2-hour at 75 %, and 2-1/2 hours at 100 %. Record output voltage and current and all monitored engine parameter at 15 minutes intervals. 4. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full- charging and float- charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity Toad test and a capacity Toad test for the battery. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge. Verify measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 5. Battery- Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float - charging conditions. 6. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid Teaks. 7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step -load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. 9. Harmonic - Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear Toad. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington E. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. G. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request. 3.6 COMMISSIONING A. Battery Equalization: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators as specified below: 1. Coordinate this training with that for transfer switches. 2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 -14 Mkt 3. . Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. , Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. 6. Minimum Instruction Period: Four hours. END OF SECTION 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 16231-15 SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Fuses." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. RFI: Radio - frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. F. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, ground -fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short- circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field- installed wiring. C. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. E. Manufacturer's field service report. F. Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 3. Time - current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 4. Record Drawings: Complete outline drawings and schematics showing all bussing, circuit breakers, control wiring, and control components. 5. Operation and maintenance manuals for all circuit breakers, control components, and protective relays. 6. Detailed sequence of operation for automatic transfer function. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NEMA PB 2. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with UL 891. F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards, including clearances between switchboards, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 2 i D. Handle switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. D. Service Conditions: NEMA PB2, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. 2. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 1.8 COORDINATION 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Spares: For the following: 1. Potential transformer fuses. • McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchboards to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards; install electric heating (250 -W per section) to prevent condensation. A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Proceed with utility interruptions only after receiving Architect's written authorizations. C. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following, unless otherwise indicated: A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 3 2. Control -power fuses. B. Spare Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed. PART 2- PRODUCT 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler- Hammer Products. 2. Industrial Electric Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Square D Co. 4. Zenith Controls, Inc. B. The main switchboard shall be furnished by Mortenson. Obtain submittal information from Mortenson. These detailed specifications are for contractor information only. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Front- and Rear - Accessible Switchboard: Front and rear aligned, with features as follows: 1. Main Devices: Drawout mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 2.3 FABRICATION AND FEATURES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory- applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust - inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. B. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit - breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. C. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire, unless otherwise indicated. Include the following features: 1. Phase- and Neutral -Bus Material: Hard -drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity silver plated. Bus sizing shall be based on ANSI temperature rise criteria of 65 °C over 40 °C ambient (outside enclosures). 2. Ground Bus: 1/4 -by -2 -inch minimum size, drawn - temper copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch - circuit ground conductors. Extend full length of switchboard. 3. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 4. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from feeder end. 5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses, unless otherwise indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. D. Drawout Circuit Breaker Cells: SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 4 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. The stationary part of the primary disconnecting devices for each power circuit breaker shall consist of a set of contacts extending to the rear through a glass polyester insulating support barrier; corresponding moving finger contacts suitably spaced shall be furnished on the power circuit breaker studs which engage in only the connected position. The assembly shall provide multiple silver -to- silver full floating high - pressure point contacts with uniform pressure on each finger maintained by springs. 2. The secondary disconnecting devices shall consist of male pin connectors mounted on the removable unit and engage floating, female pin connectors on the side of the compartment. The secondary disconnecting devices shall be silver - plated and sliding contact engagement shall be maintained in the CONNECTED and TEST positions. 3. The removable power circuit breaker element shall be equipped with disconnecting contacts, wheels and interlocks for drawout application. It shall have four positions, CONNECTED, TEST, DISCONNECTED, and REMOVED. The breaker drawout element shall contain a worm gear levering "in" and "out" mechanics with removable lever crank. Mechanical interlocking shall be provided so that the breaker is in the tipped position before levering "in" or "out" of the cell. The breaker shall include a provision for padlocking open to prevent manual or electric closing. The padlocking shall also secure the breaker in the connected, test or disconnected position by preventing levering. E. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit - breaker compartment. F. The switchboard shall be suitable for use as service equipment and be labeled in accordance with UL requirements. G. Compression lugs shall be provided for incoming line terminations. H. Labeling: Engraved (black on white) name plates for all circuit breakers, relays, meters, control switches, and indicator lights. Attach with stainless steel screws. 2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity as indicated. 1. Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time - current element for low -level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. 2. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers for Frame Sizes 250A and Larger: RMS sensing; field- replaceable rating plug; with the following field- adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and 1 response. e. Zone - Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground -fault protection function. 3. Circuit breakers shall be by Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, or Square D. B. Molded -Case Circuit - Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. C. Enclosed, Insulated -Case Circuit Breaker: Fully rated, encased -power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating as indicated. 1. Drawout circuit - breaker mounting. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 5 2.5 INSTRUMENTATION A. Instrument Transformers: NEMA El 21.1, IEEE C57.13, and the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 2. Two -step, stored - energy closing. 3. Field installable rating plug. 4. Microprocessor -based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, battery backed LED trip indicators, and the following field- adjustable settings: a. Long- and short -time pickup levels. b. Long- and short -time time adjustments with selectable 1 response. c. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and selectable 1 response. 5. Remote contact position indication. Furnish (3)a and (3)b contacts. 6. Furnish hinges, transparent plastic cover, and warning sign for exposed racking mechanism shutter. 7. Zone - Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground -fault protection function. 8. Control Voltage: 125V ac. 9. Furnish OPEN /CLOSE pushbuttons on breaker face and red and green indicating lights to indicate contact position. Furnish cover plates with small access hole on circuit breaker close - pushbutton to prevent accidental operation. 10. Circuit breakers shall be by Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, or Square D. 11. Normal and emergency source breakers shall be interlocked so that only one breaker may be closed. Interlock shall be independent of IQ- transfer control system. 1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y. 2. Current Transformers: Ratios shall be as indicated with accuracy class and burden suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments. 3. Control -Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA. 4. Provide transformers for all necessary control -power sources. B. Multifunction Digital- Metering Monitor: Microprocessor -based unit suitable for three- or four -wire systems and with the following features: 1. Switch - selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated: a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase -to -Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase -to- Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Kilowatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Kilovars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Kilowatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from 5 to 60 minutes. i. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent. Accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. 2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 6 2.6 AUTOMATIC SOURCE TRANSFER McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Switchboard shall include controls for a complete automatic source transfer system utilizing the two main breakers. System will control selection between normal source and standby diesel generator. System will control starting and stopping of diesel generator. Control components shall include: 1. Cutler- Hammer IQ Transfer Controller 2. ABB type 47D three phase undervoltage and negative sequence relay. These components shall be mounted in the front door of an auxiliary or control compartment in the switchboard. 3. The IQ Transfer shall be provided with all standard features and the following optional features: a. Overvoltage - Source 1 (option 26C) b. Overvoltage - Source 2 (option 5E) c. Overfrequency - Source 2 (option 5C) d. Time delayed neutral (option 32A) e. Transfer time delay bypass (option 8C, 8D) f. Plant exerciser with real time clock (option 23) g. Service entrance (option 37) h. Overcurrent protection (option 16) i. Load shed from emergency (option 36) j. Go to emergency (option 26D) 4. The 470 shall serve as supplementary sensing for the normal source and shall be wired such that pick -up of the 47D or normal power fail sensing of the IQ Transfer shall initiate the IQ Transfer generator startup and transfer sequence. 5. Provide all necessary control power sources and wiring. Voltage sensing leads shall be fused and shall have disconnect switch. 6. Provide control interface and wiring for service entrance option, including automatic switching of neutral current transformer to whichever main breaker is closed. 7. Provide all necessary auxiliary relays. 8. Provide the following selector switches inside of the control compartment: a. Bypass TDNE/TDEN (NORMAL/BYPASS) b. Simulate phase loss (A - NORMAUOFF, B - NORMAUOFF, C - NORMAUOFF). (Connect to switch voltage leads to IQ transfer and 47D.) 9. Provide the following selector switches and indicator lights on the front of the control compartment: a. Keyed selector switch "GENERATOR" - AUTO /DISABLE /RUN - bypasses generator controls in RUN and DISABLE positions. Starts engine in RUN position. b. Indicator lights (Auto mode - White, Off - Red, Engine run - Blue) c. Keyed selector switch "MANUAL CONTROL - EMERGENCY /NORMAU DISCONNECT" - EMERGENCY forces transfer to generator source, DISCONNECT opens both normal and emergency breakers. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 7 2.7 CONTROLS A. Control Circuits: 120 V, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control -power transformer. B. Electrically Interlocked Main Circuit Breakers: Two control -power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control -power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120 -V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail -safe automatic transfer scheme. C. Control -Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current - limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. D. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. Wiring shall be installed in non - metallic wireway with removable covers. Wiring shall be type SIS 14 AWG with insulated locking spade terminals and shall be machine labeled at each end. CT wiring shall be 10 AWG. E. Provide shorting -type terminal blocks for CT wiring. F. Factory wire zone interlocking between main breakers and electronic feeder breakers. G. The following contacts shall be factory wired to a common terminal block for interface to customer monitoring: 1. (a) contact from normal and emergency source circuit breakers. 2. IQ transfer "S1 AVAIL," "S2 AVAIL," and "ALARM." 3. Front panel selector switches "Generator- AUTO /DISABLE /RUN" and "Manual Control - Emergency/Normal/Disconnect " 2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: To test functions of solid -state trip devices without removal from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays. C. Circuit - Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead circuit- breaker lifting device, mounted at top front of switchboard, with hoist and lifting yokes matching each drawout circuit breaker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 8 !: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3.2 EXAMINATION AND GENERAL COMMENTS Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances END OF SECTION 16441 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Perform in accordance with NETA ATS -''Demonstration and Training: Provide demonstration/training session for Owner's Representative. Demonstrate and explain operation of all switchboard functions. Illustrate sound and emergency operating procedures. Session shall be conducted by a factory-authorized service representative. ' ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.8 CLEANING On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to, assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. SWITCHBOARDS ,• , • 16441 - 10 I SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and asso- ciated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch - circuit panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, TVSS device, ac- cessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed de- vices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short- circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. C. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with qualifica- tions specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following: McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1 E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load bal- ancing. F. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective de- vices. 2. Time - current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electri- cal Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. C. Comply with NEMA PB 1. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Keys: Three spares of each type of panelboard cabinet lock. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler- Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington PANELBOARDS 16442 - 2 1 1 c. Square D Co. 2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES YVY McLeod USA, Seattle, Washington A. Enclosures: Surface - mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface- mounted fronts, match box di- mensions; for flush- mounted fronts, overlap box. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion - resistant treatment or primer coat. D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panel - board door. E. Bus: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch - circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. H. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. I. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch - circuit equipment ground conductors; in- sulated from box. 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT - CIRCUIT RATING Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short circuit current available at terminals. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH- CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Front mounted, except omit in fused - switch panelboards; secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker. C. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following: 1. For Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on circuit breakers. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 3 2. For Circuit - Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug -in cir- cuit breakers where individual positive - locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1, Thermal- Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time - current element for low -level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip set- ting for circuit - breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with 5 -mA trip sensitivity. B. Molded -Case Circuit - Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air - conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 2. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field - installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated - plastic nameplate mounted with stainless steel screws. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 4 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electri- cal ground bus. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demon- strate product capability and compliance with requirements. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2 Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compli- ance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splat- ters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS 16442 - 5 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Comply with NFPA 70. Alf SECTION 16461 - DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS This Section includes dry-type distribution transformers rated 1000 V and less. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show mini- mum clearances and installed devices and features. B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field - installed wiring. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products fur- nished comply with requirements. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. E. Factory Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's routine factory tests required by refer- enced standards. F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3. G. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Divi- sion 1. A. Listing and Labeling: Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- tory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) 16461 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Cutler- Hammer /Eaton Corp. 2. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 3. Square D; Groupe Schneider. 2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, air - cooled units of types specified, designed for 60 -Hz service. B. Cores: Grain - oriented, nonaging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices, except for taps. D. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. E. Enclosure: Class complies with NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed. 2.3 GENERAL- PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Cores: One leg per phase. C. Windings: One coil per phase in primary and secondary. D. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated. E. Insulation Class: 185 or 220 deg C class for transformers 15 kVA or smaller; 220 deg C class for transformers larger than 15 kVA. 1. Rated Temperature Rise: 115 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C. DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) 16461 - 2 F. Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full- capacity taps in high - voltage windings are as fol- lows: 1. Taps: Six 2.5- percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high voltage. 2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are listed and labeled as complying with UL 506. B. Ratings: Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide capacity exceeding peak load by 50 percent minimum. C. Description: Self - cooled, 2 windings. 2.5 FINISHES A. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion - resistant pretreatment and primer. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Design and routine tests comply with referenced standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 GROUNDING 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL r— .+- r.�..�.r. +..w.s�Aa.nY.tYla.. { Y. gartV.. �l.. vF,. ttM+ 4ta. M. w. Y'. w. Y•. Me¢.. e.— V. w. Ywr.. ww .nM'..u.�wv........•nu+cnv McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with safety requirements of NFPA 70. B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. A. Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes and bond- ing connections to metallic piping as indicated and to comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding" for materials and installation requirements. A. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's toler- ances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing. DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) 16461 - 3 3.4 CLEANING END OF SECTION 16461 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component. C. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement. D. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and in- stallation. E. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods and data correction factors. 1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed. In- clude internal inspection through access panels and covers. 2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3. Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding to winding and winding to ground. a. Minimum Test Voltage: 1000 V, dc. b. Minimum Insulation Resistance: 500 megohms. c. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes. d. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20 deg C standard. F. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements. A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment through- out normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages and tap settings and submit with test results. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in readjusting transformer tap settings to suit actual occupied condi- tions. Provide up to 2 visits to Project site for this purpose without additional cost. 1. Voltage Recordings: Contractor performed. Provide up to 48 hours of recording on the low- voltage system of each medium - voltage transformer. 2. Point of Measurement: Make voltage recordings at load outlets selected by Owner. I I DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS (1000 V AND LESS) 16461 - 4 SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeod USA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes individually mounted switches and circuit breakers used for the following: 1. Feeder and equipment disconnect switches. 2. Feeder branch - circuit protection. 3. Motor disconnect switches. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs and receptacles, and snap switches used for disconnect switches. 2. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for individually enclosed, fused power- circuit devices used as feeder disconnect switches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. B. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between manufacturer - installed and field - installed wiring. C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demon- strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci- fied. D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results. E. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control," an independent testing agency shall meet OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907, or shall be a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16476 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, to supervise on -site testing speci- fied in Part 3. B. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Arti- cle 100. 2 Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- tory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler- Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division. 3. Square D Co. 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle. B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position. C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manu- facturer's written Instructions. B. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers level and plumb. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16476-2 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Set field- adjustable disconnect switches and circuit - breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.4 CLEANING END OF SECTION 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in Divi- sion 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for disconnect switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. 16476-3 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building sur- faces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designa- tion. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 3. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 4. Fluorescent and high- intensity- discharge ballasts. 5. Types of lamps. B. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Divi- sion 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 -1 1.6 WARRANTY McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addi- tion to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty for Batteries: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special Warranty Period for Batteries: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for last nine years. C. Special Warranties for Fluorescent Ballasts: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace fluorescent ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of manufacture, but not less than four years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the drawings and herein. 2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 2 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Sound Rating: A. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated. A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: B. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements" Paragraph above: 1. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 2. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound. 3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving tamps if one or more lamps fail. C. Ballasts for Compact Lamps in Recessed Fixtures: Unless otherwise indicated, additional fea- tures include the following: 1. Type: Electronic fully encapsulated in potting compound. 2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 3. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 4. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 6. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on elec- tromagnetic and radio - frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. D. Ballasts for Compact Lamps in Nonrecessed Fixtures: Unless otherwise indicated, additional features include the following: 1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. 3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations. 4. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on elec- tromagnetic and radio - frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following: 1. Sign Colors and Lettering Size: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: As follows: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light- emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. C. Self- Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self- contained power pack. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 3 2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER SUPPLY UNIT McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type with special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid -state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. A. Internal Type: Self - contained, modular, battery- inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924. 1. Test Switch and Light- Emitting Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. 2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel- cadmium type with minimum 10 -year nominal life. 3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid- state, constant - current type. 4. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when normal supply circuit volt- age drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamp, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 2.6 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color- Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI, un- less otherwise indicated. B. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid -start circuits. 2.7 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and an- gle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2 -inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 -inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16 -inch- minimum diameter, cadmium - plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. 2.8 FINISHES A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion - resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 4 z s i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manu- facturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid -Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. Install a minimum of four (4) ceiling support system wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture corners. 2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4 -inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment. F. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches and where indicated, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem - Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests. C. Provide instruments to make and record test results. D. Tests: As follows: 1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. 3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Report results in writing. E. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 5 A Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recom- mended by manufacturer. . Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. McLeodUSA; Seattle, Washington INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 6 SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Comply with NFPA 70. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, support structures, and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories; and for exterior luminaires normally mounted on buildings. A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support or other structure and mounting and support accessories. B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s), when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect lamps, and to connect lamps to power supply. A. Product Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles. 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric data. 3. High- intensity- discharge luminaire ballasts. A. Luminaires and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their indicated use, location, and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Protection of Metal from Corrosion: Warranty against perforation or erosion of finish due to weathering. 2. Color Retention: Warranty against fading, staining, and chalking due to effects of weather and solar radiation. 3. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the contract drawings. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Comply with IESNA RP -8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. B. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. C. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion - resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter /breather for enclosed luminaires. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. Arrange to disconnect ballast when door opens. F. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation. H. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 2 'a J. Photoelectric Relays: As follows: 2.3 FINISHES FART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington I. Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat- and aging- resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor in luminaire doors. 1. Contact Relays: Single throw, arranged to fail in the on position and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15- second minimum time delay. K. High- Intensity- Discharge Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Constant wattage autotransformer or regulating high - power- factor type, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 2. Single -Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 40 deg C. 3. Open- circuit operation will not reduce average life. 4. High- Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Equip with a solid -state igniter /starter having an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter /starter case temperature of 90 deg C. 5. Noise: Uniformly quiet operation, with a noise rating of B or better. L. Lamps: Comply with the standard of the ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. Provide luminaires with indicated lamps of designated type, characteristics, and wattage. Where a lamp is not indicated for a Iuminaire, provide medium wattage lamp recommended by manufacturer for luminaire. A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Steel: Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. 1. Galvanized Finish: Hot -dip galvanize after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123. a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports. B. Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace malfunctioning lamps. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 3 3•3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged units. B. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests. 3.4. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 3.5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING UNIT SCHEDULE See contract drawings. END OF SECTION 16521 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Provide instruments to make and record test results. D. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows: 1.. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination. 2. Check excessively noisy ballasts. E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating and interpreting results. F. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. • . , EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 -4 SECTION 16670 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. This Section includes lightning protection for buildings and associated structures and requirements for lightning protection system components. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Protect entire building and roof - mounted equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each component specified. Include the following: 1. Roof adhesive data. 2. Air terminals. 3. Conductors. 4. Connectors. C. Shop Drawings detailing lightning protection system. Include air terminal locations, conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding provisions. Include indications for use of raceway and data on how concealment requirements will be met. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include data on listing or certification by nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) or trade association. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive for air terminals is approved by manufacturers of both the terminal assembly and the single -ply membrane roofing material. F. Field inspection reports indicating compliance with specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is NRTL listed or who is certified by the Lightning Protection Institute as a Master Installer /Designer. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 16670 - 1 B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. Provide UL Master Label. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by of one of the following: 1. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 2. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 3. Thompson Lightning Protection Co. 2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with UL 96. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. System Materials: Copper, with solid air terminals, except as otherwise indicated. Provide aluminum materials and copper /aluminum connectors where installed on aluminum building materials. C. Air Terminals for Single -Ply Membrane Roof Mounting: Units with bases especially designed for single -ply membrane roof materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of lightning protection. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lightning protection as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Comply with UL 96A and NFPA 780. C. Conform to the most stringent requirements when more than one standard is specified. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 16670 - 2 z 1 1 i 1 Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends and narrow loops. Where indicated, run conductors in nonmetallic raceway, Schedule 40, minimum. Conceal down conductors in nonmetallic conduit painted to match building finish. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic - welded connections for underground conductor splices. Use bolted connectors for above -grade connections. Air Terminals on Single -Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's installation instructions. Adhesive materials shall be approved by roofing manufacturer. H. Bond lightning protection components to grounded metal bodies on building at every 60 feet with intermediate -level interconnection loop conductors. I. Provide blunt -tip air terminals for open areas on roof. 3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such materials. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors. Use aluminum conductors and terminals where mounted on aluminum building and HVAC components. Use CU /AL connectors for transition from copper to aluminum. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. UL Inspection: Apply for inspection by UL as required for UL master labeling of system. END OF SECTION 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 16670 - 3 SECTION 16950 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services to perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to the testing and inspection of each item of equipment provided or installed under this division of the specifications. B. Tests and inspections for each system and each item of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform test to demonstrate that the equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, and installed in accordance with the design Drawings and specifications. D. Upon completion of tests and inspections, attach a label to each device tested or inspected. Labels shall indicate date and by whom (company name) tested as well as whether or not the device passed or failed, or passed with exceptions. E. Perform grounding electrical tests. F. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for requirements for grounding conductors. 2. Division 16 Section "Switchboards." 3. Division 16 Section "Grounding." 4. Division 16 Section "Transformers." 5. Division 16 Section "Panelboards." 6. Division 16 Section "Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers." 1.3 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS, AND REFERENCES A. The publications listed for a part of these specifications to the extent referenced. 1. InterNational Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing (NETA) Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, 1995 (ATS). 2. All inspections and tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable codes and standards including: NEC, ANSI, IEEE, NFPA, NEMA, National Electrical Safety Code, and OSHA. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF INDEPENDENT TESTING ORGANIZATION A. The testing organization shall have been engaged in inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of electrical distribution systems for a minimum of five years. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 1 McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington B. The independent testing organization shall have a calibration program with accuracy traceable every six months in an unbroken chain, to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). C. Inspection, testing, and calibration shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified by a national organization, with a minimum of five years experience in inspecting, testing, and calibration of electrical equipment. 1.5 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY A. The contractor shall perform routine insulation resistance, continuity, and rotational tests for distribution and utilization equipment prior to, and in addition to, testing to be performed by the testing organization. The Contractor's responsibility shall include the following: 1. Engage the services of the testing organization. 2. Supply a suitable and stable source of power to the testing organization. Notify the testing organization when equipment becomes available for acceptance testing. 3. The independent testing organization shall maintain a written record of all tests and shall assemble and certify a final test report. 4. The Contractor shall supply a load bank as stated elsewhere within these specifications and provide cables necessary for connection. 5. Coordinate work to expedite project scheduling. Prior to commencement of testing, the Contractor shall supply a complete set of electrical drawings, specifications, manufacturers' data, and pertinent change orders to the testing organization. C. The testing organization shall perform tests and inspections as specified. Responsibilities shall include the following: 1. Notify the NE as to when testing will commence. 2. Provide sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to conduct tests and inspections safely. 3. Report any material or workmanship found to be defective during tests and inspections to the NE. 4. Provide a coordination study for the purpose of making final settings and adjustments of the electrical equipment. 5. Make final settings and adjustments of the electrical equipment. 6. Maintain written records of test. Upon completion of the project, furnish four (4) copies of the test report to the AIE in accordance with Division 1 and no later than 7 calendar days after acceptance of the project for review prior to final acceptance. The test report shall be bound and its contents certified by the testing organization. The report shall include the following; a. Summary of project. b. Description of the equipment tested. c. Description of test. d. List of the test equipment used. e. Test results. f. Conclusion and recommendations. g. Appendix, including completed test forms. 1.6 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES A. Perform all short circuit and coordination studies as listed in section 6.1 of NETA ATS -1995. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 2 B. The report shall include the following sections: 1. Description, basis, written scope, and a single -line diagram of the power system. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other equipment ratings versus calculated short circuit duties, and commentary regarding same. 3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same. 4. Fault current tabulations including a definition of terms and a guide for interpretation. C. The power system study shall be in a separate binder and contain all the information requested herein. 1.7 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION A. The testing organization shall maintain test instruments which have been calibrated within rated accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on the test equipment. B. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: 1. Field instruments- 6 months maximum. 2. Laboratory instruments -12 months. 3. Leased specialty equipment -12 months (where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor). 1.8 SAFETY PRACTICES McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Safety practices shall include, but not be limited to, the following requirements: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 -OSHA. 2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations as published by the National Safety Council. 3. Applicable safety operating procedures of governing authorities. 4. National Electrical Safety Code. B. Perform tests with apparatus de- energized, except where otherwise specifically required. C. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hot -line grounded device approved for that purpose. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES A. Perform each test and inspection until acceptable results are obtained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise specified. B. Perform test and inspections for each system and item of equipment as applicable, unless otherwise specified. Inspect for physical damage and defective materials or installation work. Inspect materials and installation work for proper physical, electrical and mechanical conditions. C. Promptly report any discrepancies or unsatisfactory conditions determined by any test or inspection. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 3 3.2 SWITCHBOARDS B. Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for proper operation and sequencing. H. Circuit Breakers - Insulated Case McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington D. Perform insulation resistance tests for each applicable system and item of equipment. Do not perform this test on solid state devices or wiring connected to solid state devices. Be aware that in some cases terminated cables cannot be tested unless disconnected from end devices. Coordinate the test with the Contractor in this instance. E. Insulation Resistance Test: Apply a test voltage of 1000V for power wiring with 600V rated insulation. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the manufacturer's recommended minimum, or less than a value equal to KV + in megohms. F. Over - potential tests shall not proceed until insulation resistance tests are satisfactorily performed. Perform over - potential tests for each system and item of equipment as specified. A. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Inspect for physical, electrical, and mechanical condition. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest one -line diagram and report discrepancies. Verify that circuit breaker, fuse, current and potential transformer, correspond to drawings. Verify all bolt torques. 1. Closure attempt shall be made on locked -open devices. Opening attempt shall be made on locked - closed devices. 2. Key exchange shall be made with devices operated in off - normal positions. C. Clean entire switchboard using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. D. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces. E. Lubrication: Verify appropriate contact lubricant on moving current carrying parts. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. F. Verify proper operation of devices and exercise all active components. Inspect all indicating devices for proper operation. G. Electrical Tests: Perform tests in accordance with applicable sections of NETA ATS 7.1. 1. Perform tests on all instrument transformers. Test insulation, perform a polarity test, and ratio verification test. 2. Perform insulation- resistance tests on each bus section, phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground for one (1) minute. 3. Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of the switchgear. 4. Determine accuracy of all meters and calibrate watthour meters. Verify multipliers. 1. For draw -out circuit breakers, check cell fit and element alignment. 2. Inspect circuit breakers, including power and control contacts for proper contact and alignment. Check arc chutes for damage. Electrically operate charging motors and verify proper operation, including transfer switch coordinated interlocking and sequence of operation. 3. Perform insulation resistance tests from each pole -to- ground and pole -to -pole, and across open contacts of each phase. Test values shall not be less than 50 megohms. 4. Utilize primary current injection method to set and verify the values determined from the coordination study, including the following: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 4 i r r I. L �• 3.5 GROUNDING 1 i 1 a. Minimum pickup current of trip devices. b. Long time delay, using 300% pickup current. c. Short time pickup and short time delay. d. Instantaneous pickup current. e. Ground fault, where provided. 5. Verify trip unit reset characteristics. 3.3 TRANSFORMERS - DRY TYPE A. Perform visual and mechanical inspection. Compare equipment nameplate with single -line diagram. Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulators, tightness of connectors, defective wiring, removal of shipping brackets, and anchorage of equipment. B. Perform electrical test in accordance with applicable secions of NETA ATS. C. Perform insulation- resistance tests, winding -to- winding and windings -to- ground utilizing a megohmmeter. Investigate if test values exceed 3 %. 1 D. Perform a turns -ratio test between windings. Test results shall not deviate more than 0.5% from calculated ratio. E. Verify and correct tap setting of transformers for secondary voltage. 3.4 CABLES - LOW VOLTAGE - 600V MAXIMUM McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. Inspect cable support and termination. Inspect cables for physical damage and connections as per the single -line diagram. Ensure equipment edges are not in contact with cables or that protective padding is provided. Verify cable size, type, ratings match specifications and single -line diagram. Verify correct over - current protection. B. Check visible cable bends against ICEA and manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius. C. Verify that neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for normal operation of protective devices, especially if cables are terminated through window type cable trays. D. Perform insulation resistance tests on each cable #6 AWG and larger with respect to ground and adjacent cables. E. Perform continuity tests to confirm proper cable connections. Verify that all phase, neutral, and ground conductors are routed together in raceways and properly grouped within switchgear to minimize heating. A. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. B. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall -of- potential method according to IEEE 81. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 5 C. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. 3.6 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Check each circuit breaker for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation. B. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation. C. Open unsealed breakers and check internal components for tightness, where applicable. D. Circuit breakers 400A frame size and larger: 1. Measure contact resistance in micro -ohms. Investigate deviations greater than 50% as compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers 2. Perform an insulation- resistance test at 1000 volts DC from pole -to -pole and from each pole - to- ground with breaker closed and across open contacts. 3. Determine long -time minimum pickup current by primary current injection. 4. Determine long -time delay by primary injection. 5. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. 6. Determine instantaneous pickup by primary current injection. 7. Make final settings in accordance with the coordination study. 3.7 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Inspect neutral main bonding connection to assure: 1. Zero sequence system is grounded upstream from sensor. 2. Ground strap systems are grounded through sensing device. 3. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link. B. Verify that control power transformer capacity is adequate for system. McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington C. Manually operate monitory panels to test sequences for trip test, no trip test, and non - automatic reset. D. Inspect zero sequence systems for symmetrical alignment of core. Balance transformers about current carrying conductors. E. Verify ground fault device circuit nameplate identification by device operations. F. Insure control circuit has disconnectable fuse device with current limit fuses. G. Measure system neutral insulation resistance to insure no shunt ground paths exist. Remove neutral - ground disconnect link and measure neutral insulation resistance, then replace link. System neutral insulation shall be one (1) megohm or greater. H. Determine current pickup by primary injection at the sensor and operate the circuit Interrupting device. Relay pickup current shall not exceed 1,200 amperes. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 6 Test ground fault pickup and time delay. INFRARED SCANNING McLeodUSA, Seattle, Washington A. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard, panelboard, and transformer. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Perform in accordance with NETA ATS 9.1. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies equipment checked and that describes Rearming results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 16950 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING 16950 - 7 ecember 3, 1999 Chuck Rauch 280 North 8th Street, Suite 138 Boise, ID 83702 . � ur++ v .nw.xlerMnllR.4eLWANi.1:5 City of Tukwila RE: Letter of Incomplete Application #1 Development Permit Application Number D99 -0421 McLeod USA — Switch Center 3417 South 120th Place Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on November 30, 1999 is determined to be incomplete. Before your permit application can begin the plan review process the following items need to be addressed. Building Division: Ken Nelson, Plans Examiner, at (206)431 -3677, if you have any questions regarding the following: In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206)431 -3672. Sincerely, Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator File: Permit File No. D99 -0421 1. Information required on watt per square foot of new lighting per W.S.E.C. 2. Building insulation because of new HVAC? John W. Rants, Mayor The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. If your revision does not require revised plans but requires additional reports or other documentation, please submit four (4) copies of each document. 4300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 431-3670 • Fax (206) 431-3665 Please Route Approved \PRROUI LDOC 5/99 DEPARTMENTS: Byil Public Works Approved n n TUES /THURS ROUTING: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Fire Prevention Structural Structural Review Required Approved with Conditions REVIEWER'S INITIALS: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP DATE: 3 -20 -2000 ACTIVITY NUMBER: D99 -0421 PROJECT NAME: MCLOED USA SITE ADDRESS: 3417 S 120 PL Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # XX Revision # 1 After Permit Is Issued Response to Incomplete Letter # Planning Division n Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE:3 -21 -2000 Complete Li Incomplete n Not Applicable n Comments: No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE 4 -18 -2000 Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) n Li Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: DUE DATE DATE: rf D UMBER: D99-0421 Original ,Plan Submittal Response. to Correction Letter # DATE: ME: MCLEOD USA SWITCH CENTER XX Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: Budding Division Awc I 1 -CO Public Workks V\/A I -lo- " 33�' ri% �S�' 7;": �, C�'�`�,}'i�.':i�:�tis1J:�'r1"wf ERMIT COORD COPY 41f, PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Complete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTI ,tJo Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATI OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete Please Route U Structural Review Required APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved r Approved with Conditions CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved Approved with Conditions \PRROUTE.DOC 5/99 REVIEWER'S INITIALS: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Plannin 'vision ( 7 - --7 - 1 Permit Coordinator ■ DUE DATE: 12 -21 -1999 Not Applicable n No further Review Required n DATE: DUE DATE 1- 18-2000 Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: 4, 0,0 f0 ...� �... v •[� ... t N-y. , ;:.q "•. s'+�C)x .y .�f'� i;". yy�u.7'1;aejKy� . i+f,.!G yiLr'!.1.1 r , �I ;`V tT. :} t;•�,'%`{Wt. 4V ` .r 3 .t. }i 4 � .11mi; i i_�..1!i: } 4u'nr�)% <.„ {k;.�.. .q.. .:...11l.rt.Mb�.fv. i S7'� PERMIT COORD COPY t PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Revision # _After. Permit Is Issued ACTIVITY :NUMBER: 1)99-0421 DATE: 11 -30 -99 PROJECT NAME: MCLEOD USA SWITCH CENTER- Response to Incomplete: Letter # , XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction. Letter # N DEPARTMENTS: /Z Byiltlin Division II Fire f vention • 1 242 - I 2 - Public Works MO Structural C DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Incomplete Comments: 144(tr4 n Cep. 14 -AY Allibrl fZ -a-e7q TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route n Structural Review Required Approved I I Approved with Conditions Approved 111 Approved with Conditions \ PRROU I E.DOC 5/99 Planning Division 'A Permit Coordinator S • DUE DATE: 12 -02 -99 Not Applicable n No further Review Required n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) DUE DATE 12 -30 -99 Not Approved (attach comments) Ti REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: DUE DATE Not Approved (attach comments) n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Revision No. Date . Received Staff Initials Date Issued Date Issued Staff Initials I . -15'—,)._000 I 1.4)&1Z I ' ' l'• ______LZI Summary of Revision: tAL y 1 1 re \it sim i Received By:m Revision No. , Date Received Staff Initials Date Issued Staff Initials I I I I Summary of Revision: Received By: Received By: Revision No. Date Received Staff Initials Date Issued Staff Initials I 'I I Summary of Revision: Received By: PROJECT NAME: M ' L8d1 U 4 PERMlf, Site Address: ?) )0' Pi Original Issue Date: I REVISION LOG (pleaseprint) (please print) (please print) I Revision No. Date Received Staff Initials Date Issued Staff Initials Summary of Revision: Received By: (please print) Revision No. Date Received Staff Initials Date Issued Staff Initials Summary of Revision: Received By: (please print) ecTpt, ■•• „ :4 ^f!z! =:•C': tWStt�{t Rtfu'YM .nn�e »f,�Jfx City of Tukwila I wig. John W. Rants, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 3 ` / S- O o El Response to Incomplete Letter # (] Response to Correction Letter # 1]( Revision # I after Permit is Issued Project Name: ? G <oJ u S �9 Project Address: 3 / 2 Sc /2o J o L S Q./; tilt 4,4 Vert Contact Person: 4 1)} 44 /64 PA 1- Phone Number: 9 - y 92 - (*AP Summary of Revision: 40- Q / (- / 0 c- / (.✓,q ! 4 D- 9 (2 Q v. REVISION NOI_L Sheet Number(s): 4 0 I A / • /0 5 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision includ date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: l l 1/30 Entered in Sierra on S ' Plan Check/Permit Number: / .9— 0 '2 / CITY OF TUKWILA MAP 1 .n n n NtRMIT CENTER 06/29/99 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 4313670 • Fax (206) 431-3665 Dec 08 99 02:12p Date: 12- 113\ gt q Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 ❑ Response to Correction Letter # p Revision # after Permit is Issued Project Address: 3417 South 120 Place Contact Person: Chuck Rauch • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development - 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Plan Check/Permit Number: D99 -0421 Project Name: MCLEOD USA — SWITCH CENTER PernsiValavitA i" DEC 1 7 1999 PERMIT CENTER Phone Number. Ze , - 392 - (04'-JI Summary of Revision: t I • ado A lo• I �..igiv 111 C*wl]'f 'tat'` • CcVer cb.-1121 -k Ma k.) Wad lrts0 (1 T�� Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Sierra on 1 e A - 12/03/99 P.8 Dear Sir: c City of Tukwila Fire Department Fire Department Review Control #D99 -0421 (512) December 1, 1999 Re: McCleod USA Switch Center - 3417 South 120th Place John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. The total number of fire extinguishers required for your establishment is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 10B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (NFPA 10, 3 -1.1) Portable fire extinguishers shall be securely installed on the hanger or in the bracket supplied, placed in cabinets or wall recesses. The hanger or bracket shall be securely and properly anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The extinguisher shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above the floor and the clearance between the bottom of the extinguisher and the floor shall not be less than 4 inches. Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher ", with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC Standard 10 -1) Clear access to fire extinguishers is required at all times. They may not be hidden or obstructed. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.5) Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 5754439 3 Page number 2 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4 and 4 -4.3) Every six years, dry chemical and halon type fire extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. (NFPA 10, 4 -4.1) If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4) 2. No point in a sprinklered building may be more than 250 feet from an exit, measured along the path of travel. (UBC 1004.2.5.2.2) Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. Exit doors shall not be locked, chained, bolted, barred, latched or otherwise rendered unusable. All locking devices shall be of an approved type. (UFC 1207.3) Obstructions, including storage, shall not be placed in the required width of an exit, except projections as permitted by the Building Code. Exits shall not be obstructed in any manner and shall remain free of any material or matter where its presence would obstruct or render the exit hazardous. (UFC 1203) Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (UFC 1207.3) Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the Uniform Fire Code. (UFC 1207 -1212) Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 5754439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 3 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Internally illuminated exit signs shall have both bulbs working at all times. (UBC 1003.2.8.4) When two or more exits from a story are required, exit signs shall be installed at the required exits and where otherwise necessary to clearly indicate the direction of egress. (UBC 1003.2.8.2) The color and design of lettering, arrows and other symbols on exit signs shall be in high contrast with their background. Words on the sign shall be block letters 6 inches in height with a stroke of not less than 3/4 inch. (UBC 1003.2.8.3) Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of buildings. Aisles located within an accessible route of travel shall also comply with the Building Code requirements for accessibility. (UFC 1204.1) Exits shall be illuminated any time the building is occupied with light having an intensity of not less than 1 foot candle at floor level. Fixtures required for exit illumination shall be supplied from separate sources of power for Group I, Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 occupancies and for all other occupancies where the exiting system serves an occupant load of 100 or more. (UBC 1003.2.9, 1003.2.9.2) When exit signs are required by The Building Code (see U.B.C. section 3314(A)), additional approved low level exit signs which are internally or externally illuminated, or self - luminous shall be provided in all interior exit corridors serving guest rooms of hotels in Group R, Division 1 occupancies. The bottom of the sign shall not be less than 6 inches or more than 8 inches above the floor level. For exit doors, the sign shall be on the door or adjacent to the door with the closest edge of the sign within 4 inches of the door frame. (UFC 1212.6) Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 57$4404 • Fax (206) 5754439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 4 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Exit doors serving exit enclosures and exit passageways shall be maintained self- closing or shall be automatic closing by actuation of a smoke detector. All hold open devices shall be listed for the intended purpose and shall close or release the fire assembly to the closed position in the event of a power failure. (UBC 1005.3.3.5, 1005.3.4.4) When two or more exits from a story are required and when two or more exits froma room or an area are required, exit signs shall be illuminated. (UBC 1003.2.8.4) The power supply for means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premises' electrical supply. In the event of it's failure, illumination shall be automatically provided from an emergency system for Group I, Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 occupancies and for all other occupancies where the means of egress system serves an occupant load of 100 or more. Such emergency systems shall be installed in accordance with the electrical code. (UBC 1003.9.2) Combustible material shall not be stored in exits or exit enclosures. (UFC 1103.3.2.3) All exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 1 1/2 hours in case of primary power loss, the exit signs shall also be connected to an emergency electrical system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or an on site generator set, and the system shall be installed in accordance with the electrical code. (UBC 1003.2.8.5) Exit doors shall be maintained in accordance with Section 1207. Exit doors shall be maintained in an operable condition. Doors installed as part of required fire assemblies shall be maintained in accordance with Section 1112.2. (UFC 1207.1) Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) .57.5-4404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 5 Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief 3. Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition /relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding sprinkler heads. 4. All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers, Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by The City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1742) All sprinkler system plans, calculations and the contractors Materials and Test Certificates submitted to The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau must be stamped with the appropriate level of competency seal. (WAC 212 -80) All valves controlling the water supply for automatic sprinkler systems and waterflow switches on all sprinkler systems shall be electrically supervised. (City Ordinance #1742) Sprinkler protection shall be extended to all areas where required, including all enclosed areas, below obstructions and under overhangs greater than four feet wide. (NFPA 13 -4- 5.5.3.1) A supply of spare sprinklers (never fewer than 6) shall be maintained on the premises so that any sprinklers that have operated or been damaged in any way can be promptly replaced. These sprinklers shall correspond to the types and temperature ratings of the sprinklers in the property. The sprinklers shall be kept in a cabinet located where the temperature to which they are subjected will at no time exceed 100 degrees F. A special sprinkler wrench shall also be John W. Rants, Mayor Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 575.4439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 6 Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief provided and kept in the cabinet to be used in the removal and installation of sprinklers. (NFPA 13 -2- 2.7.1, 2- 2.7.2) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 5. All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #1742) (UFC 1001.3) Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1742) Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 575 -4407 for approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name and the Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shut down approval. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 6. All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of The National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 7. Required fire resistive construction, including occupancy separations, area separation walls, exterior walls due to location on property, fire resistive requirements based on type of construction, draft stop partitions and roof coverings shall be maintained as specified in the Building Code and Fire Code and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (UFC 1111.1) John W. Rants, Mayor Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 5754439 City of Tukwila Fire Department When walls and ceilings are required to be of fire resistive or noncombustible construction, interior finish materials shall meet the requirements of Uniform Building Code 803. Your street address must be conspicuously posted on the building and shall be plainly visible and legible from the street. (UFC 901.4.4) This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Yours truly, 6/ 2- The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau cc: TFD file ncd John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575.4404 • Fax (206) 57544139 REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS CONST CON? GENERAL rST =: •.' :;: P. DATE. C01ti �: : Mi1MORC*190N6; `05/01/200 EFFECTIVE :DATE :08/26/.1981 M A MORTENSON COMPANY PO BOX 710 MINNEAPOLIS MN 55440 23452-0 00 48/971 AMP —JUN —18- 1999 —i4i 5.4 � . Detach And Display Catificate ---- -, Detach And Display Ccaificate M. A.. MORTENSON COMPANY. MIE EAPOLIS. MN 55440' ' . • f ' GISTER.ED AS PROVIDED BY LN CONST CON? GENERAL REGIS ?. # EXP. DATE •CCO1'. "MAMORC *190N6 05/01/2000 SFF'ECTIYr.'DATE 08/2G/1981 I Si . .. Issued by DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Please Remove And Sign Idcatification Card Before Placing In B illfold ` o&titri K, t� 0 NA • p I certify that this is a true and correct co nson Company o copy of this � ��,,� �•r>' sSt � d t s possession of M.A. Morte Y of this date., . k �� otayr'Public in and. for the . •My Commission ex ires 1/20/02. t '8c " 2 0.02 shi�'�tQn � �• 01 ?Q •• • � (••••„•••• �O � Z alliftw ie I OM • MORTENSON The Construction Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 New Switch Center 3417 South 120th Place Seattle, Washington 98188 11 -23 -1999 PERMIT SET Nqr 0 FJ N GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATE% INC. Engineers *Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois NOV 3 0 1999 .,a Corporate Headquarters 8207 Melrose Drive Lenexa, Kansas 66214 913.492.0400 19 0 21 MATERIAL INDICATIONS CODE ANALYSIS SITE DATA DRAWING INDEX GOVERNING CODE COVER SHEET ARCHITECTURAL I 1 EARTH /COMPACT FILL I STEEL / ALUMINUM 1997 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 1999 NATIONAL F E ELECTRIC CODE 1997 UNIFORM FIRE CODE W/ NFPA STANDARDS PROJECT DESCRIPTN DESCRIPTION - GRAVEL /POROUS FILL L../ - ,iL 1 FINISH WOOD �/� i /1 / INDEX AD DEMOLITION PLAN 11 -23 -1999 A0.01 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE/ U.L. DETAILS 11- 23-1999 A110 FLOOR PLAN 11 -23 -1999 A2.00 ROOF PLAN 11 -23 -1999 A5.00 ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 A5.01 INTERIOR DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 A6.00 SCHEDULES/ DOOR DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 A9.10 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 11-23-1999 A16.00 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN 11 -23 -1999 A16.00 MD2.01 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 11 -23 -1999 M2.01 FLOOR PLAN HVAC 11 -23 -1999 M2.02 ROOF PLAN HVAC 11 -23 -1999 M2.03 MECHANICAL DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 M2.04 MECHANICAL DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 P2.01 FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING FIFCTRICAL ED1.01 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 11 -23 -1999 E0.02 ONE -LINE & DETAILS 11 -2.3 -1999 E1.01 LIGHTIWG PLAN &DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E2.01 POWER PLAN & DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E2.02 GROUNDING PLAN &DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E3.01 ALARM PLAN & DETAILS 11 -23 -1999, E4.01 GROUNDING DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E5.01 PANEL SCHEDULES 11 -23 -1999 MUCTURAL 51.10 SLAB PLAN 11 -23 -1999 5 .10 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 11 -23 -1999 3.10 SECTIONS 11 -23 -7995 53 PROTECTION ' ( CONCRETE I� PLYWOOD I BATT OR SEMI -RIGID INSUL. I SAND /MORTAR /PLASTER '` ?/ 1( ( 7f I')( i I A 15,000 SQUARE FOOT TENANT FINISH IN FULLY SPRINKLERED BUILDING. (TOTAL BUILDING AREA APPROXAMATELY 100,000 SQUARE FEET) BUISNESS OCCUPANCY (TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT STORAGE). OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION COMMON /FACE BRICK jr ,! III ' lid RIGID INSULATION . B - (BUISNESS) OCCUPANCY SEPARATION ROUGH WOOD I NONE REQUIRED TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION I - ' -� \I BLOCKING /SHIM V - N ALLOWABLE BUILDING AREA 1. BASIC ALLOWABLE AREA 8,000 2. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER INCREASE 16,000 DRAWING N O N SYSTEM TOTAL ALLOWABLE 24,000 TOTAL PROPOSED 15,000 FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ARE DIVIDED INTO FIFTEEN SPECIFIC ALWAYS REMAIN THE SAME NO MATTER HOW LARGE OR SMALL THE BE ADDED TO GROUPS WITHOUT INTERRUPTING THE ALPHANUMERIC COVER SHEET A000 INDEX, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES, ETC. A100 DOOR PLANS A200 ROOF PLANS A300 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A400 EXTERIOR WALL SECTIONS A DOOR SCHEDULES ILLS & ENLARGED PLANS A700 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A800 MILLWORK DETAILS A900 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1000 FURNITURE PLAN GROUPS PROJECT. ORDER. A 3 (Al - A15), THE GROUP NUMBER WILL ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS MAY 0 1 1 } SHEEP NUMBER BEARING WALLS - EXTERIOR NR 2. BEARING WALLS - INTERIOR NR 3. NON - BEARING WALLS - EXTERIOR NR 4. STRUCTURAL FRAME NR 5. PARTITIONS - PERMANENT NR 6. SHAFT ENCLOSURES NR 7. FLOORS /CEILINGS NR 8. ROOFS /CEILINGS NR 9. EXTERIOR DOORS & WINDOWS NR MEANS OF EGRESS F02.01 FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION 11 -23 -1999 F2.01 FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION 11 -23 -1999 OCCUPANT LOAD CALCULATED OCCUPANT IOAD 3...E FACTOR OCCUPANT FACTOR OFFICE 1195 S.F. 100 12 STORAGE 12,335 S.F. 300 41 OTHER '946 S.F. 100 10 GROUP NUMBER. DISCIPLINE PREF1 TOTAL: 14.446 S.F. 63 SYMBOLS ABBREVIATIONS DISCLAIMER NOTICE GENERAL INFORMATION DRAWING TITLE A F P OF ACCEPTANCE OF RESPONSIBILITY AND DISCLAIMER O F Mcl EIBILOTTE TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PREPARED FOR PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15, 15, MCLEODUSA, SEATTLE WASHINGTON BY GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. THE UNDERSIGNED ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, AND GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC., ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PREPARATION OF ONLY THIS SHEET AND THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS AND INSTRUMENTS: SHEET NUMBER TITLE DATE CONTRACTOR MORTENSON 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 ARCHITECT GEORGE BUTLER AND ASSOC. 8207 MELROSE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 (913)- 492 -0400 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER GEORGE CUTLER AND ASSOC. 8207 MELROSE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 (973)- 492 -0400 MECHANICAL ENGIMEER GEORGE BUTLER AND ASSOC. 1100 MAIN STREET KANSAS CI., MISSOURI 64105 -2168 (913)- 492 -0400 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER GEORGE BUTLER AND ASSOC. 1100 MAIN STREET KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI 64105 -2168 (913)- 492 -0400 I A O 1; J 1 en -eo arv�oF,u,v; NOV 3 0 1999 E - RI. AB ANCHOR BOLT FD FLOOR DRAIN PAR PARALLEL ACV ABOVE F FOUNDATION PBD Ti POTICE ARTICLE BOARD AC ACOUSTICAL FE E FIRE E EXTINGUISHER PC PRECAST CONCRETE A AIR CONDITIONING FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET PERF PERFORATE(D) ACT ACOUSTICAL TILE FFE FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION PERIA4aERIMETER ADJ. ADJUSTABLE FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET PL PLATE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FIN FINISHED) P.L PROPERTY LINE AGG AGGREGATE : FLEX FLEXIBLE PLAN PLASTIC LAMINATE ALT ALTERNATE FLG FLASHING PLAS PLASTER ALUM ALUMINUM FLR FLOORING) PLBG PLUMBING ANCH ANCHOR, ANCHORAGE FLUORFLUORESCENT PLF POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT APF'D APPROVEDANEL FR. FROAOM(FEEp(ING) POL POLISHED(ED) APPROX. APPROXIMATE FTG FOOTING PR PAIR ARCH ARCHI TECTURAL) FUR FURRED, FURRING PREFAEREFABRICATE ( D () AUTO AUTOMATIC FU.. FIR PROS PRESSURE AVG. AVERAGE FVC FIRE V VALVE CABINET PROJ PROJECTION PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT B G PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH DRAWING NUMBER DRAWING NAME RAWI ����� X X ALE : 1 1/2" - I' 0" DRAWING SCALE CURRENT SHEET NUMBER SHEET NUMBER DETAIL IS REFERENCED FROM COLUMN GRID AND NUMBER ARCHITECTURAL: INDEX INDEX SHEET 11 -23 -1999 A01.10 DEMOLITION FLOCK PLAN 11 -23 -1999 A1.. SIGNAGE.SCHEDULE/ U.L DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 A}10 10 FLOOR PLAN 11 -23 -1999 A200 ROOF PLAN 11-23 -1999 A5.00 ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 A5.01 INTERIOR DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 A 0 SCHEDULES/ DOOR DETAILS REFLECTED CEILING PLPL. 11 -23 -1998 A 11-23-1999 A16.00 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN 11 -23 -1999 MECHANCUL - MD2.01 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 11 -23 -1999 M2.01 FLOOR PLAN HVAC 11 -23 -1999 M2.02 ROOF PLAN HVAC 11 -23 -1999 M203 MECHANICAL DETAILS 11 -23 -1989 M2.04. MECHANICAL DETAILS 11 -23 -1998 P2.01 R PLAN PLUMBING 11 -23 -1999 FLOO CIRICAL ED1.01 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 11 -23 -1999 E0.02 ONE -LINE &DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E7.01 LIGHTING PLAN & DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E2.01 Pp'YER PLAN &DETAILS 23 -1999 E202 GROUNDING PLAN & DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E3.01 ALARM PLAN .& DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E4.01 GROUNDING DETAILS 11 -23 -1999 E5.01 PANEL SCHEDULES 11 -23 -1899 STRUCTURA $d COLUMN NUMBER DESIGN ATIION COLUMN LETTER DESIGNATION COLUMN LINE BD BOARD GA GAGE, GAUGE PT PAINT(ED) BEO W BETWEEN BELOW PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER BE G.4LV GALVANIZED . GC GENERAL CON PTN PARTITION PIN BEV BEVELED GO GRADE. GRADING PTR PAPER TOWEL RECEPTOR BLKG BLOCK(ING) GOT GASKEDED) PVC POLVINYL CHLORIDE BLDG. BUILDING GL GLASS, GLAZING PL WCPLYWOOD BM BEAM GYP BOYPSUM BOARD O BOT BOTTOM -' SECTION CUT DIRECTION OE SECTION CUT NUMBER SECTION CURRENT SHEET NUMBER BRG BEARING H QT QUARRY TILE BRK BRICK HB HOSE BIBB QTY QUANTITY BSMT BASEMENT HC HOLLOW CORE R HCP HANDICAPPED) - SHEET NUMBER SECTION IS REFERENCED FROM BUILDING ELEVATION OF ELEVATION BS BOTH SIDES R RISER BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT HD HEAD RAD RADIUS H HARDWARE RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN C HEX HEXAGONAL X DIRECTION NUMBER CAB CABINET HM HOLLOW METAL REV REVISION, REVISED I () CAP CAPACITY H H IGH POINT 'GEM CEMENT H.P. .P. HIGH POINT RECP RECEPTACLE CER CERAMIC HR HOUR REF. REFERENCE CG CORNER GUARD HT .HEIGHT REEL REFLECTED, (INF) CHAM CHAMFER HTG HEATING KEG. REGISTER CHDC CHALKBOARD HVAC HEATING / VENTILATION/ REI REINFORCE(D), (ING) CIR CIRCLE AIR CONDITIONING REQ. REQUIRED CIRC CIRCUMFERENCE HW HOT WATER RH RIGHT HAND CJ CONTROL JOINT HYD HYDRAULIC RM. ROOM CK CAU LKING) RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE CL CENTER LINE I RO ROUGH OPENING ELEVATION SHEET NUMBER .,ry( CURRENT -SHEET NUMBER ELEVATION IS REFERENCED FROM ELEVATION TARGET XXX% FLOOR OR LEVEL (REFERENCE POINT) 1/# BUILDING DATUM ELEVATION CONSTRUCTION NOTE CLG CEILING ID INSIDE DIAMETER s IN TNCH(ES) CLO CLOSET CLR CLEARANCE) INCL INCLUE(D), (INC) S SOUTH CLS CLOSURE INFO INFORMATION SAN SANITARY CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT INSUINSULAL.E(D), (ION) SCHECBCHEDULE CO CLEANEST INT INTERIOR SD SOAP DISPENSER S ECT SECTION COEF COEFFICIENT J SF SQUARE FOOT (FEET) DESCRIPTIVE TEXT % -L 51.70 SLAB PLAN 11-23-1999 S2.10 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 11-23-1999 53.70 SECTIONS 11 -23 -1999 FIRE PROTECTON CONSTRUCTION NOTE NUMBER DOOR NUMBER COL. COLUMN SGL SINGLE COMB COMBINATION J COMP COMPRESS(ED),(ION),(IBLE) JTN JOIST JANITOR SHT SHEET CONC. CONCRETE JOINT SIM SIMILAR CONE CONFERENCE K STUD SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER DOOR LETTER COIN CONNECTION KIT KITCHEN SNR SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLE CONS. CONSTRUCTION KO KNOCKOUT SPEC SPECIFICATION CONS SQ. SQUARE CONTINUOS OR CONTINUE L SS STAINLESS STEEL CONTR. CONTRACTOR) ROOM NUMBER REFERENCE WALL TYPE F 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION 11 -23 -7999 F2.01 FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION 11 -23 -1999 THE UNDERSIGNED SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY : : Y LA:1 TIMATES, REPORTS, OR OTHER DOCUMENTS OR PERSONAL SEAL OF THOSE PERSONS PREPARING THIS NOTICE GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. ( SEAL ) ,,,, WA N ���., p ti a a 41 A R IZ.p ,. i Arc 1EC7 / r � m t / 7 7 7 yo F frU y � WALL TYPE INDICATOR CORK CORRIDOR L LENGTH STD STANDARD STL STEEL CPT CARPEDED) LAB LABORATORY STOR STORAGE CS COUNTERSINK LAM LAMINATE(D) STRUCSTRUCTURE, STRUCTURAL CSMT CASEMENT LAT. LATERAL SUSP SUSPEND, SUSPENDED CT CERAMIC TILE LAV LAVATORY CU FT CUBIC FOOT (FEET) LB POUND T WALL TYPE REFERENCE NUMBER ROOM NAME AND ROOM NUMBER D D TURE DEONLARGED PLAN REFERENCE ;EE .. TH LT. () GHTING T. TONGUE &GROOVE DBL. DOUBLE M. THLCK(NESS) DEG OCREE(S) L. LINTEL M. THROUGH DEPT. DEPARTMENT LVR LOUVER TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER DET DETAIL M NP TYPICAL DETAIL NUMBER XX.X.. CURRENT SHEET NUMBER i - SHEET NUMBER DETAIL IS REFERENCE FROM 1 BOUNDARY DEFINITION DIA DIAMETER FOUNTAIN MAN MANUAL U MAS MASONRY DIAL DIAGONAL MAX. MAXIMUM UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY DIM DIMENSION MECH.MECHANIC(AL) UNEXOINEXCAVATED DISP DISPENSER MED. MEDIUM LINO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIN. DIVISION MEMB MEMBRANE UR URINAL DN. DOWN MEZZ MEZZANINE ■ j __ _ i INTERIOR ELEVATION ()() TION ILE VB VINYL BASE MD MASONRY OPENING VERT VERTICAL E OD VE VESTIBULE (EXPfRES.Io /y 01 OF ELEVATION BY BY ARCHITECT: PAUL KENT PEARSE ENGINEER: ROB PAGE, PE. (SEAL) (SEAL) RY DIRECTION . 4111, EAST MR. METAL VT VINYL TILE EA. EACH MULL MULLION EXP. BOLT EXPANSION BOLT N VWC VINYL WALL COVERING EL SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER ELEVATION NUMBER ELEVATION N NORTH W ELEC. ELECTRICAL) N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT W WEST ELEV. ELEVATOR NO NUMBER W WIDTH EMER EMERGENCY ENCL. ENCLOSE(URE) NOM NOMINAL W/ WITH S .T. . NOT TO SCALE WD WOOD ENG. ENGINEER N WNDW WINDOW EQ. EQUAL 0 W/0 WITHOUT REVISION BUBBLE REVISION AREA CLOUDED REVISION SYMBOL EQUIP EQUIPMENT OA OVERALL WP WATERPROOFING EST ESTIMATE OC ON CENTER(S) WPT WORKING POINT EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER I OUTSIDE DIAMETER WT WEIGHT EX P. EXPOSED OFF OFFICE EXH EXHAUST OH OVERHEAD WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC EXIST EXISTING OPNG OPENING Y EXP. EXPANSION OPP OPPOSITE YD YARD EXT. E %TERIOR OZ OUNCE(S) 1'R. YEAR ENGINEER: ALAN LEHMAN, PE. REVISION NOTE NUMBER GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 kiORTENSON Corallu %rg4T:Foatiictc 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 52Z -2100 INIELEMELIMM REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 199 P 1 -23 - ^aRM1T SET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TALE INDEX SHEET NUMBER INDEX © GEORGE BUTLER, ASSOCAIES, INC. 1999 KEY PLAN 0 0 0 0 0 N z m' 1 MATCH LI 4, z a AD .,10 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN - QUADRANT 2 L ,� N PLP.N R x MATCH LINE 1 m CONSTRUCTION LEGEND = WALL AND DOOR TO BE REMOVED EXISTING VCT AND RUBBER BASE TO BE REMOVED. EXISTING SHEET VINYL W/ INTRCRAL BASE TO BE REMOVED. 0 -I- 0 0 0 z F x 0 1 MATCH LINE ir z ▪ 1 ca t— (12 61) DEMOLITION NOTES 0 REMOVE PORTION OF EXIING TILT UP CONCRETE PANEL TO ALLOW FOR THE INSTA OF A 3' 4 WIDE X 7' - 2" DOOR AND FRA • REMOVE PORTION OF EXISTING TILT UP CONCRETE PANEL TO ALLOW FOR THE INSTALLATION OF A 6' -4" WIDE X 8' -2 ". DOOR AND FRAME. Q REMOVE AND DISCARD EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES ND ,ALL ASSOCIATED PLUMBING, PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGED CONC. FLOOR A TO ',MATCH EXISTING. /1 REMOVE AND SCARD RE G NE. F OO A TFLMA L OCIATED PLUMBING, PATC AND REPAIR DAMAGED CONC. FLOOR TO MATCH ASS EXISTING. • REMOVE AND DISCARD EXISTING 2" THICK PARTITION WALLS, PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGED CONC. FLOOR TO MATCH EXISTING. AD.10 1,p DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN - QUADRANT 1 �6 REMOVE AND DISCARD EXISTING OVERHEAD DOOR, FRAME, TRACK, AND HARDWARE. C r REMOVE AND DISCARD EXISTING HOT WATER HEATER. C 8 REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL EXISTING WALL HUNG RESTROOM ACCESSORIES. C9 REMOVE AND DISCARD A PORTION OF THE EXISTING CURB TO ALLOW ACCESS TO NEW DOORS. D(eliq'° ip REMOVE AND DISCARD A PORTION OF EXISTING ASPHALT PAVING TO ALLOW FOR A NEW CONCRETE PAD ®DO OR LOCATIONS. 7 L = = = t 11 REMOVE EXISTING GYP. BD. CEILING. 12 REMO ED AND TO WALL. DISCARD EXISTING INSULATION FAST 13 REMOVE AND SALVAGE (FOR REINSTALLATION) EXISTING SMOKE DRAFT CURTIAN. 14 'REMOVE ALL L OORING AND ADHESIVE. CLEAN FLOOR F TOLIKE NEW APPEARANCE. T OI a MATCH LINE 1 EP 1 CiBR GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA. KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 AIORTENSON zh= Corstraction C n 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 0 - p�f— O cn �y C z (O —I Ili N O 5 O 10.4 co co ra N. ij w ,r IMEMENNIMMEMEMME REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE i1 -23 -99 PERMIT Sh°I DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN SHEET NUMBER A01.10 1/76/41 © GEORGE SURER, ASSOCWTES, INC. 1999 ■ - - INDICATES 1 HOUR RATED WALL INDICATES 2 HOUR RATED WALL CODE REVIEW PLAN GENERAL A.D.A. SIGNAGE LETTERS AND NUMBERS: 1. 1" MINIMUM LETTER HEIGHT. 2. WIDTH -TO- HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN 3:5 AND 1:1 3. STROKE -TO -WIDTH HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN 1:5 AND 1:10 4. CONTRAST CHARACTERS AND SYMBOL WITH BACKGROUND. 5. ° SANS SERIF CHARACTERS, UPPERCASE. RAISED AND RECESSED CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS: 1. LETTERS AND NUMBERS MINIMUM 1/32 2. RAISED SYMBOLS MINIMUM 5/8" TO MAXIMUM 2 HIGH. BRAILLE: 1. USE CONTRASTED GRADE 2 BRAILLE. DOTS SHALL BE 0.1 INCH ON CENTER IN EACH CELL 2. 0.2 INCH SPACE BETWEEN CELLS. 3. DOTS RAISED MINIMUM 0.025 INCH ABOVE BACKGROUND. PICTOGRAMS: 1. BORDER DIMENSION OF PICTOGRAM SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6" HIGH. 2. PICTOGRAMS SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY EQUIVALENT VERBAL DESCRIPTION DIRECTLY BELOW. REF: T- 24- 11178.5, ADA 4.30 NOTES 2 OCC. 2 OCC. •• REQUIRED E(IT 23 OCC. 10 OCC. ~ 4 OCC B l (u 2 OCC. REQUIRED EXIT )EY JLAN SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS BREAK ROOM WOMEN ADA COMPLIANT BRAILLE COPY ADA COMPLIANT BRAILLE COPY MEN - -8DA COMPLIANT BRAILLE COPY LATH UN. Fr TYPE "1": MOUNT AT +60" A.F.F. TO CENTERLINE OF SIGN, ADJASCENT TO STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR. TYPE "2 ": WOMENS' TOILET ROOM WALL SIGN WITH FEMALE PICTOGRAM, LETTERING, AND BRAILLE STATING "WOMEN ". MOUNT AT +60" A.F.F. TO CENTERLINE OF SIGN, ADJASCENT TO STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR. TYPE "3 ": MENS' TOILET ROOM WALL SIGN WITH MALE PICTOGRAM, LETTERING, AND BRAILLE STATING "MEN'. MOUNT AT +6D" A.F.F. TO CENTERLINE OF SIGN, ADJASCENT TO STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR. REF: ADA- 4.13(16), 4.30 REF: ADA- 4.13(16), 4.30 Design No. U411 Nonbearing Wall Rating - 2 Hr. Floor and Ceiling Runner - (Not Saloon) - 25 MSG (min) gob steel 1 in. high, return legs 2 -1/2 wide (min), attached to floor and cerling with fasteners 24 in. O.C. 1A, constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks As on alternate to Item 1 Seining Runner. - 25 MSG mm gaiv steel, width to accomidate stud, with 3 or 4 in. legs offset midpoint 1 -1/4 in. to aceomidate wall cladding thickness, attached to ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 m. O.C. The wall cladding shall overlap wallboard 1 -1/4 in. min. 2. Fire Trak Corp. Steel Studs - 2 -1/2 in. wide (mum), 1 -1/4 o. begs 3/8 in. return, formed of 25 MSG (min) gale steel max stud spacing 24 in. O.C. Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height Batts and Blankets• - (optional) - Mblerai wool or glass fiber bolts partially or completely fill- ing stud cavity. Fasten ch bolt to wallboard base layer with min 9/16 in. long staple. Use five staples for each 4 ft. piece. Drive one staple ii the center of each piece and a staple at each comer, approx 3 in. from edges. 4. See Batts and Blanket (BZJZ) categoty for names of manufacturers. Wallboard, Gypsum• - 5/8 in. thick, outer layer paper ar vinyl surfaced. (Laminated System) Wallboard applied vertically in two layers Inner layer attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 8 in. O.C. along vertical edges. and 12 in. O.C. in the field and outer layer laminated to inner Sayer with joint compound, applied with a notched spreader producing con- tinuous beads of compound about 3/8 un. in diameter. spaced not greater th 2 in. 0.C. Joints of laminated outer layer offset 12 in. from inner layer joints. Outer layer wallboard attached to floor and ceiling runner track with 1-5/8 n. long Type S steel screws spaced 12 O.C. Optional, (Direct Attodned System), Inn, layer attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel ews'spaced 16 in.. O.C. in the field old along the vertical edges., Outer layer attached to the studs ove the inner layer with 1 -5/8 n. long Type S steel screws spaced 16 in. O.C. in the field and along the verticd edges and 12 th_ O.C. to the floor and c. Ling runners. Joints of screw - attached outer layer offset fawn inner layer joints.: Joints of outer layer may be taped or untapped. Nome 3/32 in. thick gypsum veneer plaster may be applied to the entire surface of Classified veneer baseboard Joints reinforced. Boral. Gypsum Inc. - Type BG-C, D1063, DDG2 or ODNI. Canadian Gypsum Co., Ltd. - Types C, SCX, SHX. WRX Celotex Corp: - Type 1 or FRP. Domtar Gypsum - Type 4, 5 or 9 or C. Eagle- Gypsum Products - Type EG-C or EGX -11. Georgia - Pacific Corp. - Type Dry: GPFS -3, GPFS -6 or GPFS -C. James Hardie Gypsum - Type Fire X. National Gypsum Co. - Types FR, FSW, FSW -G, W 1 Pabco Gypsum Type c, PG-3, PG-5, PG-9 or PG-C. Republic Gypsum Co. - Type RG-C_ Standard Gypsum Corp. - Type SGC, SG-C err SGC -G. Temple- Inland Forest Products Corp. - Types T. TP -5, VPB -Type T. United States Gypsum Co. - Type AR, C, FCV, IP -X1, IP -X2, SCX, SHX, Weatherock, 4A WRC or WRX. Westroc Industries Ltd - Type Westroc Fceboard_ Wallboard, Gypsums - (As an alternate ti Item 4) - Nom 3/4 in. thick, installed as described in Item 4 with 1 -1/4 in. long Type S screws for inner layer and 2 -1/4 in. long Type S screws for outer layer. United Status Gypsum Co. - Type AR Bearing the UL Classification Marking Design No. U465 Nonbearing Wall Rating - 1 HR. ASV 1. Floor and celir ro - ( not shown) - Channel shaped runner, s 35/9 wide ( min. ) , 11/4 in. le formed from No. 25 M (min.) g al.. steel, attached to floor and ceP.inin g wiN faste spaced 24 in. OC max. 1A. Asa alternate to item 1 Ceiling Runner. - 25 MSG min. gale. steel width to a c comidate stud, with 3 or 4 in. legs offset at midpoint 5 /8 in. to accomodate wall cladding thickness.Attached to ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC. The wall Gadding shall overlap wallboard 1 in. min. Fire Trak Corp. Steel studs - Channel shaped, 3 /e in. wide (min.). 1 in. egs, 3 /6 in. folded back returns, Batts from No. 25 MSG (min.) gale. steel spaced 24 in. be m 3. Batts and Blankets - (optional) - Mineral wool or glass fiber bolts partially or completely filling cavity. See Botts and Blanket (BZJZ) tegory for names of Classified companies. Wallboard, Gypsum. - 5/8 in. thick, 4' wide, attached to steel studs and floor and ceiling track with 1 in. long, Type S self- tapping steel screws paced 8 in. o.o. along edges of board and 12 in. OC in field of the board. Joins oriented vertically and staggered on opposite sides of the assembly. When attached to item 6 (furring channels), wallboard is screw attached to furring channels with 1 in. long, type S steel screws spaced 12 in: OC. Boral Gypsum Inc - Type BG-C. Canadian. Gypsum Co., Ltd. - Types C, SCX, SHX, WRX. Oomtar Gypsum Ina - Type 5 or Eagle- Gypsum Products - Type EG-C. Georgia - Pacific Corp., Gypsum Div. - Type GPFS -6 or GPFS -C. National Gypsum Co. - Types FSK -G, FSW -G. Pabco Gysum Co. Type PG-C. Republic Gypsum Corp. - Type RG-C. Standard. Gypsum :Corp. - Type SG -C. Temple - Inland Forest. Products Corp. - Type 1P -5. United States. Gypsum Co. - Type AR, C, IP -X2, SCX, SHX, WRC or WRX. Westroc Industries Ltd. - Type Westroc Fireboard. 3 4A. Wallboard, Gypsum. - (As an alternate to Item 4) -Nom. /a in. th ick 4 ft. wide installed as described in Item 4 with screw length increased to 1 /4 in. United States Gypsum Co. - Type AR. 48. Wallboard, Gypsum. - (As an alternate to Items 4 and 4A) - 5 /9 in. thick installed as described in Item 4. Joint covering (Item 5) not required. United States Gypsum Co. - Weatherock 5. Joint Tape and Compound - Vinyl, dry or premixed joint compound, applied in two Coates to pints and screw heads; paper tape, 2 in. wide, embedded in first layer of compound over all joints. As an alternate, nominal 3/32 in. thick gypsum veneer plaster maybe applied to the entire surface of Classified veneer baseboard. Joints reinforced. 6. Furring Channel - (Optional -Not shown) - Resilient 25 MSG gale. steel furring channels spaced vertically max. 24 in. OC, flange portion attached to each intersecting stud with 1 /2 in. long type S -12 pan -head steel screws. aBearing the UL Classification Marking UL DESIGN W -L -1062 U.L. DESIGN W -L -7008 n METAL DUCT MINERAL WOOL BAIT INSULATION 2 LAP MIN FIRE STOPPING SEALANT ALL AROUND -BOTH SIDES UNINSUL.ATED STEEL PIPE, TUBINiG OR CONDUIT NOM. 4 IN. DIA. OR SMALLER 1HR FIRE RESISTIVE WALL SEE WALL TYPES, DWG A1.10 FIRESTOP PIPE PENETRATION E 4' FIRE STOPPING SEALANT ALL AROUND -BOTH SIDES FIRESTOP DUCT PENETRATION U.L. DESIGN W -L -4008 FILE f'OPY MIN 16 GA. GALV STEEL ANGLES ON BOTH SIDES ALL AROUND, LAP DUCT 2 MIN., WALL FACE 1" MIN. FASTEN W/ NO. 10 SHT. MTh. SCREWS ®6" O.C. AND AT ENDS 1HR FIRE RESISTIVE WALL SEE WALL TYPES, DWG A1.10 CO OF i6011'LA APPROVED M ,R 2320(0 DIN� 1 IN. DIAMIOND SHAPED an WIRE LATH OF 20 AWG . STEEL WI E OVER OPENING WITH 2" MIN. LAP AT WALL AROUND. PLASTIC COVERED ITUMESCENT PILLOWS. FILL PILLOW VOIDS WITH ITUMESCENT PUTTY. CABLE TRAY 8/ CABLES D I FIRESTOP DETAIL REVISION AIOr I OUR FIRE RESISTIVE L TYPES, D SEE L TYPS, DWG. A1.10 CiBlk I GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The C. 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 CO N CO CL C O N o y ..+ co L Z co .0 CI 7 ri j _j (O lumm REVISION , L RATED WALL REOIUIREMENTS INIMMEMMIMEMOMIN PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11 -23 -99 PERMTT SET' DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE SINAGE SCHEDULE U.L. DETAILS SHEET NUMBER A0.01 © GEORGE BARER, ASSOCKTES, INC. 1999 3/ " NOTE: 5 /8" WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO BE USED IN ROOM #103, #104, AND #105. WALL TYPE 1 SCALE: 3 /4 " =1' -0" NOTE: 5 /B" WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO BE USED IN ROOM # 103, # 104, AND # 105 . ® WALL TYPE SCALE: 3/4 " =1' -0" NOTE: 5 /e' WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. T BE USED IN ROOM # 103, #104, AND # 10 ' n WALL TYPE O 4 WALL TYPE SCALE: 3 /4 ° =E-0" 111? KEY PLAN TOP HO OF R WALL TO UNDE BE ANCED TO SIDE OF STRUCTURE. . REF 3 A g F OR SLI CONN CTION DETAIL P EILING. PER PLAN. 10 MIL POLY VAPOR BARRIER TAPE ALL SEAMS, TYP. EXISTING 5 TILTUP. 1 LAYER 5 / TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 3 20 GA. METAL STUDS 16" O.C. BRACE BACK TO WALL AT MIDSPAN 3 BATT INSUL. (R -11) EXISTING FLOOR SLAB [rJThNCHaREDbMR OP WALL - SIDE OF STRUCTURE . REF 8 A5.01 FOR SLIP CONN CTION DETAIL M i s i G—REFERENCE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR TYPE AND LOCATION 20 GA. 8° MIL. STUDS AT 16 O.C. 1 LAYER 5 /6" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. EACH SIDE FLOOR SLAB REF. U.L. DESIGN NO. U465 20 GA. 3 MTh. CHANNEL TO FORM DIAL. BRACE. ATTAC MID -POINT OF WALLS W/ MIN. OF 2 FASTENERS. (SPANS 14' -0 OR MORE) ACOUSTICAL INSUL. 4' -0" BOTH SIDES OF WALL. SEE FINISH SCHED. FOR CEILING TYPE 1 LAYER R /B" TYPE X GYP. BD. EACH SID 3 BAIT INSUL. 20 GA. 3 MN STUDS AT 16" O.C. TOP i9 ABOVE FINISH CEILING FLOOR SLAB EXTEND 2 LAYERS OF 5 / TYPE "X" GYP. BD A DISTANCE OF 4' -0" MIN. ON EACH SIDE 0 WALL. TOP OF WALL TO BE ANCHORED TO UNDER- SIDE OF STRUCTURE. REF 13/A5.01 R LI S C ONNECTION DETFOAIL CEIIVNG-REFERENCE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR TYPE AND LOCATION EXISTING MTh. STUDS 2 LAYERS 5 /S" TYPE GYP. BD. EACH SIDE FLOOR SLAB REF. U.L. DESIGN N0. U411 WALL CONSTRUCTION TO BE SIMILAR TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF U.L DESIGN N0. U.5 WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL. (NOT A CODE REQUIRED 1 HOUR WALL) NOTE: 5 /R T RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO BE USED IN WAER ROOM #103, #104, AND #105. WALL TYPE 91 " QU•IRANT CEILING - REFERENCE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR TYPE AND LOCATION 1 LAYER 5 /8" TYPE GYP. BD. ADDED TO EXISTING WALL SCALE: 3 /4 =1' -0 SCALE: 3 /4 " -1' -0" AFIRE RESISTANT SEALANT EXISTING WALL FLOOR SLAB EXISTING WALL NOTE: 5/e" WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO BE USED IN ROOM #103, #104, AND #105. n WALL TYPE TOP OF WALL TO BE ANCHORED TO UNDER- SIDE OF STRUCTURE. REF DETAIL 10/A5.01 SIM. FOF SLIP CONNECTION TOP OF WALL TO BE 6 "ABOVE S.AT. . CEILING (BRACE) EILING - REFERENCE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR TYPE AND LOCATION 1 AYER 5 /e TYPE GYP. BD. ONE SIDE 3 SOUND INSUL. 20 GA. 35 TL STUDS Ai 16" M O.C. FLOOR SLAB 5 /0" WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO BE USED IN ROOMS #103 AND #104 WALL TYPE Inr----- 70P OF TO TO BE ANCHORED WA TO UNDER- SIDE OF STRUCTURE. REF 14 &15 FOR SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL CEILING- REFERENCE FINISH SCHLE FOR TYPE AND LOCA 20 1'6'' " 8 MIL STUDS AT O.C. 1 LAYER /a" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. EACH SIDE FLOOR SLAB I 0 0 0 FLOOR PLAN - QUADRANT 2 L NORTH PLAN � q-oi CONSTRUCTION LEGEND NEW WALL AND DOOR z NEW EXTERIOR MASONRY WALL INFILL CJ REFERS TO CONTROL JOINT. REF DWG 4 AND 5/A5.01 FOR DETAILS. O WINDOW TYPE REF. SHT. A5.00. FOR WINDOW ELEVATIONS A REPRESENTS ACTIVE DOOR IN DOUBLE DOOR, 1Q2 NEW 0 0 0 0 0 0 CONC. CURB TO FORM LANDSCAPE BED. .10 Al: FLOOR PLAN - QUADRANT 1 L ,q PAN LEARANCE FROM N O H CHAINLI CLEARANCE FROM CONSTRUCTION NOTES �1 INFILL EXISTING 3' -4" WIDE X 7' -2" HIGH OPENING IN EXISTING WALL WITH METAL STUDS AND TWO AYERS OF GYP. BD. (EA. SIDE) TO MATCH EXISTING THICKNESS. 2❑ IWILL EXISTING 20' -0" WIDE X 17' -10" HIGH OPENING IN EXISTING WALL WITH METAL STUDS AND TWO LAYERS OF CYR BD. (EA. SIDE) TO MATCH EXISTING THICKNESS. INSTALL FLOOR MOUNTED 2' -O" x 2' -0" MOP SIN2 AND MOP BROOM:, HOLDERn17ILTTY SHELF. ® PROVIDE NEW STEEL STAIR PER DETAIL 2/A5.00. E5 HOUSEKEEPING PAD FOR SWITCHGEAR. REFER TO DETAL 1 /53.10. HOUSEKEEPING PAD FOR HVAC UNITS. REFER TO DETAIL 1 /53.10 ❑7 ROOF ADDER WITH ENCLOSURE- REFER TO DWG 6/A5.00 FOR DETAIL © REINSTALL EXISTING METAL SMOKE DRAFT CURTIANAO ALLOW FOR INSTALATION OF STRUCTURAL UPGRADE. Q9 CEDAR SCREENWALL 14' -0 HIGH B LONG. POSTS SPACED 4' -0" MAX. CONC. FOUNDATION FOR POSTS 18 D 'SST EMBEDDED 5' -0" BELOW GRADE. POST SIZE TO BE 8x8. MAINTAIN 5' -0" CLEARANCE FROM GEN R +TOR. LINK FE LING W ACCESS GATE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES A. FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH CITY CODE OFFICIAL. B. EXIT DOORS SHALL HAVE ONLY ONE LOCKING OR LATCHING DEVICE, WHICH MUST BE READILY OPENABLE FROM EGRESS SIDE OF DOOR WITHOUT. THE USE OF A.KEY OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE. C. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY W/ THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT. THE AVATORIES AND WATER CLOSETS AS WELL AS THE GRAB BARS, TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS, AND ALL OTHER MISC. TOILET. ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED SHALL COMPLY W ALL A.D.A. UIREMENTS RE CES / D INCLUDING MOUNTING HEIGHTS, LOCATIONS AND CLEARANCES. D. ALL DOORS SHALL BE MIN. 36" WIDE W/ LEVER TYPE OPERATING HARDWARE IN COMPLIANCE W/ THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT. ALL NEW DOOR CLOSERS SHALL REQUIRE MAX. 5 Ibf OPENING FORCE AND SHALL COMPLY W/ THE SWEEP PERIOD REQUIREMENTS OF A.D.A. E. REFER TO ENLARGED PAN DWG A5.00 FOR ADDITIONAL PAN DIMENSIONS. F. DIMENSIONS ARE FACE OF MASONRY WALL TO FINISH WALL OR FINISHED WALL TO FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. G. REFER TO DWG. A0.01 FOR TYPICAL FIRE STOP PENETRATION DETAILS H. REFER TO DWG A0.01 & THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOM SIGNAGE REQ. 11 I. REFER TO DETAIL 4 AND 5/A5.01 FOR INTER: GYP. BD. CONTROL JOINT DETAIL MAXIMUM SPACING TO NOT EXCEED 30' -0 ". J. FIRE RATED SEALANT TO BE USED AT ALL GYP. BD. TO EXISTING WOOD COLUMN INTERSECTIONS. CiBlk GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers o Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The ConsirUUon CFgaltaaaon 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH INNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (012) 522 -2100 fi AR :L ?"11':I INIMENEMMEMMEMINi REVISION A REVISION 1 - 01.20.00 L REVISION 2 - 01.26.00 03 - RATED 06 W ALL REQUIREMENTS MiraMEMMra PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 1-99 P -23 E RMIT SET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE FLOOR PLAN SHEET NUMBER A1.1O © GEORGE BUTLER. ASSOCWIES, INC. 1999 KEY PLAN O 0 0 0 0 0 0 o ' MATCH �� ■ ■ ■ ■g uuu■■ ■ ■•■ ■ ■ REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR p NEW CONDENSERS. • — • • • • — • ■ .G I 1 • .G • • • 1•11•1111•110 WALKWAY PADS, TYP. A .00 .00 ROOF PLAN - QUADRANT 2 0 0 0 0 10 •i • CY MATCH LIN E n ROOF PLAN - QUADRANT 1 L A A2.00 A .00 SCALE : 1/8` = 1 -0' N WAN T PLAN 1) TT 0-1 y WAY PADS. TYP UIU•V•IMMIMMIPMM FUUUIII UMMPHIIIIIII1■.,IIIIIII, CONDENSERS INFILL EXISTING EXHAUST FAN OPENING. PATCH AND REPAIR ROOFING PER MFR. RECCOMENDATIONS. COORDINATE W/ BUILDING OWNER FOR ROOFING MATERIAL TYPE. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. FOR NEW CONDENSERS. WALKWAY PADS, TYP. WALKWAY PADS, TYP. EXHAUST FAN EXISTING SMOKE AND HEAT VENT. --- . MOKE NG S HEAT VENT. EXISTT VEING NT SMOKE AND //-- HEA —AIR HANDLING UNIT INFILL EXISTING EXHAUST FAN OPENING. PATCH AND REPAIR ROOFING PER MFR. RECCOMENDATIONS. COORDINATE W/ BUILDING OWNER FOR ROOFING MATERIAL TYPE. INFILL EXISTING EXHAUST FAN OPENING. PATCH AND REPAIR RIG R RECCOM ROOFING N FING PER MF MATER BUILDING . OWNE ROOFING MATERIAL TYPE. NS. OR E ( MATCH LINE LINE : cr ' Ci1YN -W ,, NOV 3 1999 .1,,II7 CENTER GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORI ENSOK The Construction Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 L612) 522 -2100 0- mc co a r C CO t o to J W O 5 N ca co r N REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11-23 -99 PERl BET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE ROOF PLAN SHEET NUMBER A2.00 © GEORGE BUTLER, ASSOCWTES. INC. 1999 PROVIDE REMOVABLE GUARDRAIL 1 STEEL TUBE 1/ SOLID STEEL SQUARE CHANNEL 3P" OSTS SQ. . TUBE STEEL 1/2 "0 ANCHOR BOLTS EACH SIDE OF POST SIDE OF POST GROUT ri STAIR ELEVATION A .DGSD a- 0" SQ. TUBE STEEL POSTS. 1 � 2"0 ANCHOR BOLTS ACH SIDE OF POST 1" GROUT PER SHT. S3.10. NEW CONC. FOOTING GRADE T ° 700 ROOF HATCH /LADDER SECTION A .10 NEW CONC. LANDING PER SHT 5310 STAIR CONSTRUCTION 12" STEEL CHANNEL FRAME W/ OPEN GRATING STAIR TREADS AND LANDING. 1 DIA. PIPERAILS AND 1 /2" VERTICALS (PAINTED). .CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY GRADE ELEVATIONS AT EACH STAIR BASE PRIOR TO FABRICATION STAIRS TO HAVE EQUAL RISERS 1 STEEL TUBE 1 /2 SOLID STEEL SQUARE 3/4 "0 EXP. ANCHOR EA. SIDE 3' 0 "z 2' -6" ROOF HATCH ON 12" HIGH PREFABRICATED CURB WITH INTEGRAL CAP tFLASHING. PULL HANDLES FOR MANUAL OPERATION FROM INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR. LOCKABLE FROM INTERIOR. PROVIDE LADDER RAIL EXTENSION ACCESSORY. EXISTING ROOF MEMBRANE. 3"x3 "z ANGLE FRAME ATTACHED TO NEW 2z4 WOOD FRAMING 'N/ # 9 METAL TO WOOD FASTENERS W/ 1 -1/2" EMBED. EXISTING WOOD FRAMING NOTE: PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL ASSOCIATED WITH LADDER AND CAGE. COLOR TO MATCH WALLS CAGE SHALL NOT EXTEND MORE THAN 28" OR LESS THAN 27" FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE RUNGS OF THE LADDER. THE INSIDE SHALL BE CLEAR OF PROJECTIONS VERTICAL BARS OF THE CAGE ARE TO BE SPACED NOT MORE THAN 9" CENTER TO CENTER HOOPS SHALL BE SPACED NOT MORE THAN —0" O.C. TOP AND BOTTOM HOOPS SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 3" WIDE ATTACH CAGE SUPPORTS TO WALL (4) SUPPORTS MIN. EQUALLY SPACED. PROVIDE BLOCKING ® WALL. CAGE SHALL EXTEND DOWN THE LADDER TO A POINT NOT LESS THAN 7' -0" AND NOT MORE THAN 8' -0" ABOVE THE BASE OF THE LADDER. THE BOTTOM SECTION MUST BE FLARED NOT LESS THAN 4" (PAINT TO MATCH WALLS) PROVIDE FIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING GYP. BOARD /METAL STUD WALL PER FLOOR PLAN, SHT. A1.10. 3 "x /g SIDE RAILS WITH 3 / 4 " DIA. RUNGS EQ. SPACED 18" WIDE) (PAINTED TO MATCH WALLS) 3 "z3 "0/4" ANGLE WELDED TO .EACH SIDE OF RAIL ANCHOR TO SLAB W/ EXPANSION ANCHORS AS REVD. TYPICAL TOILET ACCESSORY MOUNTING HGTS. PL1: NEVAMAR 5 -2 -867 ,RITE TEXTURED PL2 NEVAMAR AL -3-2T DREAMY ALLUSION TEXTURED PL3: NEVAMAR 5-3 -647 BLUE MOON TEXTURED A .,1 0 A .OD CA ELEVATION GYP. BD. SOFFIT ADJUSTABLE SHELF STANDARDS & CLIPS PROVIDE FIRE RATED SOLID WOOD BLOCKING IN WALL AS REM,. FACE OF GYP. WALL BD. CAULK COUNTERTOP TO PARTITION TYP. 4" BACKSPLASH PROVIDE 1z FIRE RATED SOLID WOOD BLOCKING AT TWO LOCATIONS FOP. CART. INSTALLATION 1/4 PLYWOOD W/ MELAMINE FINISH, TYP.— ADJUSTABLE SHELF STANDARDS & CLIPS 2 X FIRE RATED SOILD SOLID WOOD BLOCKING, 1W. A .00 .00 CABINET SECTION l�q o 4-21 CONSTRUCTION NOTES El PLASTIC LAMINATED COUNTERTOP AND BACK— SPLASH ON 3 / 4 " PARTICLEBOARD OZ PLASTIC LAIR. COVERED BASE CABINET WI ADJ. SHELVES E3 PLASTIC LAM. COVERED WALL CABINET W/ ADJ. SHELVES ® 4" BASE PER FINISH SCHEDULE ES CAULK COUNTERTOP TO PARTITION, TYPICAL AT BACK © SCRND AULK BASE CABINET IBE A AND C COUNTERTOP TO PARTITION, TYP. E7 SPACE FOR REFRIDGERATOR AD )J3 /SHELA AHO SHELVES W /P.L cl ON ALL SURFACES - 3 /4" PARTICLEBOARD REVEAL OVERLAY CABINET CONST. W/ PLAS. LAM. ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES .& MELAMINE ON ALL INTERIOR SURFACES EXCEPT DOORS SHALL HAVE PLAS. LAM. AT ALL FACES AND EDGES — 3 /4" PARTICLEBOARD SHELF W/PLAS. LAM. ON ALL SURFACES 4" RESIL COVE BASE PL1: NEVAMAR 5 -2 -867 JUTE TEXTURED PL2 NEVAMAR AL -3-7 DREAMY�ALLUSION TEXTURED PL3: NEVAR — 3-64. BLUE MO TEXTUR 7 ED —WIRE DOOR PULL - 3 /4" PARTICLEBOARD COUNTERTOP W/ SOLID EDGE COVER TOP & EDGE W/ PLASTIC LAMINATE — WIRE DOOR PULLS, TYP. AT DOORS AND DRAWERS TYPICAL GUARD RAIL DETAIL A .r0 A .00 SCALE : 1 = 1' -7' DD ENLARGED STAIR PLAN A .10 A GENERAL NOTES: 8'-11'4" REFER TO TYPICAL GUARDRAIL DETAIL 3/A5.00 FOR GUARDRAIL/ HANDRAIL SIGN. PROVIDE REMOVABLE GUARDRAIL. 1 DIAMETER STEEL PIPE GUARDRAIL /HANDRAIL (PAINTED) ALL EDGES TO HAVE A MIN. i /B " RADIUS. • -3:, 7 -11" 1. REFER TO SHEET A1.10 FOR ADDITIONAL WALL TYPES. 2. ALL FAUCET HANDLES TO BE LEVER OPERATED; PUSH TYPES 1 DIAMETER STE HANDRAIL (PAINTED ). ALL EDGES TO HAVE A MIN 1 /4" RADIUS. WELD PIPE SLEEVES TO STEEL CHANNEL ® REMOVABLE GUARDRAIL LOCATIONS. 1 / 1 " SQUAR` STEEL BALUSTER (PAINTED). ALL EDGES TO HAVE A MIN 1 /4" RADIUS. 12" STEEL CHANNEL STEEL TREAD 8 . -0 " CONSTRUCTION NOTES E INSTALL RECESSED COMBINATION PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/ WASTE RECEPTACLE TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.27. ❑2 INSTALL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.16.6. ❑3 INSTALL GRAB BARS TO COMPLY WITH ADA AG SECTION 4.17.6. ® INSTALL LIQUID TANK TYPE SOAP DISPENSER TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.27. ❑6 INSTALL SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.27.3. M. INSTALL SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.27.3. Ej INSTALL ACCESIBLE FLUSH VALVE TYPE WATER CLOSET TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.16. E INSTALL SIGN AGE TO COMPLY WITH ADA AG SECTION 4.30. E9 INSTALL SEAT —COVER DISPENSER. 10 INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL MIRROR UNIT 2' -0" WIDE, TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.19.6. 11 INSTALL DRINKING FOUNTIAN, TO COMPLY WITH ADAAG SECTION 4.15. of ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN NOV 3 0 jg `' A .10 A .00 SCALE : 1/4" = PERMIT CENTER GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The C. LS•dies OrgBWIZIZBOn 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 P KENT PEARS, REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11-23 -99 PERMTT SET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TALE ENLARGED PLANS SHEET NUMBER A5.00 © GEORGE BUTLER. ASSOCIATES. INC. 1999 co (- SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL A .10 EXISTING 1/2" PLYWOOD DECKING EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING. .tom 5.01 SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL 2 LAYERS 5 /8" TYPE 'X' GYP. AD.(EXISTING) ON EXISTING 8" MIL. STUDS A .10 A .01 SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL , / C EXISTING INSULATION. EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING. ` /e" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 6" MTL STUDS 20GA. 3 RUNNER TRACK. 20GA. 35/8" METAL STUDS. S.A.T.T. P ik II FIN. SCHED. —s Ilk 2 — LAYERS OF 5 /8" TYPE "X" 5 / TYPE " %" GYP. GYP. BD.; PAINTED. BD., PAINTED. CONT. ELASTOMERIC SEALANT, TYP. (rep.) THREADED ROD PER SHEET S1.10. METAL TRIM., TYP. STEEL BEAM PER SHEET S1.10. 20GA. 3 5 / 8 M E T A L S TUDS 2' -0" O.C. FASTENED TO STEEL BEAM. 5 /8 TYPE 'X' ,GYP. BD. ATTACHED 20 GA. 3 RUNNER TRACK FASTENED TO EXISTING 2X4 16" O.C. ANCHOR FIRE IRAK— SHADOWLINE TO FURRING CHANNEL W/ METAL FASTENER. N/ g TYPE 'X' GYP B8. ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK— . SHAUOWLINE EXISTING 1 /2" PLYWOOD DECKING. EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING REMOVE INSULATION ANC BOTTOM OF THE EXISTING PLYWOOD. FIRE CAULK JOINT BETWEEN GYP. BD. AND PLYWOOD. REPLACE INSULATION AS NEEDED. NEW PURLIN PER SHEET S1.10. 2 LAYERS 5 /e" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED TO FURRING CHANNELS. MINERAL WOOL BATT FIRESAFING INSULATION 2 LAYERS 5 /8" TYPE X' GYP. BD. ON EXISTING 8" MTL STUDS. GYP. BD. TO BE FASTENED ACCORDING TO U411. NEW BUS DUCT REFER TO SHEET SLID FOR SUPPORT DETAILS. A.10 A .Dt SOFFIT DETAIL @ BUSDUCT LOCATIONS .,0 .D, Cr SCALE 1 COLUMN FURRING DETAIL 5 TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 6° MTL STUDS SLIP - CONNECTION DETAIL scALE„ 125' -6" DOT. OF EXT. STRUCTURE NEW STEEL CHANNEL FASTENED TO EXISTING STRUCTURE, REFER TO SHEET 51.10 FOR CHANNEL SIZE. 112 STEEL ANGLE BOTTOM OF EXISTING STRUCTURE. ANCHOR FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK W/ METAL FASTENER 5 /e TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK—SHADOWLINE EXISTING HEAVY TIMBER FRAME CONSTRUCTION. NEW STEEL CHANNEL FASTENED TO EXISTING STRUCTURE, REFER TO SHEET 51.10 FOR CHANNEL SIZE. NEW 8 20 GA. METAL STUDS FASTENED TO EXISTING TILT —UP CONC. WALL W/ 8" BAT -INSUL 10 MIL POLY VAPOR BARRIER, TAPE ALL SEAMS. 5 /8" TYPE ° X" GYP. BD. FASTENED TO METAL STUDS NEW 8 20 GA. METAL STUDS FASTENED TO EXISTING TILT —UP CONC. WALL W/ 8" BATT INSUL REFER TO DETAIL 4/A6.00 FOR DOE, HEAD DETAIL REFER TO DETAIL 7/A6.00 FOP DOOR SILL DETAIL. ( 19 - 1-1 ) �0 S WALL SECTION AT DOOR OPENINGS TYPICAL ® 3 LOCATIONS o SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL A).1.0.k..5.01 SCALE : 1 1/2" = i' -0" OVA t" A�'Q 01 B W INDOW ' HEAD DETAIL (NOTE: SILL SIMILAR ' 101/4 WINDOW JAMB DETAIL EXISTING 1 /2" PLYWOOD DECKING REMOVE INSULATION AND EXTEND GYP. BD. TO THE BOTTOM OF THE EXISTING PLYWOOD. FIRE CAULK JOINT BETWEEN GYP. BD. AND PLYWOOD. REPLACE INSULATION AS NEEDED. ANCHOR FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE TO EXISTING 2X4 FRAMING W/ METAL FASTENER. 5 /9" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE 5 /9" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 6 MTL STUDS DOUBLE STUD ® JAMB. 5 /B" TYPE "I' GYP. BD. EA. SIDE ON 6 MIL STUDS CONT. SEALANT ALL SIDES WINDOW STOP 1 /a WIRE GLASS. GYP. BD. CONTROL JOINT W/ REMOVABLE TAPE & PERFORATED FLANGES BOTH SIDES THERMAFIBER SAFE COMPRESSED TO FILL OPENING ®1 —HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE WALL CONSTRUCTION ONLY. 5 /9" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. EACH SIDE ON MIL. STUDS PER WALL TYPES SHT. A1.10. NOTE: CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS PER FLOOR PLAN SHT. A1.10: 30' -0" O.C. MAX. (7\ 1A5.A1 GYP. BD. CONTROL JOINT DETAIL A .1 SCALE : 3 CONTROL JOINT DETAIL SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL SCALE : 3'" = 1' -0" � I IIII 111 (7 SLIP CONNECTION DETAIL EXISTING WOOD COLUMN AND BASE PLATE. DEMISING WALL, REFER TO SHT. A1.10 FOR WALLTYPES A .10 i COLUMN D FURRING DETAIL EXISTING 5 /2" TILT —UP WALL INSIDE FACE OF WALL 5 /8" GYP. BD. ON MTL STUDS PER WALL TYPES SHT. A1.10. GYP. BD. CONTROL JOINT WHERE INDICATED — SEE SHT. A1.10 FOR LOCATIONS ANCHOR FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE TO UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING STRUCTURE. NOTE: CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS PER FLOOR PLAN SHE ALTO; 30' -0" O.C. Max. 5 /1" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE 5 /9 TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 20 GA. 3 Mm. STUDS N 16" O.C. 3 BATT INSULATION (R -12) CONT. 10 MIL. VAPOR BARRIER TAPE AL SEAMS, TYP. BOTTOM OF EXISTING STRUCTURE. ANCHOR FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK W/ METAL FASTENER 2 LAYERS 5 /8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD.. ATTACHED TO FIRE TRAK— SHADOWLINE 2 LAYERS 5 /9 TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ON 8" MTL STUDS 5 /8" TYPE 'X' GYP RD. ON 20 GA. 3 METAL STUDS. TOP OF STUDS ®12 -0" A.F.F. --- -NEW STEEL COLUMN, REFER TO SHT. 51.10 METAL TRIM, TYP. ALL CORNERS F1AR 5 TO e p, 0,1.E olstaa GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRNE LEND., KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The Construction Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NOR I1 MINNEAPDUS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 LAD O CV W " C174 8 0 O Z Q ftra4 ui V N � REVISION A REVISION 1 — 01.20.00 Q RATED -06 —WALL 00 REQIUIREMENTS 03 PROJECT NUMBER 8952.00 DATE 09-30-99 PERMIT SET 10 -08 -99 MD SET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE INTERIOR DETAILS SHEET NUMBER A5.01 © GEORGE IGSR , ASSOCIATES. INC. 1999 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE BASE A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 3 WALLS CLG. B - A 9' -0" A 9'-0" A 9' -0" A 9' -0" A 9 A IV -6" C 1E -6" C 1E -6" C 11' -6" 3 3 3 A NO. NAME FLOOR FINISHES 1. PAINTED CONCRETE 2. RESILIENT TILE 3. SHEET VINYL 4. CARPET 5. HIGH BUILD EPDXY ON FLOOR BASE FINISHES A. 4" HIGH RUBBER B. 5" COVED SHEET VINYL TYPICAL DOOR LOCATION PLAN LL O LL 101 VESTIBULE 102 STAGING AREA 103 MEN'S RESTROOM 104 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 105 JANITORS CLOSET 2 106 BREAK ROOM 2 107 OPEN OFFICE 4 108 CORRIDOR 2 109 ELECTRICAL ROOM 110 SWITCH ROOM 2 111 D.C. PCWER ROOM 5 112 TRANSMISSION ROOM 2 113 CO- LOCATE 114 CORRIDOR 2 2 WALL FINISHES 1. SEMI -GLOSS ENAMEL PAINT OVER GYPSUM BOARD 2. SEMI -GLOSS ENAMEL PAINT OVER WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD WITH WAINSCOTING OF SEMI -RIGID SHEET WALL COVERING TO 4' -0 ". SEE SPECS, SECTION 10265. 3. EGGSHELL ENAMEL PAINT OVER GYPSUM BOARD 4. SEMI -GLOSS ENAMEL PAINT OVER PLYWOOD CEILING FINISHES A. 2'x4' LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING B. SEMI -GLOSS ENAMEL OVER EXPOSED STRUCTURE C. 2'x4' LAY -IN VINYL - PLASTIC COATED ACOUSTICAL CEILING FRAME TYPES REF. 2 ".1 REF.. DOOR 2" DOOR SCHEDULE �N SCHEDUL 18 GAUGE PAINTED 18 GAUGE PA NTED 16 GAUGE KNOCK HOLLOW METAL FRAME HOLLOW METAL FRAME F HOLLOW DETAL FRRAA ME (PAINTED) 0 0 O WINDOW FRAME TYPES FIN. FLOOR HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAME WITH 14" WIRE GLASS O 16 GAUGE KNOCK DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAME (PAINTED) REMARKS 1. ® CEILING TILE 2.24" X 24" TWO COLOR TILE PATTERN 3.WALL FINISH #2 ON WALL MOUNTED PLYWOOD PANELS 4.WINDOW BLINDS ON ALL EXTERIOR WINDOWS AND DOORS 00 DOOR SCHEDULE NO. FIRST FLOOR 101 -A 101 -B 102 -A 102 -8 103 -A 104 -A 05 -A 106 -A 107 -A 109 -A 09 -8 110 -A 11 -A 112 -A 113 -A 114 -A -B ROOF HATCH 3' -0 "x 7' -0 PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 3' -O-A 7' -0 "x 1 3' -0"• 7' -0 3/4" PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 1 3' -0 "x 7' -0 3' -0 "x 7 -0 1 3/ 7' -O "x 13/ 7' -0 "x 1 3 /4 3 /4 DOOR TYPES 3/ 3 PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 1 PR. 3' -0"x 8' -0 "x 1 PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 1 PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 1 PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 1 PR. 3' -0 "x 8' -0 "x 1 MATERIAL LEGEND HM. - HOLLOW METAL WD. - WOOD MFR. - PER MANUFACTURER 2/A6.00 2/A6.00 2/A6.00 2/A6.00 2/A6.00 2/A6.00 3/A6,00 4/A6.00 2/A6.00 2/A6.00 MFR. MFR. 5/A6.00 8 /A6.00 6 /A6.00 6 /A6.00 6 /A6.00 6/A6.00 6/A6.00 8 /A6.00 8 /A6.00 7/A6.00 7/A6.00 7/A6.00 6 /A6.00 5/A6.00 7/A6.00 MFR. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MFR. HM. HM. HM. PM HM HM HM HM MFR A A A A A A FR HM HM HM HM HM HM. HM. HM. HM. HM. MFR. lJ� 3/A6.00 2/A6.00 4/A6.00 5/A6.00 1 2/A6.00 6 /A6.00 5 4 5 6 10 10 10 1 REMARKS 1. UL LABEL 20 MIN. DOOR AND FRAME 2. UL LABEL 3 /4 HR. DOOR AND FRAME 3. INSULATED DOOR 4. PROVIDE POWER TO DOORS FOR POWER CARD ACCESS SECURITY SYSTEM 5. PROVIDE KNOCK BOX PER FIRE MARSHALS' SPECIFICATIONS. 6 PROVIDE POWER FOR CONTACT. 3,4,5. 3,6 2. NOTES: 1. EXIT DOORS SHALL BE OPENABLE FROM THE INSIDE WITHOUT THE U. OF A KEY, SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT. 2. ALL DOORS (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) SHALL. HAVE LEVER- OPERATED HARDWARE. 3. DOOR OPENING FORCE SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI A117.86, SECTION 4.13.11. 04 n DOOR SILL DETAIL A6:�AA .00 SCALE FLOORING PER FINISH SCHEDULE n DOOR SILL DETAIL A6. 0 A .00 SCALE : 3" = 1' -0' FLOORING PER FINISH SCHEDULE D DG DOOR SILL DETAIL A D H.M. FRAME BEYOND DOOR PER SCHEDULE RESILIENT CARPET REDUCER STRIP FLOORNG PER FINISH I SCHEDULE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB H.M. FRAME BEYOND DOOR PER SCHEDULE AUTOM ATIC DOOR BOTT 3" WIDE ALUMINUM SADDLE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB H.M. FRAME BEYOND DOOR PER SCHEDULE 5" WIDE ALUMINUM THRESHOLD IN BED OF SEALANT SET EXISTING INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB .00 .00 DOOR SILL DETAIL A SEALANT ALL AROUND - 30TH SIDES H.M. FRAME BEYOND DOOR PER SCHEDULE TRANSITION STRIP FLOORING PER I! FINISH SCHEDULE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB PRESSURE TREATED WOOD NAILER. ATTACH TO MTh. STUDS REFER TO WAL TYPES SHEET A1.10 FOR WALL CONSTRUCTION DOOR JAMB DETAIL A6 A . 00 SCALE : 3" = 1' -0" 31/ ACOUSTICAL I NSULATION WHERE INDICATED CONT. SEALANT ALL AROUND BOTH SIDES NOTE: 5 /8" WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. IN ROOM #105. A6 0 A .DD DOOR JAMB DETAIL CONT. SEALANT ALL AROUND BOTH SIDES EXTERIOR FACE OF WALL BEYOND ALUMINUM DOOR SWEEP WITH DRIP EXPANSION T• MAT. W/ CAP & CONT. 1 /2" SEALANT ADJO TO EXTERI ACENT OR CON TO D OR . LANDING COMPLY TO ADAAG. / SLOPE NOT TO EXCEED 2% IN BOTH DIRECTIONS METAL TRIM 5 4," TYPE .'5 " GYP. ST. ON 3 METAL STUDS, EXTEND TO STRUCTURE. 6" DOUBLE STUD BOX BEAM HEADER. 1 / 4 " SEALANT JOINT GROUT HEAD FULL, TYP. KNOCK DOWN H.M. FRAME AND DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE,SHT. A6.00. rr DOOR HEAD DETAIL A6. SCALE : 3" = 1 EXISTING 5 TILT -UP CONC. CONT. SEALANT ALL AROUND GROUT JAMB FULL, TYP. KNOCK DOWN H.M. FRAME AND DOOR EXPANDABLE MASONRY ANCHORS (3) PER JAMB 1 /4" SEALANT JOINT 5 / TYPE "X "GYP. BD ON STEEL CHANNEL. STEEL CHANNEL REFER TO SHEET 51.10. 5 / TYPEAT YP. BD. 0N3 TUDS. 5 /B TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE OF 6" MTh. MTh STUDS .6" O.C. ANCHORS (3) PER JAMB DOUBLE STUD ® JAMB TO BE FASTENED TO BOTH SIDES OF RUNNER TRACK DOOR PER SCHEDULE FRAME PER SCHEDULE (NOTE: HEAD SIMILAR) 3 SOUND INSULATION WHERE INDICATED 5 /B" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE OF 3 NI, STUDS 16 "O.C. DOUBLE STUD ® JAMB TO BE FASTENED TO BOTH SIDES OF RUNNER TRACK ANCHORS (3) PER JAMB DOOR PER SCHEDULE FRAME PER SCHEDULE NOTE: 5 /8" WATER RESISTANT GYP. BD. IN ROOM #103, AND #104. NOV 3 U 199.; 1 DOOR JAMB DETAIL A64..1115.00 PERMIT C (NOTE: HEAD SIMILAR) EBP GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The Co'.D "cEToA GJ at oi: 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 Con REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE PE SET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE DOOR SCHEDULE ROOM SCHEDULE DOOR DETAILS SHEET NUMBER A6.00 © . GEORGE BUTLER, ASSOCWIB, INC. 1999 CONSTRUCTION LEGEND NEW WALL AND DOOR 1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE A GRID PER FINISH SCHEDULE, SHT. A6.00 MECH. DIFFUSER LEGEND z LIGHTING LEGEND I><1 NOTE: MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN FOR COORDINTION ONLY. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED KEY PLAN SUPPLY DIFFUSER RETURN DIFFUSER SUPPLY DIFFUSER AND AIR FLOW LIGHT FIXTURE PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS LIGHT FIXTURE PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS O O a a ,C F.9 • 57-8 • • 0' -0 ■■■.om■■r■■I C . °C ID .R.- I C C A Al A C1 Ae A Ae Flog ■ ■■■ A I mo r_ ' A A qq ti ■T_I1_ ®mu LINE i■ (I■�� ■ ■ ■ � ■ ■■ MATCH LINE c�tr 111111111111111111 A A A A A A a { I OII! Ii I1EE__M___I;_IEll A .10 2 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - QUADRANT 2 h,774 PLA a a a A .1710 SCALE t /5' = t' -0 e";4 ■�F_�I1•®L■ LINE 1 1■� ■'IT IIII ----- 1111111 y'ff ` " ■i ii ■ ■11� ■ ■111•111111__T■ IDIMIUMMEMI MI MANI ING AREA I 102 D 57' -8 /1" VESTIBULE 101 I (FIELD VERIFY) REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - QUADRANT 1 (, NoNTn PLAN A 1 __ - - -- I��F_� MI E� _ ®EM_I Ili11 MEM __==.11111111.1.1111 ==.11111111.1.1111 I di1 ■I■: ■_�_ ■�M■■ _ - - - - -_ _I � ® __ ®_- I1�__®M_ i _ =-_ ______�_� 1 I ■ ■■■ IIIIM ■ ■ ■■ .__ •__ ___�-.1 :��_ N i u iuuu uul u �__I!�� I I ■1_111 1.1_ +1 .T_ ■■■■■ ■■■ I ■__� _- • 1, ■)FI_�_I%EM_IIti� _ ENIMIDF 1 I PJIiI1 i TiiC ... �I k 1 I ■_ IEEE :1111■■ i■■ !! !! i ■®■ ma. ,........ ------ II m ■■■■■ __pm :____ 'ii h ■B h ■ ■n ■_ ■■�I ■■ 'MM ill h i ■ '� ■ Ell -m=m- •••• ••iu ■■ ■■I 6 0' -0 • N CITYOF on, NOV 3 0 1999 ERMIT CENTER i GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 - 0400 MORTENSON I The i.'onsau t oT Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (6121 522-2110 REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11 -23-99 PER2u"T SET DESIGNED ARK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SHEET NUMBER A9.10 rr /2t19y © GEORGE BUILER, ASSOCIATES, INC. 1999 KEY PLAN NoR PLAN " 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 57-8 1' -2 CO– LOCATE TRANSMISSION —..- ROOM II 1 2 FLOOR PLAN - QUADRANT 2 L Al ]EQUI 6 0' - , z P'+ ', MATCH LINE ccr 1 M E N T 0 0 0 10 D°19 otai 60' -0 /A" N I � FLOOR PLAN - QUADRANT 1 L - N PLAN � 57' -8 (FIELD VERIFY) AYOUT FOR COIRD ONLY NOV 3 0 7999 EBP, GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA. KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The Ctmo cs., ien Orgen&ad67G 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS. MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11 -23 -99 PERMIT' SEP DESIGNED AIE REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE FLOOR PLAN SHEET NUMBER A10.10 0 GEORGE BUTLER, lSSOCNIES. INC. 1999 z [1. A16 0 A16 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN PROPERTY LINE VACANT SPACE TO BE __ LEASED IN THE FUTURE 94' -10" REFER TO ELECTRICAL SITEPLAN FOR GENERATOR LOCATION. CURB LINE 430' -0" ASPHALT PAVING 274' -7 21 PROPERTY LINE VACANT SPACE TO BE LEASED IN THE FUTURE z wo fn I 5' —O" ASPHALT PAVING DISTANCE TO NEXT BUILDING) = 73' -0" NOV 3 0 1999 %Rf.�rt CENTER GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The cL 6C tet'oZ Oi i 700 MEADOW CANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 co vi as oF- , CD _` w❑ f6L 0 J W O 9J �m c"o .. 5 � v UL NENi PE SE StNi�SRlON 11 /zs REVISION MINIMEIMMENNEENME PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11 -23 -99 PERMIT SET DESIGNED AIK REVIEWED TRH SHEET TITLE ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN SHEET NUMBER A16.00 © GEORGE BUtIEN. ASSOC4IES, INC. 1999 KEY PLAN #6 ®12" EACH WAY, TOP &BOLT. BONDING AGENT - 5 SECTION S .1Q 0 SCALE : 3/4" = 1' -0" DEMO EXIST. CONC. SLAB PER PLAN TO INSTALL NEW CONC. SLAB W/ #6 ® 12" TOP AND BOTTOM EACH WAY. DRILL AND EPDXY INTO EXIST. SLAB 6" ALL 4 SIDES W/ RAMSET /RED HEAD CERAMIC 6 OR APPROVED EQUAL. NOTE: SIM.- NEW SLAB. OVER ENTIRE PILE CAP- NO EPDXY DOWEL S .,D D SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 r SI 0 51 1 • L__J • I L__J 6' -0 24' -0" S • 5 .,D D SLAB - PLAN l � SCALE 1/8" PLAN ALTERNATE 1- BATTERY LOADING =700 PSF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL VERIFY THAT EXISTING SLAB SUBGRADE ALLOWABLE UNIFORM CAPALITYTS GRLAIOH IHAN /0015F OND WHAT THE CORRESPONDING LONG TERM SETTLEMENT WOULD BE UNDER THIS LOADING. ALTERNATE 2- BATTERY LOADING =700 PSF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL VERIFY THAT SLAB SUBGRADE CAN BE REPLACED AND RECOMPACTED TO PROVIDE A SOIL SUPPORTED SLAB UNDER THE NEW LOADING. INSTALL NEW SLAB SIMILAR TO SECTIONS 5 & 6 ON THIS SHEET. ALTERNATE 3- IF EITHER OF THE ABOVE 2 CONDITIONS CANNOT BE MET, SAW CUT AND REMOVE EXISTING SLAB TO INSTALL NEW SLAB AND PILES PER SECTIONS 5 & 6 ON THIS SHEET AND WITH GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS. NEW PILE 'CAP & PILE (TYP: OF 13)I DRIVE PILE TO 30 TON CAPACITY I SAWCUT EXIST. SLAB AND POUR NEW SLAB EXIST. PULE CAP &PILE (TYP.) \ HOUSENIEAL 1 HOUSEKEEPING PAD (TIP. OF 5 THIS .10 St 0 QUADRANT) n EXIST. TILT -UP PANEL BOLT NEW 06x8.2 BTW. NEW =8x13.75 ELEV.= 12' -9" A.F.F. W/ 3x3x /4 & 3 /4 "0 A325 BOLTS 1 F 6 MATCH LINE c • ENLARGED DOOR FRAMING PLAN 0 0 0 0 0 v z �„ d � a _ m i MATCH 1 z TYP. q d CD TIP. NEW 08x13.75 LINT r 24 -0" ELECTRICAL HOUSEKEEPING PAD , SLAB PLAN 5:10 SCALE : 1/8" = 1' -0" TYP BOLT NEW 06x8.2 BTW. NEW 08x13.75 ELEV.= 12' -9" A.F.F. W/ $3x3, & 3 /4 "0 A325 BOLTS ALTERNATE 1- BATTERY LOADING =700 PSF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL VERIFY THAT EXISTING SLAB SUBGRADE ALLOWABLE UNIFORM CAPACITYTS GREA ItN IHAN /OOPSF WHAT THE CORRESPONDING LONG TERM SETTLEMENT WOULD BE UNDER THIS LOADING. ALTERNATE 2- BATTERY LOADING =700 PSF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL VERIFY THAT SLAB SUBGRADE CAN BE REPLACED AND RECOMPACTED TO PROVIDE A SOIL SUPPORTED SLAB UNDER THE NEW LOADING. INSTALL NEW SLAB SIMILAR TO SECTIONS 5 & 6 ON THIS SHEET. ALTERNATE 3- IF EITHER OF THE ABOVE 2 CONDITIONS CANNOT BE MET, SAW CUT AND RFxAOVE EXISTING SLAB TO INSTALL NEW SLAB AND PILES PER SECTIONS 5 & 6 ON THIS SHEET AND WITH GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS. NEW PILE CAP & PILE (TYP. OF 13)1 DRIVE PILE TO 30 TON CAPACITY SAWCUT EXIST. SLAB AND POUR NEW SLAB EXIST. PLILE CAP & PILE (TYP.) MECHANICAL HOUSEKEEPING PAD a (TYP. OF 5 THIS 0 QUADRANT) n REFER TO TYP. SLAB REPAIR DETAIL ON SHT. S3.10 FOR REPAIR AT SLAB DEMOLISHED FOR NEW PLUMBING .10 X51. D ENLARGED DOOR FRAMING PLAN 14' -2C �I E NEW 08x13.75 EXIST. PANEL TILT -UP r CV a 6 MATCH LINE • o' z C9' GENERATOR PAD NOV 3 0 199E PERMIT CENTER GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSOki Tke Cor.H CBICn Organization 700 MEADOW I}NE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 Tari co _B Y. N � C /� O .'` 0 ) tea® 1` L Q .6 4 O �ma t_ li .41111 c° REVISION IMIEMMINEMEMMIMIM PROJECT NUMBER 6952.15 DATE 11 -23 -99 PERMfL SET 0 w1s zs G I AIIIII wrimia TP P"OVIDE 2x4 F'AMIN UNDE• ROOF) TOP NIT E IST. URLINS • .. oC.. 'E' .. .,PEk r 8 -0 (TYP.) i HED :: • OF a• IST. I. LUELA BEAM ( _ 1� V 2C1 PROVIDE2rz� `- EXI T. 2x4 JOIST FRAM NG ARJUND ®2 " (TYP.) ROOF HATCH W/ PFR F /A50r I I MI 3 F A - NEW C6x8.2x24' -3" TYP, ATTACH TO BO, OF .10 S .70 NEW PURLINS 10 S . 0 KEY PLAN ORi PLAN N-- I O 0 LL 0 58' -4 ;" 10" D ROOF FRAMING PLAN L S .10 NEW C6x8.2x8' -3" ATTACH TO BO,. OF NEW PURLINS 10 - s 10" EAM L ALOWABLE GLUELAMINATED GIRDER I OADS: N WF IOADING MOMENT = 282 KIP -FT SHEAR = 28.2 KIPS DEFLECTION = 3" + 1.75" EXISTING CAMBER = 4.75" UNDER TOTAL LOAD = 1.33 KLF + FIBERWRAP DEAD LOAD 9 10" ROOF FRAMING PLAN L 1 S .10 S . 0 SCALE : 1/8" = 1' -0" NOTE: ALTERNATE SECTIONS 5, 6 A 7 ON SHEET 53.10 ALLOW FOR FYC0 FIBERWRAP BY FYFE CO. IN PLACE OF W16x26'S. MOMENT = 572.5 KIP -FT SHEAR = 40.9 KIPS DEFLECTION = 12" - 1.75" EXISTING CAMBER = 10.25" UNDER TOTAL LOAD = 1.33 KLF W/0 DEAD LOAD OF FIBERWRAP 58' -4y" 60' -O4" (FIELD VERIFY) 10" RECEIVES cITVOF iu Y NOV 3 0 1499 PERMIT CENT ER CBIk GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTE SON The Consmsetion Chganization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 c7A REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE I1 -23 -99 PERMIT SET DESIGNED KLM REVIEWED RLS SHEET TITLE ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHEET NUMBER S2.10 MI NE W WTbx?CraYr�CHED- T GLUEL M BE M TO ). A B•LT TO EXIST. WOOD W76 2 I� ^ •OD # 9 MIL OVER FULL H p I ❑ p 2' -0" e " ' , ILL EXI T T. 2x4 JOIS ®2 " "(TYP.) I 1111 I I 1 1 :4: SIN I WI 5x26 • • PH-LINE- e ell—LINE— I I I MI I I TW M 1 M 'IIY. SIM 31h IV EXISTING (TYYP U.) " 1 MI S I A I. I WI 5.10 S .0 W16 2 26 j j 5 1 GLUELAM C 3 x14" PARALL. -_- :a EN EXIST. - RUNS (TYP.) T EXISTING Wlb Lb .101 . I I W1 6.26 AIM ItIgIM TYP If 5. 105 5 .0 . I i I EAM TIP. u u EXIST. PURLINS GI IFl AM E (TYP.) ' a �OF N EXIST.GLUEL�M °CHE6 BEM a ea TYP.. EW 3 2 x x14" PARALL M - R... 'U'LLNS ( II8 -0 E W16 26 (TYP.) - T TYP N_ EXIT. 2x4- JOIST I I ell-L1191 W16 26 SIB 16 26 .10 0 w1s zs G I AIIIII wrimia TP P"OVIDE 2x4 F'AMIN UNDE• ROOF) TOP NIT E IST. URLINS • .. oC.. 'E' .. .,PEk r 8 -0 (TYP.) i HED :: • OF a• IST. I. LUELA BEAM ( _ 1� V 2C1 PROVIDE2rz� `- EXI T. 2x4 JOIST FRAM NG ARJUND ®2 " (TYP.) ROOF HATCH W/ PFR F /A50r I I MI 3 F A - NEW C6x8.2x24' -3" TYP, ATTACH TO BO, OF .10 S .70 NEW PURLINS 10 S . 0 KEY PLAN ORi PLAN N-- I O 0 LL 0 58' -4 ;" 10" D ROOF FRAMING PLAN L S .10 NEW C6x8.2x8' -3" ATTACH TO BO,. OF NEW PURLINS 10 - s 10" EAM L ALOWABLE GLUELAMINATED GIRDER I OADS: N WF IOADING MOMENT = 282 KIP -FT SHEAR = 28.2 KIPS DEFLECTION = 3" + 1.75" EXISTING CAMBER = 4.75" UNDER TOTAL LOAD = 1.33 KLF + FIBERWRAP DEAD LOAD 9 10" ROOF FRAMING PLAN L 1 S .10 S . 0 SCALE : 1/8" = 1' -0" NOTE: ALTERNATE SECTIONS 5, 6 A 7 ON SHEET 53.10 ALLOW FOR FYC0 FIBERWRAP BY FYFE CO. IN PLACE OF W16x26'S. MOMENT = 572.5 KIP -FT SHEAR = 40.9 KIPS DEFLECTION = 12" - 1.75" EXISTING CAMBER = 10.25" UNDER TOTAL LOAD = 1.33 KLF W/0 DEAD LOAD OF FIBERWRAP 58' -4y" 60' -O4" (FIELD VERIFY) 10" RECEIVES cITVOF iu Y NOV 3 0 1499 PERMIT CENT ER CBIk GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTE SON The Consmsetion Chganization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 c7A REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE I1 -23 -99 PERMIT SET DESIGNED KLM REVIEWED RLS SHEET TITLE ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHEET NUMBER S2.10 NE W WTbx?CraYr�CHED- T GLUEL M BE M TO ). W76 2 p I ❑ p EXI T T. 2x4 JOIS ®2 " "(TYP.) I I PH-LINE- e ell—LINE— I MI I I M 1 M 1 S I A I. I W16 2 26 j j 5 1 EXISTING .101 . .10 L W1 6.26 If 5. 105 5 .0 . i I EAM TIP. u u GI IFl AM E EW 3 2 x x14" PARALL M R... 'U'LLNS ( II8 -0 E ENTERED (TYP.) - T TYP KEY PLAN ORi PLAN N-- I O 0 LL 0 58' -4 ;" 10" D ROOF FRAMING PLAN L S .10 NEW C6x8.2x8' -3" ATTACH TO BO,. OF NEW PURLINS 10 - s 10" EAM L ALOWABLE GLUELAMINATED GIRDER I OADS: N WF IOADING MOMENT = 282 KIP -FT SHEAR = 28.2 KIPS DEFLECTION = 3" + 1.75" EXISTING CAMBER = 4.75" UNDER TOTAL LOAD = 1.33 KLF + FIBERWRAP DEAD LOAD 9 10" ROOF FRAMING PLAN L 1 S .10 S . 0 SCALE : 1/8" = 1' -0" NOTE: ALTERNATE SECTIONS 5, 6 A 7 ON SHEET 53.10 ALLOW FOR FYC0 FIBERWRAP BY FYFE CO. IN PLACE OF W16x26'S. MOMENT = 572.5 KIP -FT SHEAR = 40.9 KIPS DEFLECTION = 12" - 1.75" EXISTING CAMBER = 10.25" UNDER TOTAL LOAD = 1.33 KLF W/0 DEAD LOAD OF FIBERWRAP 58' -4y" 60' -O4" (FIELD VERIFY) 10" RECEIVES cITVOF iu Y NOV 3 0 1499 PERMIT CENT ER CBIk GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTE SON The Consmsetion Chganization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 c7A REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE I1 -23 -99 PERMIT SET DESIGNED KLM REVIEWED RLS SHEET TITLE ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHEET NUMBER S2.10 i i Design Specifications: Governing Building Co,: Design I Fading: GENERAL NOTES ENERAI NOTFS - STRUCTURAL Basic Wind Speed: 80 mph Exposure C Seismic Zone: 3 Gen cal 1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any observed discrepancies in dimensions, detailing, or other items as shown on the plans or specified prior to proceeding with work elating to said discrepancies. 2. The Contractor shall not alter or modify work shown on the structural drawings without receiving written approval of the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying shop drawings for structural steel, reinforcing steel, and concrete mix designs. Shop drawings must be reviewed for 7 onformanc with the t eoprecns aut e d s , d techprograms ni s eqe nces, heret and o, II of w 7 bons hich of construction and safe an id e the sole responsibility f the Contractor, and shall be e stamped "approved" by ' the Contractor prior to submittal. Shop drawings submitted without the Contractors stamped approval will be returned rejected. All shop drawings shall be reviewed by the Structural Engineer prior to construction. Foundations 1. A geotechnical engineer must perform a soils investigation and prepare a report as defined by Section 1804 of the 1997 Uniform Building Code. In the c a se that pile support for the battery loading on the slab is required, the investigation and report provisions of Section 1084 shall be expanded to include, but not limited to the following: 1. Recommended pile types and installed capacities. 2. Driving Criteria. 3. Installation Procedures. 4. Field inspection and reporting procedures (to include procedures far verification of the installed bearing capacity where required). 5. Pile load test requirements. 2. If wood piles are co mmended for the battery loading on the floor slab, all wood piles must be pressure treated. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel: 1. C ete m desi shall mee the follwin a meats: ( Takeoncrn from: ix ACI Manual of Concret te -1990, o 217 1�'re Location Interior Slabs Exterior Slabs Foundations Minimum Compressive Strength (PSI) 3000 3000 Aggregate Size 3/4" Cement Lbs. 517 517 Sack Mix (Per C.Y.) 5 1/2 5 1/2 Max. Water /Cement Ratio .68 .57 Slump 4" Air Entrainment Percent (5) 6 t 1 2. Fly ash shall no be used uness approved in writing by he Engineer. Fly ash, if approved, shall conform to AS. C618. All �cte is einforc unless specifically called t a u c ed. Reinforce all con crete re not oth sh own with same steel as In ou similar rc or areas. 4. Conruion joitrade beams ll be at midspan nless noted othewse. Reinforcing steel st sh be c tinuou g s through const joints unless u noted otherwi se. 5. No aluminum items shall be embedded in any concrete. ACI 318R -99 1997 Uniform Building Code Dead Load: = 40 psf (Between column grids F and G) Collateral Load: = 10 psf (Between column grids F and G) Live Load: = 25 psf 6. Reinforcing bars #4 and larger (except ties and stirrs) all meek T 4615 with Supplementary Requirements (Si), Grade 60, smaller ba sh be Gr M 40. 7. Concrete coverage of reinforcement shall have the following clear distance unless noted otherwise on the drawings: Cast against earth 3" Formed concrete exposed to earth o weather 2" eat exopo:edeo rth r t 1" Slabs 1 -1/2" Beams and columns 8. Bars marked continuous and all vertical steel laps & embeds shall be Class B tension laps unless specified otherwise on the drawings. Unless shown otherwise, splice top bars near midspan and splice bottom bars over supports. 9. Supply corner bars 4' -0" long (min. 2' -0" in each direction or 30 bar diameters) in outside face of wall t corners of all walls and grade beams, m tching and pacing f horizontal bars. Where there a no vertical bars in outside face of wall, supply three (3) - #4 vertical support bars for comer bars. 10. All bars are to be supported in forms and spaced with wire bar supports per ACI "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures" (latest edition). Bars shall be securely fired per latest edition of CRSI Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. Accessories for exposed concrete shall be plastic or have plastic- tipped feet. 11. Welded wire fabric shall have end and edge laps of one full mesh plus 2" between cross wires. Wire all laps securely together. 12. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. 13. Concre pl during raid weather shall conform to requirements of ACI 3-88. Cold we ath er is defined ELL period when for more than the 3 successive days the m 06R ean daily temperature drops below 40'F. 14. Concrete placed during hot weather shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305R -89. Hot weather is defined as that combination of air temperature, concrete temperature, relative humidity and wind speed that will cause a rate of evaporation of 0.2 Ib /sq.ft. /ht or more as defined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R -89. Structural Steel: 1. All structural steel shall conform to the following: Miscellaneous Steel - ASTM A36 Steel Pipe - ASTM A501 - ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B Weing ll conform e lateuation of licable odes set forth by the Am sha Welding Society. to th Welding st electrod shall app be E70XX. c 3. All steel stairs shall be designed by the steel stair manufacturer in compliance with the governing building code. Design Live Load = 100 psf. Roush Carpentry: 1. All roof, floor and wall sheathing shall be APA rated, with exterior glue. Roof sheathing shall have a panel identification index of 24/16. Floor sheathing shall have an identification index of 48/24. 2. New 5 -1/2 "04" Parellam purlins shall have the following minimum design values: Fb = 2900 psi = 125,000 psi Fv = 290 psi Fc (perp) = 650 psi Fc = 1,050 psi = 2,000,000 psi Hangar Type HU410, allowable hunger load= 2410# Use 16d (3 -1/2 ") common nails into header and supported member. Design valves are based on Truss Joist MacMillan Parallam PSL 3. C.C.A. lumber shall be used in all locations where lumber is exposed to weather or moisture. ABBREVIATIONS 1. F.B.E .= FOOTING BEARING ELEVATION 2. W.W.F. = MELDED WIRE FABRIC 3. C.J. = CONTROL JOINT 4. A.F.F. = ABOVE FINISH FLOOR ockcft 4" THICK CONC. PAD W/ 6x6- W2.9xW2.9 W.W.F. MID DEPTH OF 4" HOUSEKEEPING PAD t N.T.S. 1 /2 "063" TAPCON ANCHORS ANCHORS ®2' -0" NEW C8x13.75 ON EA. SIDE OF NEW DOOR PER PLAN EXIST. FLOOR SLAB N. DRILL & EPDXY GROUT #4 BAR x 3' -0" LONG 6" INTO SLAB ®12" O.C. ®MANDOORS W/ RAMSET REDHEAD CERAMIC 6 OR APPROVED EQUAL 21 3 /16 EIST. GRADE BEAM EXIST. TIMBER PILE EXIST. FLOOR SLAB AND PILE CAP EXIST. 10x12 TIMBER COL. EXIST. FLOOR SLAB NEW FLOOR SLAB FIN. FLR TYP. SLAB REPAIR DETAIL REF. PLAN NOTE VERIFY PAD DIMENSIONS W /EQUIP. MFR. .11 o s3.'1 s0 SECTION • _ FI FLR. .. SLOPE it " OS . O rr•Q - „I II -111 3 CLR. TYP. II= III =11Id � III =1 4 ®12 5 .,1 0 S3.1Q SECTION F.F.E. =100.3 ® SIM -NO EXTERIOR CONCRETE STOOP OR EPDXY DOWEL. SAWCUT & REMOVE EXIST. TILT -UP PANEL ®MANDOOR ONLY 5 .110 SECTION s1.1.9.1. SECTION DRILL & EPDXY GROUT #4 BARS 6" INTO EXIST. SLAB TYP. ALL 4 SIDES ® EXIST. REBAR W/ RAMSET REDHEAD CERAMIC 6 OR APPROVED EQUAL #4 BAR SPACING VARIES THROUGHOUT SLAB (FIELD VERIFY) DING NTWE EXIBONSTING AGE CONCRETE T BE AND EN NEW CONCRETE 3 /4' CHAMFER (TYP.) PER PLAN SAWCUT & REMOVE EXIST. TILT -UP PANEL 0 MANDOORS AND POUR NEW SLAB 6660/4 DRILL & EPDXY 1 /2 "0 A325 THREADED ROD ANCHOR 4" INTO EXIST. SLAB 3 /16 "0x3" TAPCON ANCHORS ANCHORS ®2' -0" 1i 666x DRILL & EPDXY 1 /2 "0 A325 THREADED ROD ANCHOR 4" INTO EXIST. SLAB SAWCUT & REMOVE EXIST. TILT -UP PANEL 0 MANDOOR. } } 4" I NEW TS7x7x /4 W/ 1 "x7 "xi' -1" BASE PLATE W/ (4) - "0 A325 x 1' -2" LG. RAMSET REDHEAD CERAMIC 6 EPDXY GROUTED ANCHOR BOLTS W/ 9" MIN.: EMBED. 2" NON- SHRINK GROUT EXIST. TIMBER PILES FIELD VERIFY BOIT. OF BEAM ELEV. 0 COL 12 #4 ®12" of EXIST. 2x4 ( TYP . ) EXIST. GLUELAM / BEAM EXIST. 4x14 PURLINS ®8' -0" (TYP.) SEAL ALL EDGES BETWEEN NEW CONCRETE AND EXIST. 'SPI,ALT EXIST. TILT -UP EXTERIOR WALL PANEL 1 /2 "0x3" TAPCON ANCHORS ANCHORS ®2' -0" DRILL & EPDXY (2)- 1 /2"0 A325 THREADED ROD ANCHORS EA. d. EMBED =3 "� EXIST. 10x72 TIMBER COL EXIST. 2x4 ®24" EXIST. GLUELAM BEAM FIELD V.IFT BOIT. OF BEAM ELEV. ® COL EXIST GLUELAM BEAM EXIST_ 2x4 ®24-. DRILL & EPDXY (2)- 1 /2"0 A325 THREADED ROD ANCHORS EMBED---3" B 10 v EXIST. 4x14 PURLINS / ® 8 -0" (TYP.) I NEW TS 7x721/4 THK. CAP e ® SIM = NEW AND EXIST_ PURLINS ARE ALL 4' -0" TO THE RIGHT OF SECTION LOCATIONS SHOWN. NEW 3 "614" PARALLAM 0 8' -0 EXIST. 1 /2 PLYWOOD W/ SIMPSOD. STRONG -TIE HU410 FACE MOUNTED , DECKING HANGER PER PLAN 4325 EW WI6126 FASTEN BOLTS TO GLUELAM W/ 1 /4 "0x4" LAG SCREWS CO 12" (ALT. FLANGES) TS 767x W/ 1 /2 THK. CAP t S 10 10 SCPiE : 3/4 "= 1•-O" COL & BEAM 5 ,D ,Q SECTION s 12 0 5.10 SECTIO EXIST 2x4 © 24" (TYP EXIST . 1 /2" PLYWOOD // DECKING M NEW C6x8.2 ATTACH TO BOTT. OF NEW PURLINS W/ 1 /2"0x8" LAG SCREWS 5 /e "0 A325 BOLT - CHANNEL TO CHANNEL NEW C8x13.75 ON EA. SIDE OF NEW DOOR PER PLAN SECTION EXIST. 2x4 0 24 EXIST. TILT -UP EXTERIOR WALL PANEL s .10 s . o SECTION EXIST. 1 /2` PLYWOOD DECKING NEW 3 "x14" PARALLAM W/ SIMPSON STRONG -TIE.. HU410 FACE MOUNTED HANGER PER PLAN. NEW W16z26 FASTEN TO GLUELAM W/ 1 /4 "0x4 LAG SCREWS 12" (ALT. FLANGES) PRE -DRILL HOLES (4) A325 BOLTS ® SZM = NEW. &EXIST. PURLINS ARE ALL LOCATIONS TO THE RIGHT OF LOCATIONS SHOWfd IN THIS SECTION. CL COL & BEAM EXIST. 1 /2" PLYWOOD / 1 NEW W16x26 FASTEN TO GLUELAM WI './4"064" LAG SCREWS 12" (ALE FLANGES) PRE -DRILL HOLES NEW 3 "x14" PARALLAM W / d4x4z1/4x1' -O" W/ (3) 3 /4 "0 4307 THRU BOLTS ( 41/2" GAGE EXIST. 1 10 PLYWOOD DECKING N 3/2 "x14" ARALLA W /z.x /4' - W/ EW (3) 1 3 /4 "0 43 THRU M BOLTS.( /2" xl GAG E). FIELD VERIFY BO, WILT EXIST. 2x4 ' (TYP.) OF BEAM ELEV. ® COL. EXIST. GLUELAM BEAM EXIST. 4x14 PURLINS ® 8' -0" (TYP.) ■■■■i■■■■■■■■i EXIST. 10x12 !I TIMBER COLI EXIST. 2x4 ® 2 EXIST. 2x4 ®24" EXIST. 4x14 PURLINS EXIST. GLUELAM BEAM 3 /16 NEW 767x W/ 1 /2 " T5 THK. C AP EXIST. GLUELAM BEAM NEW 3 PARALLAM ®8 -0" W/ SIMPSON STRONG TIE \DEC11IN G HANGER PER PLAN (2)- / +'0x6 LAG SCREWS FYCO F BERWRAP. SEALED STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. ONLY ICBO APPROVED APPLICATORS CAN BE USED. NEWTS 7x7x W/ 1 /2" TAB. CAP A 3 /16 ® SIM = NEW AND EXIST. PURLINS ARE ALL 4' -0" TO THE RIGHT OF LOCATIONS SHOWN. s . ,4 a - SECTION s . ',D OL COL. & BEAM FIELD VERIFY BO, OF BEAM ELEV. ® COL. s .12 0 53.,0 SECTION COL. & BEAM ( 2 ) - 1 /a'0x6" LAG SCREWS s .1 D2 5 .„ SECTION ALTERNATE NOTE: VERIFY PAD DIMENSIONS W /EQUIP. MFR. SECTION EXIST. 1 /2" PLYWOOD DECKING NEW 3 "x14" PARALLAM W/ SIMPSON STRONG - TIE HU410 FACE MOUNTED HANGER PER PLAN ® SIM = NEW & EXIST. PURLINS ARE ALL 4' -0" TO THE RIGHT OF LOCATIONS SHOWN IN THIS SECTION. EXIST. I/O" PLYWOOD DECKING FYCO FIBERWRAP. SEALED STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. ONLY ICBO APPROVED APPLICATORS CAN BE USED. car oFukwnA NOV 3 0 19' GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, INC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The Conoinsction Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 MEMEMIMEMii PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 199 P -23 - E RMIT SET DESIGNED KLM KEY PLAN 2—H MATCH LINE Z -L SEE FIRE PROTECTION CONSTRUCTION PLAN SHT. F2.01 FOR RECONNECTION TO SPRINKLER SYSTEM (TYP.) 2 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION FD2.01 FO . 01 NORTH PLAN 1 SPRINKLER TEST CONNECTION/ DRAIN TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED SEE SHT. F2.01 MATCH LINE Ct' MATCH LINE z , a .. CUT AND CAP (CYP). 4" FIRE PROTECTION PIPING (EL 20 -0 ") TO REMAIN. 1 1 /2' DN. TO FIRE HOSE CABINET TO: BE RELOCATED —_- RE. F2.01. --r rT IMMINIESEMBEIMENIEN REVISION PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 11-23-99 PERMIT SET DESIGNED KGR REVIEWED REP SHEET TITLE FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION SEE T PROTEC CONSTRUCTION / �P SHT_ F20i FOR RECONNECTION TO SPRINKLER SYSTEM (TYP.) FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION AND DRAIN (EL, 0 " - 3 ") TO BE RELOCATED. RE F2.01. 4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING . (EL.1&. -0.) TO -BE- REMOVED: PRINKLER MAIN O REMAIN CUT AND CAP 1 /2" SPRINKLER PIPING (EL E" -6 ") TO BE REMOVED. 6" SPRINKLER MAIN (EL 22' -0"" SLOPED WITH ROOF) TO REMAIN. RE: F2.01 FOR NEW CONNECTION. RE F2.01 FOR NEW CONNECTION. 6" SPRINKLER MAIN TO REMAIN. RE: F2.01. PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION L A 'D SCALE vs' = 1 " -0' ry O R T H PLAN LEGEND: EXISTING TO BE REMOVED EXISTING TO REMAIN ' 1 /2 "" SPRINKLER PIPING (TOP) (2" ABOVE SPRINKLER MAIN SLOPED WITH ROOF) TO REMAIN. EAST FIRE SERVICE ENTRANCE. SEE ELEV. SHT. F2.01. C NOV :( 0 1999 GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, MC. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA. KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 O TENSOM The Consvucttrn Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 SHEET NUMBER FD2.O1 O i GENERAL NOTES: 1. REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 13000. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS. FOR MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE FIRE DETECTION. SUPPRESSION AND ALARM SYSTEMS. 2. ALL EQUIPMENT USED FOR THE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHALL BE EM APPROVED. 3. FM -200 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE SWITCH ROOMS, CO— LOCATE AND D.C. POWER ROOM. REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 13000 FOR AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ANNUNCIATION REQUIREMENTS FOR FM -200 SYSTEMS. 4. DOUBLE INTERLOCKED PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE ELECTRICAL ROOM. 5. WET —PIPE SPRINKLER PROTECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL OTHER AREAS OF THE FACILITY. 6. FIRE SUPPRESSION OF SPACES ABOVE CEILINGS (INTERSTITIAL SPACES) IS NOT REQUIRED. 7. EARLY WARNING AIR SAMPLING TYPE SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE SWITCH ROOMS. CO— LOCATE AND D.C. POWER ROOM. 8. CEILING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE FM -200 AND PREACTION SPRINKLER PROTECTED AREAS. 9. AN ADA Sc NFPA 72 COMPLIANT AUDIO /VISUAL ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE GENERAL USE AREAS OF THE BUILDING. FIRE ALARM SUPPLIER SHALL SELECT PROPER CANDELA RATINGS BASED ON STROBE LOCATIONS SHOWN. 10. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS INDICATED. CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHERS, WITH A MINIMUM 10 —B:C UL RATING. SHALL BE USED IN THE SWITCH ROOMS, ELECTRICAL, CO— LOCATE & D.C. POWER ROOMS. ALL OTHER EXTINGUISHERS. WITH A MINIMUM 10— A:40 -9:C UL RATING, MAY BE MULTI— PURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL TYPE. PROVIDE WALL — MOUNTED SIGNS INDICATING EXTINGUISHER LOCATION ABOVE EACH EXTINGUISHER (7' -0" MINIMUM ABOVE FLOOR). 11. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWING E2.01 FOR 120 VOLT POWER CIRCUITS SERVING THE EQUIPMENT SHOWN AND SPECIFIED ON THIS DRAWING. ALL 24 VOLT CIRCUITRY IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FIRE DETECTION /SUPPRESSION/ ALARM CONTRACTOR(S). 12. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWING P2.01 FOR FIRE WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE. 13. REFER TO HVAC DRAWING M2.01 FOR AIR SYSTEMS ASSOCIATED WITH FIRE /SMOKE AND ISOLATION DAMPERS. DAMPERS ARE POWER OPEN /SPRING CLOSE AND SHALL OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION WITH RESPECTIVE HVAC UNIT. 14. SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS (PLANS, CALCULATIONS AND EQUIPMENT CATALOG CUTS) CONCURRENTLY TO THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER AND LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES FOR REVIEW AND. APPROVAL. 15. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 3/4 ". 16. ALL FIRE ALARM JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE PAINTED RED. I_1 KEY PLAN LEGEND: SMOKE DETECTOR — PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR — IONIZATION DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR MANUAL PULL STATION — GENERAL BLDG. ALARM COMBINATION AUDIBLE AND VISUAL STROBE WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED VISUAL STROBE. WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER ID ISOLATION DAMPER FSD — FIRE /SMOKE DAMPER 0 TAMPER SWITCH b FLOW SWITCH OS &Y VALVE D DELUGE VALVE Df* BUTTERFLY VALVE 21 CHECK VALVE QUADRANT 2 _i L — QUADRANT 1 N T H PLAN MATCH LIN FM -200 SUPPRESSION & AIR SAMPLING DETECTION FM -200 SUPPRESSION & AIR -- SAMPLING DETECTION FM -200 SUPPRESSION & AIR SAMPLING DETECTION 2 01 Op O 02 CONSTRUCTION NOTES (FIRE PROTECTION): 0 FM -200 STORAGE TANKS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MCLEOD USA. O2 FIRE ALARM /SUPPRESSION CONTROL PANEL. MOUNT BOTTOM OF PANEL AT 60" A.F.F. ® EARLY WARNING SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL PANELS. MOUNT BOTTOM OF PANEL AT 60" A.F.F. (� INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION WITH PIPE DOWN TO ONE FOOT ADOVE GRADE. 0 REMOTE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL. 9, 77 n PARTIAL FIRE F3OTECTION FLOOR PLAN L M2.01 M .01 SCALE 1/8" = 1' -0" N o R T H FLOW SWITCH (CONNECT PLAN TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM) OSNY GATE VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH. (CONNECT TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM) 6" TO EXISTING (PREACTION) SYSTEM FROM EXISTING 6" FIRE WATER SERVICE E2.42115.01 .01 SCALE : NONE FM -200 SUPPRESSION & AIR SAMPLING DETECTION PRE - ACTION SPRINKLER ID - I6 ::_ ►ter AIN DRAIN ROUTE TO FLOOR DRAIN N SEXIST. FIRE HOSE CABINET IN NEW LOCATION n FIRE SPRINKLER RISER TO WET —PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO ELECTRICAL ROOM PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM PRE — ACTION VALVE ASSEMBLY (TYP) BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH, CONNECT TO F.A. SYSTEM (TYP) FLOOR EXIST. 4 "FIRE MAIN NEW 6" MAIN FROM EXIST "— " -- -- SERVICE E(TRANCE. RE: "_'. :ELEY. THIS SHEET. EXIST. 4" FIRE HOSE CABINET RISER EXIST. 6" DRY PIPE RISERS ter, N MATCH LINE I O' 77 n PARTIAL FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN L j M2.01 M .01 SCALE : 1/8" = 1' -0° N o R r H PLAN EXIST. 6" MAIN AND 1 1 /2" BRANCH LINES (TOP) RE: FIRE SPRINKLER RISER, THIS SHEET. NEW 6" DRY PIPE MAIN EXIST. 6" DRY PIPE MAIN NEW 4' FIRE MAIN T. FIRE DEPT CONNECTION AND DRAIN IN, NEW LOCATION EXIST. 4" TO RELOCATED FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION AND DRAIN NEW 6" RISER TO JANITOR CLOSET 105 RE: PLAN WALL POST INDICATOR VALVE (TYP) FLOOR EXIST. 4' FIRE MAIN `EXIST. 6" FIRE WATER ,.v TUnwlw SERVICE ENTRANCE NOV 2 0 1999 ER T CENTER K - 1 7 EXISTING FIRE SERVICE ENTRANCE CBP GEORGE BUTLER ASSOCIATES, BR:. Engineers • Architects Kansas • Missouri • Illinois CORPORATE OFFICE ONE PINE RIDGE PLAZA 8207 MELROSE DRIVE LENEXA, KANSAS 66214 -3621 (913) 492 -0400 MORTENSON The Construction Organization 700 MEADOW LANE NORTH MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55422 (612) 522 -2100 PROJECT NUMBER 8952.15 DATE 1-23-99 PERMIT SGT DESIGNED KGR REVIEWED REP SHEET TITLE SHEET NUMBER F2.01 co FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION © GEORGE BUTLER, ASSOCIATES. INC. 1999